Reading view

Samsung's One UI 8.5 May Boost Pro Camera Mode with Presets

Samsung Galaxy S25 Ultra AM AH 16

Samsung is working on its next big UI update, One UI 8.5, which will be based on Android 16. The update will debut with the Galaxy S26 series next year. Initially, a beta program was expected to open in November, but recent reports suggest it’s been delayed, possibly because of changes in Galaxy S26 launch plans. Regardless, this isn’t stopping the leaks coming our way. In our latest dose, we’re hearing that Samsung may add presets for the Pro camera controls with One UI 8.5.

Samsung’s One UI 8.5 may introduce presets for Pro camera controls

In the latest One UI 8.5 builds, folks at Android Authority have spotted lines of code that suggest Samsung may introduce presets. With this change, you can switch to a particular preset at any point in time without going through manually changing the controls every time you want to click a photo with Pro mode.

This has apparently been the most requested feature for years from Galaxy users. It now looks like Samsung is finally listening to the feedback. However, it’s unclear how many presets a user can save in total.

Samsung may even let you share the presets

Furthermore, the report notes that Samsung may also let users select specific cameras for the Pro Mode preset. The strings reveal the ability to choose presets for the wide, ultrawide, telephoto, super telephoto, and front cameras. The presets will reportedly let you reserve values for various camera settings, including focus type (manual or autofocus), ISO, Kelvin value, Manual color tune (saturation, contrast, highlights, shadow), Shutter speed, White balance, Focus length, and Exposure.

Not just saving a present, Samsung may even let users share the camera presets with other Galaxy users through the Quick Share app. However, we’ll have to see how it will handle the preset compatibility. This is considering that each Galaxy phone has varying camera specs and features.

Samsung isn’t the first brand to offer camera presets; The source notes that they’re already present on several Android flagships. This means Samsung is finally catching up with the competition.

The post Samsung's One UI 8.5 May Boost Pro Camera Mode with Presets appeared first on Android Headlines.

AI Memory Demand to Force Higher Smartphone Prices in 2026

SK Hynix memory ram chip phone smartphone

The soaring demand for artificial intelligence is about to hit your wallet in a place you might not expect: your phone’s RAM. We typically focus on the price of components like the main processor. Every so often we get news about increasingly expensive Snapdragon chips, for example. However, the cost of the RAM memory used in our phones is set to skyrocket, creating a headache for every major manufacturer.

The reason is a heated tech market conflict for raw production capacity between high-performance AI servers and your pocket-sized device.

The AI tax: Why flagship smartphone prices will increase in 2026

The culprit behind this price surge is High Bandwidth Memory (HBM). HBM is the powerful, specialized RAM essential for feeding massive AI models in data centers. Demand for HBM is showing no sign of slowing, and since HBM consumes a large amount of the available silicon, it is swallowing up the wafer capacity needed for conventional server memory (DDR5). Also the memory used in your phone: LPDDR5x.

LPDDR5x is the high-performance, low-power RAM/memory required by modern flagship phones. Because it competes with HBM for the same production resources, this imbalance is causing chaos in the mobile supply chain.

According to a new report from market research firm TrendForce, this structural supply shortage is deepening. TrendForce has dramatically revised its forecast for general DRAM pricing—which includes LPDDR5x—for the end of 2025. Now they expect growth of 18–23%, up from an earlier forecast of 8–13%.

AI memory demand phone prices LPDDR5x price increase forecast Trendforce

The unexpected market flip

Here is where the memory market takes an unexpected turn. Initially, HBM was far more profitable for suppliers, commanding a price premium four times higher than DDR5. However, as the HBM market becomes more competitive and server demand for standard DDR5 remains robust, that gap is shrinking fast.

TrendForce predicts that by the first quarter of 2026, the profitability of standard DDR5 will actually surpass that of HBM3e. When this happens, manufacturers may shift production resources away from HBM to secure earnings from DDR5. This might eventually stabilize the HBM market. But it means the price pressure on LPDDR5x will remain high well into 2026.

Manufacturers are already sounding the alarm. Lu Weibing, president of Xiaomi, recently noted that the rise in storage costs is “much higher than expected and will continue to increase.”

The consumer pays the price

What do rising memory and storage costs mean for you? Smartphone manufacturers operate on extremely thin margins. This is especially true for flagship devices that also include expensive components like cutting-edge camera sensors and high-end 2nm processors.

When the cost of LPDDR5x memory jumps by nearly 20%, manufacturers have few options other than passing that cost along to the consumer. For anyone planning to upgrade their flagship phone next year, the price tag will likely be significantly higher. It seems the AI ​​revolution will make our future smartphones a little more expensive.

The post AI Memory Demand to Force Higher Smartphone Prices in 2026 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Elon Musk's Grokipedia Launches, but Wikipedia Isn't Scared

grokipedia A wikipedia elon musk featured

Elon Musk has entered the knowledge arena, launching Grokipedia, a new online encyclopedia powered by his xAI models. As its name suggests, it is a direct competitor to the massively popular Wikipedia. In fact, Musk claims Grokipedia will “purge out the propaganda” found on Wikipedia and exceed its rival “by several orders of magnitude in breadth, depth, and accuracy.”

However, the man who co-founded Wikipedia, Jimmy Wales, disagrees with that statement. Speaking at a recent CNBC summit, Wales dismissed Grokipedia’s threat, arguing that the underlying technology—Large Language Models (LLMs)—simply isn’t capable of producing a reliable encyclopedia.

Wikipedia’s Jimmy Wales is not worried about Elon Musk’s AI-powered Grokipedia

Wales’ skepticism stems from Grokipedia being powered by AI. He is aware of the flaws of LLMs like Grok and ChatGPT, which have a tendency to “make massive errors” and fabricate sources—namely “AI hallucinations.” Wales shared an example where a Wikipedia community member found that a source had used an LLM to generate book citations. This allegedly resulted in the chatbot “very happily mak[ing] up books.”

To test LLMs, Wales often queries obscure topics, such as the identity of his wife (a “not famous but known” figure in British politics). He claims that this search consistently results in a plausible but ultimately wrong answer.

We know ChatGPT and all the other LLMs are not good enough to write wiki entries,” Wales stated. He emphasizes that the reliance on human verification and community oversight that Wikipedia has developed over decades.

The question of bias and sources

Musk and his allies frequently criticize Wikipedia for alleged “woke bias” and for excluding conservative media as sources. Grokipedia’s own entry on Wikipedia accuses the site of having a “systemic ideological bias.”

Wales strongly defended Wikipedia’s editorial policy. He said the organization’s priority is sourcing neutrality. “We don’t treat random crackpots the same as The New England Journal of Medicine, and that doesn’t make us woke,” Wales said. He also added that responding to criticism by “doubling down on being neutral and being really careful about sources” is essential.

The Wikimedia Foundation still acknowledges that AI poses challenges—notably the decline in human visits and the increased scraping of Wikipedia data to train AI models. However, he considers Wikipedia’s approach to be better and more reliable. “This human-created knowledge is what AI companies rely on to generate content; even Grokipedia needs Wikipedia to exist,” notes the Foundation.

Ultimately, Wales views the biggest threat not as a direct AI replacement. Instead, he sees it as the ability of LLMs to generate plausible fake websites, which could fool the general public.

The post Elon Musk's Grokipedia Launches, but Wikipedia Isn't Scared appeared first on Android Headlines.

Cut down on car clutter with this $16 four-port car charger

Lisen 4 Port Car Charger

Car chargers can be an incredibly useful accessory, but even more so if you have multiple devices to charge at once, or multiple people in the car who want to charge devices, and that’s why this deal on the Lisen 4-port car charger is one you should consider. Normally, this charger would cost you $27.99, but right now you can pick it up for $16.14, which is a discount of 42%. You’re saving almost half the regular cost, and that makes this a really good value.

For starters, this is a four-port car charger. You can charge up to four devices simultaneously. If you have kids, you definitely want one of these for longer car rides. This charger also includes two retractable cables, one of which is USB-C and the other is a Lightning cable. This helps cut down on car clutter and lost cables because two of them are built into the charger itself. That means you only need to bring two cables to use for those other ports.

Additionally, this charger supports up to a maximum of 69W, so you can charge devices quickly. This charger also features a 180-degree angled design that you can adjust to meet your needs. That bendable hinge is way more useful than you might think, especially if you have people in the backseat charging, or if you have phones stuck to a dash mount and need to angle the charger upward.

Lisen 4-Port Car Charger

Lisen 4-Port Car Charger – $16.14

Buy from

The post Cut down on car clutter with this $16 four-port car charger appeared first on Android Headlines.

JBL's Clip 5 is the go-anywhere speaker and it's now just $60

JBL Clip 5 Deal

Bluetooth speakers are a versatile piece of tech, and speakers like the JBL Clip 5, which Amazon currently has a deal on, are some of the best options for a Bluetooth speaker because they’re extremely portable. The JBL Clip 5 is perhaps the poster child for portable Bluetooth speakers, because it’s not only compact, but it can be clipped to stuff so you don’t even have to carry it with your hands or put it in a bag. And now, it’s down to just $59.95. Normally, the JBL Clip 5 costs $79.95, so you’re saving about $20 here. Worth noting is that Amazon has this labeled as a limited-time deal. So, you’re going to want to take advantage of the discount while you can.

Aside from its portability, the JBL Clip 5 is also waterproof. Go ahead and take it with you to the pool, the lake, or anywhere there might be some water that can splash around and potentially get the speaker wet. It has up to 12 hours of battery life on a single charge, which means it should have no trouble lasting you an entire day. It might even last several days, depending on how long you use it each time you connect it to something.

The carabiner clip design is really what sets this apart, though. Clipping it to bags is one thing, but this design also makes it possible to hang the speaker from various things around the house. You could easily use this as a shower speaker if you wanted. As a nice little bonus, the JBL Clip 5 comes in several different colors.

JBL Clip 5

JBL Clip 5 – $59.95

Buy from

The post JBL's Clip 5 is the go-anywhere speaker and it's now just $60 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Best Apple iPhone 17 Cases & Accessories

Apple iPhone 17 image 12

If you just picked up a shiny new iPhone 17, you’re probably already thinking about how to keep it safe — and maybe even level up its everyday use. Apple’s latest flagship doesn’t come cheap, and with all that glass, titanium, and MagSafe-ready power, a good case and the right accessories are basically essential. Whether you’re after ultra-slim protection that still shows off the new color options, a rugged MagSafe case that can take a drop, or accessories that make the most of that upgraded Qi2 charging and USB-C port, we’ve got you covered.

In this guide, we’re rounding up the best iPhone 17 cases and accessories you can buy right now — from premium brands like Nomad and TORRAS to budget-friendly favorites that punch above their price. We’ll cover everything from chargers and power banks to screen protectors, mounts, and more, so you can protect, charge, and personalize your iPhone 17 in style.

Best Apple iPhone 17 Case

We believe that the best case for the iPhone 17 is actually the Apple Silicone case. Apple has really updated this case to be quite good. And it does have the camera control button included.

Apple Silicon Case
$37
apple silicon case

If you’re looking for a case that matches Apple’s polish and leverages every accessory-advantage in the iPhone 17 ecosystem, the Apple Silicone Case with MagSafe is a strong pick. Designed to fit the iPhone 17’s curves precisely, it gives you that soft-touch finish where premium meets subtlety. On the outside you get a smooth, silky silicone layer; inside there’s a microfiber lining to guard against micro-abrasions and the dreaded pocket lint surprise.

But this isn’t just about looks and feel — the case also incorporates built-in magnets that seamlessly align with the iPhone 17’s MagSafe system for fast, reliable wireless charging and accessory attachment. And for photography lovers, it adds support for Apple’s “Camera Control”-capable feature (via a sapphire crystal + conductive layer) so your manual controls aren’t hindered by the case.

Of course, you’re paying Apple premium pricing here, but what you get is full ecosystem compatibility, a snug fit that preserves the iPhone 17’s minimalist lines, and the confidence of Apple’s rigorous testing to better handle day-to-day knocks and bumps.

Buy from

Best Clear Case

There’s a lot of great, clear cases on the market for the iPhone, but we do believe that what ESR has is the best option right now.

ESR Classic Hybrid
$9.99
esr

If you want full clarity so your iPhone 17’s color and design shine through, yet still demand serious protection, the ESR Classic Hybrid Magnetic Case nails the balance. Its transparent back means you’re not hiding that sleek finish you paid for — unlike some so-called “clear” cases that add opaque patches or heavy frames.

But this isn’t just about style: ESR ramps up the specs with anti-yellowing material on the clear shell, so it won’t turn cloudy over time as many budget transparents do. It supports MagSafe with strong magnets and includes a dedicated cut-out or coverage for the new Camera Control button on iPhone 17, meaning you don’t lose functionality for visibility.

On the protection front you’re looking at “military-grade” drop defence from its reinforced “Air Guard” corners, with raised lips around screen and camera edges to absorb shock and protect the lens module. All told, this case delivers transparent style without sacrificing substance — a smart pick if you want minimal-visual bulk but maximum everyday safeguarding.

Buy from

Best Rugged Case

The iPhone 17 is already pretty strong, but with a good rugged case it can be almost indestructible. Perfect for those who might be a bit tough on their devices.

Spigen Tough Armor T
$24.99
spigen

This case is built from the ground up with protection as the priority: UAG’s Monarch Pro features a multi-layer construction including a shock-resistant core, impact-resistant rubber surrounds, a shear plate and reinforced armor frame. That kind of architecture signals you’re getting more than just decent drop protection — you’re getting something designed for real-world abuse.

The raised edges around the screen and the camera module help prevent scratches and lens damage when you set the phone down face-up or back-down. And while “rugged” cases often bulk up too much, the Monarch keeps MagSafe compatibility built in — meaning you don’t have to give up wireless charging or accessory compatibility to have serious protection.

Buy from

Best Photography Case

iPhones are known for being very popular devices for YouTubers, and photographers. So a case that is great for photography like the Peak Design Everyday case is a really good option.

Peak Design Everyday Case
$49.95
Collection iPhone17

If you’re serious about photography with your new iPhone 17, the Peak Design Everyday Case for iPhone 17 is a standout pick. Designed for creators who carry their phone like their mini-camera, it combines slick aesthetics with pro-level functionality. On the surface it’s a slim, protective MagSafe-compatible case with a precise cut for the iPhone 17’sCamera Control button and a tactile finish that feels premium.

But what makes it truly photography-worthy is how it integrates into the wider Peak Design Mobile ecosystem. The case features the SlimLink magnetic system so that accessories adhere cleanly and securely—critical when you’re balancing a phone on a tripod or mounting it in unusual positions. From the official product page: it “brilliantly connects to the entire Peak Design Mobile Ecosystem.”

Pairing this case with the Peak Design Mobile Tripod takes it a step further. The tripod snaps on magnetically via the SlimLink interface, then unfolds into a mini rig you can use to shoot low-angle handhelds, landscape time-lapses, or stable 4K video.

Buy from

Best Leather Case

There are a lot of leather cases available for the iPhone, but it’s hard to find something better than what Nomad offers. Nomad does also offer a lot of styles and colors for the iPhone 17 series.

Nomad Modern Leather Case
$55
856504014353 A iPhone

If you want a case that screams premium without sacrificing protection, the Nomad Modern Leather Case for iPhone 17 is the one to get. Crafted from full-grain leather sourced from the renowned Danish tannery Ecco, it develops a beautiful patina over time — meaning it actually looks better the more you use it. This isn’t faux leather that flakes or fades; it’s the real deal, with warm tones and a smooth, refined texture that elevates your phone’s aesthetic.

Underneath that elegance is real protection. Nomad built the Modern Leather Case with a 360° TPE bumper that absorbs shocks and keeps your iPhone 17 safe from drops up to 2.4 meters. The raised edges guard your camera and display, while anodized aluminum buttons give it a satisfying, tactile feel.

It’s also fully MagSafe compatible, so you can use it with Apple’s chargers or Nomad’s own line of accessories without missing a beat. And thanks to its slim, precisely engineered design, it slides easily into a pocket or bag while still looking boardroom-ready.

Buy at Nomad Goods

Best iPhone 17 Accessories

We’ve also rounded up some great accessories that you can buy to make the most out of your iPhone 17 experience.

Apple Watch Series 11
$399
71QBg6AtJuL AC SL1500

The Apple Watch Series 11 is perfect to pair with the iPhone 17 because it has all of the latest features from Apple, and works really well with the iPhone 17. Since it was made specifically for it.

It comes in Space Gray, Silver, Rose Gold, and Jet Black, starting at $399, with options that bring it up over $699.

It does also come in two sizes: 42mm and 46mm. We believe this is the better option for the iPhone 17 over the Apple Watch Ultra 3, because of the cost. And most people buying an iPhone 17 don’t need the adventurous features of Watch Ultra.

Buy from
Apple AirPods Pro 3
$249
61solmQSSlL AC SL1500

If you own the AirPods Pro 3 alongside your new iPhone 17, you’re looking at one of the most seamless audio pairings Apple has ever offered. From deep integration with iOS to killer hardware upgrades, these buds deserve a spot at the top of your buyer’s guide.

Firstly, they pack what Apple calls the “world’s best in-ear Active Noise Cancellation (ANC),” delivering up to 4× more noise reduction than the original AirPods Pro. That means when you’re commuting, working from a café, or trying to focus, the sound isolation is truly elite. On top of that, the acoustic architecture—custom driver, high dynamic range amp, H2-chip—gives you rich sound, wide soundstage, and clean vocals.

For the iPhone‐17 user, the ecosystem perks shine: effortless pairing, automatic device switching, deep integration with the Fitness app (thanks to the new heart-rate sensor built into the AirPods Pro 3) and Live Translation support for on-the-go multilingual conversations. They’re also IP57 rated (dust & sweat resistant) which means they hold up when your day takes a turn into gym time or weather-worse commutes.

Buy from
UGREEN MagFlow 10,000mAh Wireless charger
$69.99
ugreen

If you’re on the hunt for a top-tier MagSafe charger to pair with your iPhone 17, the UGREEN MagFlow MagSafe Wireless Charger stands out as a serious contender — and here’s why it deserves “best charger” status in your buyers guide.

First off: the magnetic grip. UGREEN built this charger with a strong array of magnets that lock into your iPhone’s MagSafe alignment, making sure the phone snaps on securely and stays in place — no annoying sliding off the pad mid-charge. The precision alignment also boosts charging efficiency because the coil is properly positioned every time.

Then there’s support for the newer charging standard. The MagFlow lineup supports Qi2 or MPP magnetic charging protocols which push wireless charging speeds beyond the old 15 W ceiling to up to 25 W on compatible devices. While your iPhone 17 may or may not hit the full 25 W (depending on Apple’s specification), investing in this now gives future-proofing for accessory compatibility and faster wireless power.

Buy from
Belkin UltraCharge Pro
$129
belkin ultrachar pro

If you want the best wireless charger for your iPhone 17, the Belkin Boost Charge Pro is the one to get. It’s fully MagSafe-certified, so your phone snaps perfectly into place every time — no guessing or slow misaligned charging. The strong magnetic connection keeps your iPhone secure, whether it’s on your desk, nightstand, or charging at an angle.

Belkin also nails speed and reliability. This charger delivers up to 15W MagSafe power, letting your iPhone 17 charge faster than most generic Qi pads. It’s built with premium materials and a solid, non-slip base, giving it that polished Apple-like look and feel.

You can even grab the 2-in-1 or 3-in-1 Boost Charge Pro versions if you want to charge your AirPods or Apple Watch alongside your iPhone — perfect for keeping everything powered overnight.

Buy from

The post Best Apple iPhone 17 Cases & Accessories appeared first on Android Headlines.

These open earbuds from Baseus are down to only $110

Baseus Inspire XC1 Deal

Baseus makes quite a few products, and while it makes plenty of chargers and power banks, it also makes things like these Inspire XC1 Open Earbuds, which are now on sale thanks to this deal at Amazon. While Baseus isn’t as recognizable for its audio gear, these earbuds actually have their sound done by Bose, which gives them a significant bump in recognition.

Since these are open earbuds, they don’t come with active noise cancellation, so if you’re looking for a pair of earbuds that have that kind of feature, there are better options. However, if you want something open with a wider sound stage, these are definitely that. The open design lets a little more noise in, so things sound more natural. It also means that you have a better grasp of your surroundings because you have a little bit of ambient noise, giving you more awareness.

In terms of fit, these are pretty comfortable and designed to be worn all day without discomfort. If you tend to wear earbuds for long periods of time, or you’ve wished you could, then you should consider these. Because they might just be the most comfortable pair of earbuds you’ve ever worn. They’ll last for up to 8 hours per charge, too. So you could wear them for most of the workday before you need to charge them. Speaking of charging, these come with the charging case that extends the battery life up to 40 hours.

Baseus Inspire XC1 Open Earbuds

Baseus Inspire XC1 Open Earbuds – $109.99

Buy from

The post These open earbuds from Baseus are down to only $110 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Ultra-Slim Motorola Edge 70's Images & Specs Listed Before Launch

Motorola Edge 70

Motorola will launch its ultra-slim Edge 70 phone globally on November 5th. It’s basically the same phone as the Moto X70 Air, which is available in China. We’ve already seen the design of the phone through some leaked renders. Now, as we inch closer to the announcement, Motorola has listed the Edge 70 on its official Polish and German websites, which show off more images and complete specs.

Motorola Edge 70 images and specs are listed on the official website

The official listing confirms the Motorola Edge 70 will be available in three Pantone colors: Gadget Grey, Lilly Pad, and Bronze Green. We’ve already seen the phone in the latter two colors via leaked renders. It features a unique nylon-textured finish on the back, offering a good grip. The frame is made of aircraft-grade aluminum, while the display gets a Gorilla Glass 7i protection layer. Motorola says the body has passed MIL-STD 810H standards.

The Motorola Edge 70 is just 5.99mm in thickness and is “feather light,” weighing around 159 grams. In comparison, the iPhone Air is 5.6mm thin and weighs 165 grams. There’s an IP68 and IP69 rating for water and dust resistance. It gets Water Touch support, so you can continue using it even if you’re by the pool or out and about on a rainy day.

Moto Edge 70 Bronze Green
Moto Edge 70 Gadget Grey
Moto Edge 70 Lilly pad
Moto Edge 70 Bronze Green
Moto Edge 70 Gadget Grey
Moto Edge 70 Lilly pad

Snapdragon 7 Gen 4 at the helm

Moving to specs, the Moto Edge 70 will feature the Qualcomm Snapdragon 7 Gen 4 processor. In comparison, the Edge 60 had the MediaTek Dimensity 7300. You get 12GB LPDDR5x RAM and 512GB native storage. It’ll boot Android 16 OS with Motorola’s OS, which is close to stock UI, on top. The software offers a bunch of Moto AI features like Note Assist, Playlist Studio, and Circle to Search.

The Edge 70 features a 6.67-inch 120Hz pOLED display with 100% DCI-P3 color space, 4,500 nits peak brightness, and HDR10+. The panel is Pantone validated for correct colors. You get a dual camera setup on the back, with a 50MP main f/1.8 lens with OIS and a 50MP f/2.0 ultra-wide-angle lens. There’s another 50MP lens on the front for your selfie needs.

Edge 70 will be available in three colors

Though the rest of the hardware sounds quite juicy, the battery department may not be pleasing. It has a moderate 4,800mAh silicon-carbon battery. This seems like a tradeoff for being slim. However, Motorola is promising up to 29 hours of continuous video playback and up to 66 hours of music. You get 68W fast charging and 15W wireless charging. 

Connectivity options of the phone include 5G, Bluetooth 5.4, Wi-Fi, NFC, GPS, Glonass, Galileo, and a USB Type-C. You get dual Dolby Atmos stereo speakers. There’s an in-screen fingerprint sensor and ThinkShield facial recognition for authentication. Motorola will share the price and availability details of the Edge 70 on the day of its launch.

Moto Edge 70 Grey
Moto Edge 70 Lilly pad
Moto Edge 70
Moto Edge 70 back panel
Moto Edge 70 render
Moto Edge 70 side profile
Moto Edge 70 Grey
Moto Edge 70 Lilly pad
Moto Edge 70
Moto Edge 70 back panel
Moto Edge 70 render
Moto Edge 70 side profile

The post Ultra-Slim Motorola Edge 70's Images & Specs Listed Before Launch appeared first on Android Headlines.

Vivo X200 FE Review: A Compact Beast That Won't Break Your Bank

Vivo X200 FE blue rear AH 12

Despite being in high demand, compact phones seem to continue to be a niche for device makers. Only a few brands out there cover this segment adequately, and the list is even shorter outside of China. Well, meet the Vivo X200 FE, a pseudo-flagship handset—in the same category as the OnePlus 13R, OnePlus 13s, or Samsung Galaxy S25 FE, among others—that wants to fill this space.

The X200 FE isn’t exactly a budget phone, but it’s not as expensive as other devices that top—or even exceed—the $1,000 price tag. Its price tag places it at a nice spot in the flagship segment. Plus, its compact form factor makes it stand out in an industry populated by “mini tablets.” Add in a massive battery, long life, and remarkable cameras with ZEISS optics and tuning, and overall, you have a pretty attractive—although not perfect—package. Below, we will review all the pros and cons of this handset.

Vivo X200 FE
Rating
star star star star star_empty
€799
Vivo X200 FE blue rear AH 4

Vivo X200 FE is a solid pseudo-flagship phone that combines pretty good cameras, a huge battery, high performance, and premium design in a compact package.

Pros

  • Matte-textured glass finish, highly resistant to fingerprints and scratches
  • Dimensity 9300+ chip performance and efficiency is excellent
  • A massive battery whose size is surprising in a compact body
  • Clear, vivid and bright AMOLED display, visible even in sunlight
  • Battery charges from 20 to 100% in just around 45 minutes
  • Main and periscope cameras offer great results
  • Premium glass and metal build with IP68/IP69 rating

Cons

  • 8MP ultra-wide sensor is too out of place in the powerful camera system
  • No wireless charging
  • Despite stellar performance, UFS 3.1 storage and USB 2.0 are not up to par for its price range
  • Extremely slippery design

The manufacturer provided us with a review unit of the Vivo X200 FE. We used it as our primary device for approximately one month before writing this review, which was not sponsored.

Buy at Aliexpress

Vivo X200 FE: Specs

Vivo X200 FE
Display 6.31-inch, 1,216 x 2,640 px, 120Hz LTPO
Processor Mediatek Dimensity 9300+
RAM 12GB, 16GB
Storage 256GB, 512GB
Battery 6,500mAh
Cameras 50MP main (f/1.9 aperture, 1/1.56″, OIS), 50MP telephoto (3x zoom, f/2.71 aperture, /1.95″), 8MP ultrawide (f/2.0 aperture, 120° FOV)
Colors Luxe Grey (Black Luxe), Frost Blue (Blue Breeze), Amber Yellow (Yellow Glow), Pink Vibe
View Device Specs

Vivo X200 FE Review: Hardware and Design

The design of the Vivo X200 FE is one of its strengths. With a display measuring just 6.31 inches and a body weighing around 188 grams, this is one of the few premium phones you can truly use with one hand without feeling like you might drop it. This point alone could be a great plus for many. After a long time—years—using phones of at least 6.7 inches, the change felt refreshing. I really thought I would find the screen too small, but I got used to it quickly.

The phone’s frame is crafted from aerospace-grade aluminum. In terms of real-world use, it feels sturdy, durable, and premium. There have been no signs of scratches in the time I have used it. Regarding the overall design, it is simple, clean, and practical. The rear panel features a textured glass finish that does an excellent job of resisting fingerprints and smudges. However, it also makes the phone quite slippery, so you’ll need to be careful if you like to carry it “uncased.”

The overall build quality is solid, with no creases or flex. As you may expect on a high-end “camera-focused” phone, the camera bump is notably raised. That means you’ll notice a lot of wobbles if you try to use the phone’s screen while it is laid on a flat surface—again, if you prefer not to use a case.

Beyond the aesthetics and in-hand feel, the X200 FE comes with an IP68 and IP69 rating. This means it’s fully protected against dust and can even handle high-pressure water jets. I submerged it in water for testing, and everything continued to work correctly. However, you will find that using the wet screen becomes complicated. This is a familiar situation for most phones out there, though.

The display has protection, but probably not the kind you’re used to. There’s a layer of Schott Xensation Core glass, a rarity in a segment dominated by Corning. Anyway, the phone comes with a pre-applied plastic protector that has been pretty resilient so far.

The phone is available in up to four colors: Amber Yellow, Frost Blue (our unit), Luxe Black, and Pink Vibe. It’s noteworthy that the availability of certain colors may be limited to specific markets. That said, Vivo includes a color-matching case. The case seems quite durable and feels nice in the hand. However, the material’s finish also makes it a bit slippery—though less so than the bare phone itself.

As for the ports and buttons, you’ll find the volume and power buttons on the right side, a USB-C port at the bottom, and a stereo speaker setup. Personally, I prefer the volume and power buttons on different sides of the frame, as the placement makes it easier to take screenshots with one hand. Anyway, I got used to having the buttons on one side after a few days.

1761534857841
1761535491056
1761535159582
1761535222902
1761535001408
1761534857841
1761535491056
1761535159582
1761535222902
1761535001408

The USB-C 2.0 standard is a bit of a curious choice at this price point, as it limits data transfer speeds. While this isn’t a dealbreaker for most users, it is something you should know. Surely those who tend to constantly transfer large files between their phone and PC via USB would have preferred a more current, faster standard.

In short, the Vivo X200 FE is designed as a legitimate compact premium phone. It’s good-looking, durable, and reliable. You will not find compromises in this section.

Vivo X200 FE Review: Display

The screen is a key aspect of our smartphones—especially premium ones. Fortunately, the Vivo X200 FE also excels in this section. The phone sports a 6.31-inch 8T LTPO AMOLED panel with a 2640 x 1216p resolution and a smooth 120Hz refresh rate. How does this translate into the real world? A sharp, smooth as butter user experience.

Whether you’re watching a series, a movie, or even a sporting event, the experience with the Vivo X200 FE’s display is truly pleasant. HDR-compatible content takes full advantage of the device’s display, boasting its ability to represent everything from deep blacks to bright highlights without the “black smearing” effect of cheap displays. It’s extremely responsive as well, which is especially notable when playing titles that require rapid reaction times.

The LTPO tech allows the refresh rate to dynamically adjust from 1Hz to 120Hz based on the content. In my experience, this happens perfectly smoothly, without lags or hangs here and there.

Regarding brightness, Vivo claims a peak brightness of 5,000 nits. That said, you won’t get these brightness levels under normal conditions but rather under certain specific situations (such as watching HDR-supported content) and in certain sections of the display. Anyway, I have been able to use this phone without any problem even in bright sunlight. Special mention to the operation of automatic brightness. Even though it may seem like a basic feature, not all phones handle it well. However, the Vivo X200 FE is capable of offering you the ideal levels for practice in every situation. This isn’t a device where you have to constantly adjust the brightness bar, which is just great.

Vivo has also integrated a 2,160Hz PWM dimming that will help your eyes not feel fatigued even during long reading sessions or late-night scrolling. My visual experience with this phone has been quite positive under any lighting conditions.

The screen has a responsive optical fingerprint sensor embedded, which is fast and reliable. I can’t recall a single instance where the fingerprint reader failed.

Overall, the Vivo X200 FE delivers a great viewing experience. It undoubtedly feels like one of the best phone displays you’ll find in this segment.

Vivo X200 FE Review: Performance

Under the hood, the Vivo X200 FE is powered by the MediaTek Dimensity 9300+, a flagship-grade processor from the previous generation. This chip is paired with up to 16GB of LPDDR5X RAM—12GB in our unit—and 512GB of UFS 3.1 storage. While the Dimensity 9300+ is still a powerhouse, the inclusion of UFS 3.1 storage is a bit of a curious choice at this price point, as many rivals have moved to the faster UFS 4.0 standard. This, along with the slower USB 2.0 port, is the only real hardware compromise.

In day-to-day use, the phone feels incredibly fast, fluid, and responsive. Apps open instantly, multitasking is seamless, and there is no hint of lag or stuttering, even with a demanding workload. The performance gap between the Dimensity 9300+ and newer processors is minimal and something most users will never notice.

For gamers, the X200 FE performs really well. The vapor chamber cooling system (3800 mm²) also has a lot to offer. Although it’s not a gaming phone, it has enough raw power to satisfy the vast majority, even considering its compact screen. However, keep in mind that this is a compact handset. Therefore, there’s less inner space available for heat dissipation than in larger devices.

In Call of Duty: Mobile, both “Graphics Quality” and “Frame Rate” are set to “Max” by default, with features like anti-aliasing and real-time shadows turned on. Changing the frame rate to “Ultra” sets the graphics quality to “Medium.” However, every round will be extremely smooth and lag-free with these settings. In Genshin Impact, the game automatically sets the graphics quality to “High,” with most graphics options set to “High” (except for “Shadow Quality,” which is set to “Medium”) and 30fps. You can play it at 45fps by setting “render resolution” to “medium.”

Vivo has put a lot of effort into the gaming aspect of the device. Funtouch offers an “Ultra Gaming” mode that goes far beyond what Android natively includes. It does the typical thing, which is to optimize available hardware resources to get the best possible performance while you play. However, you’ll also find a lot of additional options that aren’t just bloatware but quite useful. These options will be available from a sidebar that you can display by sliding from the left side of the game UI.

These “gaming boosters” are divided into two main sections: “Performance Panel” and “Game Tools.” As the name suggests, the former allows you to intuitively tweak the game’s performance and display the touch sampling rate using a pair of sliders. Game Tools, on the other hand, includes a plethora of options, including mapping actions to motion gestures and screen recording, and enabling 4D vibration feedback for improved haptics. You can even activate “Charge Bypass” to play connected to a power brick without draining your battery.

Vivo X200 FE Review: Benchmarks

In synthetic benchmarks, the X200 FE delivered excellent scores. Due to its compact form factor, it’s not the smartphone that handles heat the best. However, we also can’t say that the device suffers from overheating under high-demand conditions. It’s just a little warmer than other handsets out there.

Geekbench:

Starting with Geekbench 6, the device achieved scores of 2,189 and 7,029 on the single-core and multi-core tests, respectively.

DeviceSingle-CoreMulti-CoreGPU
Vivo X200 FE2,1897,02914,753
POCO F7 Ultra2,8898,32617,293
Google Pixel 9 Pro1,9614,7156,519

3D Mark’s Wildlife Extreme Stress Test:

We also ran the 3D Mark’s Wildlife Extreme Stress Test on the phone. This is one of the most demanding graphics benchmarks out there. It pushes your phone’s hardware to the limit, to the point where some models are even unable to complete it due to the temperature they reach. So, it’s ideal not only for testing your phone’s GPU but also its thermal control capabilities.

The benchmark consists of running 20 laps of the same graphically demanding test. At the end, the Vivo X200 FE managed to complete the test with a 58.4% stability score. This is perhaps where the smaller form factor becomes noticeable. That said, it will only impact your gaming experience in the most demanding titles and at the highest settings after a certain period of time.

DeviceBest LoopLowest LoopStability
Vivo X200 FE4,5112,63358.4%
POCO F7 Ultra5,9814,14169%
Google Pixel 9 Pro2,5732,05179,7%

Antutu:

We also put the handset to the test in the very popular Antutu benchmark.

DeviceScore
Vivo X200 FE1,958,355
POCO F7 Ultra2,533,644
Google Pixel 9 Pro1,148,512

Vivo X200 FE Review: thermals

Regarding thermals during benchmarks, the results were quite acceptable for a powerful compact phone. Below you can see the maximum temperature the device reached during each test.

BenchmarkTemperature
Geekbench45,3 °C/113.54 °F
3D Mark Extreme Stress Test48 °C/118.4 °F
Antutu41,6 °C/106,9 °F

We also tested the Vivo X200 FE’s thermals during 4K/60fps video recording, the most demanding recording setting available.

Device5 minutes10 minutes
Vivo X200 FE34.83 °C/94,7 °F37.36 °C/99,26 °F
POCO F7 Ultra34.66 °C/ 94,4 °F35.16 °C/95,3 °F
Google Pixel 9 Pro35 °C/95 °F37.27 °C/99,1 °F

While the storage and USB port choices are a bit underwhelming, the core performance delivered by the Dimensity 9300+, the LPDDR5X RAM, and the 12-core Immortalis-G720 GPU is really good.

Vivo X200 FE Review: Battery Life and Charging

One of the most surprising and impressive aspects of the Vivo X200 FE is its battery. Despite its slim and compact form factor, the phone is powered by a massive 6,500mAh silicon-anode cell. This is a capacity you would typically find in a much larger, more expensive device, and it is one of the biggest batteries available in a smartphone today.

This massive battery delivers exceptional endurance. In our tests, the phone comfortably lasted a full day and a half with moderate to heavy usage, and even the most demanding users should be able to get through a full day with charge to spare. More specifically, we are talking about easily achieving 10+ hours of on-screen time if you use Wi-Fi most of the day or around 8:30+ hours with heavy use of mobile data.

Charging the phone is equally impressive, thanks to 90W fast charging support. With a compatible charger, you can fully charge the phone from 20 to 100% in just around 45 minutes, according to the company. In our tests, the phone charged from 1% to 100% in just over 55 minutes. That said, the device doesn’t include a charger in the box in Europe, so that’s something you should check. However, the handset supports both USB-PD and PPS charging protocols, so you can exploit its charging capabilities with non-proprietary adapters. I also tested it with a third-party 65W USB-PD charging brick, and it worked perfectly.

Below you can find the results of the Vivo X200 FE in our battery endurance test compared to other devices.

DeviceBattery lifeCharging
Vivo X200 FE23:57:170:55:17
POCO F7 Ultra21:30:120:28:20
Google Pixel 9 Pro21:54:401:18:30

One of the advantages of these huge batteries is that you can limit their charge to extend their lifespan. Since you don’t need 100% capacity for your daily use, you can charge it up to 90%, for example. In fact, Funtouch 15 offers an option that allows you to do just that on this device.

Vivo X200 FE Review: Software

The Vivo X200 FE comes out of the box running Funtouch 15, which is based on Android 15. Vivo promises four years of Android updates, so it should receive even Android 19 in the future. This particular model is set to get monthly security updates as well. During our tests, the phone received four updates to improve camera quality and add a security patch. The device is set to get Android 16 in November along with the other, more expensive Vivo X200 models, by the way.

The software experience is a mixed bag of clean design and useful features. At first glance, the interface looks quite streamlined and practical.

Vivo X200 FE front display AH 9

However, looking at the colorful “Material” design language of the Pixel phones, the countless customization possibilities of One UI, or even riskier bets like Apple’s Liquid Glass, Vivo’s UI may be starting to feel a little “outdated.” On the good side, the OS is as stable as it can be, offering a well-optimized, smooth/snappy experience. Gone are those times when custom skins from Chinese Android brands negatively impacted performance or introduced more problems than solutions.

The software also offers some AI features that are actually useful. There’s an AI writing assistant integrated into the Notes app, a live call translation feature, and an AI Transcript Assist that can summarize spoken conversations. Vivo also includes its DocMaster tool, which simplifies file conversion and editing. You’ll also find Google’s Gemini integration, bringing features like Circle to Search and on-screen content translation.

Vivo integrates its own Gallery app, which, as you might imagine, also offers AI-powered features. There’s an “AI Photo Enhance” option that restores—or boosts—the quality of your photos. However, I must say that, at least currently, the result is a mixed bag. Often, it helps improve the photo, but in other cases, the AI processing leaves notably artificial results—especially in portraits. On the other hand, the AI-powered eraser works quite well and even lets you remove unwanted reflections from glass in pictures. Vivo’s Gallery app also offers an option to quickly generate PDF files with the images you want.

While the OS is pretty good, there are a few things here and there that could be better. Vivo includes its widget section within the app drawer, which can be a bit disruptive for users expecting a clean app list, for instance. Customization fans will also find their options somewhat limited. For starters, the launcher doesn’t support third-party icon packs, which is a bummer.

There’s also no option to remove the bottom app dock, leaving a large, empty space between the dock icons and the rest of the home screen. While you can solve these problems by downloading a launcher, it would be great to have these options natively. Hopefully, Vivo can address these couple of things in the upcoming updates.

Either way, the OS still supports Android’s theming feature. So, you can apply a uniform color tone to most of your app icons and key UI items. You can also change the icon shape (square, circular, or “squircle”). Sadly, there are apps whose icons don’t support the theme feature, which is a bummer if those apps include some of your favorites. There is also an option to hide the name labels of the app icons on your home screen for an even more minimalist look.

If privacy options are important to you, Funtouch 15 will likely satisfy you. You can encrypt access to your apps using a PIN or biometrics. If you prefer, there’s also an option to directly hide the app from the drawer and home screen. You can also check when apps have accessed your location, camera, and microphone in chronological order.

Vivo X200 FE Review: Camera

The Vivo X200 FE is a camera-focused phone, which its rear bump makes clear. You won’t find huge 1-inch sensors here, but the overall package makes for a remarkable content creation experience. There are three sensors, the main one being a 50MP Sony IMX921 with an f/1.88 aperture and a 1/1.56″ size. It’s not the most powerful sensor available out there, but it’s capable of delivering really good results full of detail.

However, you might be even more interested in the 50MP periscope Sony IMX882 sensor with support for 3x optical zoom. This is almost the same periscope lens as the vanilla Vivo X200, with the difference that the company opted for an M-style prism on the FE model. What’s the difference? Well, this format allows for a slimmer phone design, but it also means losing the lens’s macro capabilities. That’s right, you won’t find a dedicated “Macro” mode on this phone. So, keep that in mind if it’s important to you.

Both lenses boast OIS and ZEISS optics, which, in theory, should improve light transmission and reduce the lens flare effect. That said, both the main and telephoto sensors offer excellent performance. Special mention to the almost-instant shutter speed, something that even some premium flagship phones struggle to achieve.

Main camera samples:

Starting with the main lens, the results are generally good in all lighting conditions. Photos are detailed and vivid, without the dreaded “washed-out textures” effect that other brands suffer from due to overly aggressive image processing. HDR management is another strong point of the Vivo X200 FE, showing a good balance of lights and shadows.

When night falls, the main sensor continues to perform quite competently. However, at this point it becomes more noticeable that we’re not dealing with a proper flagship. You’ll primarily notice significantly worse light control, although the level of detail is still acceptable—there is no “oil paint” effect typical of mid-rangers. Just be careful in scenes with many artificial light sources.

3x telephoto samples:

Regarding the periscope sensor, it offers excellent image quality. The best thing is that, unlike some other similar solutions, there’s no “foggy effect” in the photo. Vivo has been offering some of the best camera phones available for years, so they have a lot of experience with image processing, and you’ll notice that here. The camera app offers four preset zoom levels: 0.6x, 1x, 2x, 3x, and 10x. However, if you long-press the zoom selector, you can use a carousel to fine-tune the zoom levels up to 100x. Although, as you might imagine, the images at the maximum digital zoom level will be barely usable in most cases.

Below you’ll find samples taken with the 3x telephoto periscope lens.

If you are interested in even higher zoom levels, 10x zoom results are better or worse depending on the scene. There are cases where the “AI reconstruction” is more evident than in others. In my experience, the device is capable of delivering “almost optical” quality up to 5x zoom. Beyond that, the AI’s participation in photo reconstruction will be much more evident.

Regarding nighttime performance, the 3x telephoto sensor continues to perform quite well, similar to the main camera. Texture details aren’t blurred in the shadows, which is great. It may easily be one of the best 3x telephoto lenses available out there, and it’s nice to have it in a handset that doesn’t cost as much as a premium flagship.

Ultra-wide samples:

For the ultra-wide lens, there’s nothing to write home about here. The handset has an 8MP lens that’s quite out of place with the rest of the camera package. These sensors are more typical of affordable phones, and we would have liked to see something better on this device. The best we can say about the Vivo X200 FE’s ultra-wide camera is that it’s simply “usable.” As expected, it performs just acceptable in ideal lighting conditions, but don’t expect a level of detail similar to that of the other sensors. Still, Vivo’s decent image processing helps improve things a bit.

In low-light situations, the ultra-wide sensor is barely usable. Light control is quite poor, and details become blurred easily. These are the situations when it’s most noticeable that we’re talking about a low-end camera. A 12MP sensor at least would have been much more suitable for this phone.

By the way, the phone offers a “Supermoon” mode:

IMG 20250828 190621

Regarding Vivo’s camera app, it offers a ton of “styles.” There are the three main ones: Texture, Vivid, and Zeiss. The latter is the mode that promises the most realistic results, and it’s the one we used for camera testing. However, Vivo sets the “Vivid” mode by default, aware that most users prefer photos with punchier colors for social media.

There’s a set of other styles you can play with and experiment with to get the results you like best. There are even dedicated modes for “Food” and “Stage”—a mode designed for taking photos at concerts, taking advantage of the phone’s zoom capabilities. You can also enable a “Smart Focus” setting that will automatically track subjects. The camera app is full of modes and options that photography fans will appreciate.

1761319294101
1761319294101

As an interesting fact, the phone’s flash is not monotone. It can switch between different levels of cool and warm. You can adjust the tone manually or let the phone do it automatically based on the scene. Vivo calls this “Aura Light,” whose intensity is also adjustable. There are even a pair of discreetly integrated front-facing flashlights for selfies.

Should You Buy the Vivo X200 FE?

The Vivo X200 FE is one of those great phones that, unfortunately, is not available in the US market. However, it was launched for €799 in EU countries and from ₹51,990 in India. At this point you could probably get it for less. This phone is a serious competitor to other compact devices like the OnePlus 13s and the Google Pixel 10 in its range. It’s an easy recommendation for anyone in the market for a compact phone that doesn’t compromise on the core experience.

You should buy the Vivo X200 FE if:

  • You want one of the best camera experiences available in a sub-flagship phone.
  • You are looking for an affordable pseudo-flagship device that is not primarily focused on performance, cutting costs in other aspects.
  • You want a phone whose battery will easily last more than a day even with intensive use.

You should not buy the Vivo X200 FE if:

  • The quality of the ultra-wide camera is really important to you.
  • You prefer phones with large screens.

The post Vivo X200 FE Review: A Compact Beast That Won't Break Your Bank appeared first on Android Headlines.

Samsung Galaxy F55 and F15 users can finally enjoy One UI 8 features

Samsung has started rolling out the Android 16-based One UI 8 update for the Galaxy F55 and Galaxy F15. The update brings smoother performance, new features, and a refreshed look to make the phones faster and easier to use.

One UI 8 update for Galaxy F55 and F15 update comes with build numbers E556BXXU4CYJ4 and E156BXXU7CYJ5. The download size is about 2.3 GB, and it comes with the October 2025 security patch. The update is currently live for users in India, and the company will make it available for all models soon.

One UI 8 brings several exciting features. The Weather app has a fresh new look, while the Now Bar and Live Notifications show more information at a glance. Users can also enjoy the new 90:10 split-screen ratio and new clock styles.

Samsung Galaxy F55 August 2024 update

The animations throughout the system have been improved, making switching between apps feel faster and more natural. Samsung has also added Google’s Circle to Search support with this update for Galaxy F15, giving users more functionality.

If you own a Galaxy F55 or F15 in India, you can check for the update by going to Settings >> Software update >> Download and install. Once the download is complete, tap Install now, and your phone will restart with the latest One UI 8 features. This update makes the Galaxy F55 and F15 more reliable, faster, and enjoyable to use.

Google Search Top Stories Preferred Source

The post Samsung Galaxy F55 and F15 users can finally enjoy One UI 8 features appeared first on Sammy Fans.

Android 16 makes app updates faster by reducing freeze time

Android 16 is introducing a useful new feature that makes app updates much quicker and easier for everyone. The new feature, Seamless App Updates, helps reduce the time an app is frozen during an update. This means your apps will update faster and with almost no interruption to your phone use.

Normally, when you update an app, Android briefly freezes it so it doesn’t crash while files are being replaced. For large or system apps, this freezing time could last a few seconds, which makes the app unusable for a short while.

But with Android 16, this time has been reduced from seconds to just a few milliseconds. It means that you’ll barely notice it happening during app updates.

This improvement comes from a smart change in how Android processes app updates. The system runs scripts called dexopt and dex2oat, which prepare an app’s code to make it run faster. In older versions, these tasks were done while the app was frozen, causing delays.

Samsung Galaxy Store 6.6.14.7 update

Android 16 now performs these optimizations earlier in the update process, so when the app is swapped with the new version. And the freezing happens for only a split second.

This update doesn’t just make things faster, as it also makes the whole experience smoother. It’s especially helpful for larger apps or for users who install several updates at once through the Play Store.

Although Google hasn’t shared every technical detail, the results are clear as apps now update almost instantly. Seamless app updates may seem like a small change, but it’s a big improvement in everyday use, saving time and making Android 16 feel faster and more reliable overall.

Google Search Top Stories Preferred Source

The post Android 16 makes app updates faster by reducing freeze time appeared first on Sammy Fans.

Samsung Wallet adds Mahindra Electric Origin SUV to its digital car key lineup

Mahindra Electric has introduced a smart new way for its customers to access their cars. The company has partnered with Samsung to bring Digital Car Key support for the Mahindra Electric Origin SUV through Samsung Wallet. This new feature lets Galaxy smartphone users unlock, lock, and start their vehicle using just their phone, so no physical key is needed.

The setup is simple and secure. The digital key works through NFC and UWB technology, which allows the phone to communicate directly with the car. To ensure safety, users must confirm their identity with a fingerprint, face ID, or a PIN before using the feature.

Sharing the car is also easier now. Owners can send a temporary digital key to friends or family members, giving them access for a limited time. It’s a handy option for families who share vehicles.

Samsung has also added a safety backup. If someone loses their phone, the Samsung Find service can remotely lock the device and delete all sensitive data, including the car key. This keeps both personal information and the car secure.

Samsung US Cellular

Image: Samsung

The feature will first be available for select Mahindra Electric Origin SUVs, and it will expand across India in the coming months. This step shows Mahindra’s growing aim to make its electric vehicles more connected and user-friendly.

Samsung Wallet already supports digital car keys for brands like Hyundai, Kia, Audi, and Mercedes-Benz. With Mahindra Electric now on that list, Indian customers can enjoy the same modern, digital convenience as drivers of global brands.

With this partnership, Mahindra Electric is taking another step toward a smarter future. It provides a seamless driving experience for EV owners in India.

Google Search Top Stories Preferred Source

The post Samsung Wallet adds Mahindra Electric Origin SUV to its digital car key lineup appeared first on Sammy Fans.

Sabrina Carpenter Spotted Using a Gorgeous Contax G2 Camera

A woman with blonde hair, wearing a black coat and plaid scarf, smiles while holding a vintage film camera outdoors. There is a close-up inset of the camera in her hands. The background is blurred greenery.

It is becoming more common to see celebrities and pop stars using classic cameras as the vintage aesthetic continues to burn white hot. However, most tend to stick with digital -- Taylor Swift and Selina Gomez both really like the Olympus EM-10 Mark IV, for example. Sabrina Carpenter is going even further back in time though as she has been spotted sporting a beautiful Contax G2.

[Read More]

This One-of-a-Kind Lens Was Disney’s Biggest Gamble

A camera mounted on a tripod is positioned in front of a large aquarium tank, with a shark and several fish swimming in the blue water background.

Photographer and YouTube creator Mathieu Stern saw an incredible piece of cinematic and optical history show up on an auction site. While it was outside his price range, it was not beyond the reach of Atlas Lens Co., known for its Orion and Mercury series cinema lenses. The lens in question was a Bausch + Lomb CinemaScope anamorphic lens attachment, which could turn a traditional cinema lens into a then-groundbreaking anamorphic optic.

[Read More]

Two new Sharp Value LCD Laser Projectors launch

Sharp has launched two new V series projectors for professional use: the XP-V731U and the XP-V801U. The letter V seemingly stands for value, with the brand describing these models as “cost-efficient”. Features of the WUXGA projectors include a laser light source offering up to 8,000 ISO lumens brightness and compatibility with a wide range of mounts and lenses.

A guild secretary, not a hero: Free cozy game launches on Steam with 100% positive reviews

In Ye Guild Clerk!, players don’t take on the role of a hero but that of a guild secretary in a fantasy world. Instead of slaying monsters, you chat with animal adventurers and assign quests from the comfort of your desk. The free cozy game launched on Steam on October 28 and has received overwhelmingly positive feedback since its release.

Honor Power 2's insane battery capacity is confirmed

The rumors were accurate, as it turns out, and the Honor Power 2 does in fact have a 10,000 mAh battery. The device has just been certified for sale in China by 3C, and the listing in question has revealed the battery's rated capacity, which is 9,886 mAh. That will undoubtedly be marketed as 10,000 mAh typical capacity when the phone launches. It will be the first device from a mainstream smartphone brand to reach five-digit battery capacity territory, but apparently Honor won't stop here. According to Digital Chat Station on Weibo, the brand actually plans on releasing three different...

Motorola Moto G67 Power listed on official website with specs and images, launching next week

Motorola recently started teasing the launch of a new smartphone in India, and today the brand revealed that phone is the Moto G67 Power, which will launch on November 5. Motorola also listed the Moto G67 Power on its Indian website with images, specs, and features, so we don't have to wait until next Wednesday to know what the smartphone will offer. The use of the word "Power" in the phone's moniker should already tell you that it will pack a big battery. How big? The answer is 7,000 mAh. It's a Si/C battery, advertised to last more than two days (58 hours, to be accurate) on a single...

The OnePlus 15 launches globally in two weeks, early-bird offer already underway

The OnePlus 15 was unveiled a couple of days ago in China and has booked its ticket for the worldwide tour – the company just announced that its latest flagship will make its global debut on November 13 (that’s the Thursday two weeks from now). Pricing details are to come. For now, we can just have a look at the early bird offer. Starting today and ending November 13, you can pay a €99 deposit on OnePlus.com to reserve a phone. This will count towards your purchase, which will include a €50 discount and one of several freebies for a total value of €350. You will be able to pick one of...

Insta360 X4 Air brings 8K 360 video recording for $400

The X4 Air is Insta360’s latest 360-degree action cam and it brings up to 8K30 video recording at a more affordable price point compared to the flagship Insta360 X5 model. Insta360 X4 Air in Graphite Black At its core, X4 Air gets dual 1/1.8-inch sensors which is a big upgrade compared to ½-inch sensors on its predecessor. You can record videos in 8K (7680×3840) resolution at 30/25/24fps as well as 6K (6016×3008) @50/48/30/25/24fps or 4K (3840×1920) @50/48/30/25/24fps. Photos are snapped at 29MP (7680×3840) resolution. X4 Air supports replaceable lenses and Insta360’s...

Nothing Phone (3a) Lite launches as the brand’s first entry-level phone

Even though Nothing already has entry-level smartphones under the CMF brand, it decided to launch its first affordable smartphone under its own lineup. The Nothing Phone (3a) Lite is the first entry-level smartphone from the London-based tech brand. A quick specs comparison reveals that the Phone (3a) Lite is actually quite similar to the CMF Phone 2 Pro with the only major difference being the absence of a dedicated telephoto cam. Phone (3a) Lite gets the signature Nothing transparent glass back, and it features a single Glyph light that alerts you to notifications. Phone...

OpenAI Aims to Build a Legitimate AI Researcher by 2028

ChatGPT and OpenAI Logo Background

Many AI models like OpenAI’s ChatGPT can perform research for users. But OpenAI thinks that’s not good enough. In fact, OpenAI believes that by 2028, it will have developed a “legitimate AI researcher.”

OpenAI developing AI researcher

So as not to confuse you, by “AI researcher,” OpenAI is referring to an AI that can perform research. Not a human researcher that does research on AI. According to the company’s CEO, Sam Altman, OpenAI’s deep learning systems are advancing at such a rapid pace that the company is tracking towards achieving an intern-level research assistant by 2026. Then by 2028, it would have a “legitimate AI researcher.”

If that is true, it would be impressive. Like we said, AI models like ChatGPT have the ability to perform deep research for users. This means that instead of a cursory search, it dives deeper into the web to find information on the things you want. However, does it perform as well as a human? That’s debatable.

AI research versus human research

There’s no doubt that Deep Research will save humans a lot of time. Imagine you’re trying to write a thesis for your final semester at university. Normally, you’d have to go to the library and search for books related to your subject. Then within those books, you’d have to find information that’s relevant. You could do it online, but it’s also the same thing. You’d have to sift through dozens, if not hundreds of websites, to find information to support your paper.

With Deep Research, all of that information can be found and collated in minutes. This frees you up time on researching and more time writing. However, speed is the only thing it excels at.

When we do our own research, we learn things along the way. We employ critical thinking and we understand the context of the information. AI, however, does not. It’s great at summarizing information, but because it lacks the nuances of human thinking, the information it finds might not be as good as a human researcher doing the same thing.

Right now, tools like Deep Research are more like a jumping off point. It helps you find information and sources quickly, but then you’ll have to synthesize that information yourself. However, if OpenAI is capable of achieving human-level research in the next few years, it will be a whole different ball game.

The post OpenAI Aims to Build a Legitimate AI Researcher by 2028 appeared first on Android Headlines.

AT&T Faces Customer Retention Problem Despite Strong Subscriber Growth

AH AT&T Logo (9)

By all accounts, AT&T is having a decent year. According to the company’s latest financials, it managed to gain around 405,000 new postpaid customers during Q3 2025. However, that is just one part of the story. While AT&T managed to pull in quite a sizable number of new customers, it might have a retention problem.

AT&T might have a problem with customers staying

According to a report from The Street, it discovered in the financial report that AT&T’s churn rate increased by 14 basis points year-over-year. This means that while AT&T might be bringing in new customers each quarter, it has a problem keeping existing ones.

And whose fault is this? Could it be that the marketing by Verizon and T-Mobile are too good? Turns out, it might actually be AT&T’s own doing. The carrier had recently made a decision to reduce the monthly discount for customers who opted for autopay and paperless billing. This means that customers who did opt into these programs suddenly saw their discounts gone.

For some, it might have been these discounts that kept them on AT&T’s network. Now that those discounts are no more, these customers also have no reason to stick around. Also, as The Street points out, the carrier faced some controversy with billing. AT&T, like all other carriers, is trying to lure customers to their network. However, some customers discovered higher-than-expected monthly bills after the fact.

AT&T insists that it’s normal

While the increased churn rate is alarming, AT&T doesn’t think so. In fact, during the earnings call, AT&T Chief Financial Officer Pascal Desroches said this follows “seasonable patterns.”

According to Desroches, “This reflects increased marketplace activity and, to a lesser degree, an increase in the portion of our customer base reaching the end of device financing periods, which normalized as we exited the quarter. Based on this operating environment, we continue to plan for postpaid phone churn and upgrades to follow seasonal patterns in the fourth quarter, when we typically see more switching and upgrade activity due to new device launches and the holiday season.”

AT&T CEO John Stankey also notes that rival carriers have been pretty aggressive with their own luring tactics. “It’s been competitive. It continues to be competitive. There are shifts in tactics all the time that occur in this market, and we’re in a cycle right now that, because of the maturity level, tactics have shifted.”

The post AT&T Faces Customer Retention Problem Despite Strong Subscriber Growth appeared first on Android Headlines.

Apple Accuses OPPO Engineer of Stealing Apple Watch Trade Secrets

Apple watch os 26 AH 08

Despite the Apple Watch pretty much only working with iOS devices, Apple’s wearable commands a pretty sizable chunk of the market. This is thanks to the features of the smartwatch that legitimately make it useful. It is also understandable why Apple wasn’t too thrilled when trade secrets surrounding the Apple Watch were leaked to Oppo.

Apple says Oppo engineer stole trade secrets

Now, Apple employs hundreds, if not thousands of employees, who work on a variety of products at the company. Recently, it seems that Oppo had recruited a former Apple Watch engineer, Chen Shi, who reportedly shared trade secrets about the Apple Watch with the Chinese company.

Apple discovered this leak when Shi gave a presentation on Apple sensor technology. This allowed Oppo to gain further insight into the development of the smartwatch. In fact, Shi did not even shy away from the fact that this information came from inside Apple. Oppo marketed the internal talk with the title “Apple’s Sensor Hardware R&D Philosophy and Methodology.” A tagline for the meeting even reads, “Are you curious about how Apple’s sensors are developed?”

Apple is saying that Shi’s presentations include slides that were taken directly from the company. The complaint also accuses Oppo of encouraging Shi to share trade secret information.

Oppo’s response

Naturally, Oppo is denying that there was any theft of trade secrets. Apple has asked the courts for injunctive relief to stop Shi from sharing further information. However, Oppo says that it conducted its own comprehensive search of the systems Shi had access to. The company claims that there is “no indication that Oppo received any Apple trade secret information.”

It also does not believe that injunctive relief is justified. “There is consequently no basis for Apple to request preliminary injunctive relief, and it is not entitled to any such relief. OPPO has already looked for Apple’s ‘trade secrets’ and ‘confidential information’ and found nothing that it might disclose, retain, use or be obligated to return.”

It remains to be seen how this will play out. However, if Apple’s evidence is as damning as they claim, it might not look good for Oppo or Shi.

The post Apple Accuses OPPO Engineer of Stealing Apple Watch Trade Secrets appeared first on Android Headlines.

Best Foldable Smartphone Ultimate Buying Guide 2025

Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 AH 05

Foldable smartphones have managed to evolve quite a bit over the last 5 or so years. Samsung has finally started catching up to the competition, and we have some really great offerings on the market at the moment. If you’re in the market for one such phone, picking out the very best foldable smartphone for your needs is crucial. Well, this list may help you, as it’s a buying guide, of sorts. Do note that the list is US-centric, so you won’t find devices that cannot be purchased in the States.

With that being said, quite a few compelling foldable smartphones are available in the States. You can take your pick between book-style ones and flip phone ones, there’s something for everyone. If you’re aiming for the very best, we have you covered. If you’re on a budget, that’s not a problem either, even though foldable phones are not as affordable as regular ones, of course. Either way, let’s delve into it, and hopefully help you choose your next or first foldable smartphone. These are some of the best Android phones in general, by the way.

Best Foldable Smartphone

There are several excellent foldable phones out in the market at the moment. We’ve decided to especially highlight the Galaxy Z Fold 7 from Samsung, though. Samsung made a huge leap with this phone compared to the Galaxy Z Fold 6, and it’s finally extremely competitive. This is the phone to get if you’re looking for a proper foldable phone that can become a tablet when you need it to.

Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7
Rating
star star star star star_empty
$1,999
Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 foldable smartphone display

The Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 is our pick for the best foldable smartphone in general. This is a larger foldable, of course, but it’s the best pick for those of you who live in the US, easily. It is a major improvement over the Galaxy Z Fold 6, and it can easily compete with basically every foldable smartphone in the market.

The Galaxy Z Fold 6 is much thinner and lighter than its predecessor, while it’s also plenty powerful at the same time. It is only 8.9mm thick when folded, and weighs 215 grams. needless to say that’s a huge improvement over 12.1mm of the Fold 6, and its 239 grams of weight.

The Galaxy Z Fold 7 is fueled by the Snapdragon 8 Elite processor, while it also packs in 12GB of LPDDR5X RAM and UFS 4.0 flash storage. A 4,400mAh battery is included here, while the device does support wired and wireless charging. The charging is not blazing fast, though, but it does the trick. You’ll also find two 120Hz displays on the device, both of which are great, actually. Regardless if you need a phone or a tablet, this phone does the trick.

Pros

  • Mindblowingly thin and light
  • Bigger, Brighter Displays
  • Better cameras
  • Class-leading performance

Cons

  • Another price increase, now $1,999
  • Battery capacity and battery life need improvement
  • S Pen Support removed
  • Insane camera bump

What makes the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 special? Well, the first thing that always comes to mind when we think of this phone are the design improvements. The Galaxy Z Fold 7 weighs only 215 grams and is only 8.9mm thick when folded. That’s a major improvement over 239 grams and 12.1mm of the Galaxy Z Fold 6. The Fold 6 felt like it was several generations behind the competition, design-wise, that’s not longer the case, not at all. We’d even argue it’s worth upgrading from the Galaxy Z Fold 6 for this reason alone.

Other than that, this phone does offer a really good balance. It has two outstanding 120Hz displays, while it also packs in more than enough power to last your for years. The Snapdragon 8 Elite is here, along with plenty of RAM and storage. The device is also IP48 certified, which is always good to see, especially on a foldable. Granted, its camera performance and battery life could be better, but it’s still a major improvement over its predecessor, and it can compete with basically any foldable out there.

  • Inner Display: 8″ Dynamic LTPO AMOLED 2X, 120Hz
  • Cover Display: 6.5″ Dynamic LTPO AMOLED 2X, 120Hz
  • Brightness: 2,600 nits peak (inner and cover display)
  • Protection: UTG (inner display) / Gorilla Glass Ceramic 2 (cover display)
  • Processor: Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite
  • RAM and Storage: 12GB/16GB RAM ; 256GB/512GB/1TB Storage
  • Cameras: 200MP primary camera at f/1.7, 10MP 3x telephoto at f/2.4, 12MP ultrawide at f/2.2 (120-degree FOV)
  • Battery: 4,400mAh
  • Charging: 25W wired, 15W wireless, 4.5W reverse wireless
  • Colors: Blue Shadow, Silver Shadow, Jet Black, Mint
  • Android Version: Android 16 (One UI 8)
  • Software Support: 7 years of major Android updates
  • AI Software: Gemini, Bixby, Circle to Search, Galaxy AI
  • Camera Score: N/A
  • Camera features: LED flash, Auto-HDR, 8K recording at 30fps, 4K recording at 60fps, HDR10+ recording, 10-bit HDR recording, OIS
  • Battery life Score: 20 hours and 2 minutes
  • Charging time: 1 hour and 16 minutes
Review
Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 Review featured AM AH
star
Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 Ultimate Review: Thinner, Faster, More Expensive
Since Unpacked, you’ve likely heard several times that “Samsung has finally caught up to the Chinese”. And what that means…
by Alexander Maxham Read Full Review
Buy from
Buy from
Buy from
Buy from

Best Small Foldable Smartphone

If book-style foldables are not really your thing, and you prefer flip phone foldables, there are several great options on the market. The Motorola Razr Ultra 2025 is one of them, and arguably the very best flip phone that you can buy on the market at the moment. It’s a completely different form factor compared to book-style foldables.

Motorola Razr Ultra 2025
Rating
star star star star star
$1,299.99
Motorola Razr Ultra 2025 foldable smartphone cover display

Not everyone likes book-style foldables. Some of you just want a regular phone that folds in half basically. That was you get a regular phone, and a tiny phone that you can use. Well, in our opinion, the very best such device on the market, at the moment, is the Motorola Razr Ultra 2025. This is an excellent phone in every way, basically, and unlike the Galaxy Z Flip 7, it allows you to use that cover display to its full potential out of the box. You don’t have to jump through hoops to do it.

The Motorola Razr Ultra 2025 comes with a rather large cover display, a 4-inch panel. That is large in cover display numbers, and that panel is also really good. It’s an OLED display that has a 165Hz refresh rate, just like the main panel on the phone. It also gets quite bright. The main display is great, too, and it gets even brighter than this one at 4,500 nits of peak brightness.

The Snapdragon 8 Elite will make sure the phone runs properly, along with 16GB of LPDDR5X RAM and UFS 4.0 flash storage. Motorola really didn’t skimp out on what matters. A 4,700mAh battery is also included, along with fast wired and wireless charging. Even the camera performance this phone offers is not bad at all, especially with the main camera. Motorola’s processing here is also quite good.

Pros

  • Excellent battery life
  • One of the fastest charging smartphones in the US
  • Unique materials and colors make the Razr Ultra really pop
  • Motorola is still unmatched with its cover display, it’s insanely helpful
  • The crease is mostly gone
  • Finally, true flagship performance out of the Razr Ultra

Cons

  • The Razr is still a bit too tall. It takes some getting used too.
  • New AI button is not needed
  • Don’t expect many software updates, unfortunately

The design and the cover display are the things we think of first when it comes to the Motorola Razr Ultra 2025. The phone looks great, it has a large cover display, and silicon polymer back. That makes it more grippy than its competitors, and it’s actually a pleasure to hold, whether it’s unfolded or not. Motorola did a fantastic job in the design department. The phone is also not too heavy, not at all, it weighs 199 grams.

The cover display is also worth highlighting. It’s not only quite large for what it is, but it supports a 165Hz refresh rate, and it allows you to use all the same apps as on the main display… out of the box. It also gets very bright when you need it to. The main display is great too, while the phone will also charge very fast when you need it to, thanks to 65W wired charging. Wireless charging is also supported, though

  • Display: 7″ & 4″ LTPO AMOLED 165Hz
  • Brightness: 4,500 nits / 3,000 nits peak
  • Protection: Gorilla Glass Ceramic (cover)
  • Processor: Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite
  • RAM and Storage: 16GB RAM ; 512GB/1TB Storage
  • Cameras: 50MP primary camera at f/1.8, 50MP ultrawide at f/2.0
  • Battery: 4,700mAh
  • Charging: 68W wired, 30W wireless, 5W reverse wired
  • Colors: Pantone: Rio Red, Scarab, Mountain Trail, Cabaret
  • Android Version: Android 15
  • Software Support: 3 years of major Android updates
  • AI Software: Gemini, Circle to Search
  • Camera Score: N/A
  • Camera features: Pantone Validated Color and Skin Tones
  • Battery life Score: N/A
  • Charging time: N/A
Review
Motorola razr ultra 2025 review AM AH 23
Motorola Razr Ultra 2025 Ultimate Review: Great Cameras With PANTONE-Validated Precision
Since Motorola first introduced its flip phone in 2019 with the nostalgic “Razr” name, we’ve been waiting for a truly…
by Alexander Maxham Read Full Review
Buy from Motorola
Buy from

Second-Best Small Foldable Smartphone

We had a hard time deciding between the Motorola Razr Ultra 2025 and the Galaxy Z Flip 7 for the best small foldable, so we decided to include both of them on the list. They’re basically standing side-by-side on the throne, even though we gave a small advantage to the Motorola Razr Ultra 2025. The Galaxy Z Flip 7 is an excellent flip phone.

Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7
$1,099.99
Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 foldable smartphone cover display

The Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 was neck-to-neck with the Motorola Razr Ultra 2025 for the best small foldable. We had to make a choice, though. The Galaxy Z Flip 7 is still a great option, though, of course. It may actually suit a lot people better than the Motorola Razr Ultra 2025 simply from the software standpoint, if you’re used to using Samsung’s One UI skin.

The Galaxy Z Flip 7 also has a very nice and large cover display. It fact, it’s even slightly larger than the one on the Motorola Razr Ultra 2025. Both displays on the phone offer a 120Hz refresh rate, and both of them are more than bright enough. The Exynos 2500 fuels the phone, while the device comes with 12GB of RAM.

This smartphone ships with Android 16 out of the box, and comes with a huge software support promise. Samsung is promising 7 years of major Android OS upgrades for the device. A 4,300mAh battery is also a part of the package, while the phone also supports both wired and wireless charging. You’ll find a very fast and reliable fingerprint scanner on the right-hand side of the phone. All in all, the Galaxy Z Flip 7 does have a lot to offer, and it’s also not heavy at all, quite the contrary.

Pros

  • Solid, thin design
  • Larger foldable display
  • Good performance
  • Large, and nice cover display
  • Outstanding software support

Cons

  • Slow charging
  • Cameras could be better

The Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 is one of the best-looking flip phones out there, if not the best-looking one. The bezels around its cover display are immensely thin, as Samsung managed to spread out that display to the max. The phone has two really good displays, and you can make that cover display serve you as well as the main one with some slight tweaking. The Exynos 2500 may not have been as great of a choice as the Snapdragon 8 Elite for this phone, but the chip does perform well, you don’t really have to worry about performance here.

The Galaxy Z Flip 7 is also IP48 certified, which is another positive for the phone. It will give you some piece of mind, that’s for sure. The battery life may not be its strength, but the device does support wired, wireless, and reverse wireless charging. The charging may not be blazing fast, but at least that battery capacity is not huge, so it’ll charge faster than you may think. While its ultrawide camera is kind of forgettable, the performance of the main unit is not bad at all.

  • Display: 6.9” (main) & 4.1” (cover) AMOLED 120Hz
  • Brightness: 2,600 nits peak
  • Protection: Corning Gorilla Glass Victus 2 (cover display)
  • Processor: Samsung Exynos 2500
  • RAM and Storage: 12GB RAM ; 256GB/512GB Storage
  • Cameras: 50MP primary camera at f/1.57, 12MP ultrawide at f/2.2
  • Battery: 4,300mAh
  • Charging: 25W wired, 15W wireless, 4.5W reverse wireless
  • Android Version: Android 16 (One UI 8)
  • Software Support: 7 years of major Android updates
  • AI Software: Gemini, Bixby, Circle to Search, Galaxy AI
  • Camera Score: N/A
  • Camera features: HDR, panorama, 4K at 60 FPS
  • Battery life Score: N/A
Buyers Guide
Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 AH 07
Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7: Ultimate Buyers Guide – October 2025
The Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 was announced by the company on July 9. The event took place in New…
by Kristijan Lucic Read Full Buyers Guide
Buy from
Buy from
Buy from
Buy from

Best Budget Foldable Smartphone

Yes, budget foldable smartphones are a thing these days. Back in the day, that was certainly not the case. Now, you can get a foldable at a rather reasonable price, a current-gen foldable. The Motorola Razr 2025 is our pick for this category. This is also a flip phone, but it’s a rather compelling flip phone at $549.

Motorola Razr 2025
$549
Motorola Razr 2025 foldable smartphone cover display

If you really, really want a foldable, but you’re on a budget, the Motorola Razr 2025 is a great option. This smartphone costs only $549, which is actually quite affordable for a foldable smartphone. The Motorola Razr 2025 is also no slouch. Yes, it is inferior to the Motorola Razr Ultra 2025, obviously, but it’s still a very good smartphone and worth this price tag, that’s for sure.

The Motorola Razr does offer a really nice design. Even though it doesn’t have as thin cover display bezels as the ‘Ultra’ model, and has a smaller display, it still looks very appealing. Its main display is a very nice 120Hz panel, while the cover display has a 90Hz refresh rate. The phone itself is fueled by the MediaTek Dimensity 7400X, which does a fine job. Don’t expect ‘Ultra’ performance, but it does the trick.

Both wired and wireless charging are supported here, too, while the phone is IP48 certified for water and dust resistance. There is also a solid 50-megapixel main camera included. It’s not great, but it’s not bad either, it does the trick. It’s far better than the ultrawide camera that is included here. Motorola had to cut corners somewhere. Its side-facing fingerprint scanner is fast and reliable.

Pros

  • Nice-looking phone
  • Not flagship, but good performance
  • Very good cover display
  • Good photo processing

Cons

  • Plenty of bloatware
  • Software update longevity

The price tag is something that we always think of first when the Motorola Razr 2025 conversation comes knocking. $549 is a very appealing price tag for a foldable smartphone, especially one as solid as the Razr 2025. If you can catch a discount, then it’s an even better deal, of course. This phone offers a really good design and build quality, and it’s one of the grippiest foldable smartphones on the market. Its eco leather backplate has a lot to do with that, that’s for sure.

The device may not have the best displays on the market, but both panels on the device are really, really good. The fact you can use that cover display for basically anything, same as the main panel, is a huge bonus. That’s not something a lot of flip phones can say for themselves. Despite the fact it’s technically a budget device, this phone supports both wired and wireless charging, and has a very fast and reliable fingerprint scanner on its right side.

  • Display: 6.9″ & 3.6″ Foldable LTPO AMOLED 120Hz
  • Brightness: 3,000 nits / 1,700 nits peak
  • Protection: Gorilla Glass Victus (cover)
  • Processor: MediaTek Dimensity 7400X
  • RAM and Storage: 8GB RAM ; 256GB Storage
  • Cameras: 50MP primary camera at f/1.7, 13MP ultrawide at f/2.2
  • Battery: 4,500mAh
  • Charging: 30W wired, 15W wireless
  • Colors: Pantone: Gibraltar Sea, Spring Bud, Lightest Sky, Parfait Pink
  • Android Version: Android 15
  • Software Support: N/A
  • AI Software: Gemini, Circle to Search
  • Camera Score: N/A
  • Camera features: 4K at 30 fps, gyro-EIS
  • Battery life Score: N/A
  • Charging time: 55 minutes
Buyers Guide
Motorola Razr Ultra AM AH
Motorola Razr 2025: Your Ultimate Guide To Motorola's 2025 Flip Phones – October 2025
Motorola’s 2025 Razr lineup is here, and its actually bigger than ever before. In more ways than one. First of…
by Alexander Maxham Read Full Buyers Guide
Buy from Motorola
Buy from

Best Foldable Smartphone for Android Purists

If you simply love Google‘s iteration of Android and don’t want third-party software on top of it, there’s a foldable out there for you, too. We’re talking about the Google Pixel 10 Pro Fold, of course. This is not the best foldable on the market, as it does have several notable drawbacks compared to the competition, but it’s still a very good Pixel smartphone, and it may be ideal for some people.

Google Pixel 10 Pro Fold
Rating
star star star star star_empty star
$1,699
Google Pixel 10 Pro Fold foldable smartphone

The Google Pixel 10 Pro Fold is Google’s best foldable yet, and the only one announced in 2025. This handset is different than most of the book-style competitors. It is thicker and heavier than the Galaxy Z Fold 7, OPPO Find N5, and other competitors in the space. However, it’s not too thick nor too heavy, at least in our opinion. So if you don’t mind the the added thickness and heft, this phone is definitely worth considering.

The phone looks really nice, Google did a fine job in the design department. Google also made some improvements over the Pixel 9 Pro Fold in the design department. The phone has two very compelling 120Hz displays, an 8-inch main panel, and a 6.4-inch cover display. The Google Tensor G5 fuels the device, the latest and greatest chip from the company. Some of the competitors are still more powerful, but this chip is more than enough for this phone. Everything works really, really well.

Google managed to stuff a 5,015mAh battery on the inside of this phone. It could be larger if Google used a silicon-carbon pack, but this is not bad. The Pixel 10 Pro Fold supports 30W wired and 15W wireless charging, while it also supports reverse wired charging. The latest version of Android is included here, while Google promised outstanding software support for the device. Stereo speakers are included as well, and much more.

Pros

  • Good cameras, not the best on a foldable however
  • Bright, readable displays
  • AI features are top-notch
  • Great build quality
  • First foldable with IP68 rating
  • Good battery life for a foldable

Cons

  • Heavier and thicker than the competition
  • Still Expensive
  • No major camera upgrades

The Google Pixel 10 Pro Fold is a book-style foldable, but it’s notably heavier and thicker than most of the competitors. Some of you may actually like that, and consider that a positive. You’re probably in the minority, though. Still, the Pixel 10 Pro Fold feels so good to hold and use. It’s a quality piece of hardware, at least it feels like it.

A major positive for this phone is its IP68 certification. It is the first foldable phone, to our knowledge, to offer such certification. That puts it on the same level as regular smartphones when it comes to water and dust resistance. Needless to say, quite a few of you will appreciate this.

Google also made a huge software update promise here. The Pixel 10 Pro Fold will be getting Android OS updates for the next 7 years. There’s a higher chance that the phone will become obsolete or broke down before you lose software support for it, which is saying a lot.

  • Display: 8″ & 6.4″ Foldable LTPO OLED 120Hz
  • Brightness: 3,000 nits peak
  • Protection: Corning Gorilla Glass Victus 2 (cover)
  • Processor: Google Tensor G5
  • RAM and Storage: 16GB RAM ; 256GB/512GB/1TB Storage
  • Cameras: 48MP primary camera at f/1.7, 10.5MP ultrawide at f/2.2, 10.8 telephoto at f/3.1
  • Battery: 5,015mAh
  • Charging: 30W wired, 15W wireless (Qi2)
  • Colors: Moonstone, Jade
  • Android Version: Android 16
  • Software Support: 7 years of major Android OS updates
  • AI Software: Gemini, Circle to Search
  • Camera Score: N/A
  • Camera features: 4K at 60 fps, gyro-EIS, 10-bit HDR
  • Battery life Score: 16 hours and 49 minutes
  • Charging time: 1 hour and 35 minutes
Review
Google Pixel 10 Pro Fold AM AH 33
Google Pixel 10 Pro Fold Review: The AI-Powered Foldable That Finally Gets It Right (Mostly)
Despite its name, this is only the third-generation foldable for Google. Having started with the Pixel Fold back in 2023,…
by Alexander Maxham Read Full Review
Buy from
Buy from
Buy from

The post Best Foldable Smartphone Ultimate Buying Guide 2025 appeared first on Android Headlines.

OnePlus 15 officially launching on November 13

OnePlus 15 render purple

OnePlus has now announced when the OnePlus 15 will launch in the US. That date is November 13, which was previously leaked, but now we know the official date. That is just a few weeks after the Chinese launch event, which was this past Monday. Shortening the gap quite a bit from the China to Global launch – OPPO recently did the same thing with the Find X9 series.

OnePlus is also releasing a few more details about the OnePlus 15. Including the new DetailMax Engine, which powers the cameras here. OnePlus has decided to go with its DetailMax Engine here instead of continuing with Hasselblad – OPPO has the exclusive on Hasselblad now, apparently.

The company notes that its “Ultra-Clear 26MP mode combines data from the multi-frame 12MP shots with a single 50MP high-resolution frame, producing a final 26MP photo with improved clarity, especially regarding complex textures such as fur, foliage, and fabrics, all in a practical file size ideal for sharing.” That’s just one of the new camera features that OnePlus is debuting this year.

OnePlus says to expect full pricing, specs, and availability announced on November 13 at its global launch event. You can watch on its YouTube channel.

The earliest OnePlus launch event yet

This will mark the earliest launch event for OnePlus yet. Seeing as we had the OnePlus 13 launch in January, and now just 10 months later, the OnePlus 15 is on its way.

While we don’t yet know pricing, we do believe it’ll be priced pretty similarly to the OnePlus 13, which started at $899. OnePlus 15 is shaping up to be a pretty big change for the company, not only in its design philosophy but also in things like the cameras. There do seem to be some downgrades here, even in hardware. But we’ll have to wait til November 13 to know for sure.

The post OnePlus 15 officially launching on November 13 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Phone Comparisons: Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 vs Apple iPhone 15 Pro

Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 vs Apple iPhone 15 Pro AH comparison

This time around, we’re comparing Samsung’s latest “clamshell-like” foldable phone with an Apple classic. The new Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 and the Apple iPhone 15 Pro will go head-to-head. Both the very different form factor of Samsung’s phone and the age (launched in 2023) of the still-powerful iPhone 15 Pro make the clash even more interesting.

Here, we’ll break down exactly what both devices bring to the table. We’ll start with the raw technical specs before moving into the key areas that matter most: design, display, performance, battery life, cameras, and audio output. Let’s jump straight into the full comparison between these two handsets.

Specs

Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 comp box
Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7
$1,219.99 from
Apple iPhone 15 Pro comp box
Apple iPhone 15 Pro
$639 from
Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 Apple iPhone 15 Pro
Dimensions (unfolded/folded) 166.7 x 75.2 x 6.5 mm / 85.5 x 75.2 x 13.7 mm 146.6 x 70.6 x 8.3 mm
Weight 188 grams 187 grams
Main display 6.9-inch Foldable Dynamic LTPO AMOLED 2X (120Hz) 6.1-inch LTPO Super Retina XDR OLED (1-120Hz)
Cover display 4.1-inch Super AMOLED (120Hz) N/A
Resolution 2520 x 1080 / 1048 x 948 1179 x 2556
Chipset Samsung Exynos 2500 Apple A17 Pro
RAM 12GB (LPDDR5X) 8GB
Storage 256GB/512GB (UFS 4.0) 128GB/256GB/512GB/1TB (NVMe)
Main camera 50MP (f/1.8 aperture, 1/1.57-inch sensor size, dual pixel PDAF, OIS) 48MP (f/1.8 aperture, 1/1.28-inch sensor size, 1.22um pixel size, dual pixel PDAF, sensor-shift OIS)
Ultra-wide camera 12MP (f/2.2 aperture, 1/3.2-inch sensor size, 123-degree FoV) 12MP (f/2.2 aperture, 1/2.55-inch sensor size, 120-degree FoV, 1.4um pixel size, dual pixel PDAF)
Telephoto camera N/A 12MP (f/2.8 aperture, 1/3.5-inch sensor size, 1.0um pixel size, dual pixel PDAF, 3x optical zoom)
Periscope telephoto camera N/A
Selfie camera 10MP (f/2.2 aperture, 1/3.0-inch sensor size, 1.22um pixel size) 12MP (f/1.9 aperture, 1/3.6-inch sensor size, PDAF, OIS)
Battery size 4,300mAh 3,274mAh
Charging 25W wired, 15W wireless, 4.5W reverse wireless (charger not included) 20W wired, 15W wireless (MagSafe & Qi2), 7.5W wireless (Qi), 4.5W reverse wired (charger not included)
Colors Blue Shadow, Jet Black, Coral Red Black Titanium, White Titanium, Blue Titanium, Natural Titanium
View Specifications

Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 vs Apple iPhone 15 Pro: Design

Let’s begin by examining the hardware materials. The Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 adopts a sleek construction with a combination of glass and aluminum. Its competitor, the iPhone 15 Pro, achieves a more premium feel by using durable aerospace-grade titanium, complemented by glass. Both manufacturers prioritize a minimalist look with smooth, gently rounded corners. However, the main surfaces—covering the frame, front, and back panels—maintain a largely flat plane. On the front of the Z Flip 7, the inner folding screen features a centered, small hole-punch cutout for the camera. In contrast, the iPhone 15 Pro shows its already classic pill-shaped cutout. In both cases, you will find good optimization work in terms of bezels, being small and symmetrical.

When we look at control placement, the phones handle buttons quite differently. The Galaxy Z Flip 7 has all of its controls neatly along the right side, stacking the volume keys and the power/lock button there. The power button serves a dual function, integrating a fingerprint scanner. The iPhone 15 Pro divides its controls: the power/lock key is on the right edge, but the left side is home to the volume controls, just below the customizable Action Key.

Flipping the devices over reveals the most significant visual contrast. The Galaxy Z Flip 7’s top half rear panel integrates a substantial secondary display. Two horizontal cameras are set cleanly into a corner of this large cover screen. The iPhone 15 Pro uses a more traditional form factor. Apple’s device presents a triple-camera system housed within Apple’s familiar raised, square camera island, located in the top-left corner.

Finally, the physical dimensions show clear variation. When unfolded, the Galaxy Z Flip 7 stands noticeably taller than its rival, though it maintains a narrower and slimmer overall profile. Despite their different forms, their weights are almost identical: the Galaxy Z Flip 7 weighs 188 grams, while the iPhone 15 Pro is just one gram lighter at 187 grams. For water and dust resistance, the Z Flip 7 carries an IP48 certification. The iPhone 15 Pro, however, offers the superior protection of an IP68 rating. Regardless of their distinct high-quality builds, both of these flagship devices tend to feel quite slippery in the hand.

Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 vs Apple iPhone 15 Pro: Display

Unfolding the device reveals the Galaxy Z Flip 7’s notably larger main screen, which extends to 6.9 inches. Samsung built this panel as a Foldable Dynamic LTPO AMOLED 2X. Media consumption is excellent thanks to a smooth 120Hz adaptive refresh rate and HDR10+ support. Its brightness capability is high, achieving a peak of 2,600 nits. The display efficiently maximizes its available area, reaching an approximate 88% screen-to-body ratio. It presents visuals at a sharp 2520 x 1080 resolution, utilizing a tall 21:9 aspect ratio. Furthermore, the phone includes a secondary 4.1-inch cover display. This smaller unit is a Super AMOLED panel that maintains a fixed 120Hz refresh rate (not adaptive) and matches the main screen’s impressive 2,600 nits peak brightness. This exterior screen displays content at a 1048 x 948 resolution and is protected by a layer of Gorilla Glass Victus 2.

Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 AH 20

In contrast, the iPhone 15 Pro features a substantially smaller 6.1-inch screen. This display, an LTPO Super Retina XDR OLED panel, also supports an adaptive refresh rate capping at 120Hz. For superior media quality, Apple includes support for both HDR10 and Dolby Vision standards. While its screen remains very bright, its peak output is slightly lower than its competitor, maxing out at 2,000 nits. The usable screen area is strong, registering a screen-to-body ratio of about 88.2%, and the resolution for content output is 1179 x 2556. The iPhone 15 Pro utilizes a slightly wider 19.5:9 aspect ratio and incorporates Apple’s Ceramic Shield glass for surface protection.

Regarding the overall viewing experience, both devices deliver top-tier performance. You can expect incredibly sharp detail, remarkably vivid colors, and exceptional viewing angles even on the Galaxy Z Flip 7’s cover display. Touch response is instantaneous across the board. Crucially, every display reaches sufficient brightness levels for comfortable use outdoors, and their high refresh rates ensure fluid navigation and seamless motion. A notable improvement on the Galaxy Z Flip 7 is that the crease on its folding panel is significantly less noticeable compared to previous generations.

Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 vs Apple iPhone 15 Pro: Performance

Powering the Galaxy Z Flip 7 is Samsung’s self-developed Exynos 2500 processor. This chip employs an in-house 3nm manufacturing process and gets robust support from 12GB of LPDDR5X RAM. For storage, Samsung relies on the fast UFS 4.0 flash technology. Looking at the competition, the iPhone 15 Pro depends on the mighty Apple A17 Pro chip, which also benefits from a 3nm architecture, but courtesy of TSMC. This powerful processor pairs with 8GB of RAM and uses speedy NVMe flash storage. One key detail to remember is that neither of these flagship models gives users the option of expandable storage.

In day-to-day operation, both flagship devices possess more than enough capability to handle virtually any workload. Of course, this includes even the most resource-intensive applications. The Exynos 2500 is a newer chip, but the Apple A17 Pro definitely stands as a strong competitor. In fact, in benchmarks like Geekbench, Samsung’s SoC falls slightly behind in single-core performance. However, Samsung’s chipset shows dominance in multi-core tasks with up to 30% more performance.

Both chips also integrate powerful GPUs. This translates smoothly into mobile gaming. They easily manage demanding graphical software without encountering major issues, though extended heavy use will naturally cause them to warm up. Crucially, this generated heat does not cause their processing power to dip significantly. Neither phone suffers from performance-killing overheating, meaning they consistently maintain smooth operation even when running the most graphically advanced games available today.

Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 vs Apple iPhone 15 Pro: Battery

Peel back the layers, and you’ll find the Galaxy Z Flip 7 relies on a 4,300mAh battery. That is a notable contrast to the iPhone 15 Pro, which packs a smaller 3,274mAh cell. This size gap is noticeable, although the way Android and iOS manage this capacity differs noticeably—especially when it comes to multitasking capabilities and app background behavior—which allows Apple to get extra juice from smaller batteries. Fair enough, the Z Flip 7’s battery is still on the smaller side compared to many conventional, non-folding Android giants.

So, how do these numbers stack up in the real world? Both phones actually provide decent longevity. However, external tests show that the iPhone 15 Pro has the advantage, offering around 10-12% more battery life. This could differ a lot depending on how you use the Galaxy Z Flip 7, considering its particular form factor. Some might rely more on the cover display than others, for example. But, overall, these are the numbers assuming you always use the inner display (device unfolded for a fair comparison).

When it’s time to plug in and power up, both devices offer very comparable wired speeds. The Galaxy Z Flip 7 supports 25W wired charging, plus it handles 15W wireless and even 4.5W reverse wireless charging. The iPhone 15 Pro, on the other hand, supports up to 20W wired charging, backed up by 15W MagSafe wireless and 4.5W reverse wired charging. The time spent waiting for a full charge is almost identical: the Galaxy Z Flip 7 needs about an hour and a half to hit 100%, while the iPhone 15 Pro can take up to an hour and 40 minutes.

Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 vs Apple iPhone 15 Pro: Cameras

The Galaxy Z Flip 7 features camera hardware built around a dual-sensor arrangement located on the rear. This setup centers on a 50-megapixel primary camera (which uses a 1/1.57-inch sensor). It is assisted by a 12-megapixel ultrawide lens (equipped with a 1/3.2-inch sensor and offering a wide 123-degree field of view). Users often skip the internal selfie camera entirely when shooting portraits. Instead, they prefer to utilize these two high-quality rear sensors, a choice made easy by the phone’s large cover screen.

iphone 15 pro max AM AH 32

In contrast, the iPhone 15 Pro comes with a more complete triple-camera system. Its primary shooter is a robust 48-megapixel sensor (featuring a large 1/1.28-inch sensor size). Additionally, it includes a 12-megapixel ultrawide snapper (with a 1/2.55-inch sensor and a 120-degree field of view). The cherry on top is a 12-megapixel telephoto lens (1/3.5-inch sensor) capable of delivering 3x optical zoom.

When comparing the quality of the final images, both phones achieve very similar results. Apple’s color science makes pictures from the iPhone 15 Pro typically remain closer to real-life color and tone, and the phone consistently delivers reliable output across varied lighting. However, the Galaxy Z Flip 7 produces good camera results with plenty of detail and vibrant colors.

Both devices handle low-light conditions well when relying on their main cameras. That said, the ultrawide cameras on both models struggle more compared to their respective primary lenses. They exhibit a significant resolution gap in the ultrawide lens when compared to the main one (12MP versus 50MP or 48MP). Predictably, the iPhone 15 Pro easily takes the win in any telephoto comparison, given that the Galaxy Z Flip 7 completely lacks this camera.

Audio

Both the Galaxy Z Flip 7 and the iPhone 15 Pro include a stereo speaker setup. While the audio quality remains strong on both flagship phones, the speakers found on the iPhone 15 Pro achieve a higher maximum volume. This shows the importance Apple gives to making its iPhones attractive for enjoying multimedia content even when you don’t have earphones nearby.

However, neither smartphone features the traditional 3.5mm audio jack, a common omission among high-end modern devices. For those who prefer a wired connection, you must rely on the Type-C port that both phones offer for audio output. Shifting to wireless options, the Galaxy Z Flip 7 supports the newer Bluetooth 5.4 standard. In comparison, the iPhone 15 Pro has Bluetooth 5.3.

The post Phone Comparisons: Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 vs Apple iPhone 15 Pro appeared first on Android Headlines.

F-Droid Slams Google for Misleading Users About Android’s App Verification

Android 16 QPR2 Beta 2 logo featured

A major conflict is brewing in the Android ecosystem over the future of app distribution. Google is about to tighten the security check for installing external APKs on Android. However, the company recently assured users that sideloading—the ability to install apps from sources other than the Google Play Store—”isn’t going anywhere.” That said, the alternative app repository F-Droid has publicly challenged that statement, calling Google’s assurances about Android’s upcoming app sideloading verification rules “clear, concise, and false.”

F-Droid Says Google’s promise about Android app sideloading staying is false

The core of the dispute lies in Google’s new developer verification system. This policy requires every app developer worldwide to verify their identity using government documentation and link apps to a registered Google account. F-Droid argues that while this process might technically keep sideloading alive, it fundamentally strips away the freedom and openness of the process.

F-Droid warns that this new requirement effectively puts all independent app developers and alternative stores under Google’s unilateral control. If Google doesn’t approve an app, users won’t be able to install it, regardless of where they obtained the file.

As F-Droid puts it, consumers purchased Android devices believing they were an open computing platform where they could choose their software. Starting next year, an OS update could irrevocably block this right. This will leave users “at the mercy of their judgment over what software you are permitted to trust.”

A name problem and safety concerns

The F-Droid community also takes issue with the very term “sideloading.” They argue that installing software should simply be called “installing,” regardless of the source. They also state that the term “sideloading” was coined to imply the process is inherently risky or sinister.

Google claims the new policy is necessary to enhance security. The company cited an analysis that allegedly found “over 50 times more malware from internet-sideloaded sources than on apps available through Google Play.”

F-Droid counters this security argument by pointing to recent news of large-scale malware campaigns and malicious apps being removed from the Google Play Store itself. They argue that instead, Google should focus on improving its own safeguards.

What this means for users and creators

This policy applies to virtually every Android Certified device globally. We are talking about basically over 95% of the market outside of China. It affects everyone, even those who use competing marketplaces like the Samsung Galaxy Store.

For creators, the promise of Android’s “openness”—a key historical advantage over the iPhone ecosystem—is vanishing. Developers can no longer create and share an app directly with their community without first submitting it for Google’s approval.

F-Droid warns regulators that this system centralizes too much power. It could cede “digital sovereignty” to a single unaccountable corporation. The platform urges both consumers and developers to advocate for keeping the Android ecosystem open to maintain user choice and market competition.

The post F-Droid Slams Google for Misleading Users About Android’s App Verification appeared first on Android Headlines.

Samsung Can’t Decide if the Galaxy S26 Edge Lives or Dies

Exclusive Samsung Galaxy S26 Edge Render Android Headlines 3

It seems like Samsung is not sure whether it should kill off the Galaxy S26 Edge or not. As we are now seeing rumors that the device hasn’t been canceled, and might actually still launch next year. Alongside the Galaxy S26 and Galaxy S26 Ultra.

GalaxyClub has found that Samsung has started developing a new phone under the codename “More Slim” a few months ago. For those wondering, the Galaxy S25 Edge codename was “Slim”. So, potentially, the Galaxy S26 Edge would be even slimmer?

But the most interesting part here is that the device with the codename “More Slim” is not the device that was originally set to be the Galaxy S26 Edge. Development on this started long after the original device that was going to be the Galaxy S26 Edge, which was set to replace the Galaxy S26 Plus.

A bit confusing, but not surprising to see Samsung working on multiple devices here. When it comes to a new phone, companies are typically working on multiple prototypes before they get to a final one. However, with the Galaxy S26 series set to launch in January, Samsung should be getting very close to the final version.

Could Samsung launch the Galaxy S26 Edge later in the year, again?

Samsung might be looking to launch the Galaxy S26 Edge later in the year, similar to the Galaxy S25 Edge this year. How much later, is up for discussion however. I do think that launching it in May was not a good idea for Samsung, as it was just a couple of months after the Galaxy S25 series launched, and it was priced between the Plus and Ultra, while being a downgrade for both.

If Samsung were to launch the Galaxy S26 Edge in the Fall, potentially replacing the Galaxy S25 FE (or Galaxy S26 FE), that might be a better idea. But, it’s likely going to remain an experiment for Samsung next year, as the Galaxy S25 Edge and iPhone Air have both sold very poorly. Showing that consumers don’t want less battery for a thinner device.

The post Samsung Can’t Decide if the Galaxy S26 Edge Lives or Dies appeared first on Android Headlines.

Gboard Adds a Clever Shortcut for Entering Numbers & Symbols

AH Gboard image 38495

Google has just added yet another interesting feature to Gboard app on Android, a new way to enter symbols. You can now flick keys to enter numbers and symbols, basically, which is exactly what this new feature is called.

Gboard now has a new shortcut for entering numbers & symbols

This is essentially a new shortcut for entering symbols. How does it work? Well, it allows you to quickly enter numbers and symbols via a swipe down, which is what the ‘flick’ means in this case.

You can swipe down on Q, W, E, R, T, Y, U, I, O, or P for 1-0, in which case the number in question will briefly replace the letter inside the key in a slide-down animation. It’s a rather subtle animation, though.

It is not enabled by default, though

Now, do note that this is not enabled by default, though. You’ll need to open Gboard settings, and navigate to Preferences -> Shortcuts, and there you’ll see the ‘Flick keys to enter symbols’ option, which you need to enable.

AH Gboard flick keys to enter symbols
format: 0; filter: 0; fileterIntensity: 0.0; filterMask: 0; captureOrientation: 0;?runfunc: 0; algolist: 0;?multi-frame: 1;?brp_mask:0;?brp_del_th:0.0000,0.0000;?brp_del_sen:0.0000,0.0000;?motionR: 0;?delta:1;?bokeh:1;?module: photo;hw-remosaic: false;touch: (-1.0, -1.0);sceneMode: 12582912;cct_value: 0;AI_Scene: (29, 0);aec_lux: 219.0;aec_lux_index: 0;albedo: ;confidence: ;motionLevel: -1;weatherinfo: weather?null, icon:null, weatherInfo:100;temperature: 22;

An explanation on how it works is also included. It simply says “touch a key and pull downward to enter its hinted symbol”, it’s quite straightforward, though it takes some time to get used to. You can accidentally trigger glide typing, if you have it enabled. I got used to it pretty fast, though.

Just to be clear, this is a part of the latest stable release of Gboard. It may be a server-side change, though, so even if you have the Gboard 16.2 installed, you may have to be patient to get it. We’re not sure at this point, but we do have the option.

It’s actually quite useful

This is another useful addition by Google. I got used to it pretty fast, and it does make typing more enjoyable for entering symbols, I have to admit. Not that touch&hold option is bad, but this just seems more natural somehow, at least to yours truly.

As a reminder, Google also added a font slider to Gboard not long ago, which is another useful feature, especially if you find the font on the keyboard itself to be too small.

The post Gboard Adds a Clever Shortcut for Entering Numbers & Symbols appeared first on Android Headlines.

Watch Ulefone Unbox Its Rugged Armor Pad 5 Ultra — and Win One for Free

Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra Unboxing

The Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra is the company’s new rugged flagship tablet with a built-in projector. Well, if you’re wondering what you’re getting in the package, the company has filmed an unboxing experience, which you can now watch.

Watch the unboxing of the Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra

The video itself has a duration of less than a minute, and yet it shows you everything you need to see. It’s nicely packaged, and also embedded below.

Ulefone will ship you a very nice box, a playful box. Inside, you’ll find the tablet itself, a handle stand, a 120W charger, and a charging cable. In addition to that, a screwdriver is included, along with screws, and a SIM card ejector tool. Plus, of course, paperwork.

This video will also show you the tablet’s UI, well, a part of it, along with how you can easily attach the handle stand. At the very end, the company also shows the tablet in action… as a projector.

It has a built-in projector

This project offers brightness of up to 200LM, and it can project an image in a resolution of 960 x 540. It supports both auto and manual focus, and has a dedicated physical key. There are also dual versatile LED lights included, with a total of 754 LEDs. Dual Warning Lights are also a part of the package.

The Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra includes a 24,200mAh battery and supports 120W charging. The MediaTek Dimensity 7400X fuels this tablet, while you’re also getting 12GB of RAM here. You can expand the device’s storage, while it comes with 512GB out of the box.

A 64-megapixel main camera is backed by a 64-megapixel IR Night Vision camera. 5G is supported here, and the same goes for Wi-Fi 6E and Bluetooth 5.4. Android 15 comes out of the box.

You can win one for free

The Ulefone Armor Pad 5 series will see its premiere sale on November 11 on AliExpress, Amazon, and the official Ulefone store. The company has also organized a giveaway for the tablet.

Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra (1)
Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra (2)
Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra (3)
Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra (4)
Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra (5)
Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra Giveaway
Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra Unboxing
Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra (1)
Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra (2)
Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra (3)
Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra (4)
Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra (5)
Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra Giveaway
Ulefone Armor Pad 5 Ultra Unboxing

The post Watch Ulefone Unbox Its Rugged Armor Pad 5 Ultra — and Win One for Free appeared first on Android Headlines.

Older Pixel Phones Have a Weird UWB Tracking Limitation

Google Pixel 7 Pro AM AH1

Google added UWB to its Pixel lineup in 2021, starting with the Pixel 6 Pro. While this is a wise move to anticipate the advancements in technology, it seems there are certain limitations. It appears that the specific UWB implementation in older Pixel phones doesn’t support precision finding. This prevents them from using trackers like Moto Tag, like their recent counterparts. 

UWB precision finding is not available on older Pixel phones

Android Authority has spotted a post on the Pixel support forums from a user complaining that their Pixel 7 Pro can’t use precision finding with their Moto Tag. This is despite being on the latest firmware. Moto Tag is currently the only UWB-equipped tracker that works with Android. It allows you to precisely pinpoint its location from the Find Hub app.

A Google product expert clarified, with a support page link, that UWB precision finding is only available on the Pixel 8 series and above (Pro models only). This confirms that the Pixel 6 Pro and Pixel 7 Pro don’t support precision finding despite having UWB. Google later confirmed the same to Android Authority as well. However, neither the support page nor Google explains why the feature isn’t available on older Pixels.

Google hasn’t clarified the reason behind the limitation

Though the report initially assumes that the reason for this limitation could be that both phones lacked support for determining the angle-of-arrival (AoA) of a UWB signal. This is a feature that allows a device to determine the signal’s direction. However, on checking the UWB capabilities of both phones using Android’s UWB API, Mishaal from Android Authority found that only the Pixel 6 Pro “lacks part of this feature.”

The only UWB feature that the older Pixels lack is background ranging support. This allows an app to use UWB while in the background, but it’s not clear why it would be necessary for precision finding when the Find Hub app is in the foreground while tracking. It’s possible there could be some other explanation for this feature’s omission.

Pixel 6 Pro UWB capabilities
Pixel 7 Pro UWB capabilities

The post Older Pixel Phones Have a Weird UWB Tracking Limitation appeared first on Android Headlines.

Google Brings Gemini to Your Smart Home — Early Access Users Get It First

00 Google Home Logo Pixel DG AH 2022

The next major evolution of smart home devices is here. After testing it for months, Google has officially started the early access rollout of Gemini for Home in the US, bringing a powerful AI upgrade to Google Home devices. With this update, the home device adopts a more advanced Gemini AI as an assistant, replacing the traditional Google Assistant.

Gemini for Home is now available for the enrolled early access program users

Google began testing Gemini for Home in early October by inviting select users to try it. Now, the update is rolling out in early access for enrolled US users. The global stable release of the update is expected to take place in early 2026. Those enrolled in the program will automatically be upgraded from Google Assistant to Gemini.

Gemini, as a voice assistant, is noticeably more capable and natural in terms of conversation. Users will be able to access Gemini through their existing Google speakers and displays simply by saying “Hey Google.” It is compatible with the following devices:

  • Google Nest Hub (1st & 2nd gen)
  • Google Nest Hub Max
  • Google Nest Audio
  • Google Nest Mini (1st & 2nd gen)
  • Google Home and Home Max
  • Google Nest Wi-Fi Point

Gemini brings smarter control for Home devices

As the Gemini is now integrated into Home devices, users will now be able to do much more than just control lights or play music. The AI-powered assistant can now answer more complex questions, help with learning, and even offer lifestyle advice. For example, you can ask: “Hey Google, how can I improve water pressure in my shower?” or “OK Google, what should I eat before a 5K run?”

Furthermore, please note that the feature is currently being rolled out to users already enrolled in the early access program. Stable users in the US may receive the update by the end of the year, whereas the global rollout is expected to begin in 2026. Once global access expands, setting up and managing your smart home devices will likely become simpler than ever.

The post Google Brings Gemini to Your Smart Home — Early Access Users Get It First appeared first on Android Headlines.

Motorola Edge 70 Surfaces With 5.99mm Body & 50MP Camera

Motorola Edge 70 featured image leak

The Motorola Edge 70 is on its way, as more images of the phone have surfaced. Two new images of the device have appeared, along with the EU Energy label as well. Some specs have been confirmed as a result.

Before we get into it, it’s worth noting that the Motorola Moto X70 Air has already launched. Why is that important? Well, the Moto X70 Air is essentially the same phone as the Motorola Edge 70, but for the Chinese market.

The Motorola Edge 70 has just surfaced again in several images, along with some of its specs

With that being said, if you check out the gallery below, you’ll see the two new images that appeared. Both of these phones have green-ish colors, and they’ll allegedly be claled Pantone Bronze Green and Pantone Lily Pad.

Motorola Edge 70 render leak 1
Motorola Edge 70 render leak 2
Motorola Edge 70 render leak 1
Motorola Edge 70 render leak 2

On the screens of both phones, some specs are mentioned. A 4,800mAh silicon-carbon battery will be included in this ultra-slim phone. 68W wired charging will be supported, while the phone will be 5.99mm thick. It will weigh 159 grams and include a 50-megapixel main camera.

That’s pretty much all the spec information confirmed here. You can also see that the phone will have a flat display with a centered display camera hole up top. It will also have a mostly flat back and a raised camera island in the top-left corner. Three camreas will sit up there, by the way.

Its EU Energy lable confirms IP68 certification

The EU Energy label doesn’t really reveal much, but it does confirm that the phone will be IP68 certified for water and dust resistance. It will also have an A rating for drop protection, and a B rating for ease of serviceability. An A rating for battery life is also mentioned.

Motorola Edge 70 EU Energy label

The Motorola Edge 70 will become official on November 5, that much has been confirmed. It will launch in Europe first, it would seem, and it’s expected to cost around €700. It remains to be seen if there will be some minor changes compared to the Moto X70 Air.

The post Motorola Edge 70 Surfaces With 5.99mm Body & 50MP Camera appeared first on Android Headlines.

Google’s Canceled Project Ara Just Resurfaced — And It’s Still Wild a Decade Later

project ara leak 4

About a decade ago, many of us tech geeks were very excited for a new project that Google was working on, with Motorola (before Google sold Motorola off to Lenovo, and spun off Motorola Solutions). And that was Project Ara.

This project was shown off at Google I/O, in fact, I vividly remember sitting in a session about Project Ara at Moscone West in San Francisco – before Google moved it to Mountain View. It was a pretty cool concept. Where it would let you hot-swap different components like cameras, batteries, speakers, and much more.

The device was being beta tested back in 2014, but ended up getting delayed before Google decided to shelve it entirely.

Now, we’re seeing some prototypes pop up from 2014 and Project Ara, to show us what Google was actually working on.

TikToker posts prototypes of Project Ara, a decade later

A decade after the project was shelved, a TikToker by the name of Racoondetecionsquad ended up with three Project Ara prototypes and several modules for these prototypes.

He also has a video showing the process of removing the modules and popping in a new one. Another module has a switch of some kind included. These modules are definitely different from the ones that had leaked in 2016, it’s likely that this could have been a later prototype as well.

This definitely would not work in today’s smartphone world, as companies want you to buy new phones every few years – that’s mostly how they make their money. And being able to replace batteries, cameras, and other components with ease, would not be great for their bottom line. Still, Project Ara was a really cool pipedream that would have been cool if it came to fruition.

project ara leak 8
project ara leak 7
project ara leak 6
project ara leak 5
project ara leak 4
project ara leak 3
project ara leak 2
project ara leak 1
project ara leak 8
project ara leak 7
project ara leak 6
project ara leak 5
project ara leak 4
project ara leak 3
project ara leak 2
project ara leak 1

The post Google’s Canceled Project Ara Just Resurfaced — And It’s Still Wild a Decade Later appeared first on Android Headlines.

Samsung’s ‘More Slim’ phone hints the Galaxy S26 Edge isn’t dead

Samsung Galaxy S26 Edge seems to still be under development. In a recent development, it came to light that the company has been working on a “More Slim” project, which aligns with the Galaxy S26 Edge, a successor to the S25 Edge.

For a few months, Samsung has been working on the “More Slim” project. This codename fits well with the S26 Edge, as the company has internally used the “Slim” codename for its first slim phone, called the Galaxy S25 Edge.

Recently, Korean media revealed that the Galaxy S26 Edge isn’t coming. Samsung has reportedly canceled the Edge lineup due to sluggish sales. However, the company doesn’t seem to have completely scrapped Edge plans.

As the “More Slim” project is in the pipeline, we could see the Galaxy S26 Edge sometime in 2026. Samsung may consider a separate launch for its next slim smartphone, similar to its strategy with the Galaxy S25 series this year.

The Unpacked may be held to reveal the Galaxy S26, S26 Plus, and S26 Ultra. The S26 Pro is indeed coming, but without the Pro tag. The company is also rumored to be testing a secondary S26 prototype with a brand-new camera setup.

GalaxyClub highlighted that the work on the “More Slim” project has started “significantly later” than the phone rumored as the S26 Edge. It’s also possible that Samsung is doing it intentionally to avoid device leaks.

Apple’s iPhone Air is a little slimmer than the Galaxy S25 Edge. Other rivals are also bringing their slimmer phones, such as Motorola and Huawei, so Samsung has to present an incredibly thin yet powerful device in 2026.

It also remains to be seen whether Samsung continues the Edge lineup or bring the next slim phone with a brand-new identity or naming scheme.

Samsung Galaxy S26 Edge render

Image via Android Headline

The post Samsung’s ‘More Slim’ phone hints the Galaxy S26 Edge isn’t dead appeared first on Sammy Fans.

Nvidia to invest $1 billion in Nokia to enhance AI-powered connection and 6G innovation

Nvidia will invest $1 billion in Nokia, gaining a 2.9% stake to support the development of AI-based networking and 6G technologies. The partnership focuses on integrating Nvidia’s AI systems into Nokia’s radio and data center infrastructure to create more adaptive networks. T-Mobile will also help test the new AI-RAN technology, with early trials expected next year.

iOS 26.1 RC is out, final version should be close now

Apple has begun seeding its iOS 26.1 Release Candidate (RC) version. This version is available for developers and public beta testers and comes just over a week after the iOS 26.1 beta 4 release. Apple is expanding Apple Intelligence support to an additional eight languages, including Danish, Dutch, Norwegian, Portuguese (Portugal), Swedish, Turkish, Chinese (Traditional), and Vietnamese. The RC release also fixes several bugs, including unexpected falls asleep while using lock screen apps like Calculator, Timer and Notes. AirDrop enhancements alongside smoother animations and...

Motorola Edge 70 launched as the global version of X70 Air

In a move that's as close to an official announcement as it gets, Motorola has listed the Edge 70 on its official Polish and German websites, along with the phone's full specifications. The Motorola Edge 70 is the global variant of the China-locked ultrathin Motorola X70 Air, but it wasn't yet clear whether it will share its exact specs. It seemingly is now. The Edge 70 comes in three Pantone-branded colors - Gadget Grey, Lilly pad, and Bronze Green. All three colors come with a unique nylon-textured finish on the back of the phone, the frame is an aircraft-grade aluminum, and the front...

PNY’s New SSD Delivers Blazing Speeds Without the Crazy Price Tag

pny cs3250 ssd 1

In the past, buying an SSD for your PC meant spending a lot of money. Granted, the benefits of an SSD are huge over regular HDDs, but the price-to-performance ratio was a little too expensive for the average user. These days, SSDs have become a lot more affordable. In fact, PNY unveiled its brand new CS3250 SSD. This is an M.2 NVMe PCIe Gen5 x4 SSD that’s built for gamers, AI developers, and content creators who need performance but don’t want to pay a premium.

PNY CS3250 SSD, built for speed

The PNY CS3250 SSD uses the PCIe Gen5 interface and fits the standard M.2 2280 form factor. This makes it compatible with most modern desktops and laptops. The company is selling the SSD in both 1TB and 2TB capacities. If you need even more space, the company says a 4TB model is coming soon).

The SSD features advanced thermal control to prevent overheating during intensive workloads. The thermal-coated controller keeps performance steady. This is helpful if you’re looking to render 4K video or training AI models, basically activities that might require a lot of read/write functionality.

In terms of read and write speeds, the 1TB model delivers write speeds up to 13,500 MB/s, while the 2TB version maxes out at 14,000 MB/s. Last but not least, customers can expect a 5-year limited warranty and an impressive 1.5 million hour MTBF rating.

Should You Buy It?

The PNY CS3250 SSD starts at $125.99 for 1TB and $219.99 for 2TB. The price alone positions it competitively against other similar SSDs. For AI development, AAA gaming, and professional content creation, those speeds translate to faster load times and seamless multitasking. However, you have to ask yourself, do you actually need Gen5 speeds?

If you’re someone who works with large datasets, editing 8K footage, or running AI training models, the CS3250 makes sense. Gamers who play games that are DirectStorage will experience faster asset streaming and reduced stuttering. Content creators who edit videos with multiple 4K timelines will probably appreciate the snappier performance as well. But if you’re a casual user who browses the web and streams videos, a Gen4 drive will save you money. You might not even notice the difference in performance.

But if you’re building a new PC and want to futureproof it with an SSD that won’t drain your bank account, the PNY CS3250 might be a good choice

pny cs3250 ssd 6
pny cs3250 ssd 5
pny cs3250 ssd 4
pny cs3250 ssd 3
pny cs3250 ssd 2
pny cs3250 ssd 1
pny cs3250 ssd 6
pny cs3250 ssd 5
pny cs3250 ssd 4
pny cs3250 ssd 3
pny cs3250 ssd 2
pny cs3250 ssd 1

The post PNY’s New SSD Delivers Blazing Speeds Without the Crazy Price Tag appeared first on Android Headlines.

Galaxy Buds 3 Pro See a Rare Price Drop for Prime Big Deal Days

Samsung Galaxy Buds 3 Pro AM AH 1
Editor's Choice
Samsung Galaxy Buds 3 Pro

Samsung Galaxy Buds 3 Pro – $165

The Galaxy Buds 3 Pro, announced in July 2024, are the latest and greatest earbuds from Samsung. Complete with Galaxy AI, and the most comfortable fit you’ll ever experience.

Buy from

Samsung has dropped the price of the Galaxy Buds 3 Pro to just $165. That is not an all-time low; in fact, it’s about $15 away from it. But this is the lowest price we’ve seen in quite a few months. So if you’ve been waiting to get a pair, now is the time to grab one.

Samsung talks a lot about the AI inside the Galaxy Buds 3 Pro, but honestly, that’s not really a selling feature. The audio quality and comfort are. These are not audiophile earbuds, but they do sound quite good for Bluetooth earbuds. In fact, they are some of the better-sounding earbuds I’ve used recently.

Then there’s the fit, which is super comfortable to wear. I’ve been able to wear these for hours on end without any issues or ear fatigue. That’s not something I can say about a lot of other earbuds, unfortunately.

As you might expect, these work great in the Samsung ecosystem, but since they are Bluetooth, they will work with virtually any other phone or tablet.

Battery life is also quite impressive here; we’re looking at six hours of continuous playback, which is an increase over the Galaxy Buds 2 Pro’s five hours. It also offers up to 26 hours with the included charging case. These are IP57, making them great for use when working out, too.

The post Galaxy Buds 3 Pro See a Rare Price Drop for Prime Big Deal Days appeared first on Android Headlines.

X Users Have Until November 10 to Re-Enroll Their Security Keys — Or Lose Access

X Twitter Logo AH

Popular social media platform, Twitter, saw a change in branding to ‘X’ in 2023 after the billionaire entrepreneur, Elon Musk, took over. The social network’s core systems were fully transitioned to X.com last year, leaving no trace of the bird logo. The platform is now moving a step closer to completely retiring Twitter. If you’re a former Twitter user who’s still using X and uses hardware security keys for your two-factor authentication (2FA) method, you need to re-enroll them before November 10th.

X users need to re-enroll security keys

X’s Safety account notified users of the deadline in a post last week, as spotted by The Verge. Re-enrolling your security keys will associate them with the X domain, allowing the company to retire the Twitter domain eventually. If you enroll a new security key, any other security keys will no longer work, the Safety account clarified. You will receive a prompt automatically if this relates to you.

By November 10, we’re asking all accounts that use a security key as their two-factor authentication (2FA) method to re-enroll their key to continue accessing X. You can re-enroll your existing security key, or enroll a new one. A reminder: if you enroll a new security key, any other security keys will stop working (unless also re-enrolled),” the account said.

The change doesn’t apply to 2FA authenticator apps

The tech giant clarified that the change only applies to YubiKeys and passkeys, and not 2FA authenticator apps. Failing to re-enroll their affected keys before the deadline (November 10th) will have repercussions. You won’t have access to your account until you either complete the re-enrollment process or choose a different 2FA method. You can also decide not to use 2FA altogether, but X advises against it.

The process of re-enrolling your hardware key or adding a new one is quite simple. Head to Settings in the X app, then click Security and account access and Manage Passkeys within the Security section.

The post X Users Have Until November 10 to Re-Enroll Their Security Keys — Or Lose Access appeared first on Android Headlines.

Samsung Galaxy S26 Series May Not Get a Price Hike — Here’s Why

Samsung Galaxy S26 Ultra CAD based render AH exclusive (1)

We finally have some good news when it comes to the Samsung Galaxy S26 series, they may not be more expensive than their predecessors. While many other companies raised prices for their flagship phones, Samsung may not do it with the Galaxy S26 series.

The Galaxy S26 series phones may not get a price hike, unlike the competition

The information comes from a South Korean publication, Newdaily, which claims that Samsung is not under pressure to bump prices. Why? Samsung makes its own memory for smartphones. So, even though DRAM prices are expected to jump up 30% in Q4, that won’t affect Samsung as much.

On top of that, the Exynos 2600 chip is tipped to fuel at least half devices from the Galaxy S26 seires. The Exynos 2600 is Samsung’s very own processor, so that will cushion the blow as well.

In other words, Samsung’s lack of reliance on external manufacturers could help the company keep the prices of the Galaxy S26 phones in check. An industry insider said: “Samsung may be able to maintain prices in the short term thanks to its vertical integration structure and inventory security.”

Recently, another publication, Hankyung, said that Samsung is considering raising prices. Well, Newdaily disagrees, obviously. The publication also added that solid sales of the Galaxy S25 are another reason why Samsung will keep prices unchanged.

The three devices are coming in Q1 next year, but the may arrive later than expected

The Samsung Galaxy S26 series was expected to arrive in January next year. Recent reports are saying that Samsung will postone the launch of the devices, though. Late February or early March are mentioned as launch timeframes.

Samsung is allegedly making some last-minute changes, and/or is having problems ensuring enough Exynos 2600 chips to use with these phones. Either way, the launch could be later than we expected.

The post Samsung Galaxy S26 Series May Not Get a Price Hike — Here’s Why appeared first on Android Headlines.

History of OnePlus Flagship Smartphones – 2025

OnePlus 15 official image 103

OnePlus is a relatively young company compared to a number of other mobile tech giants in the market, but this China-based company managed to rise extremely fast thanks to releasing extremely compelling flagship-grade smartphones at affordable price tags. The company has been using the “Never Settle” motto from the start. It has managed to sell quite a few devices to date and establish itself as one of the best smartphone manufacturers in the market.

The company’s first smartphone, the OnePlus One made quite a splash in the tech community. OnePlus wasn’t exactly all that well-known back there, but all of that changed over the years. The company’s initial practice of invite-only purchases also changed. Such practice was in place due to low smartphone stock. If you’d like to take a trip down memory lane, read on. In this article we’ll take a look at OnePlus’ flagship smartphones one by one, starting with the OnePlus One. It is also worth noting that this article will be updated as new OnePlus flagship phones arrive.

OnePlus One

The OnePlus One is the company’s very first smartphone, and it was referred to as the “Flagship Killer” back when it launched, mainly due to its flagship-grade specs and qualities, and not a huge price tag. This smartphone was announced back in April 2014, and it was priced at $299 and $349 for 16GB and 64GB storage variants. The OnePlus One came with a Sandstone back, and it shipped with a commercial variant of CyanogenMod on it, CyanogenOS, which ran on top of Android 4.4.2 KitKat.

This smartphone features a 5.5-inch fullHD display, along with 3GB of RAM and 16GB / 64GB of storage. The phone is fueled by the Snapdragon 801 quad-core processor, while it sports a single 13-megapixel camera on the back. A 5-megapixel unit is included on the phone’s front side. A 3,100mAh battery is also a part of the package. The phone does sport a 3.5mm headphone jack, in case you were wondering.

OnePlus 2

The OnePlus 2 arrived in July of 2015, while it was released in August that same year. That handset does resemble the OnePlus One to a degree, but it features a fingerprint scanner below its display. That fingerprint scanner is flanked by two capacitive keys, which are customizable. The phone still includes a single camera on the back, and the Sandstone material made a comeback here.

The OnePlus 2 shipped with Android 5.1 Lollipop and OnePlus’ OxygenOS skin on top of it. This happened because OnePlus and Cyanogen decided to terminate their cooperation. Luckily for OnePlus, OxygenOS ended up being a truly compelling skin for Android. It’s a close-to-stock one with a number of useful additions. The OnePlus 2 features a 5.5-inch fullHD display, 3GB / 4GB of RAM and 16GB / 64GB of storage. The phone is fueled by the Snapdragon 810 SoC, while it ships with a 3,300mAh battery.

OnePlus 3

The OnePlus 3 was the very first OnePlus-branded phone to sport a metal unibody build, and the phone was announced in June 2016. The device sports a single camera on the back, which does protrude a bit. A front-facing fingerprint scanner made a comeback here, along with capacitive buttons that flank it. The OnePlus 3 ships with Android 6.0.1 Marshmallow out of the box, with OnePlus’ custom UI.

The device retained a 5.5-inch fullHD display size from the OnePlus 2, but unlike the OnePlus 2, this phone came with an OLED panel, and Optic AMOLED display, to be exact, which made it the first OnePlus flagship to include an OLED panel. The OnePlus 3 also shipped with 6GB of RAM and 64GB of non-expandable storage. It features a 16-megapixel camera on the back and is fueled by the Snapdragon 820. A 3,000mAh battery is included in this package, as are two SIM card slots (2x nano SIM).

OnePlus 3T

The OnePlus 3T looked the same as the OnePlus 3, save for a new color variant that was available, and it was announced in November 2016. This was the first time OnePlus released a “T” variant of a smartphone. The OnePlus 3T did bring some improvements over the OnePlus 3, including a more powerful processor (the Snapdragon 821), a larger battery, and several other improvements.

Other than that, this phone is the same as the OnePlus 3 in the spec department as well. The phone features the same display, same RAM count, same software, same camera setups, and so on. The phone ended up being quite successful for OnePlus, though, so the company opted to continue releasing two flagship smartphones per year. These were usually iterative improvements over the main phone.

OnePlus 5

The OnePlus 5 was announced in June 2017, and it looks similar to its predecessor from the front, though the whole phone is somewhat different in terms of the design. The OnePlus 5 sports a front-facing fingerprint scanner with two capacitive navigation buttons on each side of that scanner. The device also ships with two horizontally aligned rear-facing cameras. This is the first OnePlus-branded handset to sport two rear-facing cameras.

The OnePlus 5 is made out of metal, and it features a 5.5-inch fullHD Optic AMOLED display. The device is fueled by the Snapdragon 835 64-bit octa-core processor, while it arrived in 6GB and 8GB RAM variants. Those two variants pack in 64GB and 128GB of storage, respectively. Android 7.1.1 Nougat comes pre-installed on the device, along with the company’s OxygenOS Android overlay.

OnePlus 5T

The OnePlus 5T was announced in November 2017, and it sported a similar design to the OnePlus 5, but it looked quite different on the front. The in-hand feel between these two phones was quite similar due to a similar shape and everything. The OnePlus 5T, on the other hand, offered considerably thinner bezels. Also, instead of a front-facing fingerprint scanner, it included a rear-facing fingerprint scanner. Other than the fingerprint scanner, the back side of this phone looked identical to the OnePlus 5.

The OnePlus 5T includes the very same processor that was utilized in the OnePlus 5, the Snapdragon 835, while the phone also comes in 6GB and 8GB RAM variants, with the same storage setups as the OnePlus 5. A 3,300mAh battery is included on the inside of this phone, while the device ships with Android 7.1.1 Nougat out of the box. The OnePlus 5T does include a 3.5mm headphone jack, just like its predecessors.

OnePlus 6

The OnePlus 6 arrived in May 2018 with even thinner bezels than the OnePlus 5T, but unlike the OnePlus 5T, this phone includes a rather noticeable display notch. The OnePlus 6 is the first OnePlus flagship to be made out of metal and glass (the OnePlus X was not a flagship-grade phone), and it includes two vertically aligned cameras on its back. Those two cameras are centered, and right below them, a fingerprint scanner is located.

The OnePlus 6 features a 6.28-inch fullHD+ display, 6GB / 8GB of RAM, and 64GB / 128GB / 256GB of storage. The phone is fueled by the Snapdragon 845 64-bit octa-core processor, and a 3,300mAh battery is included on the inside. Android 8.1 Oreo comes pre-installed on this device, and the OnePlus 6 also sports a 3.5mm headphone jack, which remains unchanged compared to its predecessor.

OnePlus 6T

OnePlus 6T was announced in October 2018, only five months after the OnePlus 6, and it offers an extremely similar design to the OnePlus 6. The only two differences come in the form of a new display notch, and the design of the OnePlus 6T’s back. The OnePlus 6T includes a much smaller, teardrop notch on the front, while a fingerprint scanner is not located on the back of the device, like on the OnePlus 6, it is located underneath the phone’s display. The OnePlus 6T ships with an optical in-display fingerprint scanner.

Other than those differences, the design of this phone remains pretty much the same as on the OnePlus 6. The OnePlus 6T includes a larger 6.41-inch fullHD+ display, though, while it arrived in 6GB / 8GB / 12GB RAM variants, the 12GB RAM model is reserved for a special edition variant of the OnePlus 6T. The OnePlus 6T also arrived with a noticeably larger battery than the OnePlus 6, a 3,700mAh unit. The device ships with Android 9 Pie out of the box.

OnePlus 7 & 7 Pro

The OnePlus 7 series was announced in May 2019, the company introduced two smartphones, the OnePlus 7 and OnePlus 7 Pro. The OnePlus 7 Pro is the more premium of the two phones, even though the two devices do share some specifications. Both devices are made out of metal and glass, though their design is considerably different overall, as OnePlus opted for a different approach in these two cases.

The OnePlus 7 Pro features no bezels or display holes, unlike the OnePlus 7, which sports a waterdrop notch. The device features a pop-up selfie camera instead of the notch, and it also comes with a curved display. The OnePlus 7 Pro is the larger of the two phones, and it sports three cameras on the back, compared to the OnePlus 7’s two rear-facing units. Neither of the two phones offer a 3.5mm headphone jack, but they do offer stereo speakers.

Both devices are fueled by the Snapdragon 855 64-bit octa-core processor, and both ship with UFS 3.0 flash storage. Android 9 Pie comes pre-installed on both devices, along with OnePlus’ OxygenOS 9.5. The OnePlus 7 Pro’s display also offers higher resolution, a 90Hz refresh rate, and it is HDR10+ certified, not to mention that it offers faster charging. Neither of the two phones are IP certified, nor do they offer wireless charging.

OnePlus 7T & 7T Pro

OnePlus 7T and 7T Pro render

The OnePlus 7T was announced in September 2019. The phone arrived as an upgraded variant of the OnePlus 7, and this may be the most notable change a T series phone brought to the table. The OnePlus 7T comes with an upgraded processor, display, charging, and cameras, compared to its predecessor. The OnePlus 7T is made out of metal and glass, and it features a waterdrop display notch, in addition to a camera oreo.

The device features a 6.55-inch fullHD+ Fluid AMOLED display with a 90Hz refresh rate. The Snapdragon 855 Plus fuels this handset, while a 3,800mAh battery is included on the inside. Warp Charge 30T is also a part of the package and is 23 percent faster than Warp Charge 30. The device includes 8GB of RAM and comes in 128GB and 256GB storage variants (UFS 3.0). 48, 12, and 16-megapixel cameras are placed on its back, while Android 10 comes out of the box.

OnePlus 8 & 8 Pro

OnePlus 8 and 8 Pro render

The OnePlus 8 and 8 Pro were announced in April 2020. Needless to say, the OnePlus 8 Pro was the more premium of the two. Both devices were flagship-grade smartphones, though, and both were fueled by the Snapdragon 865 SoC, Qualcomm’s best processor at the time. The two devices also looked quite similar, but the OnePlus 8 Pro was larger and had a different-looking rear camera setup.

Unlike the OnePlus 7 Pro, the OnePlus 8 Pro did not have a pop-up selfie camera. OnePlus opted to include a display camera hole instead. That move removed moving parts inside the device, but it left the phone with a noticeable hole in the display. The OnePlus 8 Pro was also the very first OnePlus-branded smartphone to offer wireless charging and an official IP68 certification for water and dust resistance. Android 10 shipped out of the box on these two smartphones, along with OxygenOS 10.

OnePlus 8T

OnePlus 8T render 1

The OnePlus 8T was announced in October 2020. This time around, OnePlus opted to announce only one T series smartphone. A year before that, the OnePlus 7T and 7T Pro were launched. This is actually a good move by the company. Why? Well, for the most part, there was no need for two 7T variants. The OnePlus 8T was a half-cycle upgrade. It came with the same processor as the OnePlus 8 and 8 Pro.

This phone did come with a flat display, unlike its siblings. It also delivered faster charging than the two devices that came before it. The OnePlus 8T was the first smartphone from the company to offer 65W fast charging. Do note that we’re talking about wired charging here. The OnePlus 8T did not support wireless charging. The phone included four cameras on the back, with the same sensor that was included in the OnePlus 8.

OnePlus 9 & 9 Pro

AH OnePlus 9 and 9 Pro back renders

The OnePlus 9 series was announced in March 2021. The company announced two flagship smartphones during that event, while also showing off its first-ever smartwatch. In addition to that, the OnePlus 9R was announced, but not for global markets. Having said that, the OnePlus 9 and 9 Pro arrived as the first smartphones to feature Hasselblad branding on them. OnePlus agreed on a 3-year partnership with a renowned camera company.

The OnePlus 9 has a flat display this time around, combined with a plastic frame, and glass back. The OnePlus 9 Pro is made out of metal and glass and has a curved display. The ‘Pro’ variant does come with a better display, a QHD+ LTPO panel, though the OnePlus 9 can compete. It also includes a better camera system, on paper. Both phones support 65W fast wired charging. The OnePlus 9 Pro offers 50W wireless charging, while the regular model launched with 15W wireless charging. The Snapdragon 888 was included to fuel both of these phones.

OnePlus 10 Pro

OnePlus 10 Pro green image 11

The OnePlus 10 Pro was announced in January 2022, in China. The global variant of this smartphone arrived at the end of March. It’s interesting that the ‘Pro’ model launched without the ‘vanilla’ variant of the device. It’s also interesting that OnePlus decided to launch it in China first, as that’s not what OnePlus users are used to. Regardless, the OnePlus 10 Pro arrived with truly powerful specs and changed design.

The phone’s rear camera module is an extension of the phone’s frame. Design-wise it does remind us of some phones from Samsung. The front side of the phone is very similar to the OnePlus 9 Pro. The OnePlus 10 Pro is fueled by the Snapdragon 8 Gen 1 SoC, and it includes either 8GB or 12GB of LPDDR5 RAM. OnePlus also included UFS 3.1 flash storage inside of this smartphone.

The Hasselblad partnership continued with this smartphone, while the phone includes four cameras overall, three of which are on the back. A large 6.7-inch LTPO2 AMOLED display was also included by the company, and the same goes for immensely fast charging. The OnePlus 10 Pro launched with a 5,000mAh battery, along with 80W (65W in the US) wired, 50W wireless, and 10W reverse wireless charging.

OnePlus 10T

OnePlus 10T render 4

The OnePlus 10T was announced in August 2022. After skipping 2021’s T series smartphone launch, OnePlus opted to launch on in 2022. This phone is technically a successor to the OnePlus 8T which arrived in 2020. The device does resemble the OnePlus 10 Pro quite a bit, though there are some design differences. This phone has a flat display, not a curved one, and its rear camera setup looks a bit different. On top of that, it has a different coating on its glass backplate.

The OnePlus 10T does not come with Hasselblad branding, unlike its OnePlus 10 Pro sibling, but it has some advantages over that phone. The OnePlus 10T offers faster charging, 150W one (125W in the US), and it’s fueled by the Snapdragon 8+ Gen 1 SoC. In every other way, though, it’s inferior to the OnePlus 10 Pro. It’s also considerably more affordable, though, so there’s that.

A 6.7-inch fullHD+ 120Hz flat Fluid AMOLED display is used here. The company included 8GB/16GB of RAM inside of this phone, which comes with 128GB and 256GB of internal storage. Wireless charging is not supported, but there are stereo speakers included here. Android 12 comes pre-installed on the OnePlus 10T, along with the company’s OxygenOS 12.1 skin.

OnePlus 11

OnePlus 11 image 1011

The OnePlus 11 was originally launched in January 2023. The global model is set to follow on February 7, 2023. That being said, the device is somewhat similar to its predecessor in terms of design, but it comes with a redesigned rear camera island. It is fueled by the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 SoC, and it launched in two color options. Those are essentially black and green models.

It’s the very first OnePlus smartphone to include LPDDR5X RAM and UFS 4.0 flash storage. Up to 16GB of RAM and up to 512GB of storage, depending on the model. It also has a 5,000mAh battery, with 100W wired charging support. The charger is included, but wireless charging is not supported at all. The phone also comes without IP certification for water and dust resistance, unlike its predecessor.

A large 6.7-inch curved LTPO 3.0 AMOLED display is included. That display can go between 1 and 120Hz when it comes to the refresh rate. OnePlus included three cameras on the back of this phone, and Hasselblad helped with color calibration. A 50-megapixel main camera is backed by a 48-megapixel ultrawide camera and a 32-megapixel telephoto camera. OnePlus included Android 13 out of the box, along with ColorOS 13 in China, and OxygenOS 13 in other markets.

OnePlus 12

OnePlus 12 render featured

The OnePlus 12 was announced in early December, originally. its global variant arrived in late January. The phone itself looks very similar to its predecessor, the OnePlus 11. It’s made out of metal and glass, and it’s a large phone, that’s for sure. Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Gen 3 SoC fuels this handset, the best SoC OnePlus could get its hands on at the time.

Globally, the OnePlus 12 comes with up to 16GB of LPDDR5X RAM, though in China that number goes up to 24GB. When it comes to storage, you can get up to 512GB of UFS 4.0 flash storage globally, and up to 1TB in China. A large 5,400mAh battery is also a part of the package, and the phone supports 100W (80W in the US) wired charging. A charger is included in the retail box. 50W wireless charging is also supported, and 10W reverse wireless charging.

OnePlus also included a compelling triple camera setup on the back. A 50-megapixel main camera is backed by a 48-megapixel ultrawide unit and a 64-megapixel periscope telephoto camera. The device is also certified for water and dust resistance. It has a truly bright display and an in-display fingerprint scanner.

OnePlus 13

OnePlus 13 render image 22

The OnePlus 13 has been announced at the very end of October. It’s a direct successor to the OnePlus 12, and unlike that phone, it doesn’t have a curved display. OnePlus opted for a flat display this time around, and flat sides as well. Those are the most notable design differences between the two. Metal and glass are once again used to make the device, as was the case last year.

Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Elite processor fuels the OnePlus 13, a flagship chip that launched right before the announcement of this device. A 6.82-inch LTPO AMOLED display with all the bells and whistles is included here. It’s not only immensely bright and sharp, but it has great viewing angles, thin and uniform bezels, and more. OnePlus also included plenty of RAM inside of this smartphone, and fast storage too.

The battery capacity also got boosted. OnePlus used a silicon-carbon battery to fit a 6,000mAh battery capacity on the inside. 100W wired (80W in the US) charging is supported, along with 50W wireless, and 5W reverse wired charging. Three 50-megapixel cameras sit on the back of the device, and they have the benefit of Hasselblad’s color tuning. The device is also water and dust resistant, and ships with Android 15 out of the box.

OnePlus 13T

OnePlus 13T render 1

The OnePlus 13T has been announced as the company’s compact high-end smartphone. It was announced in China at the very end of April 2025. This smartphone has the same processor as the OnePlus 13, it’s fueled by the Snapdragon 8 Elite. It pairs that chip with up to 16GB of LPDDR5X RAM and UFS 4.0 flash storage. The device itself has two cameras on the back, and it’s easily recognizable. It also has very thin display bezels.

Speaking of its display, the OnePlus 13T features a 6.32-inch LTPO AMOLED panel. That display offers a refresh rate of up to 120Hz, and its resolution is 2640 x 1216. Android 15 comes pre-installed on the phone, with ColorOS 15 in China. Outside of China, the phone will ship with OxygenOS 15, of course. A large 6,260mAh battery is also a part of the package here, along with 80W wired charging.

There are two 50-megapixel cameras included on the back of the OnePlus 13T. A 50-megapixel main snapper (1/1.56-inch sensor size) is backed by a 50-megapixel telephoto shooter (1/2.76-inch sensor size, 2x optical zoom). An in-display fingerprint scanner of the optical variety is used inside of this phone too, while stereo speakers are also a part of the package.

OnePlus 15

OnePlus 15 render purple

The OnePlus 15 has been announced in October 2025 as the company’s new flagship smartphone. It was announced in China, while the global launch is expected to follow in November. With that being said, this phone represents a redesign compared to the OnePlus 13. OnePlus opted to go with a completely flat display and glass this time around, no more quad-curved ordeal. The camera island on the back has been heavily redesigned as well, it’s now more of a square than a circle.

Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 processor fuels the phone, the company’s most powerful chip. That chip is also brand new at this point. The phone also includes a huge 7,300mAh battery, which is a huge upgrade from the 6,000mAh unit in the OnePlus 13. Its wired charging is also a bit faster at 120W, while 50W wireless and 5W reverse wired and wireless charging are also supported here.

The phone comes with a series of water and dust certification ratings, offering great ingress protection. There are three 50-megapixel cameras included on the back, albeit they’re a downgrade compared to the OnePlus 13, at least on paper. A 165Hz AMOLED display sits on the front of the OnePlus 15, a 1.5K unit. OnePlus also issued an upgrade in the storage department, as UFS 4.1 is now used instead of UFS 4.0. The phone does bring plenty of improvements, and ships with Android 16 out of the box.

The post History of OnePlus Flagship Smartphones – 2025 appeared first on Android Headlines.

Samsung launches Gloria-themed Flipsuit cases and 6 wallpapers for Galaxy Z Flip7

Samsung has a new Gloria-themed Flipsuit case for its Galaxy Z Flip 7 foldable phone. The company has crafted these exclusive cases in partnership with one of Peru’s most recognized brands, which is also a dairy company.

Crafted for the Galaxy Z Flip 7, the Gloria Flipsuit cases feature a transparent cover and a collectible NFC card. When placed on the phone, the NFC chip triggers activation of a matching animated wallpaper on the device.

Samsung users can also download additional Gloria-designed wallpapers from the official website. It allows users having qualifying devices to gain additional personalization perks driven by the latest exclusive collaboration.

With this incredible Gloria case collection for the Galaxy Z Flip 7, Samsung is blending advanced mobile technology with the Peruvian brand’s visual identity.

 

Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 Gloria Flipsuit Case

Source – Samsung Newsroom

The Korean tech giant announced that the collaboration with Gloria was realized under its new creative concept “Movilismo.” It represents a new artistic movement where tech and self-expression merge to accompany the style of youth.

Apart from Gloria’s Flipsuit Cases, Samsung also offers a variety of special designs to add dynamism and style to the new Galaxy Z Flip7. These special cases are available exclusively through Samsung stores in Peru.

Why did Samsung pick Gloria?

Peruvian brand Gloria has its iconic branding and cultural significance for the creation of Samsung’s exclusive Flipsuit cases.

Given its identity, authenticity, and strong emotional bond with consumers, Gloria aligns with Samsung’s values of innovation, continuous evolution, and inspiring users in new ways.

The post Samsung launches Gloria-themed Flipsuit cases and 6 wallpapers for Galaxy Z Flip7 appeared first on Sammy Fans.

Faster Exynos 2600 returns with impressive performance scores

Samsung’s faster Exynos 2600 has reappeared on Geekbench, securing impressive performance scores. It seems Samsung is testing two different versions of Exynos, with the main difference anticipated in CPU frequencies.

Earlier, an underclocked Exynos 2600 emerged on Geekbench, showing a performance decline. It took Samsung around a week to reevaluate its powerful Exynos 2600 chip, which has broken the previous performance records.

In the test conducted on October 29, Samsung’s Exynos 2600 chip hit 3,455 and 11,621 in single-core and multi-core tests, respectively.

This particular chip’s prime core is clocked at 3.80 GHz, while the 6-core cluster is clocked at 2.76 GHz and the 3-core cluster at 3.26 GHz.

In the past, the same SoC scored 3,309 in single-core and 11,256 in multi-core tests. That said, Samsung has improved the overall performance, which is not huge but worth praising.

Samsung Exynos 2600 Geekbench Scores

Via – Jukanlosreve/X

Last week, an underclocked Exynos surfaced for the first time. The prime core was clocked at 3.55 GHz, while the other setups were at 2.46 GHz and 2.96 GHz. It managed to score 3,047 in single-core and 10,025 in multi-core tests.

Two versions of its upcoming Exynos hint at a future strategy or chip diversification. Who knows if Samsung’s preparing a faster version for Galaxy S26 Ultra and the underclocked for the other two models, base and Plus.

Exynos 2600 is manufactured using Samsung’s cutting-edge 2nm process technology. It’s a huge technological edge over Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5, which is still based on TSMC’s 3-nanometer foundry process.

Samsung plans to equip the Asian and European Galaxy S26 and Plus with its 2nm Exynos chipset. Meanwhile, the US, Chinese, and Canadian variants would still feature Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 processor.

The post Faster Exynos 2600 returns with impressive performance scores appeared first on Sammy Fans.

Nvidia to invest $1 billion in Nokia

Nvidia will make a $1 billion equity investment in Nokia at a subscription price of $6.01 per share, the two companies announced. With this investment, which is subject to certain customary closing conditions, Nokia will issue 166,389,351 new shares to Nvidia, giving it a 2.90% stake in the Finnish company. Nokia said it will use the proceeds from the issuance to accelerate its strategic plans to "advance trusted connectivity for the AI supercycle and other general corporate purposes." Moreover, Nokia intends to accelerate development of its 5G and 6G RAN software to run on Nvidia's...

The Ultimate Creality Falcon Laser Engraver Buyer's Guide (Halloween 2025)

Creality Hlloween 2025

So, you’ve decided to dive into the world of laser cutting and engraving. It’s an exciting step! But with a range of machines available, choosing the right one can be the biggest hurdle. Should you start with an entry-level model or invest in a professional powerhouse?

At Falcon, a sub-brand of Creality dedicated to high-performance laser engraving, we continue to push boundaries—empowering hobbyists, DIY enthusiasts, and professionals alike to bring their boldest ideas to life.

Understanding Your Needs

Before we look at the specs, ask yourself these questions:

– What will I primarily create? (e.g., personalized gifts, intricate art, commercial products)

– What materials will I use? (e.g., wood, leather, acrylic, anodized metal, glass)

– Is this for hobby, small business, or production?

Your answers will directly point you to the right Falcon. Here’s how our series break down:

– The A1 Series (A1 10W/ A1 PRO 20W): Your entry into the laser world, balancing safety, simplicity, and impressive performance.

– The Falcon2 Pro Series (40W & 60W): The professional’s choice for high-precision work on a wider range of materials.

Let’s dive into the details.

1. For the Beginner & Hobbyist: The Falcon A1 Series

Falcon A1 (10W) – Your Creative Starting Point

Ideal for first-time users, the A1 10W makes entering the world of laser engraving safe, simple, and affordable.

Perfect For: Hobbyists, students, and families.

Key Materials: Wood, leather, paper, cardboard, dark acrylic.

Create: Personalized wood coasters, engraved leather tags, and custom acrylic phone cases.

Falcon A1 Pro (20W) – Upgrade Your Output & Material Range

Double the power for faster speeds and the ability to handle thicker materials. Unlock even more possibilities, including direct metal engraving, with the optional 2W Infrared Laser Head—the perfect tool for growing skills and expanding your creative or commercial potential.

Perfect For: Advanced makers, small Etsy shops, and creators working with diverse materials.

Key Materials: All A1 materials, plus the ability to cut thicker wood and acrylic efficiently. Excellent for engraving stone, glass, and ceramics, metal.

Create: Intricate wooden puzzles, multi-layer acrylic signs, engraved glassware, and precise engravings on metals like stainless steel and anodized aluminum.

2. For the Professional: The Falcon2 Pro Series (40W/60W)

    When your passion demands professional-grade capabilities, you need a tool that conquers a wider range of materials. The Falcon2 Pro series, with its significantly higher laser power, is engineered to handle tougher, denser, and more diverse materials—expanding the boundaries of what you can create.

    Perfect For: Professional workshops and commercial businesses.

    Key Strength: Masters the broadest spectrum of materials, capable of engraving on metals like stainless steel and anodized aluminum, while effortlessly cutting and engraving thick acrylic, hardwoods, composites, and stone.

    Ready to Choose?

    – Start Creating with the Falcon A1.

    – Scale Your Projects with the Falcon A1 Pro.

    – Power Your Business with the Falcon2 Pro.

    Don’t miss the Halloween Sale: Up to 18% off Creality Falcon A1 Series & up to 15% off Falcon2 Pro Series. (Oct 20 to 30)

    The post The Ultimate Creality Falcon Laser Engraver Buyer's Guide (Halloween 2025) appeared first on Android Headlines.

    How to Free Up Storage on Your Phone: iPhone vs Android

    Smartphone image 32849534895843

    Phone storage often disappears faster than anyone expects. Photos accumulate in the background silently, apps grow with each new update, and fragments of invisible data remain behind until the phone crawls along or won’t hold anything new. It occurs on both Android and iPhone devices, though the platform addresses the condition in its unique manner. 

    This article explains practical steps that show how to free up space on iPhone and Android devices safely. It breaks down what really fills your storage and how to clear it without risking your personal files.

    How iPhone and Android Handle Storage Differently

    Let’s start with how the two platforms manage memory. iPhone and Android face the same challenge – limited space – yet each system deals with it in its own way. For anyone curious about how to declutter storage on their iPhone or how to free up space on Android, the first step is, naturally, to know the difference.

    iPhone:

    Every app on an iPhone has its home in a ‘sandboxed partition’, separate from the rest of the system. The user cannot access an application’s folders, and most applications don’t provide a way to clear the cache. This is handled by iOS without any scope for human error. The phone keeps downloads inside the Files app or an app’s sandbox and does not support microSD cards. 

    While this setup keeps things tidy, it also makes it harder to free up space without deleting actual files. That’s part of the reason more users are skipping storage upgrades altogether – why pay more if you still end up running out of space? On Reddit, it’s common to see complaints about System Data ballooning even after removing apps, which is why how to free up storage on iPhone remains such a hot topic.

    Android:

    Android gives users deeper control over space and app data. A user can open Settings → Storage to review categories, clear cache or app data, and move files through a file manager. Many phones also allow external microSD cards, which let users move photos, videos, and documents outside internal memory in a few minutes. 

    This flexibility makes it easier to manage growing storage needs without deleting important content. Users can access app folders directly, and even automate cleanup with scheduled tools. It’s no surprise that Android users are less dependent on paid cloud plans or expensive storage upgrades – when space runs low, they have options.

    Bottom line:

    iPhones depend on automation and strict control, which protects users but hides files that occupy valuable space. Android provides full access and extra options such as expandable memory, but it demands regular care. A clear view of these differences helps users manage storage safely and keep both platforms stable.

    How to Free up Storage on Your Phone

    Both iPhone and Android include built-in options that help remove clutter and restore performance without risk. To keep the process clear, this guide presents three reliable methods that solve the most common storage issues.

    Each method addresses a separate cause – hidden files, large media folders, or leftover data from unused apps. Together, they demonstrate how to clear the storage on any given phone without risking the loss of important files.

    Method 1: Use Smart Cleaner App

    Users believe that removing a few images or apps will solve the issue, yet there is much more on the phone than anticipated. Cache files, leftover folders, and invisible media quietly fill memory, especially inside chat or social apps. Many people ask why “System Data” or “Other” keeps increasing even after a cleanup. A reliable cleaner app offers a direct answer.

    On iPhone:

    Apple’s system maintains order but hides the details. iOS does not display cache or residual data inside normal menus, so a part of the storage remains out of reach. A tool such as Clever Cleaner helps users manage photos and files with ease. 

    It detects duplicate or similar shots, chooses the best version automatically, removes heavy items, compresses Live Photos, and deletes screenshots in one tap – all without ads, subscriptions, or hidden fees. It’s one of the better free iPhone cleaner apps we’ve tested. The app checks your device safely, sorts results by category, and gives full control before anything disappears.

    Real steps that help clear your phone’s memory:

    1. Download Clever Cleaner from the App Store.

    2. Open Clever Cleaner and give Manage access to Photos and Files.

    iPhone storage image (1)

      3. Tap Smart Scan to detect duplicates, heavy videos, and screenshots.

      iPhone storage image (6)

      4. Find​‍​‌‍​‍‌ the items that you want to delete in either Similar Photos or large files (Heavies) and then Slide to Delete to get rid of them.

      iPhone storage image (4)

      5. Make​‍​‌‍​‍‌ sure you remove all unnecessary files first, after which you can head to Settings > General > iPhone Storage to see how much free space you have. Finally, navigate to the Recently Deleted album in Photos and delete the files that you wish to remove ​‍​‌‍​‍‌​‍​‌‍​‍‌forever.

        The convenient thing is that at every step, you know exactly how much space you’re freeing up (the app clearly displays the size of all selected files before you clean them out). Very satisfying to use.

        On Android:

        Android provides more control, but that freedom leaves traces. Old app folders stay after uninstall, unused downloads remain, and updates create duplicate files. Google includes a native solution known as Files by Google, available on nearly every device.

        Simple ways to clear phone storage:

        1. Open Files by Google and switch to the Clean tab.
        2. Review suggestions such as “Old screenshots,” “Large files,” or “Temporary app files.”
        3. Approve each entry that no longer serves a purpose
        4. Open the Settings menu, choose Storage, and check how much capacity has returned.

        Because Android grants direct access to system folders, most users never need another app. A short cleanup session with Files by Google every few weeks keeps the phone responsive, organized, and free of unnecessary data.

        Method 2: Remove Large Media and Duplicate Files Manually

        Cleaner apps remove hidden clutter, yet photos, videos, and chat attachments still occupy the most space. A short manual review exposes old albums, outdated downloads, or message files that quietly block new storage.

        On iPhone:

        Apple provides built-in tools that allow direct control over photos and videos. The Photos app identifies duplicate shots, and menus allow for quick deleting of large attachments or unused programs.

        Easy ways to reclaim phone storage:

        1. Open Photos, tap Albums, then open Duplicates to review identical shots. Combine similar photos or delete the ones that repeat.

        2. Next, scroll to Large Media to view videos and high-resolution photos that take up the most space. Remove clips or images that no longer matter.

        3. In​‍​‌‍​‍‌ the case of Messages that are taking up most of the storage space, you should go to Messages, tap on Manage Storage, and delete attachments or conversations that contribute to the largest part of the storage.

        4. Next,​‍​‌‍​‍‌ you can check the amount of space that has been freed up by navigating to Settings – General – iPhone ​‍​‌‍​‍‌Storage.

        5. The​‍​‌‍​‍‌ last step is to remove the storage that is apparently still ide with these deleted files by going to the Recently Deleted section in Photos and deleting the trash from ​‍​‌‍​‍‌there.

          Users who complete these steps often free several gigabytes within minutes. 

          On Android:

          Android grants full access to its file system, which provides more freedom but also demands closer attention. Old downloads, duplicate photos, and cached folders can remain long after you remove an app. The built-in Files by Google app simplifies this process by listing the largest files first.

          Quick ways to release extra space:

          1. Open Files by Google, select Clean, and review the section labeled Large files.
          2. Sort the list by size and delete the biggest videos or documents that have no purpose.
          3. Open Gallery, find duplicate or blurred photos, and remove them.
          4. Move older media to Google Drive or an SD card to create more room on the main device.

          A careful review of large media keeps Android phones responsive and organized. For extra guidance, visit this guide, which explains practical methods to recover phone storage and maintain solid performance over time.

          Method 3: Clear App Data and System Cache

          Even after photo or video removal, a large share of phone storage often stays blocked by app data and cache files. Each app creates temporary files to make actions faster, but these leftovers slowly occupy valuable space. A direct reset of app data can recover several gigabytes in minutes.

          On iPhone:

          Apple allows users to erase extra data from apps without removing them completely. This method frees memory while keeping files, messages, and preferences intact.

          How to free the storage on your phone: 

          1. Navigate​‍​‌‍​‍‌ through your Settings to General, and then tap on iPhone Storage.

          iPhone storage image (2)

          2. Inspect the long list of apps sorted by their size and check the largest ones.

          iPhone storage image (3)

          3. Tap the Offload App, and you remove the extra data that is a memento of the app while the information is preserved.

          iPhone storage image (5)

          4. In the case of Safari, go to Settings, tap Safari, and then select Clear History and Website Data to get rid of the additional ​‍​‌‍​‍‌space.

            This method releases memory on an iPhone quickly without changing how apps behave. Repeating the same routine once a month helps avoid another “storage almost full” alert.

            On Android:

            Android offers direct control over cache and stored data through its system menus. This option restores memory fast without touching personal information.

            Direct actions to clear phone storage safely:

            1. Open the Settings menu and find the Storage section. Inside, you’ll see an option called Apps or App Management – tap it to view all the apps currently on your phone.

            2. Find the app that takes up the most space – social media or video apps usually top the list – and open its details to see what can be cleared.

            3. Select Clear Cache in order to delete cached material or Clear Storage to clear the app completely.

            4. Get back to the Settings, Storage section, and it should tell you how much space the phone has reclaimed.

              A quick review of app data often returns several gigabytes and improves system response. Phones remain fast and organized once unnecessary files disappear.

              Final Tip

              Storage issues often return if left unchecked for too long. To understand how to clear up storage on iPhone, remove old downloads, check large photo folders, and use a trusted cleaner to erase leftover files before they pile up again.

              Regular care stops the “Storage Almost Full” alert and keeps your phone fast without extra costs. Small, steady steps always give better results than one rushed cleanup.

              The post How to Free Up Storage on Your Phone: iPhone vs Android appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Samsung Health adds in-app doctor visits for US users

              Samsung Health teamed up with HealthTap to offer an in-app feature for doctor visits in the US. This partnership aims to benefit approximately 7 million users in the United States.

              Under this partnership, Samsung and HealthTap add access to virtual primary and urgent care directly into the Samsung Health app. It’s the first time HealthTap’s first in-app experience is expanded to a third-party platform.

              As a result, Samsung Health users in the US can book, conduct, and follow up on virtual care consultations. It essentially ends the need for leaving the Samsung Health app for doctor visits, but the feature is limited to US users.

              How HealthTap works within Samsung Health:

              Through an embedded interface, Samsung Health users will be able to select a virtual visit option, complete a short intake, and connect to a HealthTap doctor for a video consultation within minutes.

              Once done, patients can review the clinician’s notes and follow-up instructions within the app. The entire process is designed to be seamless, requiring no app switching or additional downloads.

              Samsung Health Virtual Doctor Visit

              Image via Samsung

              Thanks to Samsung Health’s integration of the virtual doctor visits feature, users can connect with a physician in the same place they record their daily steps, monitor sleep, or track vital signs and medication schedules.

              Now, the wealth of medical, health, and fitness data captured by Samsung’s phones and watches and the Galaxy Ring can finally be discussed in real time at the point of care by a patient with their own primary care doctor.

              This Health app upgrade is pretty much beneficial. When this data informs the clinical conversation, it enables more personalized diagnoses, more accurate treatment decisions, and ultimately, better outcomes for patients.

              Dr. Ricky Choi, US Head of Digital Health, Samsung Electronics America, says:

              “By making available telehealth services into the Samsung Health experience, we are making care actionable, enabling users to move from wellness to clinical care and back in a trusted environment.”

              The post Samsung Health adds in-app doctor visits for US users appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Samsung is fixing the Dynamic Wallpaper reset issue

              One UI 8 elevates Dynamic Color Wallpaper, but some users are reporting functional issues with this feature. Samsung is also aware of the glitch and is working on a fix that will be provided through an app update.

              Dynamic Wallpaper is a smart wallpaper service available on flagship Samsung Galaxy phones. It keeps refreshing the elegant colors featuring a striking gradient based on the time.

              There’s no widespread outrage since a small portion of users utilize the feature. Others use their favorite picture or video as wallpaper or stunning images provided through third-party wallpaper distribution platforms.

              Samsung fans who use Dynamic Color Wallpaper are facing a major issue. The glitch wipes out the wallpaper selection and replaces it with stock wallpaper. Per the users, it happens in certain hours, most reportedly overnight.

              As the reports arose, Samsung investigated and found a glitch. The company confirmed (via Larry S White), the team is aware of it and preparing a fix. A new version of the Samsung Wallpaper app will be provided with the necessary improvements.

              The new Samsung Wallpaper may already be rolling out to certain users. Samsung said the new update will be expanded to users gradually. So if you’re facing a wallpaper reset issue, make sure to update the app from Galaxy Store.

              Remember, the app version may differ, but the improvements won’t. Therefore, install an updated Samsung Wallpaper from the Galaxy Store without worrying about the version number, package size, or release notes.

              For those having a problem where the dynamic wallpaper that turns back to the stock wallpaper the next day. Samsung is working on the problem. I only use one third party wallpaper app for almost a year so I ruled it out. I have three devices where I didn't use it on one and… pic.twitter.com/7RW0deGRZj

              — Larry S White (@F15Mechanic63) October 28, 2025

              The post Samsung is fixing the Dynamic Wallpaper reset issue appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Galaxy S21 FE’s Android 16 update is the green light for One UI 8.5

              Samsung has just widened the Android 16 rollout to the Galaxy S21 FE, and it locks the path to One UI 8.5. The company is bringing the One UI 8 to the Galaxy S21 FE smartphone users in India, starting with Exynos models.

              You may find One UI 8.0 boring, but it is the setup for One UI 8.5 for your Galaxy S21 FE. Without One UI 8, you can’t even think of the next big upgrade. You know, owners of the Galaxy S21 series consider them the unluckiest.

              There was a generational gap when Samsung launched the Galaxy S21 series and S21 FE. It was just a move similar to the Galaxy S25 series and S25 FE.

              The flagship models were released with Android 11-based One UI 3.1, while the Fan Edition arrived with Android 12-based One UI 4.0. Similarly, the Galaxy S25 series launched with Android 15, while the S25 FE boots Android 16.

              Samsung is strictly proceeding with what it promised. The Galaxy S21 series has already received four major OS upgrades to Android 15. Meanwhile, the Galaxy S21 FE has completed its OS lifecycle at Android 16 this week.

              While there’s no major difference between the One UI 7 and One UI 8, users are still disappointed, and they have a reason: One UI 8.5.

              Samsung is developing the next big upgrade, the One UI 8.5. Leaked screenshots signal plenty of new features and a massive overhaul to the user interface. The mid-cycle update will significantly widen the gap from One UI 7.

              With Samsung bringing One UI 8 to the Galaxy S21 FE users this week, it’s a moment of celebration. The current update isn’t that exciting, but the next mid-cycle version will be, when it lands in the second quarter of 2026.

              The post Galaxy S21 FE’s Android 16 update is the green light for One UI 8.5 appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Oppo's ColorOS 16 global release schedule announced

              The Oppo Find X9 and Find X9 Pro were launched in global markets yesterday. During the event, Oppo also shared the global release timeline for its ColorOS 16 update. While the ColorOS 16 rollout for compatible devices is scheduled to begin in China on October 30, global users will have to wait a little longer. Oppo’s ColorOS 16 update will be first available on the Find N5, Find N3, Find N3 Flip, the Find X8 series, Reno 14 lineup, Reno 13 series, and the Pad 3 Pro in November. Older Oppo phones and tablets will receive the Android 16-based software update in December and Q1...

              Bloomberg: Apple iPad mini, iPad Air and MacBook Air to get OLED displays

              Apple’s iPad Air and mini lineup could receive big display upgrades soon, according to a report by Bloomberg. The company is also working on upgrading the display on the MacBook Air. The report states that the Cupertino giant is testing new iPad Air, mini, and MacBook Air models with OLED displays. As per the report, Apple plans to introduce the iPad mini with an OLED panel in 2026. While an OLED display would be a welcome upgrade for the iPad mini, it’s expected to come at a higher price. The report suggests that the OLED version could cost up to $100 more than the current...

              Samsung Galaxy M55 and M55s receive One UI 8 stable update

              Samsung has released the Android 16-based One UI 8 stable update for two more smartphones - the Galaxy M55 and the Galaxy M55s. The stable One UI 8 update for the Samsung Galaxy M55 comes with firmware version M556BXXU4CYJ4 and requires a download of over 2.6GB, whereas the update for the Galaxy M55s comes with firmware version M558BXXU2CYJ4 and weighs more than 2.5GB. Samsung Galaxy M55 • Samsung Galaxy M55s The update for both smartphones comes with the October 2025 Android security patch in addition to One UI 8 goodies. [#InlinePriceWidget,12896,1#] Samsung is...

              One UI 8 draining battery on Galaxy phones, watches – Samsung breaks silence

              Samsung has finally responded to the One UI 8 battery draining problem affecting users of Galaxy phones and watches. The company explains why users see a sudden decline in battery life after installing the One UI 8 update.

              On September 15, Samsung started the One UI 8 update rollout. Starting with the Galaxy S25 series, the update was gradually expanded to dozens of devices. One UI 8 Watch update is also rolled out to the Watch Ultra and Watch 7.

              Galaxy users are complaining about the battery drain problem on community forums and social media. They are asking others if they are also facing the same issue and seeking a fix to improve the battery life declined after the update.


              Battery drain complaints

              Users are filling the Samsung Community with criticisms about reduced battery life after the One UI 8 update. One of the comments reads, “I wonder if Samsung is unaware of the fast battery drain issue or if they simply have no intention of fixing it.”

              One user with a Galaxy S24 posted a question, “The battery is draining fast after the update, is there a solution?” Another user stated, “There’s almost no change compared to the previous version, but the battery drains faster.”

              Reddit’s Samsung-related subreddits are also filled with similar complaints. A user named claimed, “I regret the One UI 8 update. When I was using One UI 7, the Screen-On Time (SOT) on my Galaxy S25 was about 7 hours, but now it’s only 5 hours.”

              A Galaxy Watch 7 user also left a question: “After the update, if I leave home with a 100% charge and return, the battery only has about 20% left. Previously, it had about 70-80% remaining. Can I downgrade (revert to the previous version)?”


              Samsung’s response

              Commenting on some complaints, Samsung explained that the cause behind battery drain isn’t just the One UI 8 update. The decline is influenced by various factors, including app updates, different usage environments, and usage patterns.

              Galaxy S25 Ultra Battery

              Samsung recommends users report the problem via the Members app and keep the log file attached. It also sought detailed information to better evaluate what’s wrong with the devices that are ruining the battery life.

              Samsung (via Chosun) responded to users, saying:

              Battery consumption is complexly influenced by various factors, such as updates to installed apps, changes in the device’s usage environment, or usage patterns.

              The post One UI 8 draining battery on Galaxy phones, watches – Samsung breaks silence appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              How Galaxy S26 delay could affect Galaxy S25 users

              Galaxy S26 series and One UI 8.5 are stamped with each other, and they affect Galaxy S25 users as well. A delay in the next-gen flagships could also postpone the Beta launch of the new software and rollout to older devices as well.

              Samsung has just unveiled its first TriFold device, scheduled for late 2025 release. Meanwhile, the S26 series is the most anticipated reveal. The software part has also become similarly awaited, given its scope of changes.

              Why Samsung could delay the Galaxy S26?

              Samsung is running late with the development of the Galaxy S26 Plus. The company reportedly had no plans to bring the Plus model next year. Instead, it has almost finished developing the Galaxy S26 Edge as a Plus replacement.

              Meanwhile, Samsung has canceled the S26 Edge at the last minute after determining no potential in the form factor. As a result, the Galaxy S26 Plus has rejoined the lineup, but the development may render Unpacked a little late.

              How Galaxy S26 delay affect S25 users?

              If Samsung delays the Galaxy S26 series, the One UI 8.5 reveal will naturally be delayed. The new software is set to come preinstalled with the new flagships. The upcoming phones and software directly affect Galaxy S25 users.

              Galaxy S25 series was rumored to get One UI 8.5 Beta in late November. With Samsung changing its plans, the Unpacked event seems to be pushed to March. That said, the Beta Program may also be delayed until early 2026.

              Rumors suggest the One UI 8.5 Beta could be delayed, and the Galaxy S26 Plus is to be blamed. One UI 8 didn’t take much time to go official, but the update doesn’t seem like a major one despite bumping the Android version.

              If you own a Galaxy S25 (or Plus or Ultra), the next couple of weeks are going to be quite important. If Samsung unveils the One UI 8.5 Beta, users will be able to access the new software advancements early, as the official release is likely in May 2026.

              The post How Galaxy S26 delay could affect Galaxy S25 users appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Gooloo’s new F3 cordless electric air duster launches with compact design and 240 minutes of runtime

              Gooloo has launched a new cordless electric air duster, the F3, onto the global market. The F3 features a 120 W motor and two 2,500 mAh batteries, and is said to offer a maximum speed of 150,000 RPM and up to 240 minutes (~ 4 hours) of runtime on a single charge. On top of that, it ships with a compact and lightweight design, weighing around 205 grams (0.45 lbs).

              iQOO confirms the Neo11's chipset

              iQOO launched the 15 last week, and now it's getting ready to unveil the Neo11, which will become official in China on October 30. The brand has already teased the device and revealed that it has a 7,500 mAh battery and a "2K" resolution screen with 144Hz refresh rate, and it will come in four colorways. Today iQOO has also confirmed the Neo11's chipset. It will be powered by the Snapdragon 8 Elite, which came out last year and was the top dog in the Android world until its successor, the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5, showed up a few weeks ago. iQOO Neo11 teasers iQOO says the...

              Huawei Mate 70 Air poster leaks, here are the rumored specs

              Motorola recently got into the slim smartphone game with the X70 Air in China (and this is going to be launched internationally as the Edge 70), and next up is Huawei. The Mate 70 Air is expected to become official next month, and ahead of that it was spotted in an online listing last week. Today an offline poster advertising its design got leaked, and was seemingly photographed in a warped fashion - rest assured, the phone isn't curved like that. The Mate 70 Air is just over 6mm thick and allegedly comes with a 6.9-inch "1.5K" screen, up to 16GB of RAM, and a main camera with a...

              Grab the Samsung Galaxy Watch 8 Classic for $180 off

              If you’re looking for a great smartwatch, the Samsung Galaxy Watch 8 Classic is one of the best options, especially for Android users. It looks like a traditional watch but has all the smart features you need. Right now, you can get it for an amazing price, which makes it a perfect time to buy.

              The Galaxy Watch 8 Classic usually costs $499.99, but it is now available for just $319 on Woot, an Amazon-owned deals website. That’s a huge discount of $180.99, and it’s the lowest price we’ve seen for this watch so far.

              You also get a full one-year manufacturer’s warranty with your purchase. Keep in mind, this deal is only for the White color, and there is a limit of two watches per customer. The offer will last for eight days or until the stock runs out.

              Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7, Flip 7 and Watch 8 Classic

              Source – Samsung Mobile Press

              The Galaxy Watch 8 Classic features a stainless steel body and a sapphire crystal screen, materials usually found in luxury watches. The rotating bezel is not only stylish but also makes it easy to use the watch. Its 1.37-inch Super AMOLED screen is bright and sharp, with a 438 x 438 resolution.

              The watch is very durable, with IP68, 5ATM, and MIL-STD-810H certifications, meaning it can handle water, dust, and tough conditions. The battery lasts up to 30 hours with Always On Display or 40 hours if it is turned off.

              If you want a smartwatch that is stylish, durable, and full of features, the Galaxy Watch 8 Classic $319 deal is a great choice. Click here to visit the deal page.

              Google Search Top Stories Preferred Source

              The post Grab the Samsung Galaxy Watch 8 Classic for $180 off appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Honor Magic8 Ultra display specs, chipset, and camera details leak

              Honor launched the Magic8 and Magic8 Pro in China earlier this month, but it's also rumored to be working on the Magic8 Ultra that will arrive at some later point, probably early next year. This is now said to be powered by the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 SoC, unsurprisingly. It allegedly boasts a quad-curved 6.71" LTPO OLED screen with "1.5K" resolution, with an ultrasonic embedded fingerprint sensor and support for 3D face recognition. Honor Magic8 Pro The main camera will have 50MP resolution and will be using OmniVision's OV50R sensor with ultra high dynamic range. The phone is...

              Samsung Galaxy Buds4 and Buds4 Pro to come with a slightly bigger battery

              Samsung is rumored to be launching the Galaxy Buds4 and Galaxy Buds4 Pro alongside the Galaxy S26 series, which is now expected to only arrive in March. According to a new report, both the Buds4 and the Buds4 Pro will come with a new case, which will have an ever so slightly bigger battery than the one in the Buds3 and Buds3 Pro. Samsung Galaxy Buds3 Pro The new case will allegedly have a rated battery capacity of 515 mAh. This will probably end up advertised as a typical capacity of 530 mAh. The Buds3 and Buds3 Pro case has a rated capacity of 500 mAh and a typical capacity of 515...

              Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 6 to Adopt LPDDR6 & UFS 5.0 Standards

              Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 image 11

              The mobile tech world never stands still. New phones featuring Qualcomm’s latest Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 flagship processor are just hitting the market. However, rumors about its successor, the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 6, are already circulating. The next-gen SoC is expected to officially debut in late 2026, so there’s still a long way to go. However, early reports about the Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 6 chip hint at major performance improvements, including support for the LPDDR6 RAM and UFS 5.0 memory and storage standards.

              Artificial intelligence has taken over multiple segments of the tech industry. The smartphone segment is no exception. The heavy implementation of AI by companies like Google and Samsung makes this abundantly clear. Well, the “Elite Gen 6” chip will be better prepared than ever for these tasks.

              LPDDR6 and UFS 5.0: The essential upgrades driving the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 6 chip

              To handle the increasingly complex AI workloads, future silicon requires massive boosts in data speed. The Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 6 chip tackles this directly by reportedly introducing support for two critical, high-speed standards: LPDDR6 RAM and UFS 5.0 storage. These upgrades will dramatically increase how fast the chip can access and write data.

              Perhaps the most compelling (and controversial) rumor centers on the manufacturing process. According to the source (tech tipster Digital Chat Station on Weibo), the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 6 chip will mark Qualcomm’s transition to the next-generation 2nm node from TSMC. Qualcomm reportedly plans to use TSMC’s more advanced N2P process. This next-level 2nm variant theoretically offers huge gains. It promises up to 18% better performance or a substantial 36% reduction in power consumption compared to the previous 3nm node.

              However, it’s noteworthy that other voices in the industry express doubt about this timeline. They argue that due to TSMC’s expected production ramp-up, Qualcomm, along with other large customers, will only secure the initial N2 2nm process for a 2026 launch.

              Skipping an entire lithography step seems ambitious. The simple shift to 2nm nodes guarantees major gains in both power efficiency and raw computational ability, regardless of the exact variant used.

              Higher flagship costs

              Regardless of the precise manufacturing details, the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 6 looks set to be an exceptional leap forward. The combination of a 2nm design with the far faster LPDDR6 memory and UFS 5.0 storage promises significant improvements across the board. These technological advances, unfortunately, rarely come cheap. Analysts expect the Gen 6 to carry a higher price tag than its predecessor. This will likely translate into more expensive flagship devices for consumers.

              The post Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 6 to Adopt LPDDR6 & UFS 5.0 Standards appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Galaxy S26's New Connectivity Chip May Bring Massive improvements

              Samsung Galaxy S26 Pro AH exclusive CAD (3)

              The Samsung Galaxy S26 series is already making many headlines. Most conversations are focusing on the expected regional split between the Exynos 2600 and the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 processors. There is also discussion about the potential performance that the Exynos 2600 chip could offer. However, a newly spotted component suggests a nice upgrade might be hidden in a completely different part of the Samsung Galaxy S26: the Bluetooth and overall connectivity experience.

              New leaks indicate the Galaxy S26 lineup could debut with a dedicated companion chip for connectivity. This approach mirrors steps taken by other industry giants toward greater hardware independence.

              Samsung Galaxy S26’s Exynos S6568 chip may enable Bluetooth 6.1

              A fresh listing on the Bluetooth qualified products website reveals a new Samsung chipset: the Exynos S6568. Described as a Bluetooth and Wi-Fi companion chip, the S6568 aims to work alongside a main Exynos SoC. This move suggests Samsung is ready to offload crucial connectivity duties from its flagship processor.

              The core technical headline is its support for Bluetooth 6.1. Announced earlier this year, Bluetooth 6.1 is the newest standard, promising better security features and noticeably improved power efficiency compared to its predecessor. Currently, no mass-market devices use this latest specification. So, the Galaxy S26 could be one of the first.

              The real advantage: Efficiency and thermals

              Why would Samsung introduce a separate chip for features like Wi-Fi and Bluetooth? The prevailing theory among tech analysts is that by dedicating the Exynos S6568 to these tasks, Samsung can significantly improve the performance and power efficiency of the main processor (the Exynos 2600).

              This architectural approach allows the primary chip to focus solely on high-demand tasks. Think about running applications and processing complex graphics. The result should be a potential gain in battery life for the S26, faster performance during heavy use, and better thermal management. In the end, the phone should run cooler when you need it most.

              The rumored S6568 certification coincides with other reports suggesting the Galaxy S26’s development schedule is changing. The launch, traditionally held in January, is now rumored to be pushed back to March 2026. This delay reportedly stems from an internal strategy reevaluation that involved shuffling the model lineup. The move would also imply the delay of the One UI 8.5 update to eligible Galaxy devices.

              The primary battle between the Exynos 2600 and the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 will still define the S26 experience in many regions. However, the integration of the Exynos S6568 points to Samsung also prioritizing other core aspects of the user experience. Making the phone run cooler and last longer, all while offering the newest connectivity standard, sounds like a great move.

              The post Galaxy S26's New Connectivity Chip May Bring Massive improvements appeared first on Android Headlines.

              'Dante' Malware reportedly targeted Chrome users through zero-day exploit

              00 Chrome zero day exploit logo image DG AH 2022

              Google Chrome is generally thought of as a pretty safe browser to use, but that doesn’t make it an impenetrable fortress, and a Chrome exploit used to distribute malware is the latest proof of that. A zero-day is an exploit that, once discovered, is immediately used to attack an entity or other users. This gives the company that makes the software that contains the exploit zero days to prepare for its malicious use. Instead, they’re forced to work on patching the previously unknown vulnerability after the fact.

              According to a report from Bleeping Computer, a zero-day was recently used to target a variety of entities by distributing malware. Reported targets include Russian media outlets, educational institutions, and financial institutions. The malware, known as ‘Dante,’ is said to be a piece of commercial spyware. It was also reportedly created by Memento Labs, an Italian company formerly known as Hacker Team.

              The Chrome exploit that was distributing malware was discovered by Kaspersky

              Dante was initially discovered back in March of this year, as malware used as part of an attack called Operation ForumTroll that targeted Russian organizations. However, it wasn’t until recently that Kaspersky shared more intricate details of the malware and its inner workings.

              As noted by Kaspersky, the initial point of infection from this malware occurred when users clicked a link in a phishing email. Once at the malicious website, the victims were “verified” and then the exploit was executed.

              According to reports, these phishing emails were sending out invites to Russian organizations to attend the Primakov Readings forum.

              Kaspersky further details that the Dante software, as well as other tools used in Operation ForumTroll, were developed by Memento Labs, linking the company to these attacks in some form. It’s worth noting that this company isn’t 100% confirmed to be behind the attacks. As noted by Bleeping Computer, there is a possibility that someone else was behind the zero-day attack and distribution of the malware.

              The post 'Dante' Malware reportedly targeted Chrome users through zero-day exploit appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Xbox's new rival is TikTok, not PlayStation or Nintendo

              Xbox Series X Controller 1

              Xbox has a new rival in town, and you might be surprised to know that it’s TikTok, as well as movies, that keep the Head of Xbox Game Studios up at night. Not PlayStation, not Nintendo. A social media application available on Android and iOS, and those motion picture films that you used to flock to theaters to see, but can now more easily than ever before watch from the comfort of your own couch.

              It’s likely strange hearing that a video game company isn’t considering other video game companies its competitors anymore. That’s understandable. Xbox targeting TikTok and movies as its new rivals probably feels entirely random. As random as it might feel, if PlayStation were to stop competing with other video game companies and start targeting fast food chains. On a surface level, it doesn’t make any sense. But if you dig a little deeper, you can start to see the direction that Xbox is probably taking, in addition to the reason it’s taking it.

              Xbox probably sees TikTok and movies as its new rivals because it’s competing for your time

              To be clear, this has always been the case. Video games are a form of entertainment, and as long as they’ve been around, they’ve had to compete for your time with any other form of entertainment. So, that’s not an entirely new aspect of things. However, things have changed quite a bit. Now more than ever, entertainment through mediums like movies and TikTok is commanding the time of everyone, from teenagers to full-blown adults.

              TikTok consumption is on such a massive scale that it wouldn’t be surprising to learn if some users were avoiding all other forms of entertainment to scroll through new clips. There likely are some users out there who are like this. Microsoft and its Xbox team appear to think so, and this is likely a big reason why it considers TikTok one of its new main rivals.

              This is just speculation, of course, but it’s the most reasonable assumption that can be made. TikTok, movies, and streaming video make up a huge chunk of media consumption these days. Naturally, Xbox wants users to spend time playing games as opposed to watching videos. So, it’s setting its sights on those types of services.

              The Xbox, as we know it, has changed forever

              The days of Xbox being the third console behemoth in the market are long gone. This console platform of the early 2000s and 2010s has transformed into something entirely different. It’s not dead per se, but it’s certainly dead in the sense that the Xbox that fans have loved for two decades isn’t the same. Not only is Microsoft now targeting social media apps as its new rival, but its Xbox consoles won’t be traditional consoles anymore. The next Xbox will reportedly be a Windows gaming PC with an Xbox UI layer on top. It’s a new age for Xbox. For better or worse, this is the path Microsoft has chosen to take.

              The post Xbox's new rival is TikTok, not PlayStation or Nintendo appeared first on Android Headlines.

              The next Xbox console is indeed a gaming PC powered by Windows

              Xbox Series X Review 10

              Rumors of the next-gen Xbox console powered by Windows, making it a full-fledged gaming PC, began floating to the surface of the news cycle earlier this month. Now, it seems that those rumors actually have weight to them. So much weight that the rumors are reportedly true.

              When the rumors first popped up, we said it sounded like the next console would just be an expensive gaming PC. That’s exactly what Microsoft is going for, according to Windows Central. (It is worth noting that this report is based on “trusted sources within Microsoft.” So, Microsoft itself has not publicly announced these details). This probably comes as no surprise to some. The ASUS ROG Xbox Ally X and ROG Xbox Ally launched on October 16, and both feature a new software experience. It’s called the Xbox Fullscreen Experience, and it’s designed to be more of a console-like user interface than Windows 11.

              One of the main complaints that Windows 11 handhelds have had so far is that they don’t feel like handheld consoles, which is essentially what they are. The Xbox Fullscreen Experience takes steps to address that issue. In most ways, it does a fine job at this. All your games are accessible right from one place. This includes games across clients like the Xbox app, Steam, Ubisoft Connect, and more. The next Xbox console is following in these footsteps.

              Microsoft’s next Xbox console is a Windows PC, but it will have a console-style UI

              The important bit here for console fans is that the new Xbox will have a console-style UI. Similar to, or perhaps exactly like, the Xbox Fullscreen Experience for the ROG Xbox Ally X and ROG Xbox Ally. The console experience will be layered on top of Windows, just like those handhelds. It will also boot into this experience as soon as you power it on, as opposed to booting into Windows first.

              There is a major difference, though. As Windows Central reports, those who prefer this console UI can stay within it indefinitely. With no requirement to ever leave it. That means updates, game installs, etc., will all be doable from this experience. For comparison, with the ROG Xbox Ally X, if you want to update anything, it all has to be done from the Windows side of things. It’s not a great experience, all things considered. The next console is reportedly not going to have this problem. That’s a big step in the right direction if you want a console to be a console.

              That being said, gamers will have the option to move to the Windows layout if they want to play games from other clients, such as Steam, or play Windows games that run in their own client and aren’t available on Xbox.

              It’s still unclear what the price is going to be. However, Xbox President Sarah Bond did confirm that the next-gen Xbox will be a “very premium, very high-end, curated experience.” So, chances are the next Xbox won’t be as affordable as some people are hoping.

              The post The next Xbox console is indeed a gaming PC powered by Windows appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Verizon's 'Personal Shopper' AI is Driving Reps Crazy & Hurting Sales

              Verizon Logo

              You only really know about a company based on the public image it wants you to see. But what really goes on behind the scenes? Behind the glitzy product launches, what exactly takes place in the planning process? If you’re curious about how a carrier operates, PhoneArena managed to land an exclusive interview with a Verizon representative who spilled the beans on the company’s operations.

              Verizon representative tells all

              According to the interview with the Verizon representative called “Jim,” it uncovered some of the things that take place behind the scenes. For starters, Verizon is relying pretty heavily on AI. This comes in the form of an AI tool called “Personal Shopper.” This feature automatically builds a cart of so-called recommended items when customers open a new account.

              While it might sound useful, Jim suggests that this usually results in a ton of irrelevant products, which makes it annoying for employees to manage. Employees are also pressured to meet strict sales quotas with mandatory upselling. These are not optional goals, and failing to meet a quota could jeopardize their employment.

              Unfortunately, this has created a somewhat toxic environment. Due to the immense pressure to perform, some employees resort to deceptive tactics. We’re talking about hidden insurance or fees here. So, the next time you get your bill, you might want to take a deeper look at the charges.

              All of this comes from the higher-ups too, where management encourages upselling for items like extra lines, even if a customer doesn’t need it.

              But it’s not all bad

              Based on the interview, it sounds like Verizon resorts to some pretty shady tactics when it comes to upselling. However, it’s not all bad. It seems that despite the stressful sales environment and pressure to meet quotas, Verizon is apparently a pretty good employer. The carrier offers decent pay, commissions, and benefits.

              Still, these pressures can lead to burnout, which results in employees leaving. But it seems that many of them eventually return. This is because the pay and benefits are simply too good to give up on.

              Jim acknowledges some of the shady tactics Verizon uses, but he also notes that it’s the same thing at T-Mobile. “It’s just that you wear pink instead of a red shirt, and you hand out goodies on Tuesdays.”

              The post Verizon's 'Personal Shopper' AI is Driving Reps Crazy & Hurting Sales appeared first on Android Headlines.

              WhatsApp soon lets you personalize your profile with cover photo

              WhatsApp has released a new beta update for Android, which reveals that the company is working on the ability for users to set a cover photo on their profile. This feature, already available for WhatsApp Business accounts, will soon be coming to regular users as well.

              The new cover photo option will let users add a banner image at the top of their WhatsApp profile, similar to what we see on Facebook or LinkedIn. This image will allow people to express their personality, mood, or style through visuals, to make profiles more fun and personal.

              Currently, only WhatsApp Business users can set cover photos to make their pages look more professional and appealing. However, WhatsApp now plans to expand this feature to everyone. Users will be able to upload or select a picture from their gallery directly in their profile settings.

              WhatsApp Cover Photo Feature

              Image via WABetaInfo

              WhatsApp is also testing privacy settings for cover photos, giving users control over who can see them. The available options include “Everyone,” “My contacts,” and “Nobody.” For now, there’s no “My contacts except” option, but it might be added later. These privacy options ensure that users can customize their profiles while staying in control of their personal information.

              The cover photo feature is currently under development and is not yet available to users. WhatsApp is currently testing and improving it before a wider release. Once ready, the update will likely roll out to beta testers first and then to all users in the coming weeks. Stay tuned for more information.

              Google Search Top Stories Preferred Source

              The post WhatsApp soon lets you personalize your profile with cover photo appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Samsung Galaxy Buds 4 case leak reveals bigger battery capacity

              Samsung Galaxy Buds 4 and Galaxy Buds 4 Pro are currently under development. Fans are expecting these new earbuds to launch in early 2026, probably alongside the Galaxy S26 smartphones. Now, new information reveals the battery life of Galaxy Buds 4 and Buds 4 Pro cases.

              According to the latest information via GalaxyClub, both earbuds will come with slightly larger charging cases. The Galaxy Buds 4 and Buds 4 Pro cases could have a rated battery of 515 mAh, with a typical capacity around 530 mAh.

              This is a small upgrade compared to the Galaxy Buds 3 series, which had a 515 mAh battery. Even though the improvement is minor, it should mean users will need to charge the cases less often. Samsung may also improve the earbuds’ efficiency so they can play music longer on a single charge.

              Samsung Galaxy Buds 3 Pro shipment

              Recently, the codenames and model numbers of the new earbuds also leaked. Samsung calls the Galaxy Buds 4 “Handel” (model SM-R540) and the Galaxy Buds 4 Pro “Bach” (model SM-R640).

              Moreover, some design details have also appeared online. Early sketches show that the Galaxy Buds 4 will keep the stem-style design from the Buds 3 series, with a few small changes. The stems may be slightly reshaped for better comfort and use.

              The Galaxy Buds 4 series seems to bring small but meaningful improvements. Stay tuned for more information.

              Google Search Top Stories Preferred Source

              The post Samsung Galaxy Buds 4 case leak reveals bigger battery capacity appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Here’s everything new you get in Samsung software updates

              If you own a Samsung Galaxy phone like the Galaxy S25 Ultra or S24, you may have noticed that your device often feels faster and smoother after a software update. Even small security patches can make a noticeable difference. Many people assume it’s just in their imagination, but several real-time changes improve your phone’s performance.

              Software updates don’t just fix security issues, as they often include tiny improvements to the system that make users feel better. They refresh your phone in ways you might not see but can definitely feel.

              Here’s How Samsung Software Updates  Make Your Phone Feel Smoother

              1.) System Cleanup

              When you install an update, your phone automatically removes temporary files, logs, and cached data. This “system cleanup” frees up storage and helps reduce memory issues, which makes the device run more efficiently. After a reboot, apps open faster, animations feel smoother, and overall performance improves

              2.) Smarter Task Management

              Even security updates often include small improvements to background task scheduling, Samsung tweaks components such as Device Care, Game Booster, System UI, and SmartThings to manage CPU and GPU resources better. These adjustments help animations stay consistent, apps launch quicker, and scrolling feels more stable.

              Samsung One UI Update

              3.) Performance Reset

              Over time, your phone’s AI performance mode or thermal throttling may slow down the system to prevent overheating. Updates often reset these settings to their default values, allowing the phone to perform at its best temporarily. This reset can make the device feel faster and more responsive immediately after updating.

              4.) Visual and UI Refresh

              Minor changes like smoother transitions, improved font rendering, and subtle tweaks to icons or animations can create a noticeable “fresh” feeling. Even small visual improvements are enough to make your phone feel newer.

              So, Samsung updates do more than keep your phone secure as they clean up the system, optimize background tasks, reset performance settings, and improve visuals. That’s why even minor updates can make your Galaxy phone feel faster, smoother, and more enjoyable to use.

              Source: PhoneArt

              Google Search Top Stories Preferred Source

              The post Here’s everything new you get in Samsung software updates appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Atlanta Film Co. Has Just 350 Rolls of This Gorgeous 120 Format Cine Film

              Seven film canisters on a wooden surface next to a scenic photo of a rocky desert landscape with a large rock formation, sparse vegetation, and a cloudy sky. The photo has a film strip edge at the top.

              Atlanta Film Company has a very limited quantity of 250D 65mm motion picture film that has been hand respooled to fit 120 format for stills photography. Due to a change in motion picture film availability, this is a very limited run that probably won't be back once it's gone.

              [Read More]

              The Most Interesting Items in the 44th Tamarkin Rare Camera Auction

              A vintage Leica camera with a lens cap beside it sits in front of a red Leica-branded case on a white surface.

              The influential Leica I 35mm camera turns 100 years old this year, and Chicago-based Tamarkin Camera, a premier Leica specialist, is celebrating Leica's centenary in style with a Leica-heavy Rare Camera Auction on November 15. Bidding is open now, so here are 10 of the most interesting lots Tamarkin has up for grabs, some of which are expected to sell for as much as $35,000.

              [Read More]

              Xiaomi 17 Pro Max battery life and charging test results

              We've completed our battery life and charging tests on the Xiaomi 17 Pro Max and the results are pretty great. Let's see the numbers themselves. The Xiaomi 17 Pro Max puts its massive 7,500mAh battery to good use. You need to look at the likes of the Oppo Find X9 Pro to find a better Active Use Score. Still, Xiaomi is better in some individual tests—it has 12 hours more in the call test and a few minutes more in the video playback test, reaching the impressive 29 hours of video playback. It should be noted that these tests were carried out with the back display OFF. const...

              Google Pixel 10a leaks in CAD-based renders

              Google launched most of the Pixel 10 family back in August, but one member is still missing: the Pixel 10a, the mid-ranger that will be the cheapest of the bunch. This is now portrayed in the CAD-based renders you can see below, ahead of its possible unveiling in early 2026. At one time it was even rumored to arrive before the end of this year, but the source of these shots now says it will be early next year instead. That still means it will land earlier in the year than its predecessor did, back in March. In the leaked CAD-based renders, the Pixel 10a looks pretty much identical...

              iPhone 20 to drop all traditional buttons

              There have been quite a few rumors over the past few days regarding the iPhone 20 family, expected to come out in 2027 and celebrate the first iPhone launch's 20th anniversary. The latest one concerns something we've heard about before, namely Apple getting rid of all physical buttons and replacing them with capacitive ones. This has been rumored multiple times for previous iPhone generations but never happened. And now a new rumor from China tells us it finally will - with the iPhone 20 handsets. These will allegedly be devoid of any physical buttons, and they'll also come with...

              Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 6 details leak

              The first phones using Qualcomm's Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 SoC have started to come out last month, following the chipset's official announcement, and yet if you have, for some reason, been wondering what to expect from its successor, today a few details have been outed. The Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 6 is probably going to be unveiled in September 2026. It will allegedly be made on a 2nm process by TSMC, and this will enable some great gains in terms of power consumption and performance compared to its predecessor. The 8 Elite Gen 6 is said to support LPDDR6 memory and UFS 5.0 storage,...

              Xiaomi HyperOS 3 launches globally with a host of smart features

              Xiaomi is taking its next big software step with HyperOS 3, an update built on Android 16 that aims to deliver smarter AI features, smoother performance, and a slightly updated interface. The rollout begins with the Xiaomi 15T and 15T Pro in Europe, with more devices to follow in the coming months.

              According to Xiaomi, the global rollout will expand in stages through early 2026. Beta users are the first to receive it—others can check for the update under Settings > About Phone > System Update.

              The initial wave (October–November) covers the Xiaomi 15 series, 15 Ultra, Redmi Note 14, and Poco F7/X7 lineups. From November to December, it is expected to reach the Xiaomi 14 series, Poco F6, and several midrange Redmi models. The final phase (December–March 2026) includes older flagships like the Xiaomi 12 and 13 series, ensuring most recent devices get the upgrade.

              New features:

              One of the biggest additions is Hyper Island, a pill-shaped hub at the top of the screen that combines notifications, live activities, and quick actions into a single space. It works with over 70 apps and services, letting users control music or reply to messages without switching apps.

              HyperOS 3 also introduces several AI-powered tools:

              DeepThink Note Writing – expands ideas into detailed notes or summaries.

              AI Voice Translation – provides real-time, multilingual translation.

              AI Noise Reduction – improves recorded audio clarity.

              Gallery AI Search – helps find photos by content or objects.

              System-Wide AI Search – quickly locates apps and files.

              AI Image Description & Summarization – turns visuals into context or captions.

              Xiaomi says the update brings a 30% boost in overall performance, with apps opening 21% faster, energy efficiency up by 10%, and fewer frame drops in games. More than 100 small animation tweaks also make navigation feel smoother across the interface.

              However, it’s still unclear whether these AI features will roll out across all models or remain exclusive to Xiaomi’s premium devices. Many of the tools, including image generation, are powered by Google AI and likely run on cloud servers rather than locally.

              Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              (Source: Xiaomi)

              The post Xiaomi HyperOS 3 launches globally with a host of smart features appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Redmi K90 Pro Max vs Xiaomi 17 Pro Max: What Sets the Budget Flagship Apart?

              Redmi K90 Pro Max - 2.1 speaker

              In the world of smartphones, the line between “affordable flagship” and “true flagship” continues to blur. With the arrival of the Redmi K90 Pro Max and the Xiaomi 17 Pro Max, buyers now have two powerhouse options from the Xiaomi ecosystem. While both offer cutting edge hardware, the K90 Pro Max delivers near flagship hardware at a more accessible price point. Considering some of their specs are also identical, what’s the difference between the budget flagship and the brand’s true flagship?

              Design & Display

              The Chinese tech giant’s two new Pro Max models feature a very similar design language, with flat rear and front, a metallic frame on the side, and rounded corners. However, the Xiaomi 17 Pro Max’s unique secondary cover display on the back is a key highlight. This tiny 2.9-inch panel can not only display crucial information like date, time, and notifications, but it also doubles as a camera viewfinder, showcases live statuses (active tasks like cabs, music playback, others), features virtual pets, and much more.

              Xiaomi 17 Pro Max

              On the front, Xiaomi equips both the Redmi K90 Pro Max and Xiaomi 17 Pro Max with the same 6.9-inch 2K OLED flat M10 LTPO panel with a 120Hz refresh rate, 3500 nits of peak brightness, DC dimming, and Xiaomi’s Dragon Crystal Glass for protection. So, apart from the cover screen, the visual experience is basically the same.

              Hardware

              Another major aspect that remains unchanged between the two devices is the Qualcomm chip under the hood. The brand offers the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 chipset, built on a 3nm process and designed for high performance. This flagship chip is paired with up to 16GB of RAM and 1TB of internal storage.

              Redmi K90 Pro Max
              Redmi K90 Pro Max

              A massive 7,500mAh battery pack powers the Xiaomi 17 Pro Max, while the Redmi K90 Pro Max barely edges ahead with a 7,560mAh cell. The duo supports 100W wired fast charging, 50W wireless fast charging, and 22.5W reverse wired charging (22.5W reverse wireless charging support on the Xiaomi 17 Pro Max).

              While Xiaomi’s top of the line smartphone gets a dual display setup, Redmi’s premium smartphone also gets a unique feature on the rear. Alongside its camera lenses, there is a dedicated woofer with ‘Sound by Bose’, which is a part of the 2.1 stereo sound field that includes the dual speakers.

              Photography

              Just like how the Redmi K90 Pro Max borrows the display from the 17 Pro Max, the K90 Pro Max borrows its main camera from another Xiaomi 17 series model. It arrives with a 50MP 1/1.31″ Light Fusion 950 sensor with OIS that is also found on the standard Xiaomi 17. This is paired with a 50MP ultra wide angle lens and a 50MP 5x periscope telephoto shooter (a first for the brand). For selfies and video calls, the front houses a 20MP camera.

              On the other hand, the Xiaomi 17 Pro Max packs a larger 50MP Light Hunter 950L main sensor (1/1.28″), 50MP ultra wide angle lens, and 50MP periscope telephoto shooter with 5x zoom. There is also a 50MP shooter for selfies and video calls. Apart from better hardware, this model also brings Xiaomi’s collaboration with Leica.

              Pricing & Final Thoughts

              Lastly, let’s talk about the pricing. Xiaomi sells the 17 Pro Max with a starting price tag of 5,999 Yuan (roughly 841 US Dollars) for the 12GB + 512GB starting option. Meanwhile, the 12GB + 256GB base variant of the Redmi K90 Pro Max costs 3,999 Yuan (roughly 561 US Dollars). The higher 12GB + 512GB option costs 4,499 Yuan. So choosing between the Redmi K90 Pro Max and the Xiaomi 17 Pro Max comes down to what you prioritize most.

              Redmi K90 Pro Max - 2.1 speaker

              If you’re looking for high-end performance, a large battery, and a strong all-around phone at a better value, the K90 Pro Max stands out as a very compelling option. But if you want every premium feature, a richer camera system, a secondary display and the absolute top tier of flagship finishing, the 17 Pro Max delivers that.

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              Tech enthusiast? Get the latest news first! Follow our Telegram channel and subscribe to our free newsletter for your daily tech fix! ⚡

              The post Redmi K90 Pro Max vs Xiaomi 17 Pro Max: What Sets the Budget Flagship Apart? appeared first on Gizmochina.

              OPPO Find X9 Launched Globally with Hasselblad Cameras, Dimensity 9500 Chip & a Massive Battery

              OPPO Find X9

              Oppo has recently unveiled the Find X9 smartphone for the global market, a couple of weeks after its launch in China.

              Display and Design

              Oppo Find X9

              The Find X9 comes with a 6.59-inch AMOLED display offering a 2760×1256 resolution, 120Hz refresh rate, and 3600 nits of peak brightness. It also features 3840Hz PWM dimming for reduced flicker. The design includes a flat aluminum frame and matte glass back, available in Titanium Grey, Space Black, and Velvet Red. It holds IP66, IP68, and IP69 ratings for dust and water resistance.

              Hasselblad Master Camera System

              The Find X9 features the new Hasselblad Master Camera System, developed in collaboration with Hasselblad. It includes a 50MP main camera using the 1/1.4-inch Sony LYT-808 sensor with an f/1.6 aperture that captures 57% more light for better low-light shots. The setup also includes a 50MP ultra-wide camera with autofocus for macro photography and a 50MP periscope telephoto lens based on the Sony LYT600 sensor for optical zoom. A dedicated 2MP True Color Camera analyzes ambient light for accurate color output.

              The LUMO Image Engine improves clarity and tone while using up to 50% less CPU power. It automatically adjusts between 50MP, 25MP, and 12MP modes depending on lighting to balance detail and noise.

              Performance and Battery

              OPPO Find X9

              Powering the device is the MediaTek Dimensity 9500 chipset built on a 3nm process. It delivers 32% faster CPU performance and cuts peak power draw by 55%. The Arm G1 Ultra GPU improves graphics by 33% and works with advanced vapor cooling for sustained performance.

              The phone houses a 7025mAh battery in a slim 7.99mm frame. Using OPPO’s third-generation Silicon-Carbon technology, it maintains 80% capacity after five years of use. It supports 80W SUPERVOOC wired charging, 50W AIRVOOC wireless charging, and 10W reverse wireless charging.

              Software and Features

              Running ColorOS 16 based on Android 16, the phone adds AI tools like AI Mind Space, AI Recorder, and AI Portrait Glow. O+ Connect allows cross-device control with Windows and Mac, supporting screen mirroring and remote file access.

              Price and Availability

              The OPPO Find X9 is priced at €999 (USD 1164) for the 12GB + 512GB variant. Global sales begin in early November 2025, with the Find X9 Pro launching alongside it. Both models will arrive in India in November.

              Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              The post OPPO Find X9 Launched Globally with Hasselblad Cameras, Dimensity 9500 Chip & a Massive Battery appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Insta360 X4 Air launches as its lightest-ever 8K 360° action camera

              Insta360’s latest 360° action camera is proof that big performance doesn’t need to come with bulk. The newly launched X4 Air takes the company’s high-res 8K shooting chops and packs them into a body lighter than most smartphones — a move that could make full 360° capture more spontaneous than ever.

              Announced on October 28, the X4 Air weighs just 165 grams (0.36 lbs) — that’s 38 grams lighter than the original X4. Its 46 x 113.8 x 37 mm matte-finish frame (in Graphite Black or Arctic White) feels purpose-built for creators on the go, slipping easily into a jacket pocket or small camera pouch.

              Under the hood, you’ll find dual 1/1.8-inch CMOS sensors rated at 29MP with f/1.95 lenses, capable of shooting 8K video at 30fps or 6K at 24fps.

              The camera carries over familiar modes from previous models — Active HDR, InstaFrame, timelapse, loop recording, and Road Mode — alongside FlowState stabilization and 360° Horizon Lock to keep footage smooth even when things get bumpy. Through the Insta360 app, creators can reframe, auto-edit, and export clips in minutes using built-in AI tools.

              Insta360 X4 Air

              Power comes from a 2,010 mAh removable battery, good for around 88 minutes of 8K recording (the same as the Insta360 X5) or 100 minutes at 6K. As for charging, it hits 80% at around 36 minutes and 100% at around 57 minutes.

              Pricing starts at $399.99 / €399.99 for the base kit, which includes the camera, battery, and essentials. The Starter Bundle adds an 114 cm invisible selfie stick, lens cap, and spare battery for $439.99 / €429.99. Both are available now via Insta360’s website and Amazon.

              The X4 Air isn’t trying to reinvent 360° cameras — it’s streamlining them. By trimming weight and simplifying operation while keeping 8K clarity, Insta360 may have found the sweet spot for everyday creators who want cinematic results without a full backpack of gear.

              The post Insta360 X4 Air launches as its lightest-ever 8K 360° action camera appeared first on Gizmochina.

              OPPO Find X9 Pro Launched Globally with 200MP Hasselblad Camera, Dimensity 9500 SoC & 7500mAh Battery

              OPPO has launched its flagship Find X9 Pro, introduced globally alongside the standard Find X9, just weeks after their debut in China. The new lineup brings major upgrades in imaging, performance, and battery efficiency, powered by the latest ColorOS 16 platform.

              200MP Hasselblad Telephoto and Triple Exposure Imaging

              The Find X9 Pro features an Ultra XDR Main Camera with a custom 1/1.28-inch Sony LYT828 sensor and Real-Time Triple Exposure technology that captures details across both bright and dark areas in one shot.

              OPPO Find X9 Pro

              Its standout feature is the 200MP Hasselblad Telephoto Camera, developed in partnership with Hasselblad. The 3x zoom lens uses a 1/1.56-inch Samsung HP5 sensor and an f/2.1 aperture, offering better light capture and detailed close-up shots from as close as 10cm. OPPO’s Active Optical Alignment system ensures precise lens calibration, improving resolution by up to 15%.

              OPPO Find X9 Pro

              The setup is completed by a 50MP ultra-wide camera and a 2MP True Color sensor, forming OPPO’s most advanced imaging system yet. The LUMO Image Engine enhances dynamic range, color accuracy, and computational efficiency while cutting CPU and power load by up to 50%. Users can record 4K 120fps Dolby Vision HDR video or LOG footage with ACES certification for professional color grading.

              Performance and Battery

              The Find X9 Pro runs on the Dimensity 9500 SoC built on a 3nm process, paired with 16GB LPDDR5X RAM and 512GB UFS 4.1 storage. The All-Big-Core design delivers up to 32% faster performance while using less power. It packs a 7500mAh Silicon-Carbon battery, the largest ever in an OPPO flagship, supporting 80W SUPERVOOC wired, 50W AIRVOOC wireless, and reverse charging.

              Display and Build

              The phone sports a 6.78-inch LTPO AMOLED display with a 2780×1264 resolution, 1–120Hz adaptive refresh rate, 3840Hz PWM dimming, and 3600 nits peak brightness. It supports Dolby Vision for HDR playback.

              OPPO Find X9 Pro

              Built with a matte aluminum frame and glass back, it weighs 224g and measures 8.25mm thick. It is IP66, IP68, and IP69 rated for dust and water resistance. Available in Silk White and Titanium Charcoal, it combines durability with a premium look.

              ColorOS 16 and AI Features

              Running on Android 16, ColorOS 16 brings smoother animations with Seamless Animation and the Luminous Rendering Engine. AI tools like AI Recorder, AI Portrait Glow, and AI Mind Space enhance productivity and creativity. The new O+ Connect feature allows real-time screen mirroring and cross-device control on Windows and Mac.

              Pricing and Availability

              The OPPO Find X9 Pro (16GB + 512GB) is priced at €1299 (USD 1514). The Find X9 series will roll out globally in early November 2025, with India confirmed among the first launch markets.

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories!

              The post OPPO Find X9 Pro Launched Globally with 200MP Hasselblad Camera, Dimensity 9500 SoC & 7500mAh Battery appeared first on Gizmochina.

              CLAW GH40 Gaming Headset Debuts in India with 50mm Drivers and RGB Lighting

              CLAW GH40 Wired RGB Gaming Headset

              CLAW has launched the GH40 Wired RGB Gaming Headset in India. It is built for gamers who want clear sound, comfort during long sessions, and easy compatibility with different devices.

              CLAW GH40 Wired RGB Gaming Headset

              The GH40 features 50mm dynamic drivers that deliver deep bass and sharp highs, helping players hear every detail like footsteps, gunfire, and ambient sounds. The audio is balanced, making it suitable not only for gaming but also for music and movies.

              It comes with a flexible noise-reducing microphone that keeps your voice clear and blocks background noise. This ensures smooth communication whether you are giving in-game commands or chatting with teammates.

              Designed for long hours of use, the GH40 has a lightweight build, an adjustable padded headband, and soft ear cushions for lasting comfort. The 2-meter braided cable is strong and flexible, while the inline controller gives you quick access to volume and mic mute controls.

              The headset connects through a 3.5mm audio jack, making it compatible with PCs, laptops, smartphones, PlayStations, and Xbox consoles. No setup or software is needed; you can plug it in and start playing right away. The earcups feature multicolor RGB lighting.

              Pricing & availability

              The CLAW GH40 Wired RGB Gaming Headset is available for ₹2,490, with a limited-time offer of ₹1,490 on Amazon.in and Originshop.co.in.

              Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              The post CLAW GH40 Gaming Headset Debuts in India with 50mm Drivers and RGB Lighting appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Dreame launches S1 and S2 Dolby Atmos soundbars featuring 500W-630W output

              Dreame-Pano-S2

              Dreame has officially stepped into the home audio segment with the launch of its first two soundbar systems: the Pano S1 and Pano S2. The S1 targets mid-range buyers at 2,199 yuan ($309), while the S2 is a high-end model priced at 4,098 yuan ($576). Both models support Dolby Atmos and come equipped with Bluetooth 5.4 for wireless streaming.

              Dreame Pano S1 Specifications

              Dreame Pano S1

              The Dreame Pano S1 is a 3.1.2-channel soundbar system with a total power output of 500 watts. It includes a main bar with nine speaker drivers and a separate 6.5-inch wireless subwoofer. The main bar features three full-range units, three tweeters, and two upward-firing speakers for Dolby Atmos. Dreame has used plant-fiber composite diaphragms in the full-range drivers and silk-dome tweeters to enhance audio quality across all frequencies.

              The S1 supports a frequency range from 45Hz to 20kHz. Dreame has designed the subwoofer with an instant-fold surround structure to improve low-end performance. The system includes three sound modes: Music, Cinema, and Game, to suit different types of content.

              In terms of design, the S1 uses a Bauhaus-inspired aesthetic and comes in Walnut Black and Walnut Grey finishes. It features a front-facing LED display and offers input options such as HDMI (eARC), optical, AUX, USB, and Bluetooth 5.4. The soundbar measures 863.4 × 102.2 × 61.5 mm, and the subwoofer measures 192 × 295 × 370 mm. The total weight is 6.8 kilograms without packaging.

              Dreame Pano S2 Specifications

              Dreame Pano S2

              The Pano S2 is a 5.1.2-channel system that includes a main soundbar, an 8-inch wireless subwoofer, and two independent rear speakers. It features 12 speaker drivers in total and delivers 630 watts of peak output. The main bar houses three full-range drivers, two tweeters, and two upward-firing Atmos speakers. The rear units each include two drivers, one tweeter and one full-range, for a more immersive surround sound experience.

              The S2 covers a frequency response from 40Hz to 20kHz. Like the S1, it uses composite plant-fiber and silk-dome diaphragm materials to improve clarity and accuracy across the audio spectrum. The system supports the same three sound modes and uses Bluetooth 5.4 for stable low-latency streaming.

              For connectivity, it includes HDMI 2.1 (eARC/ARC), optical, AUX, USB, and DC input. The Pano S2 features an Obsidian Black finish with a brushed metal nameplate. The soundbar measures 938 × 102.2 × 61.5 mm, the subwoofer measures 192 × 356 × 375 mm, and each rear speaker measures 205 × 102.2 × 61.5 mm. The total weight is 10.4 kilograms without packaging.

              Dreame confirmed that both models were acoustically tuned in collaboration with audio specialists who have over two decades of experience.

              In related news, Dreame has unveiled its V3000 Aura 4K Mini LED TVs featuring 2800 nits peak brightness and Dolby Atmos sound, along with the new 501L cross-door refrigerator offering -32°C deep freezing and VITA humidity control.

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories! 💡

              (Source 1,2)

              The post Dreame launches S1 and S2 Dolby Atmos soundbars featuring 500W-630W output appeared first on Gizmochina.

              iPhone Air production cuts: TD Cowen counters earlier supply chain rumors

              The iPhone Air arrived as Apple’s slimmest flagship yet, but talk of weak demand and slashed production quickly threatened to overshadow its debut. Now, a major analyst firm is pushing back, saying output is holding steady despite reports to the contrary.

              In an October 26 investor note seen by AppleInsider, TD Cowen analysts said their supply chain checks show “no changes” to iPhone Air production for 2025. The firm’s data points to stable forecasts — around 3 million units for the September quarter and 7 million for the December quarter. Overall iPhone 17 series production remains at roughly 54 million and 79 million units for the same periods, suggesting solid demand across the lineup.

              That view directly contradicts a string of more pessimistic reports earlier this month. On October 17, Japan’s Mizuho Securities claimed Apple had reduced iPhone Air production by a million units, shifting focus to other models instead. Days later, analyst Ming-Chi Kuo backed that narrative, citing scaled-back capacity.

              TD Cowen, however, says its conclusions come from direct supplier verification rather than anonymous chain chatter. The firm suggests rival reports may have misread Apple’s short-term manufacturing adjustments. Cupertino’s just-in-time system often shifts builds within weeks based on early sales data — especially when Pro models outsell expectations at launch.

              The iPhone Air occupies a unique middle ground in Apple’s lineup: slimmer and lighter than the Pro but priced higher than the base model at $999. Its launch faced minor headwinds, including eSIM regulatory delays in China and early complaints about its smaller 3,149mAh battery compared to the Pro’s 4,252mAh (eSIM model). Even so, TD Cowen’s note points to consistent output and confidence in the model’s long-term performance.

              The Air’s projected 10 million-unit total for this cycle is modest next to the 50+ million Pro models, but it aligns with Apple’s segmented strategy. As the holiday quarter unfolds, real sales numbers will tell whether Apple’s ultra-thin gamble pays off — or if the early skepticism sticks.

              Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              The post iPhone Air production cuts: TD Cowen counters earlier supply chain rumors appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Galaxy Z Fold 8 could eliminate the crease with a laser-treated back plate, pack 5000mAh battery, and reintroduce S Pen

              Samsung’s foldable lineup has come a long way, but one thing has stuck around since the very first model — that visible crease down the middle of the screen. Now, a new report suggests the Galaxy Z Fold 8 might finally be the one to smooth things out, both literally and figuratively.

              According to Korean outlet Deal Site, Samsung plans to use an ASP laser-drilled metal plate under the main display to eliminate the crease entirely. The component, dotted with microscopic holes to allow bending without stress marks, should keep the screen looking flat while maintaining the device’s signature foldability. The technology was first rumored earlier this year and could debut in mid-2026. Interestingly, Apple is said to be exploring a similar approach for its first foldable iPhone, expected in 2027.

              The report also mentions a welcome battery upgrade — a 5,000mAh (or slightly larger) cell, up from the Z Fold 7’s 4,400mAh. That extra capacity, combined with the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 2 chip, could give the Fold 8 far better endurance, especially when using its large 8-inch inner screen.

              Another detail that may please long-time fans is the possible return of S Pen support. The stylus was dropped from the Z Fold 7 to keep the body slimmer, but Samsung seems to have found a way to integrate the digitizer without adding noticeable bulk. That would help the Fold 8 regain some productivity edge and keep existing Galaxy Fold users from jumping ship to rival brands.

              With Apple’s entry set for 2027, 2026 could be a landmark year for the next generation of folding phones. If things go as planned, the Galaxy Z Fold 8 could arrive by mid-2026, with a starting price of around $1,999 — matching or slightly topping the Fold 7.

              Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              (Via | Image)

              The post Galaxy Z Fold 8 could eliminate the crease with a laser-treated back plate, pack 5000mAh battery, and reintroduce S Pen appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Portronics launches Beem 550 Smart LED Projector with auto focus, built-in stand & Android TV

              Portronics Beem 550

              Portronics has launched the Beem 550 Smart LED Projector in India. The projector targets users who want a portable, easy-to-use home entertainment device with built-in streaming capabilities.

              Pricing and Availability

              It is priced at ₹9,999 ($113) and is available through Portronics.com, Amazon, Flipkart, and other major retailers. The company is offering a 12-month warranty with the product.

              Portronics Beem 550 Smart LED Projector

              Portronics Beem 550 Specifications

              The Beem 550 projects in native 720p resolution and supports up to 1080p Full HD playback. It uses a 6000-lumen LED light source and offers a contrast ratio of 2000:1. Portronics claims the projector delivers clear and vibrant visuals even in well-lit rooms. The device supports projection sizes up to 100 inches with a throw distance ranging between 1.2 and 4 meters. The LED lamp is rated for up to 40,000 hours of usage.

              Portronics has equipped the projector with autofocus and auto keystone correction. These features automatically align the picture and eliminate the need for manual setup. The built-in telescopic monopod stand supports adjustable height and angle, allowing users to set it up on a table or floor without additional accessories.

              The Beem 550 runs on Android TV and includes popular streaming apps such as Netflix, Prime Video, Disney+ Hotstar, and YouTube. It allows direct streaming without the need for external devices. The projector comes with 1GB of RAM and 8GB of internal storage to handle streaming and app operations smoothly.

              Portronics Beem 550
              Portronics Beem 550

              The device features a 5W bottom-mounted speaker and supports common audio formats like MP3, AAC, FLAC, WAV, and OGG. It also provides an AUX output for connecting external speakers or sound systems.

              For connectivity, the projector offers dual-band Wi-Fi, Bluetooth 5.0, HDMI input, USB-A port, and screen mirroring support for seamless device pairing.

              In related news, Portronics has recently introduced the Toad Ergo 4 vertical wireless mouse priced at Rs. 899, along with a compact $320 Pocket Projector capable of projecting screens up to 100 inches.

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories! 💡

              The post Portronics launches Beem 550 Smart LED Projector with auto focus, built-in stand & Android TV appeared first on Gizmochina.

              3D printed and hand-crafted drone breaks 585 km/h speed record

              In a small garage turned workshop, a father and son have built what might be the world’s fastest drone — and it wasn’t made in a lab, but on a 3D printer. The Peregreen 3, a hand-crafted quadcopter designed by Mike Bell and his son Luke Maximo Bell, has reportedly hit 585 km/h (363.5 mph) in a test flight, breaking the previous drone speed record by 27 km/h.

              The record-attempt flight, documented with GPS and onboard video, still awaits Guinness certification as of writing. But it continues a streak for the Bells, who have been chasing speed records for years. Their last model, the Peregreen 2, topped out at 480 km/h — already among the fastest in the world.

              The Peregreen 3’s secret is brute force and clever engineering. Its electric motors pull 16.2 kW at peak power, almost double the output of its predecessor, with energy supplied by a 16 kW battery pack. The entire drone weighs 2.77 kg, a full kilogram heavier than before, but gains stability from custom APC propellers designed to avoid supersonic tip speeds.

              After an early prototype caught fire, the pair introduced a 50 ml water-cooling system to replace air vents and reduce drag. They also reworked the GPS setup, mounting the receiver directly on the camera to eliminate interference. The result: a more aerodynamic, cooler, and faster craft.

              Each flight lasts just under two minutes — full-throttle runs are capped at about 23 seconds to prevent total battery drain. But that’s long enough to prove their point: DIY engineering can still move at blistering speed.

              With a few printers, CAD tools, and a lot of persistence, two builders managed to outrun billion-dollar research teams — and they’re already planning the next iteration.

              Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              (Source)

              The post 3D printed and hand-crafted drone breaks 585 km/h speed record appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Tecno Pop 10 Appears on Google Play Console with Android 15 and Spreadtrum Chip

              Tecno Pop 9

              The Tecno Pop 10 has appeared on the Google Play Console, as reported by TheTechOutlook, revealing key specifications and hinting at an imminent launch.

              Tecno Pop 9 4G
              Tecno Pop 9 4G

              Specs from Google Play Console

              Listed under the model number KM4s, the Tecno Pop 10 comes with 4GB of RAM and runs on Android 15. It is powered by the Spreadtrum UMS9230E processor, which includes two ARM Cortex-A75 cores clocked at 1.80GHz and six ARM Cortex-A55 cores running at 1.60GHz. The phone also features the ARM Mali G57 GPU for graphics. It is worth mentioning that this processor does not support 5G connectivity, but offers 4G LTE.

              Image via TheTechOutlook

              The listing mentions an HD+ display with a resolution of 720 x 1600 pixels and a pixel density of 280 DPI. This confirms that the Pop 10 will focus on basic performance and display quality suitable for daily use. Since the model name is already visible on the Play Console, it is likely that Tecno will announce the phone officially very soon.

              Its predecessor, the Pop 9 4G launched last year with a 6.67-inch HD+ LCD display offering a 90Hz refresh rate. It runs on a MediaTek Helio G50 chipset paired with 3GB of LPDDR4X RAM and 64GB of eMMC storage. In terms of cameras, the device features a 13-megapixel rear sensor and an 8-megapixel front camera for selfies. It ships with Android 14 Go Edition layered with HiOS 14.

              It is powered by a 5,000mAh battery that supports 15W charging. Other features include a 3.5mm headphone jack, a side-mounted fingerprint sensor, and an IP54 rating for dust and water resistance. We can expect its successor to feature an slightly bigger battery.

              Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              (via: Thetechoutlook)

              The post Tecno Pop 10 Appears on Google Play Console with Android 15 and Spreadtrum Chip appeared first on Gizmochina.

              DJI Neo 2 global launch tipped for November 13, starting at $259

              DJI looks set to expand its compact drone lineup again, with the Neo 2 now circling for takeoff. Leaks suggest the updated model will bring a slightly higher price tag — but still stay friendly to casual flyers.

              The brand has recently hinted at an October 30 launch event under the tagline “Everything Under Control.” Now, leaker billbil-kun says that the event will be limited to China, with the global rollout following on November 13. The short delay likely gives DJI time to clear certifications and stock up for the holiday rush.

              The Neo 2’s pricing has also surfaced, showing a small bump over early rumors. The base Fly Solo Bundle—which includes the drone and a single battery—will reportedly start at $259 in the US, £209 in the UK, and €239 in Europe. The Fly More Combo (three batteries, Motion 3 controller, and Goggles N3 adapter) is said to hit $429, while the top-tier Motion Fly More Combo could reach $599.

              In return, buyers can expect meaningful upgrades, including 2-axis gimbal stabilization—a step up from the single-axis tilt setup on the previous model—and omnidirectional obstacle avoidance.

              Even with the price hike, it’s far cheaper than models like the Mini 4 Pro ($759) while promising far better visuals than the original Neo, and is aimed at vloggers and hobbyists who value portability and affordability above all else.

              With billbil-kun’s solid leak record and DJI’s teaser already live, expect full details by the end of the month. The Neo 2 may not just fly—it could easily become this season’s go-to travel drone.

              Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              (Sources: 1, 2)

              The post DJI Neo 2 global launch tipped for November 13, starting at $259 appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Huawei–BAIC Stelato S9: Huawei’s Flagship Smart Sedan Gets a Major Upgrade

              Huawei smart car

              Key Highlights:

              • The updated 2026 Stelato S9 launches in November 2025 under the Huawei–BAIC partnership.
              • Features Huawei’s latest Qiankun ADS 4 intelligent driving system and 800V fast-charging EV tech.
              • Marks Huawei’s deepening move into premium electric mobility through its Harmony Intelligent Mobility Alliance (HIMA).

              A New Step in Huawei’s Auto Journey

              Huawei and Beijing Automotive Group (BAIC) are set to launch the refreshed Stelato S9 in November 2025. The luxury sedan, positioned as a flagship under Huawei’s Harmony Intelligent Mobility Alliance (HIMA), showcases how the tech giant is embedding its smart systems deeper into the automotive industry. This will be the first major update since the S9 debuted in August 2024.

              Although the car carries Huawei’s design and technology, it isn’t built by Huawei itself. Instead, it represents the company’s growing collaborations with major automakers to bring its hardware, software, and smart driving technologies to the road.

              Elegant Design and Refined Details

              The 2026 Stelato S9 retains its large, flowing sedan design but adds new premium styling touches. The front continues with Huawei’s signature “Universe Headlight” layout, now upgraded to the “Brilliant Star River” design. A new “Universe Star” emblem and a “Nebula Through-type” taillight bar give it a more futuristic look.

              With a length of 5.16 meters and a wheelbase of 3.05 meters, the sedan promises spacious interiors, particularly focusing on rear-seat comfort and luxury. Customization options include unique trims, alloy wheels, and electronic side mirrors.

              Intelligent Driving and Power Options

              One of the biggest upgrades is the introduction of Huawei’s Qiankun ADS 4 autonomous driving system. The setup includes 4 LiDARs, 4D radar, and 36 sensors for 360° environmental awareness. This technology enables advanced driver-assistance and semi-autonomous driving features.

              Buyers can choose between two versions: a pure electric (EV) model built on an 800V platform with a range of over 800 km, or an extended-range electric (EREV) model that offers up to 1,300 km using a gasoline-powered generator. Prices start at RMB 309,800 (≈ USD 43,500).

              Strengthening China’s EV Ecosystem

              The Stelato S9 isn’t Huawei’s first car, but it is the first vehicle co-developed with BAIC, expanding Huawei’s automotive footprint beyond its existing Aito, Luxeed, and Maextro brands. This collaboration reflects Huawei’s goal of merging AI, smart sensors, and EV technology into mainstream cars, strengthening China’s position in the global electric vehicle market.

              For consumers, this means smarter, more connected cars at competitive prices, while for the industry, it signals a new phase where tech firms rival traditional automakers in innovation and intelligence.

              Read More:

              The post Huawei–BAIC Stelato S9: Huawei’s Flagship Smart Sedan Gets a Major Upgrade appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Nothing Phone (3a) Lite Price, Storage, & More Leaked Ahead of Launch

              Nothing Phone (3a) Series - Nothing OS V3.2-250717-1803

              Nothing has one more trick up its sleeve before this year ends. While the CEO previously claimed that the Phone (3) series is complete, the Nothing Phone (3a) Lite model was later confirmed, with its launch being right around the corner. But just a day ahead of its debut, the cheapest Nothing phone had its price, storage, and more details leaked. So here’s what we know.

              Nothing Phone (3a) Lite Price & Storage Leaked

              The latest rumor arrives from known tipster Paras Guglani, who shared the details on X (formerly Twitter). PassionateGeekz, as he’s known on X, claims that the Phone (3a) Lite 5G will debut with 8GB of RAM and 128GB of internal storage. It is unclear if there are higher configurations planned, although this might likely be the case. Nothing will reportedly launch the Phone (3a) Lite in two color options, including Black and White.

              Nothing Phone (3a)
              Nothing Phone (3a)

              In the Indian market, this device will target the budget segment thanks to its 18,999 INR price tag. Apparently, the India launch will arrive a short while after the 29th October 2025 global announcement. Meanwhile, first sales are expected to kick off on 4th November 2025. Apart from this, not a lot of details are available regarding this phone, so stick around for more.

              This Next Part is a Secret

              I’ve already seen the Nothing Phone (3a) Lite, and let’s say I can’t reveal a lot of details at this moment. However, I am at liberty to say that the brand will release the Phone (3a) Lite in the Indian market in an exclusive color option. Once again, I can’t reveal the color, but there’s a clue in this article already.

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!

              The post Nothing Phone (3a) Lite Price, Storage, & More Leaked Ahead of Launch appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Oppo Find X9 Series Launch Teaser Reveals India Offers, Enco Buds3 Pro+, and Hasselblad Accessories

              Oppo has launched the Find X9 Series globally along with ColorOS 16. This is the first global smartphone lineup to use MediaTek’s new 3nm Dimensity 9500 processor. Oppo has also confirmed the India launch, and a dedicated microsite is now live on the Oppo India website.

              Oppo Find X9

              The Indian microsite confirms that both the Find X9 and Find X9 Pro will arrive in the country. The Find X9 will be available in Titanium Grey, while the Find X9 Pro will come in Silk White. Oppo will also release the Enco Buds3 Pro+ in Blue and Black, and the Hasselblad Teleconverter Kit for the Find X9 Pro. The kit includes a teleconverter lens, a magnetic camera grip, a magnetic back cover, and a shoulder strap.

              The Find X9 is powered by a 7,025mAh silicon-carbon battery with 80W wired and 50W wireless charging. The Find X9 Pro uses a larger 7,500mAh battery with 90W wired charging. Oppo claims up to 69 hours of mixed use for the X9 and up to 80 hours for the X9 Pro.

              Both phones run Android 16 with ColorOS 16 and are powered by the Dimensity 9500 chip, offering up to 32% faster single-core performance than last year’s models. The Find X9 has a 6.59-inch 120Hz AMOLED display, while the Find X9 Pro features a 6.78-inch LTPO AMOLED screen that reaches up to 3,600 nits of brightness.

              The Find X9 Pro features a 50MP Sony LYT-828 main camera, a 50MP ultrawide lens, and a 200MP 3x periscope telephoto camera, along with a 50MP selfie shooter. The standard Find X9 swaps the periscope for a 50MP telephoto lens.

              Oppo Find X9

              In India, Oppo is offering a ₹99 Privilege Pack with the Find X9 Series. It includes a Premium Gift Box, a free 80W SuperVOOC adapter (via coupon), a ₹1,000 exchange discount coupon, and a two-year battery protection plan. Buyers who skip the pack will still get the Premium Gift Box.

              Oppo will reveal India pricing and availability soon. In Europe, the Find X9 is expected to cost €999, and the Find X9 Pro €1,299, both with 12GB RAM and 512GB storage.

              Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              (Source)

              The post Oppo Find X9 Series Launch Teaser Reveals India Offers, Enco Buds3 Pro+, and Hasselblad Accessories appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Tech War Intensifies: China’s Lithography Breakthrough Challenges U.S. Semiconductor Edge

              China Chip research

              Key Highlights:

              • Chinese researchers at Peking University achieve a world-first visualization of photoresist behavior using cryo-electron tomography (cryo-ET).
              • The discovery could help China reduce reliance on foreign photoresist materials and improve chip yields at advanced nodes.
              • The breakthrough deepens the ongoing U.S.-China tech rivalry, potentially influencing global chip prices and supply for everyday electronics.
              Source: Peking University

              China’s Breakthrough in Lithography Materials

              China has achieved a significant milestone in semiconductor technology that could alter the global landscape in chip manufacturing. A team led by Professor Hailin Peng from Peking University, working with domestic collaborators, has developed a method to reduce defects in chip lithography dramatically. Using cryo-electron tomography, a technique more commonly seen in biology,  the researchers visualized how light-sensitive photoresist materials behave at the molecular level during chip production.

              For the first time, scientists were able to see how photoresist polymers interact in liquid film and at gas–liquid interfaces, uncovering the hidden causes of defects that limit chip yields. The team’s new process reportedly eliminated up to 99% of these defects under industrial conditions, marking a turning point for China’s semiconductor ambitions.

              Why This Matters

              Photoresist materials are essential for defining nanoscale circuits on silicon wafers. Until now, China has depended heavily on imports, with over 90% of its photoresist supply coming from Japan. By developing its own high-performance photoresist and imaging technology, China is moving closer to self-reliance in one of the most critical areas of chipmaking.

              The discovery could improve manufacturing yields in processes like lithography, etching, and cleaning, vital steps for producing chips at 7nm and smaller scales. It also strengthens China’s position in the global semiconductor supply chain, which has long been dominated by companies in the U.S., Japan, and South Korea.

              Implications for the United States

              This development adds fresh urgency to U.S. efforts to maintain technological leadership. While American institutions such as the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) are advancing photoresist metrology and next-generation EUV lithography, China’s rapid progress suggests a narrowing gap.

              The U.S. has invested heavily under the CHIPS and Science Act to bolster domestic semiconductor R&D, including materials and lithography systems. However, China’s success in solving long-standing material science problems shows it is no longer just catching up but setting new benchmarks in applied semiconductor research.

              Whats Next for China and US

              China’s progress in lithography materials signals more than scientific advancement; it’s a strategic move toward technological independence. By tackling one of the toughest bottlenecks in chip production, China is positioning itself as a formidable competitor in the race for semiconductor supremacy.

              For the U.S., the challenge now is to accelerate innovation not just in chip design and fabrication, but in the underlying materials science that powers the future of computing.

              Read More:

              (via)

              The post Tech War Intensifies: China’s Lithography Breakthrough Challenges U.S. Semiconductor Edge appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Garmin Connect app update causes notification issues for Android’s DND users

              Garmin Instinct Crossover Tactical Edition Smartwatch

              Garmin‘s ecosystem has long been a haven for fitness enthusiasts relying on discreet wrist alerts, but a recent app tweak has silenced vibrations—leaving notifications visible but silent on their watches. This unheralded change, tied to the latest Garmin Connect update, has ignited frustration on forums, with the company acknowledging the inconvenience and promising a fix. As users scramble for workarounds, what went wrong in this smart notification sync?

              Garmin Instinct Crossover Tactical Edition Smartwatch
              Garmin Instinct Crossover Tactical Edition Smartwatch

              The problem surfaced with Garmin Connect app version 5.18 for Android, released on October 8. Previously, smart notifications from an Android phone—texts, calls, apps—would trigger vibrations on Garmin wearables, irrespective of the phone’s Do Not Disturb (DND) status. Turns out users valued this for silent phone use while staying alerted via wrist buzz.

              Post-update, DND on the phone now propagates to the watch, suppressing vibrations and alerts while still logging notifications in the watch’s center. This affects all models, with reports on the Garmin Forums detailing missed alerts despite permissions enabled. One Forerunner 255 owner downgraded to 5.17.2, restoring vibes, confirming the app’s role. Exceptions like certain CGM apps bypassing DND still vibrate, but most users face silence.

              Users decried the unannounced shift, especially those relying on watches for subtle alerts in quiet environments. Support responses initially misunderstood, but a shared screenshot reveals Garmin confirming: “Starting with the 5.18 release… DND settings on an Android phone will carry over to notifications on Garmin watches.” They pledged a reversal in an upcoming update, though no timeline was given—potentially weeks away.

              In the meantime, users who find this change inconvenient may try silencing the phone ringer/vibration instead of using DND or downgrading the Garmin Connect app to the previous version.

              Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              (Source)

              The post Garmin Connect app update causes notification issues for Android’s DND users appeared first on Gizmochina.

              HKC launches 27-inch UG27EQ gaming monitor with 400Hz refresh, 0.5ms response & USB-C

              HKC-UG27EQ-Monitor

              HKC has unveiled the UG27EQ, a 27-inch gaming monitor designed for competitive players, featuring a 2K resolution and an ultra-fast 400Hz refresh rate. It is priced at 1,999 yuan ($281) and available through retail channels in China.

              HKC UG27EQ Monitor

              HKC UG27EQ Monitor Specifications

              The UG27EQ uses a 2560×1440 Ultrafast IPS panel that supports up to a 400Hz refresh rate and a GTG response time of 0.5ms. HKC has implemented a new dual-direction drive circuit that speeds up pixel transitions beyond what conventional line-by-line scanning allows. The liquid crystal layer also features a restructured architecture to further improve motion clarity.

              In terms of color performance, the display offers HDR400 support and reaches 400 nits of brightness. It covers 98% of the DCI-P3 color gamut and 130% of the sRGB area, with 10-bit color (8-bit + FRC) rendering over a billion colors. The panel supports DC dimming and includes a hardware low blue light mode to reduce flicker and eye strain during extended gaming sessions.

              HKC UG27EQ Monitor

              HKC has integrated its DIC 2.0 motion blur reduction engine, offering three adjustable levels of dynamic blur elimination. The monitor also features a dedicated Flash Clarity mode that improves visibility in FPS games by automatically detecting flashbang effects and reducing their glare by up to 20%.

              The UG27EQ supports adaptive synchronization with FreeSync Premium and G-Sync compatibility to eliminate screen tearing and stuttering. It also includes HKC’s Gaming Visiondock software, which lets players create custom presets, enable crosshair overlays, use sniper zoom assist, adjust dark-enhancement levels, and activate on-screen timers.

              For connectivity, the monitor comes with DisplayPort 1.4, HDMI 2.1, a multifunction USB Type-C port, and a 3.5mm audio output. The Type-C port supports full-bandwidth 400Hz signal transmission, 15W reverse charging, and fast data transfer.

              The stand supports height adjustment (150mm), tilt (-5° to 25°), swivel (±30°), and pivot (90°) for portrait orientation. The monitor is also VESA-mountable at 100×100mm.

              In related monitor news, Redmi recently launched the Gaming Monitor G34WQ 2026, featuring a 34-inch WQHD curved display with a 180Hz refresh rate. The company also introduced the Redmi Monitor A24 2026 Multi-Function Stand Edition, which offers a 144Hz IPS panel and is priced at just $70.

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories! 💡

              The post HKC launches 27-inch UG27EQ gaming monitor with 400Hz refresh, 0.5ms response & USB-C appeared first on Gizmochina.

              ChatGPT Goes Free in India for a Year And Here’s Why OpenAI Is Doing It

              Chat GPT

              Key Highlights:

              • OpenAI will host its first-ever DevDay Exchange event in India on November 4, 2025.
              • All users in India will receive a free one-year subscription to ChatGPT Go.
              • The move marks a major milestone in OpenAI’s India-first expansion strategy.

              OpenAI’s First Developer Event in India

              OpenAI has announced its first developer conference in India, called DevDay Exchange, scheduled for November 4, 2025, in Bengaluru. The event will focus on connecting with Indian developers, educators, and enterprises, while also introducing new initiatives tailored for the local market. The decision to host this event in India highlights the country’s growing importance in OpenAI’s global expansion and its rapidly developing AI ecosystem.

              One-Year Free ChatGPT Go Subscription

              To celebrate this milestone, OpenAI is offering a free one-year subscription to ChatGPT Go for all users in India. The promotion will begin on November 4 and will apply to both new users and existing ChatGPT Go subscribers. Those who already have an active subscription will automatically receive an additional 12 months of free access. The duration of this limited-time offer has not yet been disclosed.

              What is ChatGPT Go

              ChatGPT Go was launched in India in August 2025 as OpenAI’s most affordable paid plan, priced at ₹399 per month. It provides ten times more usage compared to the free version and includes advanced features such as image generation, file uploads, and improved memory for more personalized conversations. The plan runs on OpenAI’s latest GPT-5 model, offering faster responses and higher reliability.

              https://x.com/nickaturley/

              India’s Growing Role in OpenAI’s Global Strategy

              India has quickly become OpenAI’s second-largest market after the United States, with millions of developers, students, and professionals using ChatGPT daily. The launch of ChatGPT Go led to a sharp rise in paid users, with subscriptions doubling in the first month alone. This growth reflects India’s strong appetite for accessible and affordable AI tools.

              Strengthening the India-First AI Strategy

              OpenAI’s expansion aligns with India’s national “IndiaAI Mission,” which aims to build a stronger AI ecosystem. The company recently opened its first office in New Delhi and is hiring local teams to focus on education, enterprise, and community engagement. OpenAI is also collaborating with government programs and educational institutions to expand AI literacy and access beyond major cities.

              Rising Competition in India’s AI Market

              OpenAI faces increasing competition from other major AI companies targeting India’s large and tech-savvy population. Perplexity has partnered with Airtel to offer free Pro access to 360 million users, while Google is providing a free one-year AI Pro membership for Indian students. These developments indicate a rapidly intensifying race to capture the growing Indian AI market.

              OpenAI’s decision to offer a one-year free ChatGPT Go subscription and host its first DevDay Exchange event in India shows its long-term plans for the country’s AI growth. 

              Read More:

              (via)

              The post ChatGPT Goes Free in India for a Year And Here’s Why OpenAI Is Doing It appeared first on Gizmochina.

              EarFun Air Pro 4+ Launch: Hi-Res Certified Earbuds with aptX Lossless and 50dB ANC

              EarFun Air Pro 4 Plus earbuds

              EarFun has launched its new flagship wireless earbuds, the Air Pro 4+, featuring Hi-Res Audio certification, adaptive hybrid noise cancellation, and a dual-driver setup for $99.99.

              EarFun Air Pro 4 Plus earbuds

              EarFun Air Pro 4+ features

              As per EarFun, the Air Pro 4+ is the first Hi-Res certified dual-driver wireless adaptive ANC earbuds in this price range. Each earbud uses a 10mm dynamic driver and an ultra-light FeatherBA balanced armature, producing deep bass, clear treble, and balanced mids. EarFun’s new Nano Side-Fitted Acoustic Architecture (NSAA) design positions the drivers at an 11-degree angle to reduce interference and improve sound clarity while keeping the earbuds light and comfortable.

              EarFun Air Pro 4 Plus earbuds

              Inside, the earbuds run on Qualcomm’s QCC3091 SoC with Bluetooth 6.0, supporting aptX Lossless, LDAC, and LE Audio for high-quality wireless audio. The QuietSmart 3.0 adaptive hybrid ANC system cuts up to 50dB of background noise using a six-microphone array and AI call enhancement with cVc 8.0 technology for clear voice pickup.

              The Air Pro 4+ also supports Auracast, Google Fast Pair, and multi-device connectivity. It features in-ear detection, which pauses playback when removed, and a low-latency Gaming Mode with a 50ms response time for better sync between audio and visuals. Users can adjust EQ settings and manage updates through the EarFun Audio App.

              Battery life reaches 54 hours in total with the charging case, including 12 hours per charge with ANC off and 8 hours with ANC on. A 10-minute fast charge provides up to 3 hours of playback, and wireless charging is also supported. The earbuds have an IP55 rating for dust and water resistance and are designed using data from 10,000 ear models for a secure and comfortable fit.

              Pricing & availability

              The EarFun Air Pro 4+ is available now on myearfun.com and the EarFun Official Amazon Store for $99.99.

              Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              The post EarFun Air Pro 4+ Launch: Hi-Res Certified Earbuds with aptX Lossless and 50dB ANC appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Oppo Find X9 vs OnePlus 13: Which Flagship Truly Deserves Your Money?

              OPPO vs OnePlus

              Oppo Find X9 and OnePlus 13 go head-to-head as two of 2025’s most anticipated flagships, each representing the best of design, performance, and camera innovation from their respective brands. This comparison matters because both phones share similar DNA under the BBK umbrella but cater to different user priorities, Oppo emphasizing balance and endurance, while OnePlus pushes boundaries in power and display technology. Choosing between them isn’t just about specs; it’s about deciding which flagship philosophy suits you best.

              Major Differences:

              CategoryOppo Find X9OnePlus 13Verdict
              Processor & PerformanceMediaTek Dimensity 9500 (3nm), efficient and balancedSnapdragon 8 Elite (3nm), faster with better GPU and AI powerOnePlus 13
              Display6.59″ AMOLED, 3600 nits peak, 3840Hz PWM6.82″ LTPO 4.1 AMOLED, 4500 nits peak, higher resolutionOnePlus 13
              Battery & Charging7025 mAh, 80W wired, 50W wireless6000 mAh, 100W wired, 50W wirelessOppo (battery) / OnePlus (charging)
              Camera Capabilities50MP triple camera, great color accuracy, Hasselblad tuning50MP triple camera, supports 8K video, better HDROnePlus 13
              Price & ValueApprox. $650, excellent all-round balanceApprox. $700, more premium but pricierOppo Find X9

              Design and Display

              Build and Feel:

              The Oppo Find X9 offers a sleek and compact design, making it easier to handle than most flagship devices. With a refined glass and aluminum frame combination, it gives off a premium, symmetrical aesthetic. Its IP68/IP69 protection ensures strong resistance against dust and water, making it reliable for long-term use. The OnePlus 13, on the other hand, feels more robust and substantial with its Ceramic Guard glass and eco-leather option, adding a touch of sophistication and durability. Its slightly larger size gives it a more commanding presence, but it may feel bulkier in hand. The Oppo model’s lighter and slimmer profile provides a more comfortable grip, while the OnePlus 13 feels like a tank built for endurance. 

              Overall, those who prefer elegance and comfort may lean toward the Oppo Find X9, while users who value strength and craftsmanship will find the OnePlus 13 more appealing.

              Display Quality:

              Both phones showcase exceptional display technology, but they cater to slightly different preferences. The Oppo Find X9 features a vibrant 6.59-inch AMOLED panel with Dolby Vision and HDR10+ support, offering stunning brightness levels up to 3600 nits. Its ultra-high PWM dimming ensures minimal eye strain. Meanwhile, the OnePlus 13 raises the bar with a 6.82-inch LTPO 4.1 AMOLED display, capable of a massive 4500 nits peak brightness. Its adaptive refresh rate and 1440p resolution deliver unmatched clarity and smoothness, especially for gaming or HDR content. 

              While Oppo focuses on color accuracy and compact brilliance, OnePlus offers cinematic depth and visibility even under harsh sunlight. For media enthusiasts, the OnePlus 13 takes the lead in immersive visual experience.

              Verdict:

              The Oppo Find X9 balances portability and high-end visual quality, making it ideal for users seeking a refined, lightweight design. The OnePlus 13 dominates with a more advanced and brighter display suited for multimedia lovers. Overall, OnePlus offers a slightly more premium experience, but Oppo wins in ergonomics and compact elegance.

              Specifications 

              Performance:

              Powering the Oppo Find X9 is the MediaTek Dimensity 9500 chip, built on a 3nm process, delivering remarkable efficiency and thermal control. It excels in multitasking, offering consistent performance with its ultra and premium CPU cores. However, the OnePlus 13 takes performance to a flagship extreme with Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Elite, which features custom Oryon cores and the new Adreno 830 GPU. This combination provides elite-tier gaming performance, AI-driven enhancements, and overall responsiveness that outpaces most competitors. 

              While both devices handle intensive tasks smoothly, the OnePlus 13’s raw processing power gives it an edge in heavy gaming and creative workloads. Oppo’s advantage lies in power optimization, which helps sustain smoother operation under prolonged usage.

              Battery and Charging:

              The Oppo Find X9 comes with a massive 7025 mAh Si/C battery, one of the largest in its class, ensuring remarkable endurance even with heavy use. It supports 80W wired and 50W wireless charging, maintaining balanced heat management. In contrast, the OnePlus 13 packs a smaller 6000 mAh unit but compensates with faster 100W wired charging that fills up 50% in just 13 minutes. Both support reverse wireless charging, yet Oppo’s larger battery gives it a longer screen-on time, while OnePlus’s superior speed minimizes downtime. 

              The choice depends on whether longevity or fast charging matters more. Oppo edges ahead in endurance, while OnePlus dominates convenience.

              Verdict:

              The OnePlus 13 is a powerhouse built for maximum performance and rapid refueling, making it perfect for power users. The Oppo Find X9, however, impresses with its long-lasting battery and efficient power management, ideal for users prioritizing endurance over raw speed. Both excel in balance but serve slightly different user needs.

              Camera

              Main and Secondary Lenses:

              Both devices feature triple 50MP cameras, but the processing and optimization set them apart. The Oppo Find X9, backed by Hasselblad Color Calibration, excels in true-to-life tones, low-light clarity, and balanced highlights. Its periscope telephoto lens with OIS captures crisp zoomed shots, while its ultrawide sensor delivers vibrant landscape results. The OnePlus 13 mirrors this setup but introduces enhanced HDR algorithms and 8K recording support, offering higher dynamic range and better sharpness for professional-grade shooting. 

              While Oppo emphasizes color science and image realism, OnePlus focuses on versatility and video capability. Photography enthusiasts will appreciate Oppo’s detail preservation, while video creators will prefer OnePlus’s comprehensive shooting flexibility.

              Selfie Camera:

              Both phones feature the same 32MP selfie sensor, producing sharp, natural skin tones. The Oppo Find X9 emphasizes realistic texture and accurate exposure, while the OnePlus 13 adds slightly stronger contrast for punchier selfies. Both support 4K video recording and gyro-EIS for stability, making them equally capable for vloggers or video calls. 

              Oppo’s selfie optimization feels more balanced for everyday shots, whereas OnePlus provides a more dramatic, social-media-ready tone.

              Verdict:

              The Oppo Find X9 shines for photography purists who value color accuracy and fine detailing. The OnePlus 13 stands out for its advanced HDR video recording and dynamic shooting options. Overall, Oppo excels in stills, while OnePlus takes the lead in motion and cinematic creation.

              Pricing

              The Oppo Find X9 is priced around $650, while the OnePlus 13 costs about $700. The $50 difference reflects the performance jump and display upgrade that OnePlus provides. Oppo delivers immense value for money with a larger battery, an equally premium camera setup, and superior comfort in hand. The OnePlus 13, while slightly more expensive, justifies its tag with higher peak brightness, flagship-level Snapdragon performance, and cutting-edge materials. 

              For users prioritizing power and display excellence, the OnePlus 13 is worth the extra spend. However, for those seeking balanced performance and endurance at a lower cost, the Oppo Find X9 offers the smarter deal.

              Disclaimer:
              Prices are approximate and may vary based on country, region, and applicable taxes.

              Conclusion

              Both smartphones represent flagship excellence but appeal to distinct audiences. The Oppo Find X9 focuses on efficiency, endurance, and elegant design, offering a balanced all-around experience. The OnePlus 13, meanwhile, pushes boundaries with superior performance, a record-bright display, and top-tier camera versatility. Unique features like Circle to Search, advanced HDR video, and faster wired charging make OnePlus a futuristic choice. Oppo counters with its massive battery, refined ergonomics, and Hasselblad-tuned imaging.

              Verdict:

              For users who value power, display brilliance, and speed, the OnePlus 13 stands out as the ultimate flagship. Those prioritizing battery life, compact handling, and consistent photography will find the Oppo Find X9 the more practical and balanced choice. Both are great, but in slightly different arenas.

              Read More:

              The post Oppo Find X9 vs OnePlus 13: Which Flagship Truly Deserves Your Money? appeared first on Gizmochina.

              A 8.8″ tablet with Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 reportedly in the works

              Oppo Pad 4 Pro

              As tablets evolve from bulky slates to travel-friendly powerhouses, Oppo is rumored to be crafting a compact contender that packs flagship punch. A new leak hints at a compact device wielding the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 and a premium OLED screen, poised to challenge Honor’s dominance in the segment. Could this be the portable productivity beast many creators have been craving?

              Oppo Pad 4 Pro
              Oppo Pad 4 Pro

              Reliable Weibo tipster Digital Chat Station reports Oppo is developing a flagship tablet powered by Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5—the same 3nm silicon debuting in phones like the OnePlus 15. The standout feature? An 8.8-inch OLED display, blending vibrant colors, deep blacks, and likely a high refresh rate for buttery scrolling and gaming. This compact form factor— relative to the iPad mini’s 8.3 inches—positions it as a true one-handed wonder for Android users, ideal for note-taking, reading, gaming, or on-the-go editing.

              Honor kicked off the Elite era with its 13.3-inch Magic Pad 3 Pro, but Oppo’s smaller canvas could appeal to users seeking portability without sacrificing power. It may launch as an Oppo Pad before rebranding to OnePlus globally, expanding reach via BBK’s shared ecosystem—much like the OnePlus Pad 2’s success.

              No firm date exists, but the tablet could accompany the compact Oppo Find X9s in early 2026. This aligns with Oppo’s strategy of bundling tablets with flagships, as seen with the Pad 3 Pro and Find X8.

              While details about the cooling system and overall performance targets remain unclear, the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5’s Adreno GPU should easily handle most demanding tasks. The tablet could go up against the performance-focused RedMagic Astra, offering similar power in a smaller 8.8-inch form factor versus the Astra’s 9.06-inch screen. However, Oppo hasn’t revealed the battery capacity yet — a key spec for a device running such a powerful chipset.

              Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              (Source)

              The post A 8.8″ tablet with Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 reportedly in the works appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Samsung Showcases Galaxy Z TriFold Before Official Release

              Samsung Galaxy Z TriFold

              We finally have the first official glimpse of the long rumored Samsung Galaxy Z TriFold. This device has surfaced in various leaks and rumors, and now, the brand has officially offered a preview that showcases its massive screen real estate. So let’s check it out.

              Samsung Galaxy Z TriFold Preview

              During the K-Tech Showcase, the South Korean tech giant had the tri folding phone showcased behind glass, mounting it as a showpiece. This was the real deal, but there were no teaser videos or render images shared during this event. But Samsung wasn’t too keen on revealing everything just yet, as journalists and other attendees weren’t allowed to hold the phone or use it, which is typical in a tech event.

              Samsung Galaxy Z TriFold
              Samsung Galaxy Z TriFold

              Furthermore, we can only see the two Galaxy Z TriFold from the front. One is completely folded and appears like a regular smartphone, but the other is completely unfurled to show off the massive display size. While the Galaxy Z Fold 7 impressed with its super thin design, Samsung’s first dual hinge smartphone will likely be bulky. Based on what we know so far, the premium foldable will sport a 6.49-inch cover display, while the fully unfolded main screen could reach nearly 10 inches (9.96″).

              It is expected to be equipped with the Snapdragon 8 Elite for Galaxy, with support for NFC, wireless charging, and reverse wireless charging. Samsung is reportedly planning on manufacturing only around 50,000 units of the Galaxy Z TriFold, with its launch being right around the corner. This is all the information we have at the moment, so stick around for more.

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              Tech enthusiast? Get the latest news first! Follow our Telegram channel and subscribe to our free newsletter for your daily tech fix! ⚡

              The post Samsung Showcases Galaxy Z TriFold Before Official Release appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Elon Musk Launches Grokipedia: xAI’s AI-Powered Alternative to Wikipedia

              Grokipedia

              Elon Musk’s company xAI has officially launched Grokipedia, an AI-powered encyclopedia designed to rival Wikipedia. Released as Version 0.1, Grokipedia uses xAI’s Grok AI model to automatically generate, verify, and update factual entries. Musk announced the launch on X, saying the platform is “better than Wikipedia even at 0.1” and added that Version 1.0 will be ten times better.

              Grokipedia

              The first release includes about 885,279 articles created using xAI’s large-scale computing system. The homepage, titled “Grokipedia v0.1,” has a simple design with a clean layout and a single search bar for finding topics. Each entry provides concise summaries backed by listed sources and is updated continuously through the Grok model.

              Unlike Wikipedia, users cannot directly edit pages. Instead, they can request corrections or updates through Grok, xAI’s conversational assistant. The assistant reviews submissions and processes approved changes automatically. Grokipedia is fully open source, meaning anyone can use or adapt its framework.

              Most of the current content is adapted from Wikipedia under the Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 4.0 license. However, some users have raised concerns about missing inline citations and transparency. Public response has been mixed. Many praised the platform’s short, neutral summaries and clean interface, while others pointed out missing context, factual gaps, and potential AI bias.

              Musk said the release was delayed to “purge out the propaganda” and ensure balanced coverage. Despite small technical issues after launch, Grokipedia is seen as an early step in AI-driven knowledge platforms.

              Grokipedia is available at Grokipedia.com, and users can sign in using their X accounts. There are no Android or iOS apps yet.

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories.

              The post Elon Musk Launches Grokipedia: xAI’s AI-Powered Alternative to Wikipedia appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Oppo Find X9 Pro vs X8 Pro: Major Upgrades You Can’t Ignore

              OPPO Find X9 Pro vs X8 Pro

              Oppo Find X9 Pro and Find X8 Pro represent two generations of Oppo’s cutting-edge flagship innovation. This comparison matters because it highlights how Oppo has refined its design, performance, and camera technology to meet the growing demands of premium smartphone users. With both models offering top-tier specs, the real question is whether the Find X9 Pro’s upgrades truly justify the leap from the already impressive Find X8 Pro, or if last year’s flagship still holds its ground in 2025.

              Major Upgrades

              CategoryOppo Find X8 ProOppo Find X9 ProUpgrades
              ProcessorMediaTek Dimensity 9400 (3nm)MediaTek Dimensity 9500 (3nm)Faster, more efficient performance with better thermal control
              Camera SystemQuad camera (max 50MP)Triple camera with 200MP periscope lensMajor leap in zoom clarity and image detail
              Battery5910 mAh7500 mAhLonger endurance with improved battery efficiency
              Fingerprint SensorOptical (under-display)Ultrasonic (under-display)Faster, more accurate unlocking
              Software & OSAndroid 15, ColorOS 15Android 16, ColorOS 16Better AI integration and longer update support

              Design and Display

              Build and Feel:

              The Oppo Find X9 Pro refines the design of the X8 Pro rather than reinventing it. Both share the same sleek aluminum frame and Gorilla Glass build, ensuring durability and premium aesthetics. However, the X9 Pro feels slightly more solid in hand, offering improved grip and better handling thanks to subtle refinements in curvature and weight balance. Its overall design looks more unified and futuristic, maintaining Oppo’s signature luxury appeal. The IP69 rating remains unchanged, but the new model exudes a more polished and premium vibe. The X8 Pro, though elegant, leans more towards a functional flagship design, while the X9 Pro feels more refined, almost art-like in its craftsmanship, giving it an edge in hand-feel and visual allure.

              Display Quality:

              Both devices boast LTPO AMOLED panels with 120Hz refresh rates, HDR10+, and Dolby Vision. The Find X9 Pro, however, introduces a significant upgrade with 3600 nits of peak brightness, compared to the X8 Pro’s impressive but slightly lower 4500-nit output that only triggers under specific conditions. The X9’s color calibration and Ultra HDR image support deliver more vivid tones and contrast balance, making it ideal for HDR media and gaming. It’s smoother, sharper, and more adaptive, while the X8 Pro still remains top-tier for most users. The X9 Pro’s improved PWM dimming (2160Hz) also enhances eye comfort, an understated yet impactful enhancement.

              Verdict:

              The X9 Pro subtly improves on the X8 Pro’s foundation with superior ergonomics and refined visuals. Though the X8 Pro’s display is slightly brighter on paper, the X9 Pro’s visual experience feels more refined and consistent, positioning it as the more premium device overall.

              Specifications 

              Performance:

              Under the hood, the Find X9 Pro takes a leap forward with the new Dimensity 9500 chipset (3nm), a more advanced and power-efficient processor than the X8 Pro’s Dimensity 9400. This translates to smoother multitasking, faster app launches, and better thermal efficiency under load. The X9 Pro also benefits from a more optimized Arm G1-Ultra GPU, making it ideal for intensive gaming and AI-driven applications. Both phones support UFS 4.0/4.1 storage and up to 16GB RAM, ensuring lightning-fast read/write speeds. 

              While real-world differences may be subtle for casual users, power users will notice the X9 Pro’s superior stability during prolonged sessions. Its updated ColorOS 16 and extended software support add long-term value, making it a better choice for future-proofing.

              Battery and Charging:

              The X9 Pro boasts a massive 7500 mAh battery, a major jump from the X8 Pro’s 5910 mAh pack. Despite similar 80W wired and 50W wireless charging, the X9’s larger battery ensures nearly 20–25% longer endurance in daily use. It supports multiple fast-charging protocols, including 80W UFCS and 55W PPS, making it more versatile with third-party chargers. The X8 Pro charges slightly faster due to its smaller size, but lags in sustained usage. The X9 Pro’s efficiency, combined with its new Si/C battery chemistry, results in cooler and more reliable long-term performance, ideal for heavy users.

              Verdict:

              The Find X9 Pro clearly dominates this category with stronger performance, better thermal control, and significantly improved battery life. It’s engineered for demanding users, offering both raw power and endurance that outpace the X8 Pro’s already impressive hardware.

              Camera

              Main and Secondary Lenses:

              The X9 Pro adopts a more streamlined triple-camera setup, replacing the X8 Pro’s quad-lens array with larger sensors and higher megapixel counts. Its new 200MP periscope telephoto lens is a standout, offering sharper zoom detail and better night performance compared to the dual-telephoto system of the X8 Pro. While the X8 Pro offers flexibility with dual zoom levels (3x and 6x), the X9 Pro’s larger sensor delivers superior clarity and depth in most real-world conditions. The new Hasselblad Color Calibration is more refined, producing true-to-life tones with better contrast and dynamic range. The overall photographic consistency in the X9 Pro feels more professional, balancing sharpness and color accuracy effortlessly.

              Selfie Camera:

              Oppo upgrades the front camera on the X9 Pro to a 50MP sensor, a big jump from the X8 Pro’s 32MP unit. The results are noticeably sharper and more detailed, especially in low light. It also supports 4K@60fps video recording, which the X8 Pro matches but with slightly less detail and dynamic range. The X9 Pro’s improved PDAF and AI enhancements make portraits more natural, with better focus and skin tone management.

              Verdict:

              The X9 Pro emerges as a major step forward in camera performance, prioritizing image quality and sensor optimization over sheer lens count. It captures more cinematic tones and excels in both daylight and low-light shooting, giving it a decisive edge over the X8 Pro’s versatile but less refined setup.

              Pricing

              Oppo Find X8 Pro retails around $650, while the Find X9 Pro comes in at approximately $800. The price gap reflects meaningful upgrades, a larger battery, next-gen processor, better camera sensors, and enhanced durability. 

              For users seeking performance longevity, improved photography, and premium feel, the X9 Pro justifies its higher price tag. However, the X8 Pro remains a strong contender for those who prioritize value, offering 90% of the experience at a lower cost. 

              Overall, the X9 Pro offers a more complete package with future-ready hardware that feels worth the premium for flagship enthusiasts.

              Disclaimer:
              Prices are approximate and may vary based on country, region, and applicable taxes.

              Conclusion

              Oppo Find X9 Pro refines the flagship experience with thoughtful upgrades, ultrasonic fingerprint sensor, satellite connectivity, larger battery, and a 200MP periscope camera, making it one of the most feature-rich Android phones in 2025. Its design polish, performance leap, and endurance improvements create a more balanced, mature flagship feel. While the X8 Pro still delivers exceptional value and camera versatility, the X9 Pro stands as a true evolution that focuses on refinement and reliability over novelty. 

              For those seeking the best Oppo has to offer, the Find X9 Pro is the more future-proof and premium choice.

              The post Oppo Find X9 Pro vs X8 Pro: Major Upgrades You Can’t Ignore appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Galaxy Tri-Fold launch delay seems minimal; rumored to debut as soon as this week at the APEC 2025 summit

              Samsung might be ready to pull off its biggest fold yet. According to a new report from The Korea Herald, the company is preparing to show off its first tri-fold smartphone later this week during the Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) 2025 summit in Gyeongju, South Korea, which will take place from October 31 to November 1.

              Inage: Geeky Gadgets

              The long-rumored device, which could debut as the Galaxy Z Tri-Fold or Galaxy G Fold, would mark Samsung’s next leap in foldable design. This launch timeframe aligns with Samsung’s earlier tease of a 2025 launch, but months ahead of most expectations.

              Samsung was originally expected to unveil the tri-fold alongside its new XR headset, which launched last week. According to a report from last month, production issues pushed the foldable’s debut slightly back, preventing a joint launch with the XR. Still, the delay seems minimal — a relief for fans who’ve been waiting years to see Samsung finally bring a tri-fold phone to market.

              Production will reportedly be limited to 50,000 to 200,000 units at launch, suggesting a soft entry aimed at gauging demand before a wider rollout. Initial markets may include the US, South Korea, China, Singapore, Taiwan, and possibly the UAE.

              Pricing, however, won’t be for the faint of heart. The tri-fold is said to start at around $2,800, roughly $1,000 more than the Galaxy Z Fold7. The extra cost likely goes toward the intricacies of this ambitious design and the larger display panel.

              The phone is expected to include a 6.5-inch cover screen that unfolds into a massive 10-inch display, giving users tablet-level space for multitasking and media. Expect S Pen support, refined hinge mechanics with reduced creasing, and tight integration with Galaxy Watches and Buds.

              While the tri-fold will likely remain a niche device, it signals Samsung’s push to compete with rivals like Huawei, whose Mate XT tri-fold gained traction in China. If true, this could be the company’s most daring form factor since the original Galaxy Fold in 2019.

              Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              (Source)

              The post Galaxy Tri-Fold launch delay seems minimal; rumored to debut as soon as this week at the APEC 2025 summit appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Honor X6b Plus Debuts as Budget 4G Phone with 50MP Camera, SGS-certified Drop Protection and 5100mAh Battery

              HONOR X6b Plus

              Honor has launched a new entry-level smartphone called the Honor X6b Plus in the Philippines. The phone sits in the budget category and may remain limited to the Chinese market. It weighs 192 grams, measures 8.39mm thick, and runs on the MediaTek Helio G85 processor, which offers basic performance and supports only 4G connectivity.

              HONOR X6b Plus

              Honor X6b Plus features

              The phone features a 6.56-inch TFT LCD waterdrop screen with a resolution of 720 × 1612 pixels. It supports a 90Hz refresh rate, peak brightness of 780 nits, and shows 16.7 million colors. The display includes an always-on feature for showing the time and notifications.

              The Honor X6b Plus runs on MagicOS 8.0 based on Android 14. It comes with 8GB of RAM and 256GB of internal storage. The Helio G85 chip includes eight cores (two Cortex-A75 up to 2.0GHz and six Cortex-A55 up to 1.8GHz) paired with an ARM Mali-G52 MC2 GPU.

              HONOR X6b Plus

              On the back, the phone has a 50MP main camera (f/1.8), a 2MP depth sensor (f/2.4), and an auxiliary lens. It supports 1080p video recording at 30fps, 10x digital zoom, and modes like portrait, panorama, time-lapse, and HDR. The 5MP front camera (f/2.2) handles selfies and offers beauty, bokeh, and smile capture features.

              HONOR X6b Plus

              The phone includes a 5100mAh battery that supports 35W SuperCharge (11V/3.2A). Connectivity options include dual SIM (4G LTE), Wi-Fi a/b/g/n/ac, Bluetooth 5.1, GPS, and USB Type-C. It also has a 3.5mm headphone jack and OTG support.

              It also includes SGS-certified drop protection, a fingerprint sensor, gyroscope, compass, ambient light, and proximity sensors. The box includes a protective case, pre-installed screen protector, charger, and USB cable.

              Pricing & availability

              The HONOR X6b is priced at PhP 6,999 ($118), but early buyers can get it for PhP 5,999 ($101) along with free Earbuds II valued at PhP 1,299 ($22).

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories.

              The post Honor X6b Plus Debuts as Budget 4G Phone with 50MP Camera, SGS-certified Drop Protection and 5100mAh Battery appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Redmi Turbo 5 Leak Details 1.5K Display, 7,500mAh Battery, and Improved Build Quality

              Xiaomi Redmi Turbo 4

              A new leak from tipster Digital Chat Station has revealed fresh details about the upcoming Redmi Turbo 5. The phone is said to feature a 6.5-inch flat LTPS display with a 1.5K resolution. It will come with a large 7,500mAh battery and support 100W fast charging.

              The device is also expected to have an optical in-display fingerprint sensor, a metal middle frame, and an IP68 rating for dust and water resistance. According to the leak, Redmi has made major improvements in the overall design and build quality, especially in terms of materials and finish.

              Xiaomi Redmi Turbo 4
              Redmi Turbo 4

              Earlier leaks: Dimensity chip and launch timeline

              Earlier reports claimed that Redmi is speeding up the launch of the Turbo 5 to stay ahead in the mid-range market. Tipster Smart Pikachu shared that the phone will be powered by a new MediaTek Dimensity chipset, likely the Dimensity 8500 Ultra. This chip is also expected to appear in upcoming models like the Oppo Reno 15 Pro, Honor Power 2, and Realme Neo 8.

              Previous leaks also mentioned a simple rear camera design, a metal frame, and an ultrasonic in-screen fingerprint sensor. While the older report suggested a larger 9,000mAh+ battery, the latest leak confirms a 7,500mAh capacity. Both leaks agree that the device will support 100W charging and offer full waterproofing, pointing to an IP68-certified build.

              Redmi is now expected to launch the Turbo 5 in November 2025, earlier than the previously reported Q1 2026 window. The Turbo 5 Pro is said to arrive later, in the first half of 2026. Following past trends, the global market may see the same device launch under the Poco brand as the Poco X8 Pro, which has already appeared in European certification listings.

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories.

              The post Redmi Turbo 5 Leak Details 1.5K Display, 7,500mAh Battery, and Improved Build Quality appeared first on Gizmochina.

              iPhone 20 tipped to feature solid-state haptic buttons across all controls

              iPhone 17 Pro / 17 Pro Max

              The rumor mill has been consistently leaking details about the iPhone 18 series that’s arriving in 2026 and even the 20th anniversary iPhone 20 series, which is expected in 2027. A recent leak from tipster Setsuna Digital (via Weibo) offers an early glimpse at what could be a major shift in how Apple’s devices are controlled.

              According to the post, Apple is preparing to move beyond the familiar click-mechanical buttons and into a new era of solid-state controls with haptic feedback, not just for iPhones, but also for its other devices.

              Solid-state buttons with ultrasonic feedback

              Apple iPhone 20 series to feature solid-state buttons, claims Sestuna Digital

              According to the source, by the time the iPhone 20 debuts in 2027, Apple intends to mass-produce solid-state buttons for the power key, volume controls, operational buttons and camera control buttons. Rather than moving parts, these buttons would rely on pressure sensing and “local vibration” feedback to give a button-like feel.

              Prior to that, the leak says the camera control button will be simplified on the 2026-era “iPhone 18”, dropping its capacitive layer and retaining only a pressure-sensing mechanism. Following that, Apple plans to adopt piezoelectric ceramic components to provide the haptic sensation in later models.

              The broader initiative is expected to replace mechanical keys across Apple’s entire ecosystem, including future iPad and Apple Watch models. Internally linked to the long-rumoured “Project Bongo”, the effort reportedly focuses on eliminating accidental inputs while ensuring a consistent and reliable tactile experience for users at scale.

              As these kinds of interface changes tend to require significant validation, the leak suggests this transition is still in the research and refinement phase. The promise is durability (fewer moving parts to break) and new gesture possibilities (firm press, long hold, swipe) but the challenge is getting the tactile feedback and responsiveness right before rollout. Until then, mechanical buttons will likely remain in place while Apple works behind the scenes.

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories.

              The post iPhone 20 tipped to feature solid-state haptic buttons across all controls appeared first on Gizmochina.

              iQOO 15 India launch date officially confirmed, here’s what to expect

              iQOO 15 India launch date-

              After teasing the arrival of the iQOO 15 for the past few days, iQOO has finally confirmed its India launch date. It will arrive as one of the first Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5-powered smartphones in the country. Here’s everything to expect from iQOO’s next flagship phone.

              iQOO 15 launch date for India

              iQOO 15 India launch date-
              iQOO 15 India launch date-

              The iQOO 15 is all set to launch on Nov. 26 in India. The teaser not only confirms the date but also offers a good look at one of the color variants heading to the market. In terms of design, it appears to be a refined version of what was seen on the iQOO 13.

              iQOO 15 specifications

              The iQOO 15’s specifications are no secret since it has already debuted in China. One of its major highlights is that it will be iQOO India’s first phone to run the OriginOS 6 UI.

              The device features a 6.86-inch AMOLED M14 LTPO display offering a 2K resolution and a 144Hz refresh rate. In China, it is available with up to 16GB of LPDDR5x RAM and up to 1TB of UFS 4.1 storage.

              For photography, the phone is equipped with a 60-megapixel primary camera with OIS support, a 50-megapixel ultra-wide lens, and a 50-megapixel periscope telephoto camera. On the front, it has a 32-megapixel camera for selfies and video calls.

              The iQOO 15 is an IP68/69-rated device featuring a metal middle frame and an ultrasonic in-screen fingerprint sensor. It also includes dual speakers, Wi-Fi 7, Bluetooth 6.0, NFC, an IR blaster, and a USB-C (3.2 Gen 1) port. Despite offering a large battery, the phone measures just 8.1mm thick and weighs around 215 grams.

              iQOO 15’s price in India

              At present, there is no information about the iQOO 15’s price for India. However, it is likely to be cost between Rs 60,000 to Rs 70,000 in the country.

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories.

              The post iQOO 15 India launch date officially confirmed, here’s what to expect appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Honor Magic 8 Ultra leak reveals key details about display, chipset, main camera, battery, and more

              Honor Magic 8 Pro

              Honor recently unveiled the Magic 8 and Magic 8 Pro in China. Rumours suggest that the brand is now working on the Magic 8 Ultra to rival the likes of the Xiaomi 17 Ultra, Oppo Find X9 Ultra, and Vivo X300 Ultra. A new Weibo post from a reliable tipster has revealed the key specifications of the Magic 8 Ultra.

              Honor Magic 8 Ultra key specifications leaked

              Honor Magic 8 Ultra specs leak by DCS

              According to the leak, the Honor Magic 8 Ultra will feature the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 chipset. It is said to pack a 6.7-inch LTPO OLED display with a quad-curved design. The screen will support a 1.5K resolution and include an ultrasonic in-screen fingerprint sensor. It will also support 3D face recognition.

              The Magic 8 Ultra’s rear camera setup is tipped to include a 50-megapixel OmniVision OV50R main camera with ultra-high dynamic range. A previous leak indicated that this new sensor would enter mass production in the first quarter of 2026. The rear camera setup will also include a periscope telephoto camera backed by a large sensor, which may offer a 200-megapixel resolution with 4.3x to 7x optical zoom.

              The Magic 8 Ultra is expected to run MagicOS 10 based on Android 16. It is also said to house a large battery of around 7,000mAh capacity. While the latest leak does not mention charging speeds, it may support 120W wired and 50W wireless charging like the Magic 8 Prov.

              According to other reports, the Magic 8 Ultra will debut in the first half of 2026. It is also likely to be accompanied by the Dimensity 9500-powered Magic 8 Mini, a compact flagship phone. As for 2025, Honor is expected to unveil the Honor 500 series in November in China, followed by the GT 2 lineup in December.

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories.

              The post Honor Magic 8 Ultra leak reveals key details about display, chipset, main camera, battery, and more appeared first on Gizmochina.

              OnePlus Ace 6 Turbo full specifications leaked well before launch

              OnePlus Ace 6

              OnePlus has just announced the OnePlus 15 and Ace 6 flagship phones in China, and the rumor mill is already buzzing with information about an upcoming OnePlus phone. There have been reports that the company may unveil the OnePlus Ace 6 Turbo before the end of this year in China. A new report, courtesy of SmartPrix has revealed almost everything about the device.

              OnePlus Ace 6 Turbo key specifications (rumored)

              OnePlus Ace 6
              OnePlus Ace 6

              Designed for the gaming audience, the Ace 6 Turbo, having the “Macan” codename, will feature a 6.7-inch OLED screen that supports a 1.5K resolution and a 165Hz refresh rate. Qualcomm’s new Snapdragon 8 Gen 5 chipset is expected to power the device.

              The Ace 6 Turbo is expected to house a massive 8,000mAh battery with 100W wired charging. For photography, it will have a 32-megapixel front camera and a 50-megapixel (main) + 8-megapixel (ultra-wide) dual-camera setup on the back. It will run on ColorOS 16-based Android 16 in China.

              The Ace 6 Turbo will also have other features, such as an ultrasonic fingerprint scanner, an X-axis linear motor, dual speakers, and NFC. As per a new Weibo post (now deleted) by tipster Digital Chat Station, it will feature a metal frame and weigh around 216 grams. It will be available in four shades, such as Fresh Black, Electric Purple, Shadow Green, and a special customized edition.

              OnePlus Ace 6 Turbo key details by DCS
              OnePlus Ace 6 Turbo key details by DCS

              While the device is almost confirmed to launch in China, the device is also being tested in India for a release. There’s a possibility that it may hit the Indian market too before the end of this year. In China, the device is expected to rival the likes of the Redmi Turbo 5 series, the iQOO Z11 Turbo series, and the Realme Neo 7 series.

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories.

              The post OnePlus Ace 6 Turbo full specifications leaked well before launch appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Retroid Pocket 6 launched with Snapdragon 8 Gen 2, 120Hz AMOLED display & 6000mAh battery

              Retroid Pocket 6

              Retroid has launched its most powerful Android handheld console yet, the Retroid Pocket 6. The device is powered by the Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 chipset and is aimed at users who want smooth emulator performance along with native Android gaming support.

              Pricing

              The Pocket 6 comes in two configurations. The base model has 8GB LPDDR5X RAM and 128GB UFS 3.1 storage, priced at $209. The higher-end version has 12GB RAM and 256GB storage, priced at $259. Both variants support microSD card expansion.

              Retroid Pocket 6

              Retroid Pocket 6 Specifications

              Retroid has retained the same 5.5-inch AMOLED panel from the G2. The screen supports a 1920×1080 resolution and a 120Hz refresh rate. The device also includes additional shortcut keys below the display for better usability. The body measures 210.4 × 86.6 × 17.2 mm and weighs 320 grams.

              In terms of raw performance, the Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 provides flagship-tier power comparable to 2022-2023 Android flagships. It easily handles demanding emulators, high-end Android games, and high-frame-rate content without noticeable lag or stutter.

              Retroid Pocket 6

              The console houses a 6000mAh battery supporting 27W fast charging and features an active cooling system to sustain performance during longer sessions. For connectivity, it includes Wi-Fi 7, Bluetooth 5.3, and a USB 3.1 Type-C port with DisplayPort 4K@60fps output, enabling direct connection to TVs or monitors.

              The handheld also includes analog L2/R2 triggers, hall-effect 3D joysticks, and a 3.5mm headphone jack. It runs Android 13 and features official OTA support for incremental software updates.

              Shipping for the Retroid Pocket 6 is scheduled to begin in early January 2026.

              In related handheld news, Ayaneo recently introduced the Pocket Air Mini, a compact Android gaming handheld featuring the Helio G90T chip, 4.2-inch LCD, Hall joysticks, and active cooling, starting at $69.99.

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories! 💡

              (Source, Via)

              The post Retroid Pocket 6 launched with Snapdragon 8 Gen 2, 120Hz AMOLED display & 6000mAh battery appeared first on Gizmochina.

              OnePlus 15 gets a magnetic case with fidget dot features

              OnePlus Custom Dot Magnetic Case

              OnePlus has introduced a new range of official magnetic cases for the OnePlus 15, announced at the end of its latest launch event. The lineup includes three versions: a heat-dissipation “Custom Dot” case, an aramid fiber case, and a sandstone-textured variant. All models support the Oppo Mag magnetic ecosystem and are tailored to fit the OnePlus 15 precisely.

              OnePlus Custom Dot Magnetic Case

              Design Details

              The Custom Dot Magnetic Case features a perforated matrix design that allows users to insert small red silicone blocks to create custom letters, shapes, or patterns. These blocks also double as pressable elements that provide a satisfying, stress-relieving tactile experience similar to fidget toys.

              OnePlus has designed the hollow structure to improve airflow and cooling during gaming or charging. The case uses polycarbonate material that retains the feel of a bare phone while enhancing protection against scratches and drops.

              The case includes a built-in magnetic ring that delivers up to 10N of magnetic force. It works with the Oppo Mag ecosystem, allowing users to attach wireless charging banks, cooling fans, magnetic stands, or car mounts.

              OnePlus Custom Dot Magnetic Case

              The case has passed multiple tests covering magnet strength, material endurance, and overall reliability. It weighs 25 grams and measures 16.36 × 8.03 × 1.29 cm. It uses a combination of polycarbonate, silicone, and magnetic materials to offer strength, flexibility, and conductivity.

              The aramid fiber case provides a thinner and more rugged option with a high-tech woven finish. The sandstone version uses OnePlus’s classic textured design for better grip.

              Pricing and Availability

              The Custom Dot magnetic case costs 99 yuan ($14), or 69 yuan ($10) in a bundle. The aramid fiber case is priced at 199 yuan ($28), or 169 yuan ($24) in a bundle. The sandstone version also costs 99 yuan ($14) individually and 69 yuan ($10) in a bundle.

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories! 💡

              The post OnePlus 15 gets a magnetic case with fidget dot features appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Insta360 X4 Air Launches: 8K 360 Video Just Got Affordable at $399

              insta360 x4 air camera 5

              If you’re looking for a 360-degree camera, Insta360 has become more or less the standard. But if the Insta360 X5 is a bit out of your price range, the company unveiled the Insta360 X4 Air today. This is a compact 360-degree camera that brings 8K video recording to creators who have a smaller budget.

              Meet the new Insta360 X4 Air

              The X4 Air captures 8K 360-degree video at 30fps and 4K at 50fps. It features dual 1/1.8-inch CMOS sensors that can deliver vibrant colors. But this doesn’t mean it can’t take photos. If you have to take photos, they max out at 29MP. This is lower than Insta360’s flagship models, although it should be more than enough for most creators.

              While it is cheaper than the X5, Insta360’s FlowState stabilization, 360-degree horizon lock, and Invisible Selfie Stick effect are all here. The camera is waterproof up to 15 meters without extra housing and weighs just 165 grams (46 x 113.8 x 37 mm), making it 30 grams lighter than its predecessors.

              The camera has a built-in 2,010mAh battery that runs for 90 minutes on 8K while charging fully in 57 minutes. Another standout feature is the user-replaceable lenses. This means you can swap them out easily if they get scratched. Other features include gesture control, voice activation, and twist-to-record, perfect for solo vloggers.

              insta360 x4 air camera 7
              insta360 x4 air camera 6
              insta360 x4 air camera 5
              insta360 x4 air camera 4
              insta360 x4 air camera 3
              insta360 x4 air camera 2
              insta360 x4 air camera 1
              insta360 x4 air camera 7
              insta360 x4 air camera 6
              insta360 x4 air camera 5
              insta360 x4 air camera 4
              insta360 x4 air camera 3
              insta360 x4 air camera 2
              insta360 x4 air camera 1

              How it stacks up against the X4 and X5

              The X4 Air sits below the X4 and X5 in Insta360’s lineup. While it sacrifices some photo resolution and slow-motion frame rates, it retains important features like stability and immersive shooting capabilities. 

              The Insta360 GO Ultra, which launched earlier this year at $449, offers a different form factor with a wearable design. Meanwhile, competitors like the DJI Osmo Nano are also targeting budget-conscious creators with similar pricing strategies.

              For casual users who want to experiment with 360 content or creators stepping up from smartphone cameras, the X4 Air is a good place to start. It’s priced around $399 at launch. This is less than the $500+ X4 and $550+ X5 when they first launched. The Insta360 X4 Air is available now on the company’s official site, Amazon, and select retailers globally. It also comes with a free one-year subscription to Insta360+.

              The post Insta360 X4 Air Launches: 8K 360 Video Just Got Affordable at $399 appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Age Check Hits Play Store: You Might Need an ID to Download Some Apps

              oplus 3145728

              On app stores like Apple’s and the Google Play Store, there are certain applications that are designed for adults. Now, it looks like Google wants to implement age verification across the board, requiring users to show proof they are 18 or older to download certain “mature” apps from the Play Store.

              Google Play Store needs proof of your age

              This is according to a post on X by Artem Russakovskii, where he shared screenshots of the age verification system in action. Basically, users need to show Google proof of their age, if not they might not be able to download many apps from the Play Store. This is part of Google’s larger efforts at identifying the ages of their users on search and YouTube.

              Based on the screenshots, users have several ways of verifying their age. This comes in the form of uploading a government-issued ID, taking a selfie, using a credit card, or using a third-party service. If you’re already using a credit card in your name to buy from the Play Store, we reckon this shouldn’t be an issue.

              At the moment, it is unclear what kind of limitations users might face if they do not verify their age. Presumably, at the very least, they will be blocked from downloading apps designated for adults. However, if the limitations go beyond that, it is going to be very annoying.

              Not Google’s fault

              Now, you might think that this is just Google’s way of collecting more information on you. That was our first instinct too. However, according to Russakovskii, Google isn’t entirely to blame for this. According to him, Google is just adhering to the law. In the US alone, there are several states that have implemented age verification requirements. This is also true for other countries like the UK.

              Google obviously needs to play nice with these states and countries if it wants to keep operating in them. However, for users, these extra steps will be a pain. It would be less of an issue if the process were seamless. But we’ve already seen Google’s reliance on AI has resulted in adults getting banned.

              google play store proof artem russakovskii 1
              google play store proof artem russakovskii 2
              google play store proof artem russakovskii 1
              google play store proof artem russakovskii 2

              The post Age Check Hits Play Store: You Might Need an ID to Download Some Apps appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Best Google Pixel 9a Cases & Accessories

              Google Pixel 9a AM AH 14

              Launched in March of this year, the Google Pixel 9a has quickly become a favorite for those seeking a powerful yet affordable smartphone experience. Its impressive photographic features have also helped its popularity. To help you protect and enhance this device, we’ve scoured the market for the best cases and accessories so you don’t have to. Below you will find our top pick that will cover most of your needs and requirements.

              Best Google Pixel 9a Case

              For a great blend of style, protection, and a slim profile, the Spigen Liquid Air is our top choice for the best overall case for the Google Pixel 9a.

              Spigen Liquid Air
              $29.99
              google pixel 9a Liquid Air case accesories

              The Spigen Liquid Air’s matte black finish with a subtle geometric pattern not only looks modern; it also provides an excellent grip, significantly reducing the chances of accidental slips. This case is crafted from a flexible TPU material that is easy to install and feels comfortable in hand.

              Despite its lightweight and slender design, the Liquid Air doesn’t compromise on protection. It features Spigen’s Air Cushion Technology in the corners to absorb shock from drops and bumps. The raised edges around the screen and camera provide an extra layer of defense against scratches when you place your phone on flat surfaces. It’s a case that offers substantial protection without adding unnecessary bulk, making it ideal for everyday use.

              • Colors: Mate Black, Navy Blue, Abbys Green, Marble Gray
              • Wireless Charging Support: Yes
              • Build Materials: Textured thermoplastic polyurethane
              • Recycled materials: N/A
              • Dimensions: 152.4 x 76.2 x 10.16 mm
              • Weight: 11.96 grams
              Buy at

              Best Google Pixel 9a Case for Grip

              If a secure hold is your primary concern, the dbrand Grip Case is second to none. Engineered with a unique micro-etched texture on the sides, this case offers an exceptional level of grip that inspires confidence when holding your Google Pixel 9a.

              dbrand Grip Case
              Starts at $59.90
              google pixel 9a Spigen Thin Fit MagFit case accesories

              The tactile feedback from the textured rails on dbrand’s Grip Case ensures that the phone stays firmly in your hand, preventing accidental drops.

              Beyond its grippy exterior, the dbrand Grip Case provides military-grade impact protection. So, you can be sure your device is safe from everyday tumbles. One of the standout features of this case is its customizability. You can pair it with a wide array of dbrand’s signature skins to personalize the look of your Google Pixel 9a. So, this case will not only offer you a secure grip, but you will also be able to adapt it to your unique style.

              • Colors: Dozens to choose from, literally
              • Wireless Charging Support: Yes
              • Build Materials: Textured silicon
              • Recycled materials: N/A
              • Dimensions: N/A
              • Weight: N/A
              Buy at dbrand

              Best Ultra-Thin Google Pixel 9a Case

              Among case users, there are many who want to protect their phone from scratches and scuffs without adding bulk. For these cases, the Spigen Thin Fit MagFit case is an ideal solution.

              Spigen Thin Fit MagFit
              $39.99
              google pixel 9a Thin Fit MagFit case accesories

              As one of the thinnest cases on the market, the Spigen Thin Fit adds virtually no bulk to your phone, preserving its original form factor and feel. The case is so slim that you’ll barely notice it’s there if the color matches that of your device. As a bonus, it integrates a magnet to add compatibility with MagSafe accessories.

              This Spigen case is designed with precision, ensuring a snug fit and easy access to all buttons and ports. It features a subtle lip around the camera to protect the lens without adding bulk. While it won’t offer the same level of drop protection as a thicker case, it excels at preventing the everyday nicks and scratches that can blemish your device.

              • Colors: Black, Navy Blue
              • Wireless Charging Support: Yes
              • Build Materials: Polycarbonate, Thermoplastic Polyurethane
              • Recycled materials: N/A
              • Dimensions: 152.4 x 76.2 x 10.16 mm
              • Weight: 11.86 grams
              Buy at

              Best Google Pixel 9a Rugged Case

              When it comes to robust protection, the OtterBox Commuter Series is a top contender case for the Google Pixel 9a.

              OtterBox Commuter Series
              $39.99
              OtterBox Google Pixel 9a Commuter Series Case

              The OtterBox Commuter Series case is built with a dual-layer design, featuring a soft inner slipcover and a hard outer shell. Both work together to absorb and deflect impact from drops and falls. It’s a case designed for those who lead an active lifestyle or work in demanding environments. It even boasts of exceed 3x the MIL-STD-810G 516.6 military drop standards.

              The Commuter Series also includes port covers to block out dust, dirt, and lint from getting into the jacks and ports. Despite its rugged construction, it maintains a relatively slim profile that allows for easy pocketability.

              • Colors: Black, Blue
              • Wireless Charging Support: Yes
              • Build Materials: Polycarbonate, Silicone
              • Recycled materials: A minimum of 35% recycled plastic
              • Dimensions: 164.59 x 80.51 x 14.98 mm
              • Weight: 81.64 grams
              Buy at
              Buy at OtterBox

              Best Google Pixel 9a Case with a Kickstand

              Maybe you are looking for both rugged protection and the convenience of a built-in kickstand. In this case, the Spigen Tough Armor AI (MagFit) for the Google Pixel 9a is an excellent choice.

              Spigen Tough Armor AI (MagFit)
              $21.99
              google pixel 9a series spigen case tough armor ai magfit

              This case provides heavy-duty defense with its combination of a shock-absorbent TPU interior and a durable polycarbonate exterior. It’s also fortified with Air Cushion Technology for superior drop protection. It even has magnets to support MagSafe gadgets and accessories.

              The integrated kickstand is a standout feature. It allows for hands-free viewing in landscape mode, perfect for watching videos or making video calls. The kickstand sits flush with the back of the case when not in use, maintaining a sleek profile. The Tough Armor offers a sweet balance of functionality and protection for your Google Pixel 9a.

              • Colors: Black, Navy Blue, Abbys Green, Metal Slate
              • Wireless Charging Support: Yes
              • Build Materials: Polycarbonate, Thermoplastic Polyurethane
              • Recycled materials: N/A
              • Dimensions: 152.4 x 76.2 x 10.16 mm
              • Weight: 56.7 grams
              Buy at

              Best Google Pixel 9a Leather Case

              For those who like to put some premium fashion on their phones, the Bellroy Leather Case for the Google Pixel 9a is the ultimate choice.

              Bellroy Leather Case
              $45
              Google Pixel 9a Bellroy Leather Case

              Like other leather cases from Bellroy, this one is designed in direct collaboration with Google. This guarantees a perfect fit and smooth, seamless access to every feature of your Google Pixel 9a.

              Crafted from eco-tanned leather, the case doesn’t just protect your phone—it evolves, gaining a unique patina over time. It keeps a remarkably slim profile yet delivers serious protection. You’ll find a soft microfiber lining inside to cushion your phone, plus subtly raised edges that safeguard the screen and camera. If you value genuine leather and precision design, this is your case.

              • Colors: Terracotta, Agave, Black
              • Wireless Charging Support: Yes
              • Build Materials: Leather
              • Recycled materials: N/A
              • Dimensions: 159 x 78 x 12 mm
              • Weight: 29.4 grams
              Buy at Bellroy
              Buy at

              Best Google Pixel 9a Wallet Case

              To simplify your daily carry, the Smartish Wallet Slayer Vol. 1 for the Google Pixel 9a is a nice solution.

              TORRO Leather Wallet Case
              $34.99
              TORRO Leather Wallet Case Card Slots Google Pixel 9a

              The TORRO Folio Case is an elegant way to protect your device. Made from genuine top-grain leather, it promises a classic look and exceptional durability that ages beautifully over time.

              Inside, the case features a soft microfiber lining to safeguard your screen. Its true advantage lies in the utility: multiple card slots replace your wallet, and a simple fold creates a built-in stand for media viewing. The TORRO case offers robust protection that never sacrifices the sophisticated touch of premium leather.

              • Colors: Black
              • Wireless Charging Support: Yes
              • Build Materials: Leather
              • Recycled materials: 12% Recycled Polyester
              • Dimensions: N/A
              • Weight: 110 grams
              Buy at

              Best Google Pixel 9a Screen Protector

              Protecting the display of your Google Pixel 9a is essential. The Supershieldz Tempered Glass Screen Protector offers high-quality protection at an affordable price.

              Supershieldz Tempered Glass Screen Protector
              $7.99
              Supershieldz Google Pixel 9a Tempered Glass Screen Protector

              Made from high-quality tempered glass, it provides excellent scratch resistance and can withstand minor impacts. It’s a nice option to keep your screen in pristine condition.

              The Supershieldz screen protector is designed to be highly transparent, ensuring that you don’t lose any of the vibrant colors or sharpness of your Google Pixel 9a’s display. It also features a hydrophobic and oleophobic coating to reduce smudges and fingerprints. The package typically includes multiple protectors, making it a great value and ensuring you have a spare on hand.

              Colors: Clear
              Build Materials: Glass
              Dimensions: N/A
              Weight: N/A

              Buy at

              Best Google Pixel 9a Wireless Charger

              For the best wireless charging experience with your Google Pixel 9a, the official Google Pixel Stand (2nd Gen) is the top choice.

              Google Pixel Stand
              $38.45
              Google Stand Wireless Charger

              This wireless charger is designed to provide fast and efficient wireless charging. Plus, it turns your Pixel into a smart display while it powers up. You can use it to control smart home devices, display your favorite photos, and more.

              The Pixel Stand is a premium accessory that not only charges your phone quickly but also enhances its functionality. It comes with a power adapter and cable, so you have everything you need to get started right out of the box. For a seamless and feature-rich charging experience, the Pixel Stand is an excellent investment.

              • Colors: White
              • Wireless Charging Support: Yes
              • Build Materials: Plastic
              • Recycled materials: N/A
              • Dimensions: N/A
              • Weight: 5 grams
              Buy at

              Best Google Pixel 9a Wired Charger/Power Brick

              The Google Pixel 9a doesn’t come with a power brick in the box. If you don’t have one at home, the Anker 312 Charger (30W) is an excellent and affordable option for fast charging.

              Anker 312 Charger (30W)
              $19.99
              Anker 312 Charger Power Brick 30W

              This compact and powerful charger can charge your Google Pixel 9a at its maximum supported speed via USB-C.

              The Anker 312 features a foldable plug, making it incredibly portable and perfect for travel. It also incorporates Anker’s safety features to protect your device from overcharging and overheating. For a reliable, fast, and compact charging solution, the Anker 312 is a must-have accessory for your handset.

              • Colors: Aurora White, Lilac Purple, Misty Blue, Natural Green, Phantom Black
              • Build Materials: Plastic
              • Recycled materials: N/A
              • Dimensions: N/A
              • Weight: 45.36 grams
              Buy at

              The post Best Google Pixel 9a Cases & Accessories appeared first on Android Headlines.

              This UGREEN car charger covers the whole family for only $35

              UGREEN 145W Car Charger Deal

              If you’ve ever been on a car trip with the family, then you know how irritating it can be if everyone needs to charge their devices and there’s not enough charging ports to go around. That’s why this deal on the UGREEN 145W retractable car charger is such a good deal. For $34.99, you get a car charger that can charge up to four devices at once. Not only that, but it has one of the USB-C cables already available as it retracts into the charger when not in use. Then, there are three other ports available, so you can plug three more cables in to charge three additional devices. Normally, this car charger would cost you $50.

              That price means this is 30% off right now, and it’s the lowest price in the last 30 days. Just imagine, for $35, you could solve everyone’s charging problems for the next family road trip. Alternatively, this serves as a great way to charge several of your own devices at a time. Like your phone, earbuds, and maybe a gaming handheld if you take one with you everywhere you go. And with a 145W output, you have plenty of juice to charge everything simultaneously. It’s also worth noting that this has enough power to charge your laptop.

              While you could probably find a car charger for less money, it probably won’t be as good as this one or as useful.

              Lowest Price
              UGREEN 145W 4-Port Car Charger

              UGREEN 145W 4-Port Car Charger – $34.99

              Buy from

              The post This UGREEN car charger covers the whole family for only $35 appeared first on Android Headlines.

              The 2024 Motorola razr at $400 is a price you can be proud to pay

              Motorola Razr AM AH 06

              There aren’t many excellent phones you can pick up for a price under $500, which is what makes this deal on the 2024 Motorola razr so good and, dare we say, tempting. At its normal price of $699.99, the 2024 Motorola razr is a pretty good value, but at its current sale price of $399.99, it’s almost like you’re stealing from Motorola and Amazon.

              This is a 43% discount for a foldable smartphone, which is evidence of two things. One, foldable smartphone prices are likely starting to come down to more reasonable levels, and Amazon probably has some stock of this phone that it’s trying to chew through. Either way, if you like the idea of a foldable phone but have held off because of the cost, now is the perfect time to get this one.

              The 2024 Motorola razr is powered by a 4,200mAh battery that should last you all day and then some. The phone has pretty fast charging as well. So when the battery drains completely, it shouldn’t take long to power the phone back up. It has a 50MP camera for photos as well, and it comes unlocked so it can work on any major US carrier. The large cover screen display isn’t just for show. It can display the time, date, and even run several apps, allowing you to interact with some of the phone’s features.

              Lowest Price
              Motorola razr 2024 256GB

              Motorola razr 2024 256GB – $399.99

              Buy from

              The post The 2024 Motorola razr at $400 is a price you can be proud to pay appeared first on Android Headlines.

              OPPO Find X9 Pro Review: Hasselblad Optics, Monster Battery, No Compromises

              OPPO Find X9 Pro featuredAM AH

              Ah, the OPPO Find X9 series. One of my favorite smartphone series out right now. Why? Well, it’s got everything I love about OnePlus, with a more efficient chip and a more versatile camera system. At least, that was the case with the Find X8 and Find X8 Pro. Is that still the case for the Find X9 Pro this year? Let’s find out.

              OPPO Find X9 Pro
              Rating
              star star star star star_empty star
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH

              The OPPO Find X9 Pro takes everything we loved about last year’s model and turns it up a notch — with a sleek new flat design, a powerhouse Dimensity 9500 chip, and one of the best battery experiences you’ll find on any flagship.

              Pros

              • Incredible build quality and design
              • Gorgeous display
              • Excellent performance
              • Massive 7,500mAh battery
              • Great thermal management
              • Smooth, refined software

              Cons

              • Not officially sold in the US
              • No charger in the box (for EU)
              • Minor software quirks
              • No Alert Slider
              • The best color is exclusive to China

              OPPO did invite us to London for a pre-briefing of the new Find X9 series in early October. OPPO paid for lodging and transportation, but this is not a paid or sponsored review. OPPO did not see this review before it was published.

              OPPO Find X9 Pro Specs

              OPPO Find X9 Pro Specs
              Display 6.78″ FHD+, LTPO AMOLED 120Hz
              Processor MediaTek Dimensity 9500
              RAM 12GB/16GB
              Storage 256GB, 512GB and 1TB (UFS 4.1)
              Cameras 50MP primary; 200MP 3x periscope telephoto; 50MP ultrawide
              Battery 7,500mAh
              Charging 80W wired, 50W wireless
              Colors Silk White, Titanium Charcoal, Velvet Red
              View Device Specs

              OPPO Find X9 Pro Review: Build Quality and Design

              Much like the OnePlus 15, the OPPO Find X9 Pro also underwent some big design changes this year. The curved display is now gone in favor of a flat one. The round camera module is also gone. It’s now a squircle in the left hand corner. The sides are now fully flat, and reminds me a lot of the iPhone. Which has been a trend for smartphones over the past couple of years. Not that it should be a surprise.

              We have the silk white color here, which actually looks really nice. I definitely would have liked to get the Velvet Red color, but that is exclusive to China unfortunately. While the name says “silk” it is not slippery at all. In fact, that is the single biggest upgrade over the Find X8 Pro from last year, at least for me. I had the Pearl White Find X8 Pro and it was so slippery, like holding a bar of soap. So thank goodness OPPO fixed that this year.

              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 03
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 5
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 4
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 3
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 2
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 1
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 03
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 5
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 4
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 3
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 2
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 1

              The Alert Slider is also gone this year, which we expected. After all, OnePlus and OPPO both announced this would happen a few months ago. Not to mention, the Find X8 Ultra also ditched the Alert Slider. Instead, we have the AI Key, which opens up Mind Space. Something we’ll talk more about in a bit. The right side still has the camera button which is capacitive – something Apple still hasn’t learned – as well as the power and volume rocker. With the USB-C port, SIM card slot and speaker on the bottom.

              In the hand, the OPPO Find X9 Pro does feel really good. It’s one of the best feeling phones in the hand in quite some time. Part of this comes down to the overall size as well. It measures in at 161.3 x 76.5 x 8.3mm thick, which is actually pretty small. And that’s despite having a 6.78-inch display. Remember the bezels are incredibly thin here, we’re looking at about 1.15mm.

              If you’ve used an OPPO phone before, then you know what to expect from the build quality. Which is a pretty incredible feeling piece of tech in the hand, that feels nice and solid as well.

              OPPO Find X9 Pro Review: Display

              Moving onto the display, this display looks incredible and offers thin bezels with insane brightness. We’re looking at a 6.78-inch display here, with 1.15mm thick bezels, and up to 3,600nits of peak brightness – or 1,800nits in high brightness mode. That said, I’ve not had any issues seeing this display outdoors, and no one should, even in direct sunlight.

              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 11

              The color reproduction on this panel is also incredible. It’s truly one of the best displays I’ve seen in quite some time on a smartphone. I truly enjoyed watching content on this display, even on YouTube and Netflix.

              Auto brightness also works very well here, though, we haven’t really had that issue in quite some time, on phones. It stayed nice and bright, whenever i needed it, and dimmed when I was in a dark room as expected.

              OPPO has absolutely nailed this display.

              OPPO Find X9 Pro Review: Performance

              The number one thing I was excited to check out with the Find X9 Pro was the performance. You see, this is the first device I’ve used with the new MediaTek Dimensity 9500 chipset inside. OPPO told us in our briefing that this chip was about 55% more efficient versus the Dimensity 9400 in the Find X8 series, which is quite incredible, since that was already a crazy efficient chip. And, well that appears to be true. We’ll touch on that more in the battery life section, however.

              In day-to-day usage, the OPPO Find X9 Pro did perform quite well. I never noticed it getting hot, nor slowing down. In fact, as a little teaser for our battery life test video that’s coming soon, the OPPO Find X9 Pro stayed significantly cooler than the Find X8 Pro. We’re talking double digits lower.

              So performance is top-notch here, and we’d expect nothing less from OPPO and ColorOS 16.

              Benchmarks

              Now, we gotta talk benchmarks. This is running the Dimensity 9500 with 16GB of RAM, so we’re expecting some good numbers here, and we got just that. To be clear, each benchmark was run in “Performance mode” and after the device had cooled down to about room temperature (around 72 degrees Fahrenheit), to make sure the numbers were accurate.

              DeviceGeekbench CPU SingleGeekbench CPU MultiGeekbench GPU
              OPPO Find X9 Pro3,48310,34429,999
              OPPO Find X8 Pro2,7908,28521,502
              Google Pixel 10 Pro XL2,2676,0342,948

              First up is Geekbench 6. This test will test out the raw performance of the CPU in single- and multi-core tests, as well as the GPU. This is a great way to see the raw performance compared to other devices.

              Here, we are comparing it to the Find X8 Pro from last year which had the Dimensity 9400, as well as the new Pixel 10 Pro XL with its Tensor G5 inside. As we can see, the Dimensity 9500 is quite a bit faster than the Dimensity 9400 was. About 24% in single-core and about 25% in multi-core. While the Tensor G5 just got destroyed.

              DeviceAnTuTu Score
              OPPO Find X9 Pro3,403,118
              OPPO Find X8 Pro2,552,179
              Google Pixel 10 Pro XL1,240,243

              Next up is AnTuTu. This test will test well, basically every aspect of the phone. From the CPU, to RAM, to battery and everything in between. We got our highest score ever on AnTuTu here, if we don’t count reference devices. So quite impressive, almost 1 million higher than the Find X8 Pro.

              The last benchmark we run here is a video export benchmark. What we do is, we load up a 60-second video into Capcut and then export it at 4K60, timing how long it takes to export. For most phones, this is incredibly fast. But the Find X9 Pro did struggle here with a time of 14.2 seconds. That’s more than double the Find X8 Pro’s time and the Pixel 10 Pro XL. This makes me think there’s going to be an update to address video rendering times for the Find X9 series in the future.

              Thermals

              Now, let’s move onto thermals. We have a slew of tests that we run on each device, to test out how hot they get. The first one is 3D Mark Wildlife Extreme Stress Test. This test is designed to push your device to its absolute limit and does show us how much the device will throttle. With the Find X9 Pro, we’re looking at a pretty good result here, at 112.4 degrees Fahrenheit. Yes, it is higher than the Find X8 Pro, but it also had better stability and much less throttling.

              Next up is Genshin Impact. We run this at full brightness and max graphics settings for an hour and then measure the temperature. For most phones, it says under 100 degrees, and that’s the case again here, coming in at 92.4.

              DeviceGenshin ImpactCamera 4K60 – 5MinCamera 4K60 – 10Min
              OPPO Find X9 Pro92.486.487.8
              OPPO Find X8 Pro95.692.895.7
              Google Pixel 10 Pro XL105.894.698.7

              Finally, we do a camera test, where we record 4K60 video for 10 minutes, taking the temperature at 5 minutes and again at 10 minutes. We actually got some of the lowest temps ever on this test, at just 87.8 degrees after ten minutes. So good job, OPPO, on the cooling here.

              OPPO Find X9 Pro Review: Battery Life and Charging

              When it comes to battery life, you won’t be surprised to hear this, but this 7,500mAh capacity battery does last quite a long time. It’s definitely a two, maybe three day phone for most people. Even for heavy users. During normal use for me, it’s hard to use more than 20% in a single day.

              Now, I did take this to the Lady Gaga concert in London, which OPPO invited a group of us too (OPPO paid for it and covered food, lodging, and transportation), despite taking videos and photos for over three hours, the phone still had 20% left after that long day.

              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 6

              Another example is when I went to New York City for a pre-briefing on the Galaxy XR. I used the Find X9 Pro as my main camera for that event. That included taking a boatload of photos and videos as well as communicating with the team on Slack and handling emails, etc. Still, after the end of the day, I was down to 40%. Most phones would have needed a charge halfway through, so that is quite impressive.

              Unfortunately, we did not get a charger in the box. I believe that this is becuase its the EU model. And in Europe, you can only include USB-C chargers in the box, which OPPO (and OnePlus) are still doing USB-A. But, I have plenty of OPPO chargers and OnePlus chargers at home, so that wasn’t a big deal. We’re still looking at the same charging speeds, but a much larger battery, so charging is slower overall. But for me, I usually plug it in overnight and unplug in the morning so that’s not a problem for me.

              Benchmarks

              Now, let’s talk benchmarks. For the battery, we charge the phone to 100%, set the brightness to about 150 nits and unplug it while it’s playing a YouTube video nonstop until it dies. On the OPPO Find X9 Pro, it performed quite well in this test. But I was expecting it to do a bit better, to be honest.

              DeviceBattery Life Time
              OPPO Find X9 Pro24 hrs, 28 mins
              OPPO Find X8 Pro25 hrs, 30 mins
              Google Pixel 10 Pro XL23 hrs, 43 mins

              Moving onto charging, the Find X9 Pro was slower than the Find X8 Pro as expected. After all, it does have a 26% larger battery this year – just let that sink in for a moment. Still, it only took 10 more minutes to fully charge it.

              DeviceCharging time
              OPPO Find X9 Pro1 hr, 6 mins
              OPPO Find X8 Pro56 mins
              Google Pixel 10 Pro XL1 hr, 19 mins

              And finally, we did a side-by-side battery test with several apps to see how much better the Find X9 Pro performs over the Find X8 Pro, and it blew it away. You can see that test below.

              OPPO Find X9 Pro Review: Software

              The Find X9 Pro is the first to launch with OPPO’s version of Android 16, which is ColorOS 16. And the company is really focusing on “smoothness” here. Not like ColorOS wasn’t already incredibly smooth, but now it is even more smooth. It’s actually really incredible just how smooth this software is.

              Not only has OPPO cleaned up the code base, but also made changes to the animations to make them feel smoother. Parallel Animation debuted in ColorOS 15 last year, and now it has evolved into Seamless Animation. Which extends that parallel capability across the entire OS, to make it feel even more responsive and visually connected.

              For most people, you likely wouldn’t notice a difference between ColorOS 15 and ColorOS 16, I barely noticed a difference, to be quite honest. But it does add support for Aqua Dynamics, which is basically Android’s version of the Dynamic Island. Of course, we do need apps to support, it, and very few do right now. But it does look quite nice.

              One of the bigger features you’ll find here, actually debuted on the OnePlus 13s earlier this year, and that’s Mind Space. The new AI Key on the left side activates Mind Space, and it works quite nicely. Did you find something you wanted to keep? Press the AI Key, and it’ll save that screenshot for you, analyze and it help you with the next step. For instance, I took a screenshot of the tweet from University of Michigan Football advertising their next game against Purdue. Mind Space was able to identify the game, location, time and even the game’s sponsor, which is not even identified as a sponsor on the poster.

              Basically, Mind Space is like Google’s Pixel Screenshots on steroids. And the best part is, you don’t have to use it, if you don’t want to.

              But that’s ColorOS 16. Even smoother and faster than ever before, and it’ll be rolling out to other OPPO devices very soon.

              OPPO Find X9 Pro Review: Camera

              Finally, let’s talk about the camera. Personally, the most exciting feature for me, on Find X9 Pro. For the Primary sensor here, we’re looking at the Sony LYT-828 which is a 50-megapixel 1/1.28″ sensor size with a f/1.5 aperture. On paper, a pretty good lens, right? In practice, it’s a pretty good lens. Here are some samples from that primary sensor, as well as some that are cropped into 2x.

              Oplus 154271744
              oplus 1056800
              oplus 271581184
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048608
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              Oplus 154271744
              oplus 1056800
              oplus 271581184
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048608
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576

              Then there’s the 50-megapixel Samsung 5KJN5, this is a pretty popular ultrawide lens for OnePlus and OPPO, and has been used for many years. So we know exactly what to expect here. It’s a decent lens, and for as rare as I use the ultrawide, it does the job.

              Finally, the new addition. The 200-megapixel Samsung S5KHP5. This is a 1/1.56″ sensor size at 70mm and has a f/2.1 aperture. Because this is such a large sensor with so many megapixels, OPPO is cropping in for 6x and even up to 10x optically. Which means that the 6x telephoto lens is gone.

              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 05

              This telephoto lens is quite good though. I was able to get some really good shots at 3x, 6x, 10x even up to 30x. But like with most smartphone cameras, after around 30x, the pictures do look quite bad. But that’s where OPPO’s Teleconverter kit comes into play. Here’s some samples from the telephoto lens.

              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1056800
              oplus 1048608
              oplus 1048608
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1056768
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1056800
              oplus 1048608
              oplus 1048608
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1056768
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576

              OPPO’s Hasselblad Teleconverter kit is a masterpiece

              Obviously, a teleconverter kit like this is not new. Vivo actually launched one earlier this year with the X200 Ultra, but for OPPO, it is new. And I absolutely love this thing. It is a bit cumbersome to put on, and I hope that’s something that OPPO works on in the future. But being able to pop on this teleconverter lens and get a 10x optical zoom on your smartphone is really incredible.

              You can get up to 40x optically, and up to 200x digitally. It works well up to about 60x, after that the photos do tend to fall apart.

              It’s important to note, that right now the software is still a bit early, and so after you go up past 40x, the camera does freeze and crash. Hopefully that’s something that OPPO fixes rather soon. Also important to note, that after you put the teleconverter lens on, you do need to switch over the teleconverter mode in the settings. It doesn’t switch over automatically, unfortunately.

              oplus 271581216
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048608
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 271581216
              oplus 271581216
              oplus 271581216
              oplus 271581216
              oplus 135266304
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 271581216
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048608
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 271581216
              oplus 271581216
              oplus 271581216
              oplus 271581216
              oplus 135266304
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576
              oplus 1048576

              Should you buy the OPPO Find X9 Pro?

              It’s hard to say if you should buy the OPPO Find X9 Pro. There’s a lot of things at play here. For instance, I do not know pricing, but if it is competitive, then it is definitely a good option. If you have the Find X8 Pro, it might not be a worthwhile upgrade. Find X7 Pro and earlier, definitely worth it.

              This is a pretty incredible device, and one that I really, really wish was available in the US. But I have been using it on T-Mobile (Google Fi) here in the US for the past month, and it does work pretty well. So you can import it if you’d like.

              You should buy the OPPO Find X9 Pro if

              • You want a great Hasselblad camera experience (OnePlus no longer has Hasselblad).
              • You want some of the best battery life you’ve ever experienced.
              • You want a great software experience with ColorOS 16.

              You should not buy the OPPO Find X9 Pro if:

              • You live in the US (import fees will make this much less competitive).
              • You own the Find X8 Pro or X8 Ultra.

              The post OPPO Find X9 Pro Review: Hasselblad Optics, Monster Battery, No Compromises appeared first on Android Headlines.

              The Galaxy S25 Edge 512GB is nearly down to Prime Day pricing

              Samsung Galaxy S25 Edge Deal

              Samsung’s Galaxy S25 Edge is the company’s thinnest phone, and as of right now, it has a price that’s almost as thin as its design, thanks to Amazon’s currently available deal. With a price that’s nearly as low as it was during Amazon’s October Prime Day, this is definitely a deal you probably want to take advantage of, especially since this deal is for the 512GB model, making this the all-time low price for this variant. The Galaxy S25 Edge can now be picked up for $729.99. While that’s not quite as low as the $689.99 price from a few weeks ago, you’re getting double the storage for almost the same cost. The 512GB model also usually costs $1,219.99, so this is almost $500 off.

              If you like the Galaxy S25 series but wanted a phone that was thinner than any of those three models, the Galaxy S25 Edge is that device. It features the best parts of the Galaxy S25 Ultra but with a lower price and a thinner body. That includes the 200MP main camera, as well as all of the Galaxy AI smarts. Another important distinction to make is that the storage amount is 512GB. This is only $40 away from the price of the 256GB model a few weeks ago. That’s truly where the value lies in this deal.

              The Galaxy S25 Edge is running on Android 15 but should be getting the upgrade to Android 16 soon enough. You’ll still get plenty of awesome features out of the box, though. For instance, the Morning Brief, Midday Brief, and Evening Brief will lay out key pieces of information about your day during those times. It’s pretty useful if you like to compartmentalize your day.

              Lowest Price
              Samsung Galaxy S25 Edge 512GB

              Samsung Galaxy S25 Edge 512GB – $729.99

              Buy from

              The post The Galaxy S25 Edge 512GB is nearly down to Prime Day pricing appeared first on Android Headlines.

              OPPO Find X9 Series Launches Worldwide With 200MP Power and Over 7,000mAh Batteries

              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 22

              Less than two weeks after announcing the Find X9 series in China, OPPO is now announcing it for the rest of the world. This is a huge change of events for OPPO, as typically the Chinese launch comes many months ahead of the global launch – not 12 days before.

              The launch event took place in Barcelona today, where they announced the Find X9 and Find X9 Pro, both of which use the MediaTek Dimensity 9500 chipset. This does not include the Find X9 Ultra, unfortunately, which will likely launch in the Spring.

              OPPO is touting this phone as “The Ultimate Concert Phone,” and a big reason for that is the massive 200MP 3x telephoto sensor on the back. This year, instead of having a 3x and a 6x telephoto, there’s just a single telephoto sensor. However, since it is so large and has so much resolution, OPPO is able to sensor crop to get 6x optically and even 10x. And digitally up to 120x.

              Unlike OnePlus, OPPO is sticking with Hasselblad this year, so the cameras are all tuned by Hasselblad, including the Teleconverter kit. This includes a 10x telephoto camera that snaps onto the back of the OPPO Find X9 Pro for some really incredible photos.

              The main sensor is the Sony LYT-828 sensor, which is a 1/1.28″ sensor size and 50 megapixels. Providing for some really great photos, even at 1x as well as a sensor-cropped 2x.

              Both phones pack over 7,000mAh batteries

              This seems to be the generation that will see loads of 7,000mAh-capacity phones. We’ve already seen the Xiaomi 17 Pro Max with a 7,500mAh battery, the OnePlus 15 was announced with a 7,300mAh and now OPPO is doing the same. It uses the same size batteries around the world, including in Europe.

              The OPPO Find X9 has a 7,025mAh battery while the Find X9 Pro has a 7,500mAh capacity battery. These are both about 25% larger versus their predecessors. Combine that with the 55% improvement in efficiency with the Dimensity 9500 and you have a recipe for incredible battery life.

              Both the Find X9 and Find X9 Pro will be available globally beginning in early November. With the Find X9 coming in 12GB/256GB, 12GB/512GB and 16GB/512GB. While the Find X9 Pro is offered in 16GB/512GB globally. OPPO has not yet announced pricing.

              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 21
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 18
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 24
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 20
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 19
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 17
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 21
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 18
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 24
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 20
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 19
              OPPO Find X9 Pro AM AH 17

              The post OPPO Find X9 Series Launches Worldwide With 200MP Power and Over 7,000mAh Batteries appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Phone Comparisons: OnePlus 15 vs OnePlus 13

              OnePlus 15 vs OnePlus 13 comparison

              OnePlus announced its new flagship smartphone, the OnePlus 15, in China, its homeland. It is coming to global markets, but we’ll have to wait a bit before that happens. Therefore, at this point in time, we still haven’t reviewed the phone, but we can compare it to its predecessor. For more information, however, you’ll have to wait for our review, which will come after the global launch. For the time being, we’ll stick to the facts. In this article, we’ll compare the OnePlus 15 vs OnePlus 13.

              As per usual, we’ll kick things off with the spec sheets of both phones and work our way from there. We’ll be comparing their designs, displays, performance-related details, battery setups, camera offerings, and the last is the audio section. Let’s get to it, shall we?

              Specs

              OnePlus 15 comp box
              OnePlus 15
              OnePlus 13 comp box
              OnePlus 13
              $949 at
              OnePlus 15 OnePlus 13
              Dimensions 161.42 x 76.67 x 8.10-8.20mm 162.9 x 76.5 x 8.5 mm or 8.9 mm
              Weight 211/215 grams 210/213 grams
              Display 6.78 AMOLED 6.82-inch LTPO 4.1 AMOLED
              Refresh rate 1-120Hz (adaptive), up to 165Hz for gaming 1-120Hz (adaptive)
              Resolution 2772 x 1272 3168 x 1440
              Chipset Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite
              RAM 12GB/16GB (LPDDR5X) 12GB/16GB/24GB (LPDDR5X)
              Storage 256GB/512GB (UFS 4.1), non-expandable 256GB/512GB/1TB (UFS 4.0)
              Main camera 50MP (f/1.8 aperture, 1/1.56-inch sensor size, OIS, 84-degree FoV) 50MP (f/1.7 aperture, 1/1.43-inch sensor size, 1.12um pixels ize, multi-directional PDAF, OIS)
              Ultra-wide camera 50MP (OV50D sensor, 1/2.88-inch sensor size, f/2.0 aperture, 116-degree FoV, 6P lens) 50MP (f/2.0 aperture, 1/2.75-inch sensor size, 120-degree FoV, PDAF)
              Telephoto camera N/A N/A
              Periscope telephoto camera 50MP (S5KJN5 sensor, 1/2.76-inch sensor size, 3.5x optical zoom, 4P lens, OIS, f/2.8 aperture, 30-degree FoV) 50MP (f/2.6 aperture, 1/1.95-inch sensor size, 0.8um pixel size, 3x optical zoom, OIS)
              Selfie camera 32MP (Sony IMX709 sensor, 1/2.74-inch sensor size, f/2.4 aperture, 5P lens) 32MP (f/2.4 aperture, 1/2.74-inch sensor size, 0.8um pixel size)
              Battery size 7,300mAh 6,000mAh
              Charging 120W wired, 50W wireless, 5W reverse wired 100W wired, 50W wireless, 10W reverse wireless, 5W reverse wired (charger not included)
              Colors Absolute Black, Mist Purple, and Sand Dune Black Eclipse, Arctic Dawn, Midnight Ocean
              View Specifications

              OnePlus 15 vs OnePlus 13: Design

              The OnePlus 15 does look notably different than its predecessor, that’s hard to deny. Still, there are a lot of similarities between the two phones. From the front, they do look very similar. The corner curvature is a bit more pronounced on the new model. Both smartphones have flat displays, but the OnePlus 15 does not have the quad-curved glass approach of the OnePlus 13. It’s flat flat now. Both devices have a centered display camera hole up top, and thin, uniform bezels around the display. The thing is, those bezels are thinner on the OnePlus 15, they’re only 1.15mm thick.

              Both devices have flat frames, but still different. The OnePlus 13 includes chamfered edges, and a smaller flat surface. The OnePlus 15’s frame does curve towards the edges, but only slightly. The power/lock and volume up and down buttons sit on the right-hand side of both smartphones. The OnePlus 13 also has an alert slider on the left. Well, that slider has been replaced by a customizable button on the OnePlus 15, even though it sits in the same spot as the slider.

              If we flip them two phones around, you’ll see notably different backplates. The OnePlus 13’s backplate does curve on all sides, the same as the glass on the front. The OnePlus 15’s is flat, and it only curves slightly towards the very edges. The camera islands are also different, OnePlus went from a circular one, to a squarish one. They also look notably different. The OnePlus 15 also doesn’t come in an eco leather variant, unlike the OnePlus 13. All models of the OnePlus 15 have glass on the back.

              The new model is slightly shorter, slightly wider, and slightly thinner. The weight of the two phones is basically the same, there’s only a slight difference. Both devices also offer outstanding water and dust resistance ratings, though the OnePlus 15 has the upper hand in that area as well.

              OnePlus 15 vs OnePlus 13: Display

              The OnePlus 15 features a 6.78-inch LTPO AMOLED display, which is flat. It can project up to 1 billion colors, and its refresh rate goes up to 165Hz, but only during gaming. Dolby Vision is supported, as is HDR10+ content, and HDR Vivid. High-frequency PWM dimming is also a feature here, while the display can get immensely bright when needed. The screen-to-body ratio is at around 91% here, while the resolution is 2772 x 1272. The display aspect ratio is 19.5:9, while we still don’t have any information regarding display protection.

              OnePlus 13 AM AH
              OnePlus 13

              The OnePlus 13, on the other hand, has a 6.82-inch LTPO AMOLED display, which is flat with a curved glass on top of it. This display can also project up to 1 billion colors, and it has an adaptive refresh rate (1-120Hz). It has high-frequency PWM dimming, Dolby Vision, HDR10+, and HDR Vivid support. The peak brightness is immensely high, while the screen-to-body ratio is at around 90%. The resolution here is 3168 x 1440, while the Ceramic Guard glass protects the display.

              There’s really not much to complain about here, if anything. Both displays are large, vivid, offer great viewing angles, and have good touch response. Both of them are also very sharp and can get very bright when you need them to. The OnePlus 13’s is a bit sharper, but that’s not something you’ll notice at all. The OnePlus 15’s display allows you to utilize a higher refresh rate in games. You’ll be fine with either of these two panels, in all honesty. Just note that we still didn’t test out the OnePlus 15’s display at this point, more info is coming in our review. On paper, though, it looks great.

              OnePlus 15 vs OnePlus 13: Performance

              The OnePlus 15 is fueled by the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 processor, Qualcomm’s latest and greatest chip. That processor is boosted by 12GB or 16GB of LPDDR5X RAM and UFS 4.1 flash storage. The OnePlus 13, on the flip side, utilizes the Snapdragon 8 Elite chip, along with LPDDR5X RAM and UFS 4.0 flash storage. Neither phone supports storage expansion, in case you were wondering.

              The OnePlus 13 didn’t really slow down over time. The phone still offers outstanding performance, though, granted, it launched back in January (global version). We’re expecting something similar from the OnePlus 15, too. That phone offers an extremely powerful spec sheet, even more powerful than the OnePlus 15. Not only is the SoC more powerful, but the storage is faster. We’ll have to test it out to be sure.

              The OnePlus 13 did great with gaming, as it is not only immensely powerful, but it also has proper cooling. Based on the specs, the OnePlus 15 should be able not only to match that, but do even better than the OnePlus 13. Once again, we’ll have to wait and see, but based on past models, we’re not expecting problems in the gaming department, not at all.

              OnePlus 15 vs OnePlus 13: Battery

              The OnePlus 15 features a 7,300mAh battery on the inside, while the OnePlus 13 includes a 6,000mAh battery. To put things into perspective, the OnePlus 13 already has a large battery for its size, let alone the OnePlus 15. Both of those battery packs are silicon-carbon batteries, too, by the way. The OnePlus 13 offers great battery life, so we do have high hopes for the OnePlus 15, too.

              We still didn’t get around to testing its battery, as the global model is not official yet at this point, but it has a more power-efficient SoC, storage, and a notably larger battery. The OnePlus 15 should be able to beat the OnePlus 13 in the battery life department, easily. Whether that will happen, we’ll see, but that’s what we expect to happen. That’s the only scenario that makes sense based on everything. Either way, you shouldn’t really worry about battery life on either phone, OnePlus made sure it’s all good in that department.

              The OnePlus 15 does support slightly faster charging than its predecessor, 120W vs 100W wired charging. If we had to guess, we’d say that they’ll charge in about the same time. Larger battery and faster charging in the OnePlus 15 should even things out. Do note that users in the US will get 80W wired charging, almost certainly, just like they did with the OnePlus 13. Both smartphones also support 50W wireless charging and 5W reverse wired charging.

              OnePlus 15 vs OnePlus 13: Cameras

              The OnePlus 15 has three 50-megapixel cameras on the back, just like the OnePlus 13. The thing is, all three of those cameras have smaller sensors, not to mention that Hasselblad is not a part of the picture anymore. We still didn’t do our full-fledged camera test on the OnePlus 15, but on paper, things are not looking great. In fact, the OnePlus 13 does seem to have a better camera setup than the OnePlus 15.

              OnePlus 15 official image 99
              OnePlus 15

              The OnePlus 15 features a 50-megapixel main camera (1/1.56-inch sensor size), along with a 50-megapixel ultrawide unit (1/2.88-inch sensor size, 116-degree FoV). The third camera on the back is a 50-megapixel periscope telephoto camera (1/2.76-inch sensor size, 3.5x optical zoom).

              The OnePlus 13, on the other hand, uses a 50-megapixel main camera (1/1.43-inch sensor size), a 50-megapixel ultrawide camera (1/2.75-inch sensor size, 120-degree FoV), and a 50-megapixel periscope telephoto camera (1/1.95-inch sensor size, 3x optical zoom). On top of that, Hasselblad is a part of the picture, not to mention that the aperture on the main and periscope telephoto cameras is wider on the OnePlus 13.

              We do already have some camera samples of the OnePlus 15 out there, in case you’d like to check those out. As things stand at the moment, the OnePlus 13 could take the win in that department, we’ll see.

              Audio

              Both of these phones include stereo speakers. The ones on the OnePlus 13 are actually really good. They’re not only plenty loud, but offer good quality output as well. We’re hoping to get something similar out of the OnePlus 15.

              Neither phone has an audio jack, but you can connect your headphones via their Type-C ports. The newer phone includes Bluetooth 6.0 for wireless audio connectivity, while the OnePlus 13 supports Bluetooth 5.4.

              The post Phone Comparisons: OnePlus 15 vs OnePlus 13 appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Samsung Galaxy S26 lineup may set a new standard for Bluetooth

              Samsung is reportedly gearing up for the launch of its Galaxy S26 series in March 2025, instead of January 2025. While the lineup is expected to include the Galaxy S26, S26+, and S26 Ultra, new reports suggest these phones could bring something special, which is support for the latest Bluetooth standard, Bluetooth 6.1.

              A recently spotted Samsung chip on the Bluetooth SIG website, the Exynos S6568, could make this possible. The Exynos S6568 is designed to work alongside Samsung’s main Exynos 2600 processor and supports both Bluetooth 6.1 and Wi-Fi.

              Announced in May 2025, Bluetooth 6.1 is the newest version of Bluetooth technology. It promises better security, improved power efficiency, and more stable connections compared to Bluetooth 6.0. Currently, no devices in the market offer this standard, so the Galaxy S26 series could be the first phones to feature it.

              Samsung Exynos 2600 Bluetooth certification

              Samsung may be using the Exynos S6568 to offload Bluetooth and Wi-Fi tasks from the main processor. The Galaxy S26 lineup is also expected to use the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 in some regions, but in most markets, the Exynos 2600 could make the Galaxy S26 series more efficient and powerful.

              While official confirmation is still pending, the certification of the Exynos S6568 suggests that Samsung is planning to push connectivity and efficiency with the new Galaxy phones. The new Galaxy S series is expected to arrive with One UI 8.5, which will bring several new features and changes. Stay tuned.

              Google Search Top Stories Preferred Source

              The post Samsung Galaxy S26 lineup may set a new standard for Bluetooth appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              One UI 8.5 could bring custom camera presets to Samsung phones

              Samsung’s next big software update, One UI 8.5, is shaping up for Galaxy users. While Samsung hasn’t officially announced it yet, leaked information from early builds has revealed some exciting new features in its Camera app.

              In the current Pro mode, users can manually adjust settings like ISO, shutter speed, white balance, and focus to capture perfect shots. However, doing this every time can be time-consuming.

              With One UI 8.5, Samsung plans to introduce Pro camera presets. These presets allow users to save their favorite combinations of settings and apply them instantly.

              For example, you could save one preset for bright daylight photos and another for low-light shots. The next time you take pictures, you can simply pick the right preset instead of adjusting each setting manually. This makes it easier for both beginners and photography lovers to get great results quickly.

              Samsung One UI 8.5 Camera presets

              Image via Android Authority

              Moreover, Samsung might let users share these camera presets with others using Quick Share. This means you could send your favorite camera settings to friends or download theirs to try different styles.

              The leaked code also shows that users will be able to choose which camera lens – main, ultrawide, or telephoto – the preset applies to. However, since Galaxy phones have different camera hardware, some presets might not work the same on every device.

              While we don’t yet know when One UI 8.5 will officially arrive, these new camera tools could make Samsung’s camera experience even more powerful and user-friendly. Stay tuned for more information.

              Google Search Top Stories Preferred Source

              The post One UI 8.5 could bring custom camera presets to Samsung phones appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Moment Launches New Line of Ultra-Light Camera Bags and Brings Back the Photo Vest

              A variety of bags and packs in neutral colors, including a large beige backpack, a black vest-style pack, a green crossbody bag, and two smaller pouches in beige and black, arranged on a plain light background.

              Moment has introduced a wide range of new carrying solutions for photographers today, including a 23-liter camera backpack, small and lightweight slings, and the glorious return of the photographer's vest.

              [Read More]

              This Explainer on How a Rangefinder Camera Works Is The Best We’ve Seen

              A diagram shows the internal optical path of a camera’s viewfinder system, with colored lines illustrating light passing through various lenses, prisms, and mirrors inside the camera body.

              Photographer and technology expert David Imel recently published a video discussing why Leica got rid of the most iconic part of its M series cameras in the new M EV1: the rangefinder. But to do that, he first had to explain what a rangefinder is and how it works, and in doing so created the best modern breakdown of the technology that is very easy to understand.

              [Read More]

              Fitbit launches redesigned app with new health coach in preview

              The redesigned Fitbit app, which includes a new personal health coach feature, is about to start rolling out in beta. The Personal Health Coach Public Preview Program starts on October 28th, though it is only open to select users at this time. This AI functionality will provide users with personalized training programs and workouts, sleep analysis and health insights.

              Oppo Find X9 series goes global

              Exactly 12 days ago, Oppo announced its Find X9 and Find X9 Pro flagships in China and the pair are now making their way to global markets. Both phones feature MediaTek’s Dimensity 9500 SoC and massive 7,025 mAh (Find X9) and 7,500 mAh (Find X9 Pro) silicon-carbon batteries. Charging speeds top out at 80W for wired top-ups, and you also get 50W wireless and 10W reverse wireless on both phones. Find X9 gets a 6.59-inch AMOLED (FHD+ 120Hz) while Find X9 Pro goes up to a 6.78-inch FHD+ AMOLED with the same refresh rate. In terms of cameras, Find X9 Pro brings a 50 main...

              Motorola Edge 70 leaks in more press renders, its EU Energy label is out too

              Motorola is about to dunk its feet into the slim smartphone game internationally with the Edge 70, which is expected to be a rebranded X70 Air, a model that made its debut in China earlier this month. As we wait for the global launch, a couple more press renders have been outed showing the Edge 70 and confirming some of its specs - the 4,800 mAh Silicon Carbon battery with 68W wired charging support, the 5.99mm thickness, the 159g weight, and the 50MP main camera. Motorola Edge 70 in Pantone Bronze Green (left) and Pantone Lily Pad (right) These colors will apparently be called...

              Pixel Watch Receives October 2025 Update with Security Fixes and Bug Improvements

              Google pixel watch 4 AH 53

              Earlier this year, Google announced its latest Wear OS 6 update for its Pixel Watch lineup. However, when it comes to legacy wearables, only the Pixel Watch 2 and 3 got the update. This means that the original Pixel Watch is still stuck at Wear OS 5. However, if you own the original Pixel Watch, we have good news as Google has released the October 2025 update for it.

              Pixel Watch gets October 2025 update

              According to Google, it says that all eligible original Pixel Watch devices should get the October 2025 update starting today. “The rollout will continue over the coming weeks in phases depending on carrier and device. Users will receive a notification on their watch once the software update becomes available.”

              Before you get too excited, no, the update isn’t bringing about new features. Instead, according to Google, the update is focused more on security updates and bug fixes. So, if you’re still holding onto the OG Pixel Watch, keep an eye out for this update. Hopefully, it should fix any bugs you might be encountering on the phone.

              Also, it’s worth noting that the smartwatch is guaranteed at least 3 years of updates. This means that the October 2025 is the last guaranteed update you’ll get. This doesn’t mean that Google won’t release updates in the future. It is possible that the company could release an emergency update if there are any critical issues. But moving forwards, you probably shouldn’t expect anything else.

              How to update your Pixel Watch

              As Google said, the rollout will take place over the coming weeks. This means if you don’t see the update available right now, don’t worry, it should eventually make its way to you. However, if you want to check if there’s an update available, it’s pretty easy. Just go to Settings > System > System updates. Tap on the “Your watch is update to date” screen multiple times to initial the download.

              Once that’s done, just update your watch and you’re good to go. While the original Pixel Watch has been around for a few years, it’s still a very viable smartwatch. If you’re just looking for a smartphone companion for your wrist, it’s more than sufficient. Otherwise, you might want to consider upgrading to the Pixel Watch 4.

              The post Pixel Watch Receives October 2025 Update with Security Fixes and Bug Improvements appeared first on Android Headlines.

              HONOR Magic8 Ultra Details Leak: Snapdragon 8 Elite Power and Upgraded Cameras

              MTG ºiþO ProÑ *H16 9 RGB

              Earlier this month, Honor unveiled its latest flagship smartphone, the Honor Magic8 series. However, if you thought that the company was done with phones for the rest of the year, think again. According to the details, Honor could be working on an Ultra version of the Magic8 series.

              Honor Magic8 Ultra details revealed

              In a post on Weibo, tipster Digital Chat Station dropped some hints on the details we can expect from the Honor Magic8 Ultra. The post claims that the phone, like the rest of the Magic8 lineup, will be powered by the Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite 5 chipset. It will also feature a 6.71-inch 1.5K LTPO quad-curved screen, support for 3D face recognition, and a built-in 3D ultrasonic fingerprint sensor.

              As for the cameras, the post claims that Honor is testing use of of OmniVision’s OV50R main camera. It is also rumored to feature a 5,000W ultra-high dynamic range solution, and a new large-bottom periscope telephoto lens. As for the battery, Digital Chat Station says it will start with the “7” figure. To be honest, at this point, we’re not sure other than the cameras, how different the Ultra version is compared to the rest of the lineup.

              However, it seems to be part of Chinese phone makers strategy, which is to release Ultra-variants of their phones. So far, we know of phones like the Xiaomi 17 Ultra, Oppo Find X9 Ultra, and the Vivo X300 Ultra. So it looks like Honor is joining in on the fun. 

              Contradicting reports

              That being said, we should point out that the recent post does contradict some earlier reports. According to past reports, the Magic8 Ultra might actually use the MediaTek Dimensity 9500 chipset. Also, while some expect the phone to be announced by the end of the year, some suggest it could launch in the first half of 2026.

              In any case, we should have more details in the coming months. But in the meantime, if you’d rather not wait, the Honor Magic8 Pro is already quite the powerhouse. It might be worth checking out if you’re in the market for a new phone.

              The post HONOR Magic8 Ultra Details Leak: Snapdragon 8 Elite Power and Upgraded Cameras appeared first on Android Headlines.

              OnePlus Turbo Specs Leak: Massive 8,000mAh Battery and Snapdragon 8 Elite Power

              OnePlus 15 image 83459438

              OnePlus recently took the wraps off its latest flagship smartphone over in China. This came in the form of the OnePlus 15. But it turns out OnePlus isn’t done with new phones just yet. According to the rumors, the company is working on a phone called the OnePlus Turbo. Now, thanks to a report by Smartprix, the OnePlus Turbo specs have been revealed.

              OnePlus Turbo specs revealed

              According to the rumors, the OnePlus Turbo is meant to be a gaming smartphone. Based on the rumored specs of the OnePlus Turbo, there is one major difference between it and the OnePlus 15: battery.

              The OnePlus 15 comes with a 7,300mAh battery, which is already impressive. However, the report claims that the OnePlus Turbo could pack an even larger battery, going up to a whopping 8,000mAh. This, combined with the 100W charging, will make the phone an endurance beast.

              However, since the focus is more on performance, OnePlus could dial back on the cameras. The rumors are saying we can look forward to a dual camera setup on the back. This will consist of a 50MP main shooter and an 8MP ultrawide. This is compared to the OnePlus 15, which sports a triple 50MP camera setup on the back.

              As for the rest of the phone, it appears to be more or less identical to its flagship sibling. We’re talking about a ~6.7-inch 1.5K OLED display with a 165Hz refresh rate. We’re also looking at the use of the Snapdragon 8 Elite 5. So, like we said, the major difference here is in its battery. If you don’t really care too much about cameras, then the OnePlus Turbo could make a good alternative to the OnePlus 15, especially if battery life is a big deal for you.

              Coming not so soon

              Smartprix claims that their source told them the handset is currently being tested in India. If testing goes to plan, the OnePlus Turbo could launch in the next two months. This is an odd time for a release towards the end of the year. However, OnePlus might be able to catch a break.

              Samsung typically launches its new flagships in January. This means if OnePlus launches it in December, it would have very little time before Samsung takes over the news cycle. However, last we heard, Samsung could delay the launch of the Galaxy S26 to March 2026.

              The post OnePlus Turbo Specs Leak: Massive 8,000mAh Battery and Snapdragon 8 Elite Power appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Exclusive: Google Pixel 10a Official CAD Renders & Rumors

              Pixel10a 5K3

              After releasing almost every detail of the Pixel 10 series ahead of the official launch in August, we’re back at it again with the upcoming Pixel 10a. There have been rumors that the Pixel 10a would launch before the end of 2025, but given where we are in the rumor mill, we don’t believe that is accurate. We do believe it’ll launch in early 2026.

              With that said, we have official renders based on CADs for the Pixel 10a. And to your surprise, it doesn’t look that different versus the Pixel 9a. Unfortunately, this blue color might not be real, but we’d love for Google to use it.

              Google Pixel 10a CAD Renders

              We have three CAD renders to show off here. This shows different angles of the Pixel 10a, which look identical to the Pixel 9a. Now, unfortunately, we can’t confirm or deny if there is a SIM card slot on the Pixel 10a, since that detail is typically not included in CAD renders. It is included in the CAD render here, but that doesn’t confirm that it will be available on the final model when that launches.

              Pixel10a 5K2
              Pixel10a 5K3
              Pixel10a 5K1
              Pixel10a 5K2
              Pixel10a 5K3
              Pixel10a 5K1

              As you can see from these renders, Google is sticking with what looks to be a plastic back that is completely flat and flush with the camera module. Google is also sticking with a dual-camera setup on the rear, and some rather thick bezels on the front. The volume rocker continues to be below the power button – the opposite of almost every Android phone on the market.

              There are antenna lines on the sides, top and bottom. With a microphone hole at the top as well as the bottom. It also looks like Google has made the bottom symmetrical with the speaker and microphone holes.

              Google Pixel 10a Specifications (rumored)

              We’re currently pretty early in the rumor mill for the Pixel 10a, so the specs haven’t surfaced as much. But we do know that it’ll be roughly the same physical size as Pixel 9a. With a 6.2-inch display and dimensions of 153.9 x 72.9 x 9mm. That’s actually rather thick compared to a lot of other phones on the market today.

              There is also a rumor that is pointing to the Pixel 10a using the Tensor G4 (same as Pixel 9a) instead of the newer Tensor G5 in the Pixel 10 series. This could be due to the cost of the Tensor G5, since it is a TSMC-manufactured chip and does cost significantly more than the Tensor G4 did. This is said to be a “boosted” Tensor G4, likely a higher clocked chipset.

              Last year, Google surprised us with the Pixel 9a, outfitting it with a 5,100mAh battery. Since the phone is actually thicker, we are expecting an even larger battery this year. But, I don’t think many would complain about a 5,100mAh battery on Pixel 10a either, considering battery life was so great on the 9a.

              Google should stick with the same cameras again this year, and it’ll also have 7 years of software support. Pricing should also remain almost identical to last year, at $499 for 128GB of storage.

              How will it compare to the Pixel 9a?

              From what we know so far about the Pixel 10a, it’s going to be almost identical to the Pixel 9a. Perhaps slightly better performance, WiFi signal, and battery life. That would likely be about it here. Along with some new colors, but that doesn’t really determine whether you’d buy it or not.

              google pixel 9a vs pixel 10a AH

              Above, you can see how similar these two look side-by-side. Really, the only way to tell them apart is going to be the colors. Though, bezels do look significantly smaller this year. We’ll have to wait for the final renders to see if that is indeed the case, as CADs are usually approximate, and not always 100% correct.

              Google Pixel 10a vs Pixel 9a Spec Comparison

              As mentioned, specs haven’t really surfaced all that much yet for the Pixel 10a. So we’ve compiled what we’ve seen rumored so far, and speculated with the rest, given what we can see in these CADs, as well as how often Google sticks with the same specs.

              Editor’s Note: Everything that is speculated for the Pixel 10a is denoted with an asterisk.

              H1 2025 Family Bundles
              Google Pixel 9a
              Pixel10a 5K1
              Google Pixel 10a
              Google Pixel 9a Google Pixel 10a
              Dimensions 154.7 x 73.3 x 8.9mm 153.9 x 72.9 x 9.0mm
              Weight 186g 186 grams*
              Display 6.3-inch FHD+ 120Hz P-OLED 6.2-inch FHD+ 120Hz P-OLED
              Refresh rate 60-120Hz (adaptive) 60-120Hz (adaptive)*
              Resolution 2424 x 1080 2424 x 1080*
              Chipset Google Tensor G4 Google Tensor G4 (boosted)
              RAM 8GB 8GB*
              Storage 128GB/256GB 128GB/256GB*
              Main camera 48MP (f/1.7 aperture, 1/2.0″ sensor size) 48MP (f/1.7 aperture, 1/2.0″ sensor size)*
              Ultra-wide camera 13MP (f/2.2 aperture, 120-degree FOV) 13MP (f/2.2 aperture, 120-degree FOV)*
              Selfie camera 13MP (f/2.2 aperture, 1/3.1″ sensor size) 13MP (f/2.2 aperture, 1/3.1″ sensor size)*
              Battery size 5,100mAh 5,100mAh*
              Charging 23W wired, 7.5W wireless 23W wired, 7.5W wireless*
              Colors Obsidian, Porcelain, Iris, Peony N/A
              View Specifications

              When will the Google Pixel 10a launch?

              Of course, the biggest question of all is, when will the Google Pixel 10a launch? There was a wacky rumor about a month ago that claimed the Pixel 10a would launch before the end of 2025. Which we do not believe. Here’s why.

              To launch the Pixel 10a before the end of the year would be a really bad decision, especially in the US. Really anything launched after October is a terrible idea because of holiday shopping. On top of that, all of the new flagships with Qualcomm and MediaTek’s new chips are launching at this time. So it would get buried. But if we take the holidays out of the equation, we are just not seeing images of the Pixel 10a. This usually happens about 6 months ahead of the actual launch. Which means we’re likely gonna see a March or April launch once again.

              DeviceAnnouncement DateRelease Date
              Google Pixel 9aMarch 19, 2025April 10, 2025
              Google Pixel 8aMay 7, 2024May 14, 2024
              Google Pixel 7aMay 10, 2023May 10, 2023

              As you can see from the previous release dates, the Pixel 10a is likely going to launch in March. The Pixel 9a was delayed a bit because they found an issue with manufacturing which delayed the device’s shipping by a couple of weeks. So very unlikely that the Pixel 10a will launch in 2025; however, Google has been adjusting the release timelines for its devices and software lately.

              The post Exclusive: Google Pixel 10a Official CAD Renders & Rumors appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Samsung Envisions a 6G Future Driven by AI and Real-World Benefits

              6G image 839483498

              During a global conference on 6G, which is currently ongoing in Korea, Samsung had some interesting things to say. Lee Ju-Ho, a fellow at Samsung Research, said that the changes 6G will bring “cannot be expressed in numbers.”

              Samsung envisions a 6G future with major changes and AI involvement

              He also added: “we must change the direction of the technology” in order to illustrate the benefits of 6G. On top of all that, Lee Ju-Ho also said: “We will find it difficult to solve the various problems we face by emphasizing only the peak performance of the 4G and 5G era.”

              Samsung doesn’t think that hyping up 6G’s numbers is the way to go. The hype around 5G’s performance gains, higher connection speeds, lower latency, and so on, were not the right call.

              Lee Ju-Ho believes that the advantages for 6G will be “qualitative”, while he referred to native AI a “key feature of 6G”. He added that AI will be essential to “solve previously impossible realities.”

              It seems like Samsung believes that reliability, energy efficiency, and security will be key for 6G, along with AI, of course. Lee Ju-Ho said that 6G will benefit an aging population and those who live on their own. How? Well, for one, self-learning AI is expected to manage the network and also fix certain problems on its own.

              He added that Integrated Sensing and Communication (ISAC), where sensors in the network create real-time spatial awareness, could be used in autonomous transport. That’s just another example.

              Samsung wants to focus on real-world benefits

              Samsung obviously wants to focus on real-world and social benefits, rather than hyping up numbers. Well, at least that’s what we got from what Lee Ju-Ho said during this global conference.

              As a reminder, the first commercial industry standard for 6G is expected to arrive in 2029.

              The post Samsung Envisions a 6G Future Driven by AI and Real-World Benefits appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Amazon Reportedly Planning Massive Corporate Layoffs

              AH Amazon Logo (1)

              Yes, it’s true that many companies went out of business during the pandemic, and many people lost their jobs. However, the tech industry actually saw a surge in hirings. But it looks like that hiring spree is coming to a head. According to a report from Reuters, Amazon could be looking to conduct corporate layoffs.

              Amazon to conduct corporate layoffs

              Based on the report, Amazon corporate layoffs could be the largest layoffs the company conducted since 2023. The Reuters report suggests that Amazon could be looking to layoff up to 30,000 corporate positions. This is higher than the 27,000 job cuts that the company had previously conducted.

              30,000 positions seem like a lot, but to Amazon, that’s roughly 10% of its corporate workforce. This will cover various departments such as human resources, cloud computing, advertising, and more. However, the total number of staff reductions hasn’t been finalized yet, but for now, it is estimated to be around 30,000.

              Is AI coming for our jobs?

              Many companies, not just Amazon, conduct layoffs periodically as a way to cut costs. But when there’s a surge in demand, these companies tend to hire again. However, what’s worrying about the recent layoffs is that some of these positions may never be filled by humans again.

              Amazon CEO Andy Jassy said back in June that some jobs will be cut because of AI. Jassy said at that time, “As we roll out more Generative AI and agents, it should change the way our work is done. We will need fewer people doing some of the jobs that are being done today, and more people doing other types of jobs.”

              It is true that as AI becomes smarter and more capable that jobs that humans used to do may no longer be necessary. If an AI can generate reports and summarize information in minutes compared to the hours it takes a human, it makes sense who you’d rather keep from an efficiency point of view.

              But this doesn’t necessarily mean that humans are doomed to be jobless. The rise of AI represents a new industry that we can transition to. As the saying goes, when one door closes, another opens.

              The post Amazon Reportedly Planning Massive Corporate Layoffs appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Deleted a Text by Mistake? Google Messages Will Soon Let You Undo It

              Google Messages Logo AH 3

              Have you ever deleted an important text in Google Messages and instantly regretted it? Well, you are not alone. Right now, it’s not possible to recover a deleted message. But to address the concern, Google seems to be working on an undo button for its Messages app, making the texting experience safer.

              Google is working on an Undo texting button for the Messages app

              As reported by Android Authority, a new beta version of Google Messages hints at a new “trash” or “bin” folder. The concept of the new folder is pretty similar to what Gmail already has. When you delete a message, instead of completely disappearing right away, it might move to this trash folder. From there, you could have up to 30 days to recover it before it’s permanently deleted. This change would be a big relief for anyone who’s ever deleted an important text by accident.

              Currently, deleting a message on the app is permanent. Once it’s gone, it’s gone for good. There’s literally no way to undo the task or bring back the text. And that’s what makes this upcoming feature so exciting. It finally addresses a problem that’s faced by almost everyone once in their life. Messages are also used for storing important bank texts or transaction SMS, and deleting them by mistake is the fear of many. The new option will finally address this fear.

              Google aims for smarter and more reliable messaging services

              The latest move confirms Google’s push to make the Messages app smarter and reliable. The app already lets users archive chats they want to hide without deleting them. But archiving isn’t enough when you want to bring back something you’ve completely removed. A new trash folder or undo delete option finally bridges that gap. It gives users better control over their texting experience. It solves a real problem faced by millions of users daily.

              The post Deleted a Text by Mistake? Google Messages Will Soon Let You Undo It appeared first on Android Headlines.

              iPhone 20th Anniversary Model Might Go Fully Button-Free

              apple iphone 16 v3

              Apple might be planning some big changes for the iPhone’s 20th anniversary in 2027. According to the latest rumors out of China, Apple is planning to do away with mechanical buttons and use haptics instead. HTC actually tried this out many years ago, and it didn’t work out too well for them.

              Why go with haptics versus mechanical buttons? For one, they use up less space inside the phone. Two, they are less likely to break as they don’t have moving parts. And of course, Apple is very proud of its Haptic Engine, so this would be another way for Apple to show that off.

              This report is claiming that this is going to be the biggest design shake up for the iPhone since the 2017 iPhone X, which was Apple’s ten year anniversary for the iPhone. And it drastically changed the look of the iPhone.

              iPhone’s 20th anniversary is still two years away

              Despite all of the rumors we are seeing today about the 20th anniversary iPhone, it is still a solid two years away from launching. So we’re likely gonna see some more changes in the rumor mill before it actually launches in 2027. Apple is likely still actively working on it, and changing the hardware to meet whatever goals that they have.

              There are also rumors about Apple using a wraparound display with the edges of the screen merging into the button zones. This is also something an Android OEM had tried in the past. Xiaomi did this many years ago too on a concept phone (a concept phone that was actually sold, however). Though, Xiaomi never followed up with another one, so it must not have done all that well.

              The post iPhone 20th Anniversary Model Might Go Fully Button-Free appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Motorola Patent Reveals a Phone That Can Transform Into a Watch

              Motorola phone concept wrist 2 2023

              The smartphone candy bar form factor has been around for more than a decade. But realistically, we don’t think the form factor is sticking around for the foreseeable future. That begs the question of, if not this form factor, then what? That’s something Motorola is exploring, according to a recently discovered patent that suggests a phone that can be worn as a watch.

              Motorola has a patent for a phone that can be worn as a watch

              Based on the patent images, it looks like Motorola has come up with an idea for a phone that can transform into a watch. Believe it or not, this is actually not the first time Motorola has come up with this idea. Back in 2023, the company took the wraps off a concept phone with a bendable display and body that can be bent around the wearer’s wrist.

              However, there is a difference between Motorola’s concept and this patent. For starters, the patent suggests that the phone could feature some kind of retractable display. This means that when the display is fully retracted, it’s small enough to fit on your wrist. However, it can then be expanded to become a phone.

              The patent talks about the frame structure needed to support the retractable design. However, it stops short of mentioning things like display size, connectivity options, battery, and most importantly, cameras. It’s actually a pretty cool concept on paper. But honestly, it seems unlikely that it will ever see the light of day.

              While patents sometimes act as clues for what a company has planned for the future, it is never a guarantee that these patents become actual commercial products.

              The future of communications

              Like we said, we don’t think candy bar shaped smartphones are going to continue being the standard of mobile phone design. In fact, with the rise of AI, some believe that we may even transition to devices without a display. 

              We’ve already seen some companies attempt these AI-first devices, like Rabbit, and Humane. However, neither of these devices really took off. We’re also hearing that OpenAI’s Sam Altman is working with legendary former Apple designer, Jony Ive, to create some kind of communications device.

              It’s too early to tell how that will turn out, but what do you think? What kind of device can you imagine replacing our smartphones in the future?

              Motorola patent Motorola patent
              Motorola patent 1 1 Motorola patent 1 1

              The post Motorola Patent Reveals a Phone That Can Transform Into a Watch appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Samsung’s Galaxy Z Fold 8 Could Be a Bigger Leap Than Anyone Expected

              Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 Review AM AH 27

              The Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 8 is tipped to bring some major improvements to the table. The information comes from DealSite, as the source claims the Galaxy Z Fold 8 will get a major battery boost.

              The Galaxy Z Fold 8 could bring major improvements, including a battery boost

              It is said to feature a 5,000mAh battery, a considerable upgrade from the 4,400mAh battery inside the Galaxy Z Fold 7. For comparison’s sake, the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 competitors have larger battery packs. The OPPO Find N5, for example, comes with a 5,600mAh battery, and it offers a lot better battery life.

              The battery life boost is not the only improvement mentioned, though. Samsung is also aiming to improve the display crease situation. The company plans to adopt the so-called laser-drilled metal plate technology. Apple will use something similar for its foldable iPhone.

              Another area of improvement is mentioned in the report… the stylus. The Galaxy Z Fold 8 will, allegedly, be compatible with a stylus. Samsung removed the stylus compatibility this year, with the Galaxy Z Fold 7, after first introducing it to its foldables back in 2021 with the Galaxy Z Fold 3.

              Stylus support could also be making a comeback

              Samsung made that move to make the Galaxy Z Fold 7 thinner. Well, it’s possible that the company figured out how to get the best of both worlds, which is why the Galaxy Z Fold 8 may get stylus support. It’s hard to imagine Samsung making its devices thicker just for the sake of stylus support.

              The arrival of the first foldable iPhone may really push Samsung to make some major improvements to its book-style foldable. Competition is good, as it pushes innovation. The first foldable iPhone is tipped to arrive next year, though we may have to wait longer than that, it all depends on which rumor you choose to believe.

              As a reminder, Samsung’s very first tri-fold smartphone made its first public appearance recently. It’s expected to get a full launch later this week, though nothing has been confirmed just yet.

              The post Samsung’s Galaxy Z Fold 8 Could Be a Bigger Leap Than Anyone Expected appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Google Gemini Can Now Build Presentations for You

              Gemini Logo 15x10

              AI is surely integrating itself into our daily lives. Gone are the days when we had to learn the whole Microsoft PowerPoint and Google Slides toolkit just for creating presentations. With the new update, Google is rolling out a new version of the Gemini tool that can create powerful presentations for you. All you have to do is type the prompt and upload relevant files, and the tool will then turn it into slides.

              Google Gemini can now generate presentations from texts or files

              The new update is now available for Gemini Pro users and is expected to be released to free users soon. Once updated, users can access the “Canvas” tab on the Gemini website, give it a topic or prompt, and attach relevant files. Gemini then generates a complete presentation based on the given input. It also matches the theme and visual effect throughout the slides for a more appealing and professional look.

              Users can export the generated presentation directly to Google Slides. There, they can make small changes, such as editing text or rearranging slides. This makes it much easier for students, office workers, or anyone who needs to build a presentation fast.

              Google says that the tool is backed by Gemini’s powerful AI

              Google says that the Canvas feature uses the same AI that powers Gemini’s writing and reasoning abilities, but now applies to design and layout. The Canvas tool will show the instructions on one side and the results on the other. This process is done so that the user can see changes instantly. This side-by-side layout helps users easily adjust prompts to get better slides without switching screens.

              Moreover, the feature is currently rolling out in batches. Only a limited group of users has access to the feature. A broader rollout is expected to take place in the coming days. You can log in to the Gemini website to see if the feature is available.

              The post Google Gemini Can Now Build Presentations for You appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Best USB-C Chargers Deals

              best chargers deals

              With so many smartphone makers getting rid of the charger in the box, it’s always a good idea to pick up a couple of spare chargers, because you really never know when you’ll need them. Thankfully, Amazon almost always has a lot of them available on sale. Here are the best USB-C chargers that are on sale right now.

              Baseus 140W USB-C Charger

              Baseus 140W USB-C Charger – $49.99

              This charger has 140W of power with 3 USB-C and a USB-A port. It’s a GaN charger, making it much smaller than other chargers with the same power.

              Buy from
              Editor's Choice
              Baseus Enercore CJ11

              Baseus Enercore CJ11 – $59

              This charger has a retractable USB-C cable as well as two USB-C ports available for charging. With a total output of 67W.

              Buy from
              Anker 45W USB-C Charger

              Anker 45W USB-C Charger – $15.99

              Charge up with this Anker USB-C charger at up to 45W, fast enough to max out the Galaxy S25 Ultra.

              Buy from
              Anker Nano 30W USB-C Charger

              Anker Nano 30W USB-C Charger – $13.99

              This tiny charger can charge at up to 30W, and its just $14.

              Buy from
              Editor's Choice
              Baseus Nomos 8-in-1 Charging Station

              Baseus Nomos 8-in-1 Charging Station – $42.99

              This charging station is perfect for those with lots of devices to charge. With three AC outlets, 4 USB-C and a MagSafe wireless charger all available.

              Buy from
              Belkin 45W USB-C Charger

              Belkin 45W USB-C Charger – $14.99

              Belkin has its own USB-C PD3.1 PPS Fast Charger that can charge up to 45W, which will max out the Galaxy S25 Ultra.

              Buy from
              Editor's Choice
              Anker 737 Power Bank

              Anker 737 Power Bank – $75

              This massive power bank has 24,000mAh capacity battery that should keep you going for a few days.

              Buy from

              The post Best USB-C Chargers Deals appeared first on Android Headlines.

              HyperOS 3 Global Rollout Kicks Off: New Design, AI, and Animations

              HyperOS 3

              Xiaomi introduced its next iteration of Android 16-based skin, the HyperOS 3, alongside the Xiaomi 15T series last month. It promised that the stable release would kick off starting from October. Standing on its promise, Xiaomi has now announced that the HyperOS 3 global rollout has begun with the Xiaomi 15T. The new version features a redesigned interface, AI enhancements, new system-wide animations, and privacy improvements.

              Xiaomi’s HyperOS 3 global rollout begins

              Xiaomi, on X, has announced that the global rollout of HyperOS 3 has kicked off, with the Xiaomi 15T series being the first wave of devices to receive the new version. The company mentioned that the update will hit users in a phased manner. This means you should see it hitting your devices over the next few days. 

              It’s possible that the Xiaomi 15T and 15T Pro users who signed up for the global beta program could be the first to receive the stable HyperOS 3. Meanwhile, the Xiaomi 15 series and Redmi K80 lineup were the first to receive the stable update in China.

              Xiaomi HyperOS 3 global rollout

              HyperOS 3 brings a new design, AI enhancements, and more

              Xiaomi clarified that it’s working hard to bring the HyperOS 3 update to more devices as per the global schedule. After the Xiaomi 15T series, the Xiaomi MIX Flip, the Redmi Note 14 series, the POCO F7 lineup, Xiaomi Pad 7 tablets, Xiaomi Pad Mini, and a range of wearables are set to get the update between October and November timelines.

              The HyperOS 3 rollout will stretch through March 2026, with older models getting the update last. The new iteration brings HyperIsland, which shows live activities of apps and notifications for calls, music, charging, and schedules. It brings deeper Google Gemini integration for system-wide AI capabilities. It’s also improving data protection through Unified Authentication Service, on-device, and cloud privacy computing.

              HyperOS 3 rollout schedule

              The post HyperOS 3 Global Rollout Kicks Off: New Design, AI, and Animations appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Samsung may hike prices of Galaxy S26 phones

              Samsung may be forced to hike the prices of Galaxy phones, including the Galaxy S26 series. A new report highlights the reasons that could force Samsung to increase prices across its IT products, including smartphones and laptops.

              According to Hankyung (via Jukan), Samsung is facing cost-increase pressure, which would result in a price hike in Galaxy phones and laptops. Memory and inflation are among the key reasons behind a potential increase in prices.

              Galaxy S26 series will launch early next year, and Samsung is betting everything on the Exynos 2600 chipset. If the in-house SoC is used, the company will manage to keep the prices unchanged, without passing on to buyers.

              Almost every merchant related to the electronics industry reiterated the fact that DRAM prices have doubled in a month and are skyrocketing. People familiar with the matter believe the prices won’t go down anytime soon.

              Samsung Galaxy S25

              Samsung Galaxy S25, S25 Plus and S25 Ultra

              Industry insiders estimate that the memory-flation will continue until 2027-2028. Given the rapid rise of AI, the supply and prices of DRAM are peaking. It also affects the bill of materials as memory is a key spec in mobile devices.

              HBM chips are almost five to six times more expensive than regular DRAM, and that’s why manufacturers are focusing on high bandwidth memories. It makes the general-purpose DRAM supply insufficient, leading to a price jump.

              Memory-flation is a term that comprises memory + inflation in the industry. It applies when the price of complete IT products like phones and PCs rises following the surge in memory semiconductor prices, which has begun in earnest.

              The post Samsung may hike prices of Galaxy S26 phones appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Samsung Galaxy S22 family’s October 2025 update is available

              Samsung’s October 2025 security update is now available for Galaxy S22, S22+, and S22 Ultra in various markets. The firmware was released first in Southeast Asian markets, before the recent expansion to India.

              October 2025 patch follows the recent One UI 8 update rollout for the Galaxy S22 series. While the previous release was a major one, users shouldn’t expect a significant update until the second quarter of next year.

              Well, the new update isn’t useless either.

              It includes stability and reliability enhancements to elevate your phone’s behaviour. Samsung has patched 34 CVEs and SVEs and included the improvements in the October patch. You can check the changelog and build versions below:

              Changelog:

              • Stability and reliability
                • Device behavior has been improved

              Software versions:

              • S908EXXUCGYJ1 – Galaxy S22 Ultra
              • S906EXXUCGYJ1 – Galaxy S22 Plus
              • S901EXXUCGYJ1 – Galaxy S22

              October patch is coming as an over-the-air update, which doesn’t require manual installation. You can easily update the software by navigating through Settings, followed by Software update, and Download and install.

              One UI 8.5 is expected to be available by June 2026. It will bring plenty of new features and a frosted glass user interface. Samsung is testing new changes and features internally, and the official reveal is slated for Unpacked next year.

              One UI 8 was the last major OS upgrade for the Galaxy S22 series. The flagship lineup was released in early 2022 and supported four years of OS upgrades. Starting with Android 13, it has received 4 Android upgrades until Android 16.

              Now, Samsung will provide another year of regular security patches. You can expect a category demotion by the end of February 2026. Your device will be shifted to the Quarterly updates cycle for another year of security patches.

              Samsung Galaxy S22 Ultra

              Source – Samsung Mobile Press

              The post Samsung Galaxy S22 family’s October 2025 update is available appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Meet the Galaxy Z TriFold – Samsung’s boldest foldable phone [Video]

              Samsung’s Galaxy Z TriFold phone is on display at the K-Tech Showcase before the APEC CEO Summit in South Korea. The company is displaying an unfinished device, with market arrival scheduled for the end of the year.

              While Samsung didn’t let visitors touch or use the device, we’ve exclusive videos right from the launchpad. Korean media outlets Chosun and Dailian have published real-life images, and tipster Ice Universe posted the showcase video.

              It is reported that the TriFold has a nearly invisible screen crease. Samsung has already nailed the screen visibility with the Galaxy Z Fold 7, and it would be interesting to see how the TriFold takes the crease control further.

              Samsung TriFold Phone

              Source – Dailian

              The Z TriFold is placed inside a glass box, which displays a visual clip. It shows the phone in its folded state along with a visualization of unfolding. The cover screen offers a regular phone-like experience, while the full view acts like a tablet.

              Here's the Galaxy Z TriFold phone Samsung showcased at APEC Summit in South Korea ✨

              Courtesy of @UniverseIce (Weibo) pic.twitter.com/ZmHVIpZE3H

              — Yash (@TweetToYash) October 28, 2025

              Samsung’s Galaxy Z TriFold phone comes with a dual-hinge design to function in the triple-folding form factor. It practically features two foldable panels, which turn into a tablet-sized appearance when completely unfolded.

              Galaxy Z TriFold is based on Samsung Display’s Flex G prototype, whose screens fold inward. Korean media reports that Samsung’s TriFold has overcome the technological limitations that caused durability concerns.

              The Korean tech giant is expected to have a brief session regarding its TriFold during the APEC CEO Summit on October 31 and November 1. The official reveal is expected in late November or early December in select markets.

              Related articles:

              The post Meet the Galaxy Z TriFold – Samsung’s boldest foldable phone [Video] appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Adobe’s End-Of-Year Updates Are All AI, and Sometimes Not Even Its Own AI

              A split-screen shows Photoshop editing a person in a pink coat, Premiere Pro selecting a dancing person, and Illustrator displaying a cartoon key character with arms, legs, and clouds.

              Adobe MAX kicks off this week and, historically, that has meant a large drop of updates across the company's portfolio of apps. That is technically true this year too, but everything is revolving around AI -- and sometimes, that doesn't even mean Adobe's own technology.

              [Read More]

              8 GB VRAM: still fine today, or already outdated? A look at the Legion Pro 5 16

              Unlike the Ti version with 12 GB, Nvidia’s RTX 5070 (non-Ti) only comes with 8 GB of VRAM — a spec that’s sparked plenty of online debate about its future-proofing, and understandably, some concern. Our test unit, the Lenovo Legion Pro 5 16IAX10 with an RTX 5070, offers some useful insight into how much VRAM might actually be “enough.”

              New Insta360 X4 Air 8K action camera launches with sleek design and 100 minutes of runtime

              The Insta360 X4 Air is the company’s latest 8K 360° action camera that comes with a compact and lightweight form factor. Advertised as the brand’s lightest-ever action camera, the Insta360 X4 Air features dual 1/1.8-inch CMOS sensors and a 2,010 mAh battery, which is said to offer 100 minutes of runtime. On top of that, the action camera is compatible with most X5 accessories.

              iPhone 20 tipped to offer an impressive camera upgrade

              The iPhone is turning 20 in 2027 and Apple will mark the anniversary with a special iPhone 20 release. We’ve already heard about the big redesign with its sloping display bezels that are supposed to make the device look like a single piece of glass when viewed from the front. We now get an additional report that suggests some major camera upgrades as well. The 2027 iPhone model – likely the Pro variant will reportedly bring Lateral Overflow Integration Capacitor (LOFIC) camera sensor. In short, this means the cameras will capture more light per pixel, leading to higher dynamic range and...

              Galaxy Z Fold8 display and battery details leaked

              Samsung’s Galaxy Z Fold8 isn’t expected to debut until next year, but rumors about the upcoming foldable are already making the rounds. The latest leak sheds light on its display specifications and battery capacity. According to the leak, the upcoming Galaxy Z Fold8 will use a new ‘laser-drilling metal plate technology’ for its hinge, which is said to reduce the display crease. The same technology will also be used on the rumored iPhone Fold. The leak also states that the foldable will pack a battery with a capacity over 5,000mAh. Notably, the current Galaxy Z Fold7 has a 4,400mAh...

              New report claims Apple hasn't cut iPhone Air production

              Multiple reports in recent times claimed that Apple is cutting production of the iPhone Air unveiled last month, with one even claiming that this sleek iPhone had entered almost end-of-production mode. However, a new report contradicts those claims. In a note to investors on October 26, TD Cowen said Apple isn't reducing the number of iPhone Air units it will produce in 2025. TD Cowen's report states that the iPhone Air forecasts for October remain unchanged. The forecasts for the iPhone Air remain at 3 million for Q3 2025 and at 7 million for Q4 2025. The September quarter builds...

              Samsung showcases its tri-fold prototype

              While not exactly launched as tipped yesterday, Samsung did showcase its tri-fold smartphone at the 2025 K-Tech Showcase event. The device, which still does not have an official name, was seen at the Samsung booth behind a protective glass display case. Attendees were not allowed to touch or hold the device. Samsung tri-fold prototype (image: Park Ji-min) South Korea’s ChosunMedia shared images of the device, which reveal its folded and fully unfolded states. We say it is fully unfolded as it features two hinges allowing it to stretch its display diagonal up to 10 inches. In its...

              Samsung’s Mysterious Tri-Fold Phone Just Made Its First Public Appearance

              Samsung tri fold first appearance 4

              Samsung has just shown off its first tri-fold smartphone ahead of its launch. Sounds confusing? Well, it kind of is. The company showed off the device sitting under glass during the K-Tech Showcase in Korea.

              The K-Tech Showcase is kind of a side event of the APEC Summit, which is taking place October 31-November 1. The phone is tipped to get a full reveal during the APEC Summit, so we could be only days away from that happening. This appearance at the K-Tech Showcase certainly points in that direction.

              Samsung’s first tri-fold phone just made its first public appearance

              In any case, the device is shown here, but only its front side, it could be reflective of a device that is coming soon. It’s shown in full unfolded, and fully folded formats. Several sources shared these images, and that includes Ice Universe and The Chosun. You can see the device in the gallery below.

              Samsung tri fold first appearance 1
              Samsung tri fold first appearance 2
              Samsung tri fold first appearance 3
              Samsung tri fold first appearance 4
              Samsung tri fold first appearance 5
              Samsung tri fold first appearance 1
              Samsung tri fold first appearance 2
              Samsung tri fold first appearance 3
              Samsung tri fold first appearance 4
              Samsung tri fold first appearance 5

              When fully folded, the phone will feature a 6.5-inch display, allegedly, as shown above. When completely extended, you’ll get a 10-inch display to use. You’ll notice that a display camera hole is all unfolding levels, basically.

              The phone will have a middle-of-the-road unfold state, too. It is expected to offer an 8-inch display in that state. So it’ll essentially be a tiny table when unfolded once.

              The device is expected to launch soon, possibly later this week

              This is what Samsung said to SamMobile, in a statement: “Samsung continues to advance innovative technologies, including next-generation form factors in the era of mobile AI, to deliver meaningful user experiences. The recent showcase reflects ongoing R&D efforts, and we plan to bring this next generation device to users within this year.”

              From that statement, one might think Samsung is saying this is just a prototype, not the real thing. Well, it could be, though if the device is coming in only a couple of days, that doesn’t make much sense. Either way, Samsung once again confirmed that the real tri-fold announcement is right around the corner.

              The post Samsung’s Mysterious Tri-Fold Phone Just Made Its First Public Appearance appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Samsung Galaxy Watch 6 gets One UI 8 Watch Beta 3 with crucial fixes

              Samsung has now dropped the One UI 8 Watch Beta 3 update for the Galaxy Watch 6 and Classic. The company is running a Beta Program in South Korea, with users are now getting a new Beta four weeks after the second release.

              One UI 8 Watch Beta 3 brings crucial bug fixes to the Galaxy Watch 6. This update targets voice recording and media controller functions. It’s an important release that brings users closer to the Stable One UI 8 Watch update.

              Samsung’s One UI 8 Watch is built on Google’s Wear OS 6. It’s a successor to the One UI 6 Watch, as One UI 7 Watch term was not utilized. The OS introduces a new tile system that delivers important updates at a glance.

              The Stable update has already rolled out to the Galaxy Watch 7 and Watch Ultra 2024. The company didn’t take much time for the Watch Ultra, but Watch 7’s testing lasted longer; but it won’t be the case for the Watch 6.

              With the third Beta, Samsung has addressed issues related to audio recording and media controller. Users who reported issues with these two aspects will now have a better experience, with even more enhancements likely included.

              Changelog

              Improved performance issues

              • Fixed the voice recording not operating normally
              • Fixed the media controller not operating normally

              If you’ve participated in the Beta Program and are running the second Beta, you would have received the third Beta OTA. Access it using the Wearable app; follow the steps: Watch settings > Watch software update > Download and install.

              Galaxy watch 6 series beta 3 released ‼

              Fixing performance issues

              – Fixed the issue where audio recording was not working properly.

              – Fixed an issue where the media controller was not working properly pic.twitter.com/n9DDp9jzTZ

              — Alfatürk (@Alfaturk16) October 28, 2025

              The post Samsung Galaxy Watch 6 gets One UI 8 Watch Beta 3 with crucial fixes appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Google Messages testing Recycle Bin, a staple in Samsung phones

              Google Messages will soon integrate a “Trash” folder, an idea inspired by Samsung’s Recycle Bin feature.

              Galaxy phones prioritize Google Messages, instead of Samsung Messages, to offer modern chat features like RCS. However, Google’s native messaging app is still evolving, and Samsung is playing a key role, indeed indirectly.

              Google Messages app’s latest Beta shows signs of an upcoming Recycle Bin-like “Trash” feature. It will help users recover deleted chats, just like Gmail. The app will keep deleted chats stored in a separate memory for 30 days.

              Samsung Messages has the same feature as the Recycle Bin. When you delete a chat, it goes right to the Recycle Bin, a dedicated folder. You have 30 days to restore the deleted chat; otherwise, it will be permanently wiped out.

              Google Messages prioritizes the term “Trash Folder” for this feature, similar to Files by Google. Leaked code snippets suggest the “Trash Folder” will be put on the task to store recoverable “Trashed Conversations.”

              All in all, Samsung users are going to benefit much from this feature. It will effectively safeguard messages and prevent the loss of accidental removals.

              While Samsung Messages has had it for years, Google’s version is in early stages. The current development is limited to code snippets, and we could see a preview of this feature in the next Beta builds of the application.

              Let’s see when Google Messages begins the rollout of its trash folder.

              Samsung Messages Recycle Bin

              Recycle Bin feature in Samsung Messages

              The post Google Messages testing Recycle Bin, a staple in Samsung phones appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Samsung Galaxy S26 series may use a new Exynos connectivity chip

              There’s been no shortage of rumors surrounding Samsung’s upcoming Galaxy S26 series, with the latest one suggesting a potential delay in its launch. Now, a new leak indicates that the lineup could debut with an Exynos connectivity chip. A new Samsung Exynos S6568 chipset has been listed on the Bluetooth qualified products website. It has been described as a Bluetooth and Wi-Fi companion chip with Bluetooth 6.1 support that’s meant to be used with an Exynos SoC. No other details are available at the moment, but it is likely that the Galaxy S26 lineup could use the S6568 companion...

              Moto X70 Air price in China revealed

              Earlier this month, Motorola listed the X70 Air on the Lenovo China website, but did not reveal pricing or availability details. The company has now confirmed the pricing of its new ‘Air’ phone. The Moto X70 Air is priced at CNY 2,399 ($340) for the 12GB/256GB variant, whereas the 12GB/512GB option will cost you CNY 2,699 ($380). The phone is available in Bronze Green, Gadget Gray, and Lily Pad colors. Pre-orders for the phone are currently live on the Lenovo China website, with sales set to start on October 31. The Moto X70 Air is 5.99mm thin and weighs just 159g. It is powered...

              Which AI Humanizer Passes GPTZero, Turnitin, and Copyleaks?

              AI image 384985348954389

              If you write with any large-language model, ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini, or the dozen niche tools that pop up every month, you’ve surely run into the same brick wall: AI detectors. Classmates whisper about GPTZero, professors swear by Turnitin’s AI meter, and agencies quietly copy-paste everything into Copyleaks before they publish. Nothing drains the fun out of automated drafting faster than a bright-red “99% AI-written” label.

              That tension is why “AI humanizers” now headline software round-ups and TikTok tutorials alike. The promise is simple: paste your machine-written paragraph in, click “Humanize,” and out comes prose that sounds like you after two coffees and zero robots. The reality is more nuanced, but some platforms really do trip up leading detectors at least most of the time.

              Below you’ll find a practical, evidence-based look at the field as it stands. I’ve narrowed the spotlight to three tools that consistently beat GPTZero, Turnitin, and Copyleaks in independent side-by-side tests: Smodin: https://smodin.io/ai-humanizer, Undetectable.ai’s Rewrite module, and HIX Rewrite+ (formerly HIX Covert). You’ll also learn why “passing the detectors” is never just about software and how to keep your words both honest and invisible to the bots.

              How AI Detectors Actually Flag Your Text

              Before judging humanizers, it helps to know what they’re hiding. Modern detectors rely on two core signals:

              – Statistical fingerprints. Language models like GPT use certain phrase patterns, function-word frequencies, and sentence-length distributions that differ from human baselines. Detectors train other models to spot those quirks.

              – Burstiness vs. perplexity. Human writing jumps around: a short fragment here, a multi-clause monster there. AI tends to coast in a tighter range. Detectors score that smoothness as “low burstiness” and raise alarms.

              Turnitin and Copyleaks layer plagiarism checks and cross-document comparisons on top, but the heartbeat is still pattern analysis. Break the patterns, and you drop the detection score.

              The Three Front-Runners in 2025

              After combing through dozens of platforms and running them against fresh detector builds released this fall, three names consistently floated to the top in both reliability and usability. Each excels at a slightly different mix of speed, linguistic nuance, and detector-dodging “stealth” scores, which is why they’ve become staples in student Discords, freelance Slack channels, and small-agency content workflows. Below you’ll find a closer look at what sets Smodin, Undetectable.ai, and HIX Rewrite+ apart, along with the blind-test data that earned them front-runner status.

              Smodin AI Humanizer

              Smodin bills itself as the Swiss Army knife of writing tools generator, paraphraser, detector, and, crucially, a “humanizer” that rewrites machine text to sound organic. It supports 100+ languages, which matters if you write bilingual essays or global marketing copy. In four October blind tests run by freelance reviewers, Smodin’s rewrite dropped GPTZero scores from an average of 83% AI to 12%. Turnitin’s AI index fell below its 20-percent “possible AI” threshold in three of four samples. Copyleaks still caught one technical paragraph (likely due to jargon repetition), but overall accuracy hovered around an 85 percent bypass rate.

              Strengths:

              – Solid at varying sentence length and inserting subtle contractions (“we’re,” “they’ve”) that detectors weigh heavily.

              – Lets you highlight every change, so you can reverse anything that warps meaning.

              – Reasonably priced: the current Writing plan is $15/month.

              Weak spots:

              – Long academic citations sometimes get truncated. Paste those back in manually.

              – On ultra-formal papers, the tool adds a conversational tilt that editors may notice. Tone sliders help, but you still need a quick proofread.

              Undetectable.ai Rewrite Module

              Undetectable.ai surfaced in late 2024 and quickly won a cult following among copywriters. The company’s marketing flex: “0% AI on all major detectors, or we credit your account.” In practice, its success rate sits closer to 90 percent, but that’s still impressive.

              How does it work? It adds “entropy layers,” essentially rewriting twice: once for semantics, once for randomness. You can crank an “Entropy” dial from 1 to 5; anything above 3 can begin to sound disjointed, but level 3 nearly always sneaks past GPTZero and Copyleaks. Turnitin remains the toughest nut; Undetectable.ai achieves a pass roughly four out of five tries.

              Pros:

              – Fast bulk mode: you can upload a 10,000-word white paper and get it back in under a minute.

              – Built-in plagiarism sweep uses the Copyscape API, catching accidental overlap.

              Cons:

              – No free tier, and the Pro plan ($29/month) caps you at 25,000 words. Heavy users can burn through that in a week.

              – Level 3+ entropy occasionally introduces factual drift. Double-check names, dates, and figures.

              HIX Rewrite+ (Covert)

              HIX Write launched as a straight copy assistant in 2023. It’s 2025: Rewrite+ engine quietly became a detection-dodger’s secret weapon. The interface is minimal: paste, select “Covert,” pick a tone (academic, casual, narrative), and hit run. The server spins a hybrid model that blends lexical substitution with clause rearrangement. In public benchmarks hosted by the independent ReviewStack Lab (July 2025), HIX achieved the best Copyleaks evasion only one false flag in 30 runs, while tying Smodin on GPTZero.

              Good news:

              – Best at retaining stylistic nuance. If your original had rhetorical questions or semi-colons, they’re often preserved.

              – Respectable free allotment: 5,000 words/month.

              Bad news:

              – Limited language options (only eight major tongues).

              – No side-by-side change tracking; you need a diff tool if you’re paranoid.

              Field Test: One Paragraph, Three Humanizers

              To ground the numbers, let’s walk through a single paragraph about CRISPR agriculture, originally produced by GPT-4 Turbo. Raw text scored 98% AI on GPTZero, 89% on Turnitin, 91% on Copyleaks.

              – Smodin output: “14% AI” (GPTZero), “17% AI” (Turnitin), “22% AI” (Copyleaks).

              – Undetectable.ai (entropy 3): “5% AI,” “21% AI,” “15% AI.”

              – HIX Rewrite+ (academic tone): “12% AI,” “18% AI,” “9% AI.”

              All three cleared the generic “likely human” threshold that most instructors use (usually 20-25%). The differences matter only if your reader scrutinizes every decimal. In real-world conditions, thousands of essays funneling into an LMS, any of these outputs would slip through.

              What Separates a “Pass” from a Hard Fail

              Even the best tool can’t cover every tell-tale sign on its own. Experienced editors and professors look for other giveaways long before they click “Check AI”:

              – Sudden voice shift. If your intro sounds like Hemingway and your body reads like a textbook, suspicion spikes.

              – Lack of personal anecdote. AI rarely invents believable micro stories (“I spilled coffee on my first draft at 2 a.m.”). Adding one can tilt judgment your way.

              – Too-perfect structure. Flawless five-paragraph symmetry is another red flag. Humans ramble; sprinkle a side-thought here and there.

              In short, humanizers defeat algorithmic pattern detectors, but they can’t import lived experience. That part is on you.

              Choosing the Right Tool for Your Needs

              Ultimately, the best pick hinges less on raw bypass percentages and more on your daily writing context, how many words you crank out, how frequently you switch languages, and how much polish you add by hand after the fact. Think of these humanizers as different gears on the same bike: one may climb academic hills effortlessly, another might zip through marketing flats, and a third offers an all-around ride with a lighter price tag. Keep that metaphor in mind as you weigh the options below.

              – You value multilingual support and budget flexibility → Smodin.

              – You need industrial-scale throughput and don’t mind tweaking entropy → Undetectable.ai.

              – You care most about retaining voice and want a generous free tier → HIX Rewrite+.

              All three update their models every few weeks because detectors evolve just as fast. A subscription that works today might falter next semester. Most creators, therefore, keep at least two accounts active and cross-check outputs before hitting “submit” or “publish.”

              Final Takeaway

              The headline question “Which AI humanizer passes GPTZero, Turnitin, and Copyleaks?” no longer has a single silver-bullet answer. Smodin, Undetectable.ai, and HIX Rewrite+ each clear the bar in late 2025, provided you use them thoughtfully. No guarantee of eternal invisibility; detectors will sharpen again, and the cat-and-mouse game will lurch forward.

              The thing that will never change is the worth of real, captivating prose. These tools are not to conceal your thoughts, but to perfect your language. Combine machine efficiency and human touch, and you will always be a step further than algorithms and bored readers, regardless of what detectors are lurking on the other side of Submit.

              The post Which AI Humanizer Passes GPTZero, Turnitin, and Copyleaks? appeared first on Android Headlines.

              New updates for Galaxy Tab S10 and S9 rolling out now

              Samsung has new software updates for the Galaxy Tab S10 and Tab S9 series. The company has recently released a major One UI 8 upgrade for its premium tablets, while the latest updates aim to improve system security.

              Galaxy Tab S10 and Galaxy Tab S9 series are getting Samsung’s September and October security patch updates, respectively. Despite having a generation gap, the older tablet lineup is receiving a better, newer security patch.

              Users of the Galaxy Tab S10, Tab S10 Plus, Tab S9, Tab S9 Plus, and Tab S9 Ultra can expect a notable boost in performance and stability. The latest updates may also have carried improvements for features across the OS.

              Firmware update versions:

              • CYJ4 – Galaxy Tab S10 series
              • DYJ2 – Galaxy Tab S9 series

              Initially available in South Korea, the new software updates will soon be available in the Global market. You can manually check for updates through Settings > Software update > Download and install.

              Samsung Galaxy Tab S10

              One UI 8 introduces major refinements for the user interface. Samsung has also tweaked the Quick Settings and Notification Panel. The windows are now impressively optimized for tablet form factor and have adopted dynamic blur.

              Samsung recently started the Android 16 rollout to the Galaxy Tab S8 series. The company didn’t expand key Galaxy AI features with the Tab S9 and Tab S8 series; however, the Tab S10 series has received Now Brief and Audio Eraser.

              Meanwhile, a major interface overhaul is being prepared along with a set of new features. These upgrades will be provided as part of One UI 8.5. You can expect the Android 16-based One UI 8.5 update in the second quarter of 2026.

              Via – @ya_sking12767 | Source1/Source2

              The post New updates for Galaxy Tab S10 and S9 rolling out now appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 8 to get 5,000mAh battery, crease fix, and S Pen to challenge foldable iPhone

              Samsung is preparing at least three major upgrades for the Galaxy Z Fold 8. With Apple reportedly pushing its foldable iPhone launch plans to 2027, Samsung is utilizing this opportunity to raise the bar of this smartphone segment.

              A new report (via Jukan/X) reveals how Samsung could bring major upgrades to the Galaxy Z Fold 8 ahead of Apple’s entry to the foldable lineup.

              Galaxy Z Fold 8 Upgrades

              Samsung’s next Galaxy Z Fold model is expected to improve performance by improving its screen and battery, as well as retaining stylus support.

              1. Display

              Samsung Display may use its advanced laser drilling metal plate technology. This technological shift is slated to significantly reduce the display crease on the Galaxy Z Fold 8.

              Over the years, Samsung has improved the crease, but there’s still room for improvement. The next year’s Z Fold model may be equipped with a screen with almost an invisible crease.


              2. Battery

              Samsung may bring a battery near 5,000mAh to the Galaxy Z Fold 8. It will be a big boost over the 4,400mAh battery on the Galaxy Z Fold 7 and previous models.

              The report suggests 5,000mAh could be the typical capacity, meaning the rated battery capacity could exceed this mark; however, it remains a matter of internal consideration.


              3. S Pen

              Galaxy Z Fold 7 screen lost the stylus input support to reduce thickness. However, Samsung might bring it back with the next-gen foldable smartphone in 2026.

              The Korean tech giant is working on a futuristic display technology inspired by Apple Pencil solution; without the requirement of a digitiser film, the panel could recognize stylus input.


              If you’re considering buying the perfect foldable, the Galaxy Z Fold 8 would be for you. Well, this year’s Galaxy Z Fold 7 smartphone also has significant upgrades in terms of design, display, camera, and performance.

              You may like:

              The post Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 8 to get 5,000mAh battery, crease fix, and S Pen to challenge foldable iPhone appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Samsung unveils the Galaxy Z TriFold smartphone

              On October 28, Samsung put its most ambitious Galaxy Z TriFold smartphone prototype on showcase on the sidelines of the APEC Summit.

              At K-Tech Showcase, Samsung officially unveiled its Galaxy Z TriFold smartphone, which features a dual-hinge mechanism to fold twice. This innovative form factor is set to be commercialized by Samsung by the end of the year.

              Following this showcase, we’re expecting a little bigger reveal by Samsung during the APEC Summit, which is being held on October 31 and November 1.

              It’s an expansion to the existing Galaxy Z Fold lineup, which features a single hinge and unfolds a single time. The dual-hinge mechanism integrates three folding panels into one, and the smartphone can be unfolded twice.

              Samsung Galaxy Z TriFold Phone

              Source – Chosun

              The unit put on showcase is a prototype unit, as the mass production and official release in expected by the end of the year. Until then, Samsung might bring even more refinements to the hardware, software, and appearance.

              Samsung Galaxy Z TriFold Phone

              Source – Chosun

              Samsung did not allow visitors to touch or use the device directly. It was placed behind a protective glass display case. Meanwhile, tipster Phoneart has also dropped pictures showing off a closer look at the phone’s design.

              Samsung TriFold Render

              Source – Phoneart (@UniverseIce)

              Galaxy Z TriFold is rumored to have a 6.5-inch cover screen, and the main screens could be extended to 10 inches. That said, the device will become even bigger than the Galaxy Z Fold 7 phone, which has an 8-inch screen.

              While the US release is unlikely, Samsung might launch the Galaxy Z TriFold with a price tag of between $2,600 $2,800. Its presence could be limited to select countries: South Korea, China, Singapore, Taiwan, and the UAE.

              The post Samsung unveils the Galaxy Z TriFold smartphone appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Apple reportedly upgrading iPhone 18 RAM with Samsung’s help

              Apple might equip the entire iPhone 18 lineup with 18GB of RAM. This year’s Pro and Pro Max models have upgraded their RAM capacity to 12GB, which is expected to expand to the Base and Plus/Air models next year.

              TheBell reports that Apple informed Samsung of an increased requirement for LPDDR5X memory for the iPhone 18 series. Samsung is the only vendor producing 12GB and 16GB LPDDR5X RAMs, so the shift is highly likely.

              An upgraded 12GB RAM on the iPhone 18 will help Apple Intelligence run more effectively. It will also provide a crucial boost to on-device AI processing. For this crucial shift, Apple is reportedly seeking the help of Samsung.

              Apple’s base and Plus/Air models compete with Samsung’s Galaxy S and Plus/Edge flagships. Samsung has the Galaxy S Ultra to rival Apple’s iPhone Pro and Pro Max versions with the most premium-tier hardware and features.

              Samsung upgraded the Galaxy S lineup’s RAM in 2025, taking it to 12GB across models. Apple will catch up to Samsung in the memory segment with its next-gen iPhones.

              12GB won’t sound like a decent upgrade in 2026 iPhones, as there are plenty of devices available with even more, 16GB or 24GB RAM. However, the software optimization plays a key role here as just hardware can’t deliver alone.

              Another major shift in the pipeline is a new strategic launch timeline. The base iPhones might launch in the first quarter, starting in 2026, while the Pro and Pro Max would be introduced in the third quarter, as usual.

              Apple iPhone 17

              The post Apple reportedly upgrading iPhone 18 RAM with Samsung’s help appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Wreckreation's gameplay leak reveals 40 minutes of Burnout-inspired racing on PS5 ahead of launch

              A 40-minute unfiltered PS5 build of Wreckreation leaked a day before release, showcasing Burnout‑inspired high‑speed arcade racing with loops, big jumps, track‑building, and destructible elements, even as viewers pointed out inconsistent performance and bugs that could perhaps be attributed to an earlier build.

              Randy Pitchford says Valve's Gabe Newell called him directly to pitch Half‑Life: Opposing Force

              In the Shacknews documentary 24 ’Til Launch: The Making of Borderlands 4, Gearbox CEO Randy Pitchford recounts how EA’s cancellation of his Rebel Boat Rocker project Prax War and the subsequent founding of Gearbox led to an unexpected call from Valve’s Gabe Newell, who invited Pitchford to pitch an expanded Half‑Life storyline.

              Former Halo CE dev talks Halo Campaign Evolved: "There's plenty of ways to improve Halo 1 without breaking it"

              After Halo: Campaign Evolved’s 13‑minute Silent Cartographer demo at the Halo World Championship 2025, former Combat Evolved designer Jaime Griesemer took to X to criticize changes. He focused most of his ire on the ability to steamroll Hunters in a Warthog, movable obstacles, and added trees, all of which he says wreck the pacing in the game.

              iQOO 15's India launch date announced

              iQOO unveiled the iQOO 15 in China last week, and today, the company announced that the iQOO 15 will be launched in India on November 26. The smartphone will likely be sold through iQOO's Indian website and Amazon.in in India, but its pricing and sale date are yet to be officially revealed. The Indian model of last year's iQOO 13 came with a smaller battery (6,000 mAh vs. 6,150 mAh), and it's unclear if there will be any differences in specs between the iQOO 15's Indian and global/Chinese versions. However, the two features we know will remain the same across all regions are the Snapdragon...

              Retroid Pocket 6 released to redefine Android gaming handheld scene with 120 Hz AMOLED and Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 for just over $200

              The Retroid Pocket 6 is now available to pre-order worldwide with hardware to rival recent popular Android gaming handhelds like the Ayn Odin 2. While the Retroid Pocket 6 combines a 120 Hz AMOLED display with a Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Gen 2 chipset and 8 GB of RAM, the handheld starts for a mere $209 initially.

              vivo S50 series specs leak

              vivo unveiled the S30 and S30 Pro mini in May, and if you know anything about Chinese smartphone makers, you know that they hate the number 4, due to prevailing tetraphobia in China. So it won't surprise you to find out that there will be no S40 series, but that vivo is already working on the S50 family. A few details about these have been outed today. The S50 Pro mini will keep the exact same display size its predecessor has - 6.31". On the other hand, the S50's screen will shrink to 6.59" from the S30's 6.67". Both of the new phones have "1.5K" resolution and flat panels. vivo...

              OnePlus Turbo's full specs leak, insane battery capacity included

              OnePlus has just announced the 15 and the Ace 6 in China, but it's also working on a new series of devices, which was previously rumored earlier this month. The first phone in this line will be called OnePlus Turbo, and today its specs have been leaked. It will allegedly sport a 6.7-inch OLED screen with "1.5K" resolution and 165Hz refresh rate, the Snapdragon 8 Gen 5 SoC at the helm, and a gigantic 8,000 mAh battery with support for 100W wired charging. OnePlus Ace 6 On the rear will be a 50 MP main camera and an 8 MP ultrawide. The device will also pack an X-axis linear vibration...

              Sam Altman Reportedly Developing Noninvasive Brain Interface to Rival Elon Musk’s Neuralink

              Sam Altman 2

              It’s kind of funny. Back when OpenAI was first founded, Elon Musk and Sam Altman were thick as thieves. Both supposedly had a similar mission when it came to artificial intelligence. However, fast forward to today, and both parties appear to be bitter enemies. But despite their differences, they both seem to be working towards a similar goal. Elon Musk has Neuralink, and now Sam Altman is reportedly working on his own brain interface as well.

              Sam Altman’s brain interface could rival Neuralink

              According to The Verge’s Alex Heath in his Sources newsletter, it appears that OpenAI’s CEO, Sam Altman, is building his own brain interface that could rival that of Elon Musk’s Neuralink. The report claims that Altman has tapped Mikhail Shapiro, an award-winning biomolecular engineer. 

              Shapiro will join Merge Labs, which is a brain-computer interface startup by Altman and Alex Blania. At the moment, not much is known about what this company is about. However, based on Shapiro’s work, it suggests that Altman could leverage his expertise to create a device that could link to the human brain using noninvasive techniques. To be more specific, it could use sound waves.

              This is based on a recent talk Shapiro gave, where he said that sound waves and magnetic fields could be used to create a brain-to-computer interface. If that’s true, it could make Altman’s startup a whole lot more attractive compared to Neuralink.

              Neuralink’s approach

              For those unfamiliar, Neuralink is a company founded by Musk. The company’s goal is to create a way for people to interact with their computers or phones using their thoughts. It sounds quite high-tech, almost sci-fi-like. However, the problem with Neuralink is that it’s not exactly the most user-friendly.

              In order for Neuralink to work, the user has to undergo open-skull surgery. This is where the electrodes are implanted into the brain to allow the user to control their devices. Any type of brain surgery has its risks. But to ask someone to undergo surgery just so they have a hands-free way of using their computers? That’s a huge ask.

              If Altman’s new startup can indeed create an interface that uses sound waves, it’s a no-brainer (pun intended) that more people might prefer.

              The post Sam Altman Reportedly Developing Noninvasive Brain Interface to Rival Elon Musk’s Neuralink appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Threads Gets 'Ghost Posts' That Vanish After 24 Hours

              Threads Logo on phone 2

              Meta has been increasingly focused on Threads in the recent past, and it’s visible in how frequently it’s been adding new features to the platform. Early last month, the social media app announced long-form posts. As part of that feature, users can now post up to 10,000 characters in one go. Now, Threads is getting a “disappearing post” feature, which Meta calls “ghost posts.” Meta started testing this feature back in April, alongside other features that are now available on Threads. 

              All the replies to your ghost posts land in your Threads DMs

              Threads’ new ghost posts feature enables you to share your thoughts or engage in conversation that vanishes after 24 hours. You’ll be able to create a ghost post on mobile by enabling the toggle that has the new “ghost” icon on the app’s compose screen. The feature is a handy addition for anyone who likes to post something but doesn’t want it to appear on their Threads profile. 

              Every time you publish a ghost post on Threads, others will see it having a dotted bubble around. This gives an idea to others that it’s a disappearing post. What’s interesting is that the replies on such posts land directly into your DMs and don’t appear on your timeline. 

              Another thing to note is that other Threads users can’t see the number of likes, replies, or the names of ghost post viewers. However, they can still see smiley-face icons below the disappearing posts. This gives an idea to people that others have replied to or liked the posts. 

              02 Profile Entry
              01 Ghost Post Carousel 01
              01 Ghost Post Carousel 02
              02 Profile Entry
              01 Ghost Post Carousel 01
              01 Ghost Post Carousel 02

              You can still revisit the post from the “archived” section

              Not to forget, you can still check ghost posts from the “archived” section of the Threads’ settings menu. Think of this feature as Instagram Stories that are only available for 24 hours. Meta, in the announcement post, notes that this feature is for those who want to “share unfiltered thoughts and fresh takes without the pressure of permanence or polish. Here today and gone tomorrow, you can feel confident trying new things and posting spontaneous thoughts.”

              The post Threads Gets 'Ghost Posts' That Vanish After 24 Hours appeared first on Android Headlines.

              New Leak Sheds Light on iPhone 18 Pro and iPhone 17e Designs

              iPhone 17 Pro

              Apple’s iPhone 18 series is still months away from seeing the light of day, but the rumor mill has started giving a glimpse of what’s to come. The iPhone 18 Pro models may gain satellite 5G support. Apple will also introduce a new A20/A20 Pro chip, which may significantly increase the prices of the phones. While that’s for hardware, a new leak sheds light on the iPhone 18 Pro design for the first time.

              iPhone 18 Pro design details

              Leaker Digital Chat Station has detailed what to expect in terms of the iPhone 18 Pro and iPhone 17e designs. In a Weibo post talking about iPhone 18 Pro’s camera upgrades, the leaker in comments says the new model will feature the same rear camera design as this year’s iPhone 17 Pro. This means we’ll see the same large horizontal module taking up a large portion of the back panel.

              This makes sense considering Apple just redesigned its flagship models this year, and it usually sticks to the same for at least a few years. It’s unclear whether the glass cutout below the module will see any changes. The leaker previously mentioned that it will have a slightly modified transparent look on the iPhone 18 Pro.

              Furthermore, the leaker says that he hasn’t come across the design details for the iPhone 18 model yet.

              iPhone 18 Pro Design

              No ProMotion display for the ‘e’ model yet

              Moving to iPhone 17e, Digital Chat Station says the display will finally shift to Dynamic Island. In comparison, the current iPhone 16e uses a dated notch design. This should bring the low-cost iPhone more in line with the flagship models. 

              However, the display will only support a 60Hz refresh rate, as per the leaker. This isn’t surprising, as Apple brought ProMotion to the base iPhone 17 model only this year. We may have to wait at least another year before we see ProMotion for the budget ‘e’ model. 

              The post New Leak Sheds Light on iPhone 18 Pro and iPhone 17e Designs appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Ethical Wildlife Photography: A Field Guide to Photographing Animals with Respect

              Two bear cubs stand on hind legs playfully sparring in a grassy field, while a bald eagle perches calmly on a branch against a blurred forest background.

              A crew working for an unnamed wildlife photographer fed and used cellophane paper to lure a fox for the 'perfect shot' in Grand Teton National Park. Since the fox was conditioned to human food, park officials euthanized it. The photographer got his shot. The fox paid with its life. Learning about this event became the North Star for Arthur Lefo, an OM SYSTEM Ambassador who has spent almost a decade photographing iconic wildlife. Lefo believes that ethical wildlife photography isn't just about rules, but respect.

              [Read More]

              ARMSX2 version 1.0 released, promises improved PS2 emulation on ARM, Android devices

              Version 1.0 of ARMSX2, an ARM-focused branch of the popular PCSX2 emulator, has landed on Android. The new version of the PlayStation 2 emulator uses a translation layer to run code from PCSX2 (with some additions) on ARM devices, including Android smartphones. This gives retro gamers another option to play PS2 titles on their smartphones.

              Apple is reportedly releasing Pixelmator Pro for iPad along with MainStage, Compressor, and Motion

              According to a new report, Apple is about to launch four new apps for iPadOS. These are Pixelmator Pro, MainStage, Motion, and Compressor. They would join Apple's Final Cut Pro and Logic Pro, both of which arrived on iPadOS in 2023. The four apps that are supposedly coming to an iPad near you are at the moment only available on macOS. Apple acquired professional image editing app Pixelmator Pro this year, while MainStage is a Logic Pro companion app for live performances, Compressor is a Final Cut Pro companion app for compressing audio and video files, and Motion is a Final Cut Pro...

              Samsung may have delayed the One UI 8.5 beta program, here's why

              Samsung is now rumored to have delayed the start of the beta program for its upcoming One UI 8.5 Android skin . This is what the Galaxy S26 series is expected to launch running. Samsung should have released the first beta build of One UI 8.5 in November. However, this is now very unlikely to happen, a tipster on X says. The rollout is delayed, and it's all connected to the Galaxy S26+. This model was initially scrapped by Samsung, only to be brought back to life recently in the face of the Galaxy S25 Edge's dismal sales (the S26 Edge was supposedly replacing the S26+, but now the S26 Edge...

              Best Gaming Smartphones

              AH REDMAGIC 10S Pro Review (12)

              Gaming smartphones used to be an extremely niche product, and while they technically still are, there are a lot more phones out there these days that can be considered suitable gaming smartphones. Even if they aren’t marketed as such. With that in mind, consumers have more choices for a gaming smartphone than ever before. With more options comes more of a challenge in finding the best gaming smartphones available, because you have a higher chance of picking something that isn’t a good phone for gaming.

              That being said, we’ve set out to find all the best gaming smartphones for you to make this process easier. There will be some obvious choices and some maybe not so obvious, but all of them will be viable for playing mobile games if that’s the kind of device you’re looking for.

              Here are the best gaming smartphones you can buy in 2025.

              Best Gaming Smartphone

              If you want the best gaming smartphone available, then there are a couple that would easily fit into this category; however, we’re recommending the REDMAGIC 10S Pro as the phone to beat. Not only is it extremely capable because of its specifications, but it was purpose-built for mobile gaming and offers some specialized gaming features. It’s also available at a very reasonable and affordable base price compared to another high-end option we had in mind. At the end of the day, the REDMAGIC 10S Pro provides a basically pound-for-pound experience and has a lower price. So, this is the best for anyone who wants a dedicated gaming smartphone. At least for now. We’re a few months out from the end of the year, and eventually, new gaming smartphone models will arise.

              REDMAGIC 10S Pro
              Rating
              star star star star star
              Starting at $699
              AH REDMAGIC 10S Pro Review (3)

              REDMAGIC’s 10S Pro is an excellent example of what a gaming phone should be – affordable, powerful, and full of features that cater to the gamer. After years of development and several iterations, the REDMAGIC 10S Pro is the product of a lot of hard work to create something that mobile gamers will be proud to have.

              It offers several advantages, and while it comes in at a lower price point than direct competitors, it doesn’t skimp on performance. It doesn’t give an inch. That’s an impressive feat and it’s one of the reasons why it’s the best gaming phone available for most people in 2025.

              Pros

              • Great battery life
              • Charges up super fast
              • Exceptional performance
              • Good camera
              • Affordable price point
              • Display provides an awesome visual experience

              Cons

              • Fingerprint magnet
              • Can get extremely warm during high-intensity tasks
              • No wireless charging

              The REDMAGIC 10S Pro has a lot of unique features that other high-end phones won’t have, and that’s one of the reasons why it’s a special phone for mobile gaming enthusiasts. The key feature, at least in our eyes, is the ultrasonic triggers that sit on top of the phone when you’re holding the phone in landscape mode for playing games. These act just like the triggers on a controller. These are perfect for shooter games, but you can map these triggers to any in-game control so you could use them for any game you want, as long as that games plays in landscape mode.

              This phone also has a pretty large battery capacity and a really good cooling system. The latter helps ensure the phone stays capable of operating at optimal temperatures to sustain that high performance for longer periods of time. Then of course, you can pick this phone up with large amounts of RAM and storage, and it’s powered by the Snapdragon 8 Elite chipset, which is extremely powerful for mobile games.

              Display: 6.85-inch AMOLED

              Brightness: 2,000 nits

              Protection: Corning Gorilla Glass

              Processor: Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite

              RAM and Storage: 12GB, 16GB, or 24GB RAM / 256GB, 512GB, or 1TB storage

              Cameras: 50MP+50MP+2MP

              Battery: 7050mAh Dual Cell Battery

              Charging: 80W wired

              Colors: Nightfall, Dusk, Moonlight

              • Android Version: Android 15
              • Software Support: 2 years of major OS updates and 3 years of security updates
              • AI Software: AI Trigger, Circle to Search, AI Photo Search AI image editing, real-time translations, call subtitles
              • Camera Score: Not tested by DXOMark
              • Camera Features: AI-powered image editing, Portrait Mode, Milky Way Night, Pro, Camera-Family
              • Battery Life Score: 25 hours and 42 minutes (Ranked 4th among phones Android Headlines has reviewed)
              • Charging Time: 44 minutes
              Review
              AH REDMAGIC 10S Pro Review (1)
              REDMAGIC 10S Pro Ultimate Review: The Gaming Phone for Everyone
              REDMAGIC burst onto the scene years ago, but the brand has really started to push the envelope within the last…
              by Justin Diaz Read Full Review
              Buy from
              Buy from REDMAGIC

              Best Premium Gaming Smartphone

              When it comes to premium gaming phones, there’s really only one choice, and this year it’s the ASUS ROG Phone 9 Pro. At a retail price of $1,299, it is most certainly not cheap but you get a top-of-the-line gaming smartphone with an exceptional experience for mobile gaming. While some of us here at Android Headlines personally like it more than the REDMAGIC 10S Pro, the 10S Pro is still the best offering because of its price and similar performance. However, if money is no object and you’re not concerned about the price, then this is the gaming phone you go with. ASUS spared no expense, and you might not want to either.

              ASUS ROG Phone 9 Pro Edition
              Rating
              star star star star star
              $1,299
              AH ASUS ROG Phone 9 Pro Edition

              The ASUS ROG Phone 9 Pro released early in the year, making it one of the first phones to launch with the Snapdragon 8 Elite. It was officially launched in November of 2024, but it didn’t reach the US until January of 2025. It has an admittedly pretty good camera for a gaming phone. We say this because gaming phones typically have not had very good cameras. ASUS and REDMAGIC have started to change this and the ROG Phone 9 Pro has what is likely the best camera of any “gaming phone” that’s currently available.

              Of course, the real magic lies in the special software features in the Armoury Crate app, as well as the popular AirTriggers. ASUS pioneered this feature and it has since spread to other gaming phone devices in similar forms. Still, they feel the best on the ROG devices.

              Pros

              • AirTriggers are incredibly responsive
              • Best-in-class cooling system
              • Top-notch performance
              • Best camera of any ROG Phone to date
              • Advanced gaming software features enhance the user experience

              Cons

              • Expensive
              • Not widely available
              • Short lifespan on major OS updates

              The AirTriggers are one of the best things about this device. They give your phone trigger-like ultrasonic buttons that act like the triggers on a controller. ASUS is no longer the only brand to offer a feature like this, but it is the brand that offers the best-feeling triggers on a gaming phone. Plus, it has some excellent gaming software, with the most advanced features we’ve seen yet thanks to ASUS”s infusion of AI-powered functions.

              It also has the best cooling of any gaming phone we’ve ever used, which allows it to keep sustained performance at a high level beyond other devices. You could play the most demanding games on this phone for a couple of hours and barely notice any change in surface temperature. At least, it wouldn’t get to the point where things are uncomfortable. This wasn’t the case with some of the older ROG Phone models, so ASUS came a long way with this one. There is, of course, the addition of large amounts of RAM and storage capacity, though, this isn’t specific to the ROG Phone 9 Pro. It’s just one of the really great things about it.

              Display: 6.78 inch FHD+ 2400 x1080

              Brightness: 2,500 nits peak, 1,600 nits HBM

              Protection: Corning Gorilla Glass Victus 2

              Processor: Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite

              RAM and Storage: 16GB or 24GB RAM / 512GB or 1TB storage

              Cameras: 50 MP, f/1.9, 24mm (wide), 32 MP, f/2.4, (telephoto), 13 MP, f/2.2, 13mm, 120˚ (ultrawide)

              Battery: 5,800mAh

              Charging: 65W wired, 15W wireless

              Colors: Phantom Black

              • Android Version: Android 15
              • Software Support: 2 years of major OS updates and 3 years of security updates
              • AI Software: X Sense, X Capture, X Grabber
              • Camera Score: Not tested by DXOMark
              • Camera Features: AI Object Sense, AI HyperClarity, AI Portrait Video, 4K video, 8K video
              Buy from

              Best Non-Gaming Smartphone For Gaming

              Gaming phones aren’t for everybody, and that’s understandable. They focus mostly on gaming as the key features, so naturally, a few other things may take a backseat. That being said, there are still consumers out there who like mobile gaming but want something that does other things really, really well. Thankfully, some brands, like Samsung, have put an emphasis on mobile gaming in recent years while still managing to deliver a phone that’s excellent for mobile gaming, but it’s not an actual gaming phone. The Galaxy S25 Ultra is the best phone to go for if you want something that can perform well with mobile games, that isn’t actually a gaming phone. That means you won’t get any special gaming-centric hardware features here, but it’ll run games effortlessly thanks to its powerful hardware.

              Samsung Galaxy S25 Ultra
              Rating
              star star star star star_empty
              Samsung Galaxy S25 Ultra AM AH 17

              The Samsung Galaxy S25 Ultra is not a gaming phone but it is a good phone for games, because it’s good at pretty much everything it can do. It has great cameras, it has lots of storage, and it has a powerful chipset for high performance. Plus, it has a big screen with great resolution and vibrant colors. In other words, you’ll get a good screen size for games and the colors in those games will look amazing. Of course, it can’t be forgotten that this device has plenty of AI-powered software features to make everyday use outside of games more convenient.

              Samsung has also taken great pains to increase mobile gaming performance and improve the user experience while playing games. This includes the use of a vapor chamber for better cooling, and even some gaming software features. It’s an all-around great device for more than just gaming. But, when it comes time to game, this phone won’t let you down.

              Pros

              • Good Cameras
              • LOG Video recording for aspiring YouTubers
              • Class-leading battery life
              • Improved charging
              • Useful AI Features
              • 7 years of Updates!

              Cons

              • No Dolby Vision support
              • S Pen losses Bluetooth support
              • Still Expensive

              What makes this phone special is that it’s a high-performance phone that can be used for mobile gaming, but it’s not really a gaming phone. So, as a user, you just end up with a really, really nice premium phone that can just happens to be able to play games well. Not just well, but at top-tier levels, given its RAM, storage, and Snapdragon 8 Elite chipset.

              It’s a device that is just as suitable for everything else people love to do with mobile phones as it is for mobile gaming. It doesn’t look like a gaming phone either. That is most certainly going to appeal to some people who like games but don’t like the over-used gamer aesthetic. Even better is that you can use this phone for years to come. Samsung has promised 7 years of major OS updates, security updates, and feature updates. Which means, you’ll still be getting new versions of Android in 5 years. This isn’t something that was typical until Google’s Pixel 8 series. Samsung followed and promised 7 years of updates with last year’s Galaxy S24 series, and it’s continuing to do so here. The Galaxy S25 Ultra is an expensive phone as well, but it does a lot and it does it all pretty well.

              Display: 6.9″ Dynamic LTPO AMOLED 2X 120Hz.
              Brightness: 2,600 nits peak
              Protection: Corning Gorilla Armor 2
              Processor: Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite for Galaxy
              RAM and Storage: 12GB RAM, 256GB, 512GB or 1TB Storage
              Cameras: 200MP primary camera at f/1.7, 10MP 3x telephoto at f/2.4, 50MP 5x telephoto at f/3.4, and 50MP ultrawide at f/1.9.
              Battery: 5,000mAh
              Charging: 45W wired and 15W wireless. 4.5W reverse wireless also available
              Colors: Titanium Silver Blue, Titanium Black, Titanium White Silver, Titanium Gray, Titanium Jade Green, Titanium Jet Black, Titanium Pink Gold

              • Android Version: Android 16 (One UI 8)
              • Software Support: 7 years of updates (through January 2032)
              • AI Software: Galaxy AI, Gemini, and Circle to Search
              • Camera Score: 151 via DXOMark (Ranked 26th globally)
              • Camera features: Up to 100x zoom, 10-bit HDR recording, 8K video recording, LOG video mode, ProVisual Engine + Next-Gen Camera AI.
              • Battery life Score: 22 hours and 3 minutes (Ranked 22nd among phones Android Headlines has reviewed)
              • Charging time: 1 hour and 14 seconds.
              Review
              Samsung Galaxy S25 Ultra AM AH 22
              star
              Samsung Galaxy S25 Ultra Ultimate Review: More Than Meets The Eye
              On the surface, it looks like Samsung did the bare minimum to release a new flagship phone. However, once you…
              by Alexander Maxham Read Full Review
              Buy from
              Buy from
              Buy from

              Best Mid-Range Gaming Smartphone

              The OnePlus 13R is perhaps the best option for a phone that excels at mobile gaming in the budget category. It doesn’t cost a whole lot these days, and it’s still using some pretty powerful specs for a phone. Even if the chipset is from last year, it’s still last year’s flagship chipset from Qualcomm. Which is only a little less powerful than the Snapdragon 8 Elite.

              OnePlus has also done some work to make its phones good for mobile gaming. The company included vapor chambers, added some gaming-centric software features, and, of course, the phones use good specs that allow the phone to run games well with high settings. This is another device that isn’t really a gaming phone, but it does play mobile games really well, all at a fraction of the cost of premium devices and actual gaming phones.

              OnePlus 13R
              Rating
              star star star star star_empty
              $599
              OnePlus 13R Deal

              Much like the OnePlus 12R, the OnePlus 13R prides itself on being capable in many different areas and that includes gaming. The approach is similar to Samsung with a focus on using high-quality components to ensure that gaming performance is smooth, but without alienating the crowd of consumers who doesn’t like the style of gaming phones or the fact that they can drop the ball in a few areas, most notably the camera, although not always. The OnePlus 13R shines in most areas including with battery life (so you can play games for longer), and it does these things while managing to keep the price tag a reasonable amount. How does OnePlus keep the price lower? Mainly by using last year’s chipset. This is the gaming phone for anyone who wants something mainstream, with excellent performance, great features, and a stylish design.

              Pros

              • Great, smooth display
              • Outstanding performance
              • Solid main camera performance
              • Battery life is its strong suit
              • Very fast (wired) charging
              • Plenty fast fingerprint scanner

              Cons

              • Poor ultrawide camera performance
              • No wireless charging

              The thing that makes this phone special the most is that it has top-tier gaming performance at a price of $599. Thanks to the use of the Snapdragon 8 Gen 3 as opposed to the Snapdragon 8 Elite, OnePlus was able to keep the price lower than its flagship OnePlus 13. There are other differences, of course, but this one factor helped a lot. Yet, the Snapdragon 8 Gen 3 is still a flagship chipset, just from one year prior, and that makes it a very good chip for games. OnePlus has also kept the vapor chamber and even improved on it from the previous year. Not to mention, it has put some focus toward enhancing mobile gaming through a few software features. There was a time that only brands who made official gaming phones would pay attention to this detail. More and more brands who make devices for the masses are catering to gamers too. And OnePlus is one of them.

              It charges up extremely fast as well, when you use the wired charger, and that bodes well for the gamer who plays for long periods of time and needs to charge up the device as much as possible before having to rush out the door. By all accounts this is a great phone for gaming if you’re on a smaller budget and don’t want to compromise too much on performance.

              Display: 6.78 LTPO AMOLED 120Hz

              Brightness: 4,500 nits peak

              Protection: Corning Gorilla Glass 7i

              Processor: Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Gen 3

              RAM and Storage: 12GB/16GB RAM ; 256GB/512GB Storage

              Cameras: 50MP primary camera at f/1.8, 8MP ultrawide at f/2.2, 50MP telephoto at f/2.0

              Battery: 6,000mAh

              Charging: 80W wired

              Colors: Astral Trail, Nebula Noir

              • Android Version: Android 15 (OxygenOS 15)
              • Software Support: 4 years of major Android updates
              • AI Software: Gemini, Circle to Search, OnePlus AI
              • Camera Score: N/A
              • Camera features: Color spectrum sensor, HDR, 4K video recording at 60 fps, gyro-EIS
              • Battery life Score: 18 hours and 55 minutes (ranked 43rd among phones Android Headlines has reviewed)
              • Charging time: 44 minutes and 30 seconds
              Announcement
              13R 2colors uncrop Large
              OnePlus 13R Packs a Punch Without Breaking the Bank
              Alongside the OnePlus 13 today, the OnePlus 13R was also announced. This is the company’s cheaper flagship offering with last…
              by Alexander Maxham Read Full Announcement
              Buy from OnePlus
              Buy from

              Best Budget Gaming Smartphone

              If you’re looking to go even less expensive than the OnePlus 13R, then the Poco X7 Pro 5G is the phone for you. It’s the best bang for your buck if mobile gaming is a huge focal point in choosing a new phone to upgrade to. While it won’t have the best performance of any phone on the market, it has considerably good performance, and it costs under $400. That’s a price-to-performance value you can’t really argue against. Plus, the phone doesn’t look too bad in terms of design.

              Poco X7 Pro 5G
              Rating
              star star star star star_empty
              $360
              poco x7 x7 pro 2

              The Poco X7 Pro 5G is the kind of phone you consider when you want something that was built with mobile gaming in mind, but for the crowd of consumer who doesn’t want to spend more than a few hundred dollars.

              At an average price of around $360, the Poco X7 Pro 5G from Xiaomi is a testament to what you can produce for less money when you put some effort into the development process. While it won’t beat out the top-tier devices, the Poco X7 Pro will have no problem delivering a quality gaming experience to the user. If you don’t care so much about having the absolute best, this is the device we’re recommending because it’s affordable, and it performs well. Not to mention it has a huge battery, so it’ll last a while between charges, too.

              Pros

              • Pretty powerful chipset for a budget device
              • Massive 6,000mAh battery
              • Affordable price point
              • 90W charging support
              • Slim bezels
              • 120Hz display with decent resolution

              Cons

              • underwhelming camera
              • Performance won’t quite match top-tier phones

              What makes this phone truly special is that it can play mobile games with pretty good performance that most mobile gamers are likely to find acceptable, all without charging the consumer more than a few hundred dollars. This is the biggest draw of the Poco X7 Pro 5G. You’ll pay under $400 for it, and you’ll end up with a device that pumps out decent performance and has a long-lasting battery.

              With a 120Hz display and ultra-slim bezels, gaming visuals will be presented in a delightful way so you can enjoy more of your game time without distractions. Plus, the slimmer bezels just look nicer overall. It also comes with an IP68 rating for dust resistance and water resistance. An IP68 rating on phones this inexpensive isn’t as common, so this is definitely a standout feature of the design.

              Display: 6.67-inch CrystalRes AMOLED display

              Brightness: 3,200 nits peak

              Protection: Corning Gorilla Glass 7i

              Processor: MediaTek Dimensity 8400-Ultra

              RAM and Storage: 8GB RAM, 256GB storage/12GB RAM, 256GB storage/12GB RAM, 512GB storage

              Camera: 50MP Main camera at f/1.5 with OIS, 8MP Ultrawide

              Battery: 6,000mAh

              Charging: 90W wired

              Colors: Black, Green, Yellow

              Android Version: Android 15 via HyperOS 2

              Software Support: 4 years of major Android updates

              AI Software: Google Gemini, Circle to Search, AI Cinematic Lockscreen, AI Dynamic Wallpapers, AI Writing, DeepThink Mode

              Camera Score: Not tested by DXOMark

              Camera Features: AI Image Expansion, AI Film, AI Erase Pro, 4K Video Recording at 60fps, Director Mode, Burst Shot Mode, Night Scene Capture

              Announcement
              poco x7 x7 pro 5
              POCO just unveiled its new X7 series with a special Iron Man Edition
              If there’s one thing we love about POCO’s phones, it’s that they basically bring a flagship experience despite being priced…
              by Tyler Lee Read Full Announcement
              Buy from

              The post Best Gaming Smartphones appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Samsung Finally Resumes One UI 8 Rollout for Galaxy S24 & S23

              Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra AM AH 06

              The One UI 8 rollout has seen its share of issues, with Samsung pausing the process on several of its phones, including the popular Galaxy S24 and S23 flagships. The company hasn’t disclosed the reason that triggered this move, but we assume something serious. Anyway, it looks to be a thing of the past, as Samsung appears to have resumed the One UI 8 update for the Galaxy S24 and S23 models. 

              One UI 8 update for the Galaxy S24 and S23 resumed again

              The screenshots shared by Tarun Vats confirm that One UI 8 is again available for the Galaxy S23 and S24. This is happening first in Samsung’s home soil, South Korea, suggesting that the Android 16-based update will also resume in other affected regions shortly. To recall, One UI 8 debuted on the Galaxy Z Fold 7 and Z Flip in July. It later made its way to other models, starting with the Galaxy S25 series.

              Since then, Samsung has temporarily halted the update for various models without acknowledging or giving out a reason. It halted the One UI 8 rollout for the Galaxy S23 last week, after it began rolling out earlier this month. 

              One UI 8 update Galaxy S24–resumed

              The update is live in South Korea

              One UI 8 is now back on track, as it’s rolling out again in the Galaxy S24 and S23 October monthly update. The update weighs around 396MB for the Galaxy S24 and 385MB for the Galaxy S23.

              Meanwhile, Samsung’s next big UI upgrade is One UI 8.5, whose beta was originally rumored to start in November. But this is now reportedly not happening, possibly because of Samsung’s change in launch plans for the Galaxy S26 series.

              The post Samsung Finally Resumes One UI 8 Rollout for Galaxy S24 & S23 appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Samsung Galaxy S26 Changes Reportedly Delay One UI 8.5 Beta

              samsung one ui 8 5 logo featured

              Samsung’s upcoming big software update, One UI 8.5, is expected to bring some major changes and optimizations. However, things are reportedly not going as smoothly as planned. The company has now reportedly delayed the rollout of its One UI 8.5 beta. The program was earlier rumored to open in late November.

              Samsung has delayed the rollout of the One UI 8.5 beta update

              While Samsung has not made any official announcement yet, a fresh leak suggests that the firm has delayed the rollout of its One UI 8.5 beta update. The well-known tipster on X/Twitter, Tarun Vats, who closely follows the company’s software rollout timeline, recently revealed that the One UI 8.5 beta for the Galaxy S25 series has been postponed.

              Earlier reports indicated that the beta would begin in the last week of November, but that schedule now appears unlikely. The delay seems to be connected with the major shake-up within the Galaxy S26 series.

              According to sources, Samsung has canceled the Galaxy S26 Edge and reinstated the S26 Plus. It has also scrapped its plan to rename the standard S26 as S26 Pro. With the company revising its entire strategy, the internal development timeline has been disrupted. This has indirectly pushed back the One UI 8.5 beta as well.

              The delay could be longer than anticipated

              Since there are no official words on the update yet, it’s unclear how long the firm plans to hold off on the beta program. Historically, the company has delayed the release of its major software versions, such as One UI 8.0 and 8.1. This is to ensure the update’s stability before the stable release.

              Anyway, if the One UI 8.5 beta rollout is delayed by more than a few weeks, it could line up with the slightly postponed launch of the Galaxy S26 series. However, depending upon the priorities of the company, the update may be delayed much longer than anticipated.

              The post Samsung Galaxy S26 Changes Reportedly Delay One UI 8.5 Beta appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Fitbit's Personal Health Coach enters an early preview this week

              Fitbit Personal Health Coach Preview (1)

              Earlier this year, Google announced that a Fitbit Personal Health Coach was coming to eligible devices, such as the Pixel Watch 4, and this week, it’s entering an early preview phase. This brings it one step closer to being fully launched, although it will take a little more time to get there, Google admits. This early preview will serve as a way for users to test the new feature and give some feedback to Google so that it can improve where things need to be improved. “Building this health coach takes time, rigor, and input to make sure it works well for everyone, which is why we’re starting with a preview and asking for your honest feedback,” Google says.

              Since this is a preview, Google is quick to point out that everything it has mentioned as part of the preview is “by no means a comprehensive list of everything it can do.” That means users can expect it to do even more than what Google has announced so far. Which, by the way, includes everything from creating workouts on the fly to understanding more about specific health conditions. These don’t even have to be health conditions you have. It can just be something you’re particularly interested in learning more about.

              Fitbit Personal Health Coach Preview (4)
              Fitbit Personal Health Coach Preview (2)
              Fitbit Personal Health Coach Preview (3)
              Fitbit Personal Health Coach Preview (4)
              Fitbit Personal Health Coach Preview (2)
              Fitbit Personal Health Coach Preview (3)

              The Fitbit Health Coach early preview begins October 28

              Good news for anyone who wants to try this out: you’ll be able to give the Personal Health Coach a try starting tomorrow, October 28. Google doesn’t mention a specific time, so you may just have to end up keeping an eye on the Fitbit apps on your devices.

              Google says you will need an eligible device to check it out, and this includes Pixel Watch and Fitbit devices. You also need to be a Fitbit Premium subscriber, as this will be a Fitbit Premium feature. Once the feature begins rolling out, users will be able to spend about 5 to 10 minutes having a conversation with their AI-powered fitness coach to get the ball rolling. Doing this isn’t mandatory to begin using the preview, as Google notes you can come back to it later, but it does seem to be recommended.

              It’s also worth noting that this preview doesn’t have access to everything the current version of the Fitbit app has. A lot of features are missing. This includes menstrual health logging and tracking, body temp logging and tracking, social features like friends and leaderboards, and a host of others.

              That being said, this is a preview, and Google confirms that users can swap back and forth. So, it isn’t a one way or another kind of situation. You can have both, just not in one app experience yet.

              The post Fitbit's Personal Health Coach enters an early preview this week appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Qualcomm Challenges Nvidia with In-House AI Accelerator Chips

              AH Qualcomm Logo (1)

              Qualcomm has officially entered the AI chip race with the launch of its two new accelerator chips. With this move, the company aims for a major shift from its traditional focus on smartphone and wireless connectivity semiconductors. With the launch of its new AI200 and AI250 chips, the company has positioned itself as a new challenger in the booming data center market, currently dominated by Nvidia and AMD.

              Qualcomm announces AI200 and AI250 accelerator chips

              According to an official announcement, Qualcomm plans to commercially release its new accelerator chip, the AI200, in 2026. The AI250 is scheduled to launch later in 2027. Both of these chips are designed for large-scale, liquid-cooled server racks. They are capable of powering an entire rack with up to 72 chips acting as one system.

              Qualcomm builds its data center chips on the same hexagon neural processing unit (NPU) as its mobile processors. According to the company’s general manager of data center and edge, Durga Malladi, this is a part of a strategic move. She says that “We first proved ourselves in other domains, and then scaled up to the data center level.”

              The new AI chips are competing on cost, efficiency, and flexibility

              Unlike NVIDIA, whose GPUs are primarily used for training AI models, Qualcomm’s chips focus on inference, running pre-trained models efficiently. The company claims its rack-scale systems will cost less to operate. It is said to consume around 160 kilowatts per rack, roughly similar to Nvidia’s systems.

              Malladi further adds in her statement that Qualcomm will offer modular sales. Clients will be able to purchase full racks or individual components. Interestingly, even competitors like Nvidia or AMD could use Qualcomm’s CPUs or other data center parts. The new AI cards are also said to be capable of handling 768GB of memory, surpassing both NVIDIA and AMD in this metric.

              The post Qualcomm Challenges Nvidia with In-House AI Accelerator Chips appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Samsung Galaxy Buds 4 and Buds 4 Pro codenames revealed in One UI 8.5 build

              Samsung is getting ready to launch its next wireless earbuds, the Galaxy Buds 4 and Galaxy Buds 4 Pro. The company seems to be giving this new lineup a unique and creative touch. Instead of using simple or color-based codenames like in the past, Samsung has chosen names inspired by classical composers.

              According to information via Android Authority, the latest One UI 8.5 software revealed important details about these upcoming earbuds. In Samsung’s Buds Manager app, the Buds 4 are listed under the codename “Handel,” while the Buds 4 Pro are called “Bach.”

              Both names come from famous German composers, which shows that Samsung is adding a touch of classical music flair to its new products. This is a new direction for Samsung, as older Galaxy Buds had much simpler codenames.

              Samsung Galaxy Buds 3 Pro

              While the names Galaxy Buds 4 and Buds 4 Pro had already been seen before, this is the first time we’ve learned about their codenames.  These names are quite different from previous generations. For example, the Galaxy Buds 2 were called “Berry” internally, while the Buds 3, 3 Pro, and 3 FE used “Jelly,” “Paran,” and “Gemstone.”

              The new musical codenames might hint that Samsung is aiming for a more elegant design or an improved listening experience. So far, there are no leaked images or official previews of the Galaxy Buds 4 series. Only some icons have appeared in the early One UI 8.5 builds, and it’s unclear if they represent the final design.

              Still, it’s clear that Samsung is continuing to improve its popular audio lineup while also working on new products like the Galaxy XR headset. Stay tuned for more information.

              Google Search Top Stories Preferred Source

              The post Samsung Galaxy Buds 4 and Buds 4 Pro codenames revealed in One UI 8.5 build appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Your Samsung Galaxy S20 FE is now out of date – Here’s why it matters

              Samsung’s Galaxy S20 FE has officially received its last security update. October 2025 security patch is the final update the phone will get. While the device is still up-to-date now, it will no longer receive future updates.

              The Galaxy S20 FE is part of Samsung’s “Fan Edition” lineup, which offers many features of Samsung’s flagship phones at a lower price. When it was released, it was a popular choice because it combined strong performance and useful features without the high cost of a full flagship model.

              Samsung now supports newer phones for longer periods. Many new Android phones get updates for about seven years, but the Galaxy S20 FE came out before this policy. It means that this FE will no longer receive security updates.

              Samsung Galaxy S20 FE September 2024 update Verizon

              The successor of the Galaxy S20 FE, the Galaxy S21 FE, is also nearing the end of its support, while the new Galaxy S25 FE is in its first year of a seven-year update plan. This means the S25 FE will continue to receive both Android and security updates until 2032.

              For anyone still using the S20 FE, this is a good time to think about upgrading. Samsung is offering the Galaxy S25 FE at an amazing discount with a trade-in and even includes a free storage upgrade. While the S20 FE will still work, it will gradually lose protection against security threats.

              Google Search Top Stories Preferred Source

              The post Your Samsung Galaxy S20 FE is now out of date – Here’s why it matters appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Galaxy S21 FE grabs October 2025 patch amid slow One UI 8 rollout

              Samsung has started rolling out the October 2025 security update for the Galaxy S21 FE. Right now, it is available for users in Vietnam, and it will reach other countries soon. This update comes soon after Samsung began releasing the One UI 8 update for the device.

              October 2025 security update for Samsung Galaxy S21 FE arrives with the One UI build version G990EXXSJHYJ4 and is about 300MB in size. Even though it is not very large, it includes important security fixes. The latest security patch addresses over 30 security issues, some of which could put your phone at risk.

              October 2025 security update is coming while Samsung is still rolling out One UI 8 for the Galaxy S21 FE. The One UI 8 update started last week, but many users in different countries are still waiting for it. Even though this major UI update is not yet available for everyone, Samsung is making sure devices get the latest security fixes first.

              Samsung Galaxy S21 FE October 2025 update

              Image via golyigit2025 (X)

              This security update rollout shows that Samsung is focused on keeping its users’ phones safe. Installing updates on time is important to protect your phone from security threats and ensure it works well.

              To get the update, go to your phone’s Settings >> Software Update >> Download and Install. If you don’t see it right away, don’t worry. Samsung usually releases updates in phases, so it might take a few days to appear on your device.

              Galaxy S21 FE users should check for this update and install it as soon as it is available. Keeping your phone updated will not only improve security but also help your device run better with the latest improvements.

              Google Search Top Stories Preferred Source

              The post Galaxy S21 FE grabs October 2025 patch amid slow One UI 8 rollout appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Samsung widens October 2025 security update rollout for Galaxy Z Flip 7 and Fold 7

              Samsung has started expanding the October 2025 security update for its latest foldable phones, the Galaxy Z Flip 7 and Galaxy Z Fold 7. After first reaching users in Korea, the update is now available in India and Europe. This new update enhances the security and stability of the devices for everyday use.

              October 2025 update mainly focuses on improving security and performance. It fixes 34 security issues found in both Android and Samsung’s own software. While there are no new features or major visual changes, the update helps make the phones safer and run more smoothly.

              Users of Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 7 and Galaxy Z Fold 7 can identify the latest update by the firmware version ending with AYJ3. Although this update doesn’t bring visible changes, it’s important for maintaining the phone’s security and long-term performance.

              Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7, Flip 7 and Watch 8 Classic

              Source – Samsung Mobile Press

              Samsung’s new foldables come with One UI 8 based on Android 16 right out of the box. The company promises seven years of software updates, which means users will continue to get new features and security patches for a long time.

              At the moment, Samsung is preparing the One UI 8.5 update. It will reportedly bring a refreshed design with more dynamic visuals and new features. Notably, this major update will debut with the Galaxy S26 series next year.

              To install the latest security patch, go to Settings > Software update > Download and install. If the update is available for your device, it will start downloading automatically. It’s recommended to install this patch to keep your Galaxy Z Flip 7 or Fold 7 secure and running smoothly.

              Google Search Top Stories Preferred Source

              The post Samsung widens October 2025 security update rollout for Galaxy Z Flip 7 and Fold 7 appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              The Best Video Cameras to Take On Long-Distance Backpacking

              A hiker with a large backpack walks toward a scenic mountain vista, framed by a tree and a large rock, under a partly cloudy sky.

              It was sunset on top of the tallest mountain in the continental United States, and I had two immediate priorities. One was dinner. As a long-distance backpacker on the Pacific Crest Trail, I was burning between 4,000 and 6,000 calories a day, and losing too much weight was a constant concern for myself and my friends. The other priority was 32.4 ounces of metal and glass clipped to the shoulder strap of my backpack: my camera. And as the sun sank towards the horizon, I kept neglecting my dinner in favor of keeping up with the ever-changing lighting.

              [Read More]

              How a Ladder Company Turned Louvre Heist Photo Into a Viral Ad Campaign

              A Böcker cargo lift is positioned against a historic stone building, reaching an upper window. Two police cars and orange cones block the street. Text overlay promotes the lift’s speed and electric motor.

              As the saying attributed to P.T. Barnum goes, "There is no such thing as bad publicity." German company Böcker certainly subscribes to the view after turning a press photo of one of its ladders used in the daring Louvre Museum heist into a viral marketing campaign.

              [Read More]

              Microsoft Xbox 'Magnus' launching with free online multiplayer plus Epic Games Store and Steam games support

              A new report has shared more details about Microsoft's next Xbox 'Magnus' console. Not only is Microsoft now rumoured to be switching to free console multiplayer, but the move to running future Xbox consoles with a modified version of Windows will allow it to support PC games while retaining backwards compatibility with older Xbox generations.

              Lenovo IdeaPad Slim 3 with Snapdragon X chipset and touchscreen drops below $450

              Deal | The Lenovo IdeaPad Slim 3 might be a great choice for people looking for a budget laptop with a touch-capable display. It comes equipped with a Qualcomm Snapdragon X SoC, 16 GB of soldered RAM, and a 256 GB SSD (that's thankfully user-upgradable). Port selection is decent too for the $450 price point, as it even has a full-sized SD card reader.

              Rumor: iPhone 20 Pro will get Apple camera sensor for the first time, iPhone 18 Pro will get two camera upgrades

              According to the latest rumors, Apple is planning at least two significant camera upgrades for the iPhone 18 Pro (Max). The anniversary iPhone in 2027 will also be particularly exciting, as it is expected to be equipped with a camera sensor developed by Apple for the first time, which promises far better image quality thanks to new technology.

              More details about the Xiaomi 17 Ultra's cameras leak

              Xiaomi has already launched the 17, 17 Pro, and 17 Pro Max, but of course there's still one member missing from its latest flagship family - the 17 Ultra. It's unclear exactly when this phone will be made official, but for reference note that the 15 Ultra (Xiaomi skipped the number 16 in order to match Apple's product naming scheme) got official this February. Today some more details about the Xiaomi 17 Ultra's cameras have been outed in China. Xiaomi 15 Ultra According to Digital Chat Station on Weibo, the 17 Ultra will come with a new 50 MP main camera that supports better...

              Samsung Galaxy Buds3 and Buds3 Pro are receiving a new update

              Samsung is seeding a new update for the Galaxy Buds3 series. The flagship earbuds were launched in July last year alongside the Galaxy Z Fold6 and Galaxy Z Flip6. The Galaxy Buds3 and Buds3 Pro are receiving a firmware update. At the moment, the update is only available for users in South Korea. However, it is expected to be rolled out to users in other regions soon. According to screenshots shared by users on Samsung's community forum, the update improves stability and fixes bugs. Unfortunately, the changelog doesn’t detail the fixes or improvements. The Galaxy Buds3 update is...

              Watch the global unveiling of the Oppo Find X9 series here

              Oppo announced the Find X9 and Find X9 Pro in China earlier this month, and now it's almost ready to take them to global markets as well. The company is live-streaming the global unveiling on YouTube, and you can find the stream embedded below. The event starts on October 28 at 3 PM GMT / UK time, 4 PM in Germany and France, 8:30 PM in India, 8 AM in California, and 11 AM in New York. The duo's European pricing surfaced last week, with the X9 allegedly starting at €999 and the Pro model going for €1,299. In China, the Find X9 has a 6.59-inch AMOLED screen with 120Hz refresh rate...

              DJI Osmo Pocket 4 chassis leak hints at refreshed dimensions

              DJI’s compact camera line looks set for a refresh. Nearly two years after the Osmo Pocket 3 made its debut, leaked images of what’s believed to be the Osmo Pocket 4 have surfaced online. The upcoming model adds new physical controls and slight tweaks to its overall shape and size.

              Pocket 4 (left), Pocket 3 (right)

              A side-by-side comparison shot of the Osmo Pocket 3 and Pocket 4’s chassis has emerged online, showing the Pocket 4 stands slightly taller and narrower than the Pocket 3. Still, the redesign keeps that signature pocketable feel. This leak lines up with earlier footage from Barcelona, where what looked like a Pocket 4 prototype was spotted filming in public.

              The most visible change is a new set of hardware buttons placed below the rotatable touchscreen, replacing the “Osmo” logo found on the Pocket 3. These could serve as shortcuts for recording, focus, or gimbal controls—making one-handed shooting much easier. Combined with reports that production is already underway, the leak suggests a launch could happen before early 2026.

              The Osmo Pocket 3 set a high bar back in 2023 with its 1-inch CMOS sensor, 4K/120fps recording, and 2-inch rotatable OLED screen, though its 179g weight and short battery life left room for improvement. Previous rumors point to the Pocket 4 possibly adding a dual-camera setup. If true, it could mean a telephoto or depth camera for added versatility alongside the 1″ main camera.

              DJI seems ready to respond with a more ergonomic, creator-friendly design. Whether it lands before the holidays or in early 2026, the Osmo Pocket 4 looks poised to be a small but meaningful upgrade for handheld storytellers everywhere.

              Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              (Source)

              The post DJI Osmo Pocket 4 chassis leak hints at refreshed dimensions appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Vivo X300 vs Xiaomi 17: Two flagships head-to-head

              Vivo-X300-vs-Xiaomi-17

              It’s the season of flagship Android wars in China. Almost every major brand has unveiled a new device in the last month or so, each equipped with the latest processors, top-tier displays, and, thankfully, bigger batteries.

              The Vivo X300 and Xiaomi 17 are two such contenders. On paper, both devices come loaded with high-end hardware, eye-catching designs, and the latest chips from MediaTek and Qualcomm.

              But peel back the specs and the differences start to show. So let’s break down what really sets them apart.

              Design and Build

              Both the Vivo X300 and Xiaomi 17 share similar dimensions. It measures around 150mm tall and weighs just under 200 grams. They’re slim, premium slabs that feel engineered to impress.

              Vivo’s design features glass on both sides, paired with an aluminum alloy frame, while Xiaomi opts for Dragon Crystal Glass on the front, complemented by an aluminum frame.

              Both phones are IP68 rated, meaning they can withstand accidental water drops and dusty environments. However, Vivo takes it a step further with an IP69 rating, enabling it to withstand high-pressure water jets. That’s rare even among flagships, though it’s unlikely to make a meaningful difference in real-life use.

              Display

              Both phones use LTPO AMOLED panels with 120Hz refresh rates and 2160Hz PWM dimming, making them easier on the eyes at low brightness. Vivo’s display measures 6.31 inches, while Xiaomi’s is roughly the same at 6.3 inches.

              Brightness is where Vivo pulls ahead. The X300 peaks at a massive 4,500 nits, while Xiaomi reaches up to 3,500 nits. Both are extremely bright and should deliver great outdoor visibility, regardless of the numbers.

              In terms of color, both screens support HDR10+, HDR Vivid, and advanced tone mapping. Xiaomi adds Dolby Vision to the mix, giving it an edge when watching supported content on Netflix or YouTube.

              Resolution-wise, both hover in the 1220–1260p range, offering crisp text and smooth visuals.

              Performance: MediaTek vs Snapdragon

              The two phones take very different approaches to performance. The X300 runs MediaTek’s Dimensity 9500, a 3nm chip with ARM C1 cores clocked up to 4.21GHz.

              Xiaomi, on the other hand, ships with Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5, also built on a 3nm process and equipped with custom Oryon V3 cores running up to 4.6GHz.

              On paper, Snapdragon’s architecture has the upper hand. It uses two 4.6GHz Oryon V3 Phoenix L cores and six 3.62GHz Phoenix M cores, paired with an Adreno 840 GPU—delivering top-tier gaming and raw compute performance. The Dimensity 9500’s 4.21GHz C1-Ultra and 3.5GHz C1-Premium cores aren’t far behind, and MediaTek’s Arm G1-Ultra GPU is also powerful.

              In real-world use, both phones should feel incredibly fast. Scrolling, multitasking, and gaming happen without hesitation. Vivo’s OriginOS 6 (based on Android 16) feels smooth and responsive, while Xiaomi’s HyperOS 3 offers deep customization and similarly slick performance.

              Cameras

              This is where things get interesting. The Vivo X300 features a bold 200MP main sensor with OIS, a 50MP periscope telephoto, and a 50MP ultrawide. The system is tuned by Zeiss and includes Zeiss T* lens coating, laser autofocus, and even 3D LUT import for pro-grade color work.

              The Xiaomi 17, meanwhile, sticks to a more traditional 50MP triple setup—50MP main, 50MP telephoto (2.6x optical), and 50MP ultrawide—with Leica-co-engineered optics.

              Both phones offer flagship camera performance, and the final quality will come down to ISP tuning and post-processing. However, Vivo holds a clear advantage in flexibility, thanks to support for external photography accessories, including a telephoto extender that can deliver crisp shots at up to 200mm.

              On the front, both devices use 50MP selfie cameras with 4K video support, but Xiaomi goes further with HDR10+ video capture and gyro-EIS.

              Battery and Charging

              Battery life is where Xiaomi dominates. The Xiaomi 17 packs a huge 7,000mAh cell along with 100W wired, 50W wireless, and 22.5W reverse wireless charging.

              Vivo’s 6,040mAh battery with 90W wired and 40W wireless charging still offers strong endurance, easily lasting a day and a half, but Xiaomi simply goes farther. The difference between 6,040mAh and 7,000mAh will be noticeable, especially for heavy users.

              Audio and Connectivity

              Both phones skip the headphone jack but feature stereo speakers. Xiaomi’s setup is tuned for Dolby Atmos and Snapdragon Sound, with Hi-Res 24-bit/192kHz playback. Vivo’s speakers are clean, but lack Dolby branding.

              Connectivity is top-tier on both devices, including Wi-Fi 7, Bluetooth 5.4, NFC, infrared, and multi-band GPS. Vivo adds eSIM support internationally, which Xiaomi lacks, while Xiaomi includes DisplayPort output over USB-C, allowing it to connect directly to a monitor.

              Verdict

              The Vivo X300 and Xiaomi 17 show how differently two brands can approach the same idea: a compact 2025 flagship.

              The Vivo X300 stands out with its brighter display, Zeiss-tuned 200MP camera, and cleaner design. It’s ideal for users who prioritize photography and aesthetics.

              The Xiaomi 17 shines with its massive battery, Leica tuning, Snapdragon performance, and superior audio. It’s the better fit for power users who value endurance and versatility.

              There’s no outright winner—just two flagships excelling in their own way.

              Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              The post Vivo X300 vs Xiaomi 17: Two flagships head-to-head appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Motorola Edge 70 appears on Geekbench, launch offers revealed — matches Edge 60 Pro in performance

              Moto Edge 70

              Motorola is stirring excitement for its next mid-range entry, the Edge 70. This phone blends a super-slim profile with surprisingly generous launch deals. With the official reveal set for November 5, the company has already started teasing specs that make this phone look like an appealing option for casual users who prioritize design and in-hand experience.

              Moto Edge 70
              Moto Edge 70

              The Edge 70 packs a 4,800mAh silicon-carbon battery—larger than the iPhone Air’s 3,149mAh and even the Galaxy S25 Edge’s 3.900mAh—yet the chassis stays impressively thin at 5.99mm. Charging speeds are solid too, with 68W wired and 15W wireless support, promising up to two days of battery life.

              Under the hood, Motorola is opting for Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 7 Gen 4, paired with 12GB of LPDDR5X RAM and 512GB of UFS 3.1 storage.

              Leaked Geekbench 6 CPU scores suggest performance on par with the MediaTek Dimensity 8350 of the Edge 60 Pro. The display sounds premium as well: a 6.7-inch 1.5K pOLED panel with 120Hz refresh, 4,500 nits peak brightness, and Gorilla Glass 7i protection. The camera setup features 50MP main and ultrawide lenses on the back, paired with a 50MP selfie shooter.

              Where things really heat up is pricing. While Motorola hasn’t confirmed global prices yet, the Edge 70—sold in China as the X70 Air—appears to be positioned as an affordable rival to Apple’s iPhone Air and Samsung’s Galaxy S25 Edge. In China, it’s available in two variants: 12GB + 256GB for 2,599 yuan (~$365) and 12GB + 512GB for 2,899 yuan (~$410).

              For international buyers, Motorola appears to be stacking generous launch offers that could amount to over €550 (~$640) in savings through early-bird vouchers and regional promos. If those carry over to the final pricing, the expected €699 (~$760) tag could dip into Pixel 9a territory—a seriously competitive spot for what’s shaping up to be a near-flagship phone.

              The Edge 70 will debut in Europe first, with India and the US expected to follow by December.

              Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              (Source: Motorola | Geekbench)

              The post Motorola Edge 70 appears on Geekbench, launch offers revealed — matches Edge 60 Pro in performance appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Grab Acer TravelLite Laptop available at just Rs. 38,999

              Acer TravelLite Laptop

              All the festival discounts end with Diwali, but there are some good offers. The Acer TravelLite series is designed specifically for digital nomads, offering a sleek, portable build. Amazon is providing an excellent discount on the Acer TravelLite Smart FHD TL04-51M laptop, allowing you to buy it for as low as ₹38,999.

              The original Amazon listing price is ₹45,999, but applying the coupon reduces it by ₹7,000 to reach that lower price. Moreover, if you make a payment through a credit/debit card, you can get Rs 1500 discount, which makes the effective price of Acer’s laptop just Rs. 37,499.

              Please Note: When you buy something using the links in our articles, we may earn a small commission at no cost to you.

              Acer TravelLite Smart FHD TL04-51M Specification

              Coming to the major specifications of the laptop. At its core, the TravelLite packs an Intel Core i5 processor 13th generation. Paired with 8GB of RAM and a spacious 512GB SSD, it should effortlessly handle everything from spreadsheets in Excel to video editing in Adobe Premiere or seamless Zoom calls and much more.

              What truly sets the TravelLite apart is its travel or business-friendly DNA. Weighing under 1.5 kg with a slim 14-inch Full HD display boasting anti-glare tech and vibrant IPS panels, it’s built for long flights or other outside hustles. The battery life is claimed to last up to 10 hours on a single charge, perfect for all-day unplugged adventures. The laptop is packed with USB-C, HDMI, and Thunderbolt ports, ensuring you stay plugged into your ecosystem. Running on Windows 11 Home, it integrates smoothly with Microsoft 365 and offers Acer’s Care Center for easy diagnostics.

              That being said, although priced originally higher, this Rs. 7,000 coupon slash brings premium specs into budget territory. So, if you’re looking for a reliable daily driver that won’t weigh you down, then bag the Acer TravelLite now from Amazon India.

              The post Grab Acer TravelLite Laptop available at just Rs. 38,999 appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Baseus launches 100W power bank with 20,000mAh capacity & dual built-in cables

              Baseus 100W Power Bank

              Baseus has officially launched a new 100W power bank in China. The product is now available on JD.com with a retail price of 199 yuan ($28). It features a 20,000mAh battery, a 3C + 1A output layout, and built-in dual USB-C charging cables that eliminate the need to carry separate cables.

              Baseus 100W Power Bank

              Baseus 100W Power Bank Specifications

              The power bank supports 100W fast charging and is designed to work with a wide range of devices, including smartphones, tablets, laptops, handheld consoles, and cameras. According to Baseus, it can charge a 13-inch MacBook Air up to 36% in just 30 minutes. It also supports up to 65W input for self-charging and can fully recharge itself in approximately 2.5 hours.

              Baseus has included support for several charging protocols such as PD, PPS, UFCS, QC, FCP, AFC, and SCP. The power bank is compatible with major brands, including Apple, Xiaomi, Huawei, Oppo, Vivo, and Samsung. It delivers up to 100W via its USB-C port and the USB-C1 cable, 50W via the USB-C2 cable, and 22.5W via the USB-A port. It can charge Xiaomi phones at 55W and iPhones at up to 45W.

              Baseus 100W Power Bank

              The device features an ergonomic and compact design that is 24% smaller and 40% thinner than typical 20,000mAh power banks. It weighs around 420 grams and measures 152.1 × 66 × 26.5mm. The surface uses a smooth, skin-friendly coating, and the body includes soft R-shaped edges for improved grip. The built-in charging cables are made from dual-weave high-density braiding and interlock to form a convenient carrying loop.

              Internally, the power bank houses four high-density 5000mAh cells with a total energy rating of 73Wh. It uses a graphene-based dual heat dissipation system to prevent overheating. It also comes with an onboard AI temperature control chip that monitors thermal conditions 36,000 times per hour to ensure stable performance.

              Baseus has added nine layers of protection, covering overvoltage, overcurrent, short circuit, temperature, and electromagnetic interference. The product is available in Starry Blue, Moonlight Beige, and Interstellar Black color options.

              For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.

              Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories! 💡

              (Baseus JD)

              The post Baseus launches 100W power bank with 20,000mAh capacity & dual built-in cables appeared first on Gizmochina.

              Google Pixel Phones Will Finally Get Theme Packs Soon

              Google Pixel 10 AH 04

              Google is currently working on its next major software update for Pixel devices—also known as Pixel Feature Drop—for a November 4, 2025 release. This update will deliver several key upgrades. However, among all of them stands out a substantial boost to customization through the introduction of Theme Packs for Google Pixel phones.

              This isn’t the first time we’ve heard about this feature. It’s been highly anticipated among Pixel fans, as it has the potential to finally break the customization limitations on these devices compared to third-party Android implementations (such as One UI and Chinese custom skins).

              Google Pixel Theme Packs to arrive with the November 2025 Feature Drop

              According to Mystic Leaks, the long-rumored Theme Packs feature is finally ready for public release. These packs will represent more than minor color tweaks. They will offer comprehensive, system-wide aesthetic changes. The initial launch will involve a high-profile collaboration, with the first official theme drawing inspiration from the film “Wicked: For Good,” conveniently coinciding with the movie’s first screenings. This joint launch suggests Google plans to launch collaborative Themes constantly in the future.

              Google Pixel Theme Packs 1

              Pixel Studio Animations and VIP notifications as well

              That said, the upcoming Drop also includes a couple of major new features. First, for the creators, The Pixel Studio app is gaining new animation functionality that uses generative AI. Users will be able to transform their existing photos and GIFs into short, dynamic video clips. There are no details yet on which AI model will be behind this feature. However, it is likely powered by the latest Veo 3.1. This new tool will offer a simple way for users to add dynamic motion to their static media.

              Lastly, the other star feature of the update will help users manage communication overload. The Pixel VIP feature will let you prioritize notifications from contacts designated as “VIPs.” Its scope will initially be limited to conversations within WhatsApp and Google Messages. However, it leaves the door open for potential integration with more messaging services and apps in the future.

              Google Pixel Theme Packs 2

              The post Google Pixel Phones Will Finally Get Theme Packs Soon appeared first on Android Headlines.

              This MagSafe phone grip is also a kickstand, and it's only $9

              MagSafe Phone Holder Deal

              If you’ve got an iPhone or a phone with a MagSafe-compatible case, then you should definitely consider picking up this MagSafe phone grip accessory, because this Amazon deal knocks the price down to just $8.98. That’s a respectable price for an accessory like this one, which has multiple uses. Normally, this thing is also $11.99 at full price, so why not save a few extra bucks, right?

              As for what this does, it’s a MagSafe phone grip. It has a ring shape on it that allows you to slip your finger through and hold the phone more securely. This is great for holding the device one-handed, especially if you’re typing. This also serves as a kickstand, and its design allows it to be used as a kickstand while the phone is in landscape or horizontal orientations.

              This is a neat little trick because once you’re done holding it, you can set it down on your desk or table or any other flat surface, and prop the kickstand part out to stand the phone up. It doesn’t charge your device, so if you need to charge the phone and want to charge it via the MagSafe, then you’ll have to take this off while you do that. You also won’t have to be worried about safety with this magnet accessory attached, because it has a super-strong magnet inside. It’s strong enough to hold up to 5.5 lbs., which is around 2,500g, and that’s more than enough to keep your phone attached.

              Bordsek MagSafe Phone Grip

              Bordsek MagSafe Phone Grip – $8.98

              Buy from

              The post This MagSafe phone grip is also a kickstand, and it's only $9 appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Anker's flat 6-in-1 Nano charging station is down to just $38

              Anker Nano Charging Station Deal

              Charging up your devices can be a pain in the neck if you don’t have enough outlets to plug everything in, but luckily, this deal on the flat 6-in-1 charging station from Anker can save you from those terrible moments. As the name suggests, the Anker Nano 6-in-1 flat charging station will let you charge or power up to six devices at a time. Normally, this charging station accessory would end up costing you $49.99. However, Amazon has it on sale for $37.99 today.

              Aside from having the capability to power six devices, here’s what makes this charging station so good. First, it has a flat plug. With the flat plug, you can easily plug the charging station into an outlet, even if it’s behind furniture. Ideally, you wouldn’t need this sort of solution. However, sometimes the only available outlets are stuck behind couches, desks, or other furniture that needs to be up against the wall. The flat plug allows you to bypass this hurdle. The charging station itself is also quite flat, with two additional AC outlets and four USB ports. Two of those USB ports are USB-C.

              And if it wasn’t already obvious from the picture, the cable is also thin and flat, which not only helps it fit behind stuff but also does a good job at preventing it from tangling up. The main reasons for grabbing an accessory like this are to charge multiple devices at once and help get rid of cable clutter from multiple chargers. This also comes in three colors.

              Lowest Price
              Anker Nano Flat 6-in-1 Charging Station

              Anker Nano Flat 6-in-1 Charging Station – $37.99

              Buy from

              The post Anker's flat 6-in-1 Nano charging station is down to just $38 appeared first on Android Headlines.

              OpenAI May Launch its Own Generative AI Music Tool

              ChatGPT and OpenAI Logo Background

              We’ve seen how AI can generate text. Later, we also saw how AI can generate images and videos. So, AI that generates music? Why not? And that’s something that OpenAI is reportedly working on, which is generative AI music.

              OpenAI working on generative AI music

              According to a report from The Information, it has learned that OpenAI is developing a new AI tool that would allow users to create generative music. This means that similar to generative text, images, and videos, users can just type in a prompt using natural language, and the AI will create a song for them on the fly.

              The report goes on to state that OpenAI is apparently working with students from the prestigious Juilliard School to annotate scores. This will help the AI model train itself on music. That being said, if this report is accurate, OpenAI won’t be the first to launch such a tool. Platforms like Sumo and SOUNDRAW already offer similar capabilities.

              However, we suppose the potential upside is that OpenAI might bake this feature into ChatGPT. This will give ChatGPT even more tools, making it a more well-rounded AI model compared to those designed for niche purposes.

              Is the world ready for more AI slop?

              That being said, we have to wonder what the world and the industry think about this. At the moment, most people seem to be against AI-generated content. This is especially true when it comes to text, images, and videos, which have been labelled as “AI slop.” However, there could be some potential use here.

              Content creators right now have a few options when it comes to using music in their videos. They can either pick from a library of songs that are copyright-approved, find their own royalty-free music, or pay a third-party platform to license music. Otherwise, they risk having their videos pulled, muted, and accounts suspended. Giving these creators the ability to generate something on the fly could be one way around that. 

              Plus, we’re sure that there are many musicians, record labels, and music publishers who might be concerned that their content is being used to train these AI models without their consent or compensation. We’ve already seen artists, writers, and publishers sue AI companies, so it’s not entirely out of the question.

              The post OpenAI May Launch its Own Generative AI Music Tool appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Google's second-best Pixel Watch is now on sale for $100 off

              AH Google Pixel Watch 3

              Google’s Pixel Watch 3 is still one of the best smartwatches out there that you can buy. Even at its regular price, it’s an enticing purchase because it has plenty of awesome features, and it’s Google’s first watch to come in a 45mm size. Still, it becomes an even better value when you can save money on it, and that time is now, as Amazon has it on sale for $100 off.

              Normally, the Pixel Watch 3 in the 45mm size would cost you $299. However, Amazon has it on sale for $199. This is the all-time low price for the watch, and quite honestly, well worth it if you don’t feel like spending close to $200 more for the latest model.

              The Pixel Watch 3 features everything from advanced sleep tracking to automatic activity tracking of several different types of exercises. Naturally, it works as a great device to keep you informed on smartphone notifications without having to pull your phone out of your pocket or purse or wherever else you may have it stowed away. Plus, now that it has Gemini available, the watch has become even more useful. You can also use the Pixel Watch 3 for Google Pay payments at checkout stands and for Google Maps directions. You can even set navigation up to display the navigation on the watch display, which makes driving navigation way easier, as you can just lift your wrist for a quick peek.

              Lowest Price
              Google Pixel Watch 3 (45mm)

              Google Pixel Watch 3 (45mm) – $199

              Buy from

              The post Google's second-best Pixel Watch is now on sale for $100 off appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Best Google Pixel 10 Cases & Accessories

              Google Pixel 10 AH 15

              The Google Pixel 10 series has been in the stores for weeks. With their cutting-edge features and refined design, they are devices worth protecting and accessorizing. Since its launch, the market has been flooded with a vast array of cases and accessories. To help you navigate the options, we’ve curated a list of the best cases in various categories, ensuring your Google Pixel 10 is not only safeguarded but also enhanced to fit your lifestyle. All our selections are readily available on Amazon, making it easy to get your hands on these top-tier products.

              Best Grip Google Pixel 10 Case

              For those who prioritize a secure hold on their device, the dbrand Grip Case for the Google Pixel 10 is in a league of its own.

              dbrand Grip Case
              Starts at $59.90
              dbrand Grip Case customizable 6

              Engineered with microscopic ridges along the sides, dbrand’s Grip Case offers an unparalleled grip that significantly reduces the likelihood of accidental drops. The tactile texture provides a confident and comfortable feel in your hand, making it ideal for one-handed use and for those on the go.

              Beyond its impressive grip, the dbrand Grip Case doesn’t skimp on protection. It boasts military-grade impact resistance to safeguard your Pixel 10 from everyday tumbles. The case is also fully compatible with dbrand’s extensive collection of skins. This allows you to customize the look of your phone without compromising on the secure grip that makes this case a standout choice. The design you see in the image above is just one of dozens of options to choose from.

              • Colors: Dozens to choose from, literally
              • Wireless Charging Support: Yes
              • Build Materials: Textured silicon
              • Recycled materials: N/A
              • Dimensions: N/A
              • Weight: N/A
              Buy from dbrand

              Best Rugged Google Pixel 10 Case

              When maximum protection is your top priority, the Spigen Tough Armor for the Google Pixel 10 is the case to beat.

              Spigen Tough Armor
              $21.99
              Google Pixel 10 Spigen Tough Armor Case

              This case is built to withstand serious impacts. It features a dual-layer design that combines a flexible TPU interior with a hard polycarbonate exterior. It also incorporates Spigen’s Air Cushion Technology in the corners for enhanced shock absorption during drops.

              Despite its robust construction, the Spigen Tough Armor maintains a relatively slim profile and includes a built-in kickstand for hands-free viewing. The precise cutouts ensure easy access to all ports and buttons, and the raised edges provide excellent protection for the screen and camera. If you lead an active lifestyle or simply want peace of mind knowing your Pixel 10 is safe from harsh conditions, the Tough Armor is a reliable choice.

              • Colors: Black, Abyss Green, Metal Slate, Navy Blue
              • Wireless Charging Support: Yes
              • Build Materials: Polycarbonate, Thermoplastic Polyurethane
              • Recycled materials: N/A
              • Dimensions: 156.97 x 76.2 x 10.16 mm
              • Weight: 52.7 grams
              Buy at

              Best Google Pixel 10 Official Case

              For an all-around excellent case that perfectly complements the Google Pixel 10, look no further than Google’s own Pixelsnap Case.

              Google Pixelsnap Case
              $49.99
              Google Pixelsnap Case Pixel 10

              This case offers a great fit and is designed to work seamlessly with the phone’s new PixelSnap technology. This ensures a secure connection with compatible magnetic accessories. The case provides reliable protection against everyday drops and scratches without adding unnecessary bulk. While it’s not an ultra-slim case, it maintains the slim profile of your device.

              The Pixelsnap Case is crafted from a soft-touch silicone that feels great in hand and enhances grip. The finish reduces the chances of accidental slips. It also features a soft microfiber lining to keep your Pixel 10 free from scuffs. There’s also a variety of colors to match your personal style and the phone’s own colorways.

              • Colors: Obsidian, Moonstone, Indigo, Porcelain, Jade, Lemongrass, Frost
              • Wireless Charging Support: Yes
              • Build Materials: Silicone, polycarbonate, magnets, and a microfiber lining
              • Recycled materials: 42% recycled materials, shell made with 75% recycled plastic
              • Dimensions: 157.48 x 76.2 x 12.7 mm
              • Weight: 33.97 grams
              Buy at

              Best Ultra-Thin Google Pixel 10 Case

              Maybe you’re looking to protect your Google Pixel 10 from scratches and minor bumps without sacrificing its sleek design. Well, the Mous Super Thin Case is an exceptional option.

              Mous Super Thin Case
              $49.99
              Google Pixel 10 Mous Super Thin Case

              This case is impressively slim and lightweight, adding minimal bulk to your phone, so it still feels comfortable in your pocket. It’s constructed from a durable yet flexible material that provides a surprising amount of protection for such a slender profile.

              The Mous Super Thin Case features a minimalist design that lets the aesthetics of your Pixel 10 shine through. It’s also compatible with Pixelsnap accessories. So, you can take advantage of the magnetic ecosystem without needing a thicker case. For those who prioritize a minimalist feel and want to keep their device as close to its original form as possible, this case is the top contender.

               

              • Colors: Almost 20 colors
              • Wireless Charging Support: Yes
              • Build Materials: Polycarbonate
              • Recycled materials: N/A
              • Dimensions: 155.23 × 74.38 × 12.97 mm
              • Weight: 27 grams
              Byu at
              Buy at Mous

              Best Leather Google Pixel 10 Case

              If you’re looking to elevate the look and feel of your Google Pixel 10, the premium Bellroy Leather Case is another great option.

              Bellroy Leather Case
              $55
              bellroy Leather Pixel Case

              This case is a product of a partnership between Bellroy and Google. The partnership ensures a perfect fit and seamless integration with the phone’s features. The case is crafted from high-quality, eco-tanned leather that develops a unique patina over time.

              The Bellroy Leather Case offers a slim profile while still providing ample protection for your device. The interior is lined with a soft microfiber to prevent scratches, and the edges are slightly raised to protect the screen and camera. For those who appreciate the touch of elegance of genuine leather, the Bellroy case is calling you.

              • Colors: Black, Sienna
              • Wireless Charging Support: Yes
              • Build Materials: Leather, plastic polymer and polyester
              • Recycled materials: 12% Recycled Polyester
              • Dimensions: 157 x 76.2 x 14 mm
              • Weight: 27 grams
              Buy at
              Buy at Bellroy

              Best Wallet Google Pixel 10 Case

              For those who value both style and convenience, the TORRO Premium Leather Wallet Case for the Google Pixel 10 is an excellent all-in-one solution.

              TORRO Premium Leather Wallet Case
              $34.99
              TORRO Premium Leather Wallet Case Google Pixel 10

              Crafted from genuine top-grain leather, this folio-style case exudes a classic and sophisticated look. The supple leather not only feels great in the hand but also offers durable protection against daily wear and tear.

              Inside, the TORRO case features a soft microfiber lining and multiple card slots. This allows you to carry your essential cards and some cash alongside your phone. The case also has a built-in stand function, perfect for watching videos or making video calls. This TORRO case integrates a nice combination of premium materials, practical features, and robust protection.

              • Colors: Black
              • Wireless Charging Support: Yes
              • Build Materials: Leather, plastic polymer and polyester
              • Recycled materials: 12% Recycled Polyester
              • Dimensions: 159 x 75.94 x 18.03 mm
              • Weight: 95 grams
              Buy at

              Best Google Pixel 10 Screen Protector

              Protecting the vibrant display of your Google Pixel 10 is crucial. Fortunately, the Spigen GlasTR EZ FIT Tempered Glass screen protector makes it incredibly easy.

              Spigen GlasTR EZ FIT Tempered Glass
              $34.99
              Google Pixel 10 Spigen GlasTR EZ FIT Tempered Glass

              This screen protector is made from durable 9H hardness tempered glass to defend against scratches and cracks. It also features an oleophobic coating to resist fingerprints and smudges.

              What sets the GlasTR EZ FIT apart is its innovative auto-alignment installation tray. This ensures a perfect, bubble-free application every time. The screen protector offers edge-to-edge coverage without interfering with most cases and maintains the original touch sensitivity and display clarity of your Pixel 10. If you want reliable and hassle-free screen protection, the Spigen GlasTR EZ FIT is a top choice.

              • Colors: Clear
              • Build Materials: Glass
              • Dimensions: N/A
              • Weight: N/A
              Buy at

              Best Google Pixel 10 Grip/Stand

              The Spigen O-Mag Ring is a versatile accessory that enhances both the grip and functionality of your phone, working perfectly with the native Qi2 magnets of the Google Pixel 10.

              Spigen O-Mag Ring
              $23.99
              Spigen O Mag Ring

              This magnetic ring attaches securely to the back of your phone, providing a comfortable and stable loop for your finger. This drastically improves one-handed use, making it much easier and safer to navigate the large cover and main screens.

              In addition to being a secure grip, the O-Mag Ring doubles as a durable kickstand. It rotates 360 degrees, allowing you to prop your Google Pixel 10 up in either or portrait landscape mode at various angles, which is perfect for watching videos, taking video calls, and more. Its strong magnetic attachment makes it easy to snap on when you need it and remove for wireless charging.

              • Colors: Carbon
              • Build Materials: Metal
              • Recycled materials: N/A
              • Weight: 60 grams
              Buy at

              Best Google Pixel 10 Power Bank

              Keep your Google Pixel 10 powered up on the go with the Anker Nano Power Bank.

              Anker Nano Power Bank (10,000mAh, 30W)
              $33.99
              Anker Nano Power Bank 10000mAh 30w

              This compact and portable charger packs a 10,000mAh capacity, which is enough to provide multiple charges for your Google Pixel 10. It features a built-in USB-C cable that doubles as a carrying loop, so you never have to worry about forgetting your charging cable.

              The Anker Nano Power Bank delivers up to 30W of power. So, it perfectly matches the fast-charging power supported by the device. The charger also has an additional USB-C and USB-A port for charging other devices. There’s an informative display that shows you the remaining battery percentage, so you’ll always know when it’s time to recharge the power bank itself. For a reliable charging solution, the Anker Nano Power Bank is an excellent Google Pixel 10 companion.

              • Colors: Ice Lake Blue, Lilac Purple, Shell White, Sprout Green, Pure Black
              • Wireless Charging Support: No
              • Build Materials: Plastic
              • Recycled materials: 80% post-consumer recycled plastic (PCR)
              • Dimensions: 103.87 x 52.32 x 25.91 mm
              • Weight: 214.89 grams
              Buy at
              Buy at Anker

              Best Google Pixel 10 Wireless Charger

              For the most seamless and efficient wireless charging experience for your Google Pixel 10, the official Google Pixelsnap Wireless Charger is the way to go.

              Google Pixelsnap Wireless Charger
              $39.99
              Google Pixelsnap Charger Pixel 10

              This charger is specifically designed to work with the Google Pixel 10’s PixelSnap technology. This ensures perfect alignment and optimal charging speeds every time you place your phone on it. The magnetic connection makes it easy to use, even in the dark.

              The Pixelsnap Wireless Charger delivers a fast and reliable charge. Plus, its minimalist design looks great on any desk or nightstand. It’s a simple and elegant solution for keeping your phone topped up without the hassle of cables. If you want the most convenient and optimized wireless charging for your new phone, the official Google charger is a great choice.

              • Colors: Rock Candy
              • Wireless Charging Support: Yes
              • Build Materials: Polycarbonate, metal ring
              • Recycled materials: At least 15% recycled materials
              • Dimensions: N/A
              • Weight: 53.86 grams
              Buy at

              Best Google Pixel 10 Wired Charger/Power Brick

              Like many other modern phones, the Google Pixel 10 doesn’t come with a power brick in the box. If you don’t have one at home, the Anker 312 Charger (30W) is an excellent and affordable option for fast charging.

              Anker 312 Charger (30W)
              $19.99
              Anker 312 Charger Power Brick 30W

              This compact and powerful charger can charge your Google Pixel 10 at its maximum supported speed via USB-C.

              The Anker 312 features a foldable plug, making it incredibly portable and perfect for travel. It also incorporates Anker’s safety features to protect your device from overcharging and overheating. For a reliable, fast, and compact charging solution, the Anker 312 is a must-have accessory for your handset.

              • Colors: Aurora White, Lilac Purple, Misty Blue, Natural Green, Phantom Black
              • Build Materials: Plastic
              • Recycled materials: N/A
              • Dimensions: N/A
              • Weight: 45.36 grams
              Buy at

              The post Best Google Pixel 10 Cases & Accessories appeared first on Android Headlines.

              New Android Gesture Will Let You Run Any App in a Floating Bubble

              Samsung Galaxy Tab S11 AM AH 07

              For years, Google has been working on optimizing Android for tablets and other large-screen devices. Key feature additions like a taskbar and improved split-screen functionality have helped. However, many users agree that Android tablets still fall short of offering truly seamless, PC-level multitasking. Google is now working to close this gap by reviving and refining a powerful tool that could change how we use tablets: the ability to run any Android app in a floating bubble.

              Recent findings by Android Authority suggest Google still has this “bubble anything” concept. The company now aims to better fit existing tablet workflows with an updated interface. Google is positioning it to become a seamless, general-purpose feature for power users.

              Android tablets may get massive multitasking upgrade with Floating Apps

              The new implementation centers on a simple, intuitive drag-and-drop gesture. Code strings and accompanying animations indicate that tablet users will soon be able to drag an app icon directly from the taskbar and drop it onto one of the screen’s bottom corners. This action will immediately launch the app in a smaller, floating bubble window. Users can then move this bubble freely while simultaneously working in other applications.

              This approach aligns perfectly with how other multitasking features, such as split-screen mode, currently work on Android tablets. The goal is probably to minimize the learning curve. To further ensure a smooth user transition, the code also points to a new educational tutorial with animations. This will guide users through the new drag-to-float gesture the first time they interact with the taskbar.

              android tablets floating bubble apps feature multitasking upgrade
              Source: Android Authority

              Bubble anything

              The current version of Android limits the “bubble” feature almost exclusively to conversation notifications from supported messaging apps. However, the evidence strongly suggests this new gesture will apply to any app placed on the taskbar. Android already allows any app icon to sit in that position. So, extending the floating window capability to all apps is a logical next step.

              This broader application unlocks powerful multitasking possibilities. It may allow users to keep three, four, or more apps instantly accessible at the same time. This is a significant functional boost, particularly for smaller tablets that struggle to fit multiple applications comfortably in the standard split-screen mode. Some custom skins from other brands already integrate similar functions. However, a powerful, native solution would be very useful to add uniformity between all Android devices.

              We still don’t know when these improvements will arrive in a stable release. However, the presence of a fully designed tutorial and corresponding animations suggests that this “bubble any app” Android feature is making steady progress toward a public release in a future update.

              The post New Android Gesture Will Let You Run Any App in a Floating Bubble appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Trump and Xi to Finalize TikTok Deal This Thursday

              AH TikTok image 12

              It looks like we’re one step closer to putting this whole TikTok saga behind us. According to US Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent, US President Donald Trump and China President Xi Jinping are expected to “consummate” the TikTok deal this Thursday.

              Trump to close TikTok deal this Thursday

              According to Bessent, “We reached one in Madrid, and I believe that as of today, all the details are ironed out, and that will be for the two leaders to consummate that transaction on Thursday in Korea. My remit was to get the Chinese to agree to approve the transaction, and I believe we successfully accomplished that over the past two days.”

              Last month, Trump signed an executive order that would see ByteDance sell its TikTok US operations to American-owned companies. Ever since he came into power, Trump had been pushing for China and ByteDance to sell TikTok. This was based on concerns that ByteDance is a Chinese company. The US government was worried that data of US citizens and users would be sent back to China.

              Under the Biden administration, TikTok was due to be banned in the US at the start of the year. However, following Trump’s re-election, he extended the deadline of the ban several times. At one point, it looked like we would never hear the end of this whole TikTok saga. But come Thursday, Trump will officially close the TikTok deal and put it to bed once and for all.

              What does the future of TikTok look like?

              Once the deal has been closed, TikTok’s US operations will come under control of a new board of directors. Oracle will be responsible for security operations. These board of directors are also expected to oversee TikTok’s recommendation algorithm, source code, and also take over duties when it comes to the moderation of content.

              Note that this only applies to TikTok in the US. For the rest of the world, your TikTok experience should remain the same. However, we have to wonder if TikTok US could undergo a huge change. TikTok’s algorithm is kind of what gives the platform an edge over competitors like Instagram Reels.

              But if US companies and engineers are taking over the algorithm to make their own tweaks, what could this mean for creators based in the country? Could they see a drop in views? We suppose we’ll have to wait and see.

              The post Trump and Xi to Finalize TikTok Deal This Thursday appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Android's Live Threat Detection is Getting Powerful Updates

              Google Pixel 10 Pro Fold AM AH 25

              Google is working to make its on-device security features more transparent and manageable for users. An analysis of a recent beta version of the Play Protect Service app indicates that the company is adding updates to its Live Threat Detection tool, which uses artificial intelligence models to identify potentially malicious applications on Pixel phones and Android devices in general.

              The Live Threat Detection feature fully relies on local, on-device AI. This means all the processing happens entirely on the local hardware. This approach allows for quick threat detection without requiring sending sensitive application data to Google’s cloud servers. The result is a strong layer of user privacy throughout the scanning process. Now, Google is making it friendlier and easier to use.

              Live Threat Detection upgrade for Android: See every flagged app in one place

              Currently, Android’s Live Threat Detection issues real-time alerts when it detects suspicious app behavior. However, the feature offers limited visibility beyond those initial notifications. Google is now fixing this lack of a central hub. The recent findings (by Android Authority) point to the development of a dedicated new page for the security tool. This upcoming screen is expected to clearly list all applications that the system has flagged as potential threats. Moving the threat information from individual, potentially numerous notifications to a permanent, centralized report is a great move. It improves user control and makes the security status of the device significantly easier to check at a glance.

              Additionally, Google is adding a new, specific alert type focused on data harvesting. Code strings reveal a future warning designed to explicitly inform users when an application deemed unsafe is detected monitoring the device’s location or activity. This alert directly addresses a major area of ​​concern for user privacy: applications that covertly harvest sensitive data or track user movement patterns without proper consent.

              Google Android Live Threat Detection updates 1
              Google Android Live Threat Detection updates 2
              Google Android Live Threat Detection updates 1
              Google Android Live Threat Detection updates 2

              These changes aim to enhance the usefulness of Android’s security tools. The mainstream public often underestimates security improvements because they often act in the background. However, keeping your personal data safe from potential bad actors is key in today’s tech industry.

              The post Android's Live Threat Detection is Getting Powerful Updates appeared first on Android Headlines.

              One UI 8.5 leak reveals a big boost for Samsung’s photo editing tools

              Samsung is preparing to roll out its next big software update, One UI 8.5, and leaks have already started revealing some of the exciting changes coming to Galaxy devices. One UI 8.5 is expected to make photo editing easier and smarter, especially with a big change to Samsung’s popular Object Eraser feature.

              According to the latest information via @Tarunvats, Samsung is planning to combine the Object Eraser tool with the Generative Edit feature in the Gallery app. This means users will be able to remove unwanted people, objects, or shadows from their photos more easily and quickly.

              Notably, the Object Eraser, first introduced with the Galaxy S21 series, has been a fan-favorite AI feature that makes photo editing simple for everyone. Now, a new change for Object Eraser has been spotted in a leaked test version of One UI 8.5.

              One UI 8.5: Object eraser has been integrated into generative edit. pic.twitter.com/E2LqSGp2U7

              — Tarun Vats (@tarunvats33) October 26, 2025

              With the new setup, users can use Object Eraser directly from the Generative Edit option instead of switching between tools. This will make photo editing faster and more convenient.

              Other leaks also mention new design changes coming with One UI 8.5. Samsung may add a “Create” button at the bottom of the Gallery app with a clean blur effect, along with a refreshed Favorites card design in the Contacts app. It also brings new AI features, a fully customizable quick panel, and more.

              For now, these new changes are based on an internal test build, so Samsung has not officially confirmed any details. The final version of One UI 8.5 may include all or some of these features. It is expected to arrive with the Galaxy S26 series next year. Stay tuned.

              The post One UI 8.5 leak reveals a big boost for Samsung’s photo editing tools appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              City Fines Homeowner $300,000 After Using Drone to Spot Illegal Fireworks

              Aerial view of a residential neighborhood at night with fireworks shooting up from the street, illuminating houses and trees while city lights glow in the background.

              A week after Fourth of July celebrations, PetaPixel reported that multiple California police departments had used drones to surveil and spot people illegally shooting off fireworks. Promised fines have been rolling out since, including a new $300,000 one levied against an Orange County homeowner who claims they were not even home on July 4.

              [Read More]

              US Will Soon Begin Photographing All Non-Americans When They Enter and Exit Country

              A man stands in front of a biometric scanner at an airport security checkpoint. Several people and staff are visible in the background of the brightly lit terminal.

              As part of its expanding crackdown on immigration, the United States government says it will soon begin photographing every non-citizen, including all legal ones with green cards and visas, as they enter and leave the U.S. The government claims that improved facial recognition and more photos will prevent immigration violations and catch criminals.

              [Read More]

              Data hoarders, here are the best free Docker containers to help you access, store and organise every type of media

              CheckMag | If you are looking to step away from subscription services, reduce reliance on big tech, or simply have fun while learning, self-hosting is a great way to make your media collections available across all of your devices while keeping data under your control. Here are the best containers for managing almost every type of media.

              Anker’s compact 737 3-port power bank with 24,000 mAh capacity drops to lowest-ever price on Amazon

              Deal | Anker’s 737 24,000 mAh power bank is currently available at its all-time low price on Amazon for a limited time. The Anker 737 power bank boasts a 24,000 mAh capacity and offers a maximum power output of 140 W across three ports. Plus, the flight-approved power bank has a small display for real-time charging information.

              7,800 mAh silicon-carbon power: OnePlus releases Ace 6 smartphone with Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite at mid-range starting price

              The Ace 6 is OnePlus' latest attempt to entice people seeking a powerful yet affordable Android smartphone. Starting at CNY 2,599 (~$366) in China, the OnePlus Ace 6 combines a 165 Hz AMOLED display and a 7,800 mAh battery with the Qualcomm Snapdragon chipset from last year's OnePlus 13 flagship.

              Apple will bump up the iPhone 18 to 12GB of LPDDR5X RAM

              Apple is expected to upgrade the base iPhone to 12GB of RAM - 4GB more than the iPhone 17, and the same as the iPhone 17 Pro and 17 Pro Max, and iPhone Air. According to industry sources, Apple has asked key supplier Samsung to increase its supply of LPDDR5X RAM for the next iPhone lineup. Samsung reportedly only makes LPDDR5X RAM in 12GB and 16GB modules. The bump up to 12GB will allow the base model iPhone to run AI models on-device, which is hard to pull off with 8GB of RAM. [#InlinePriceWidget,14049,1#] According to reports, Apple will move to a staggered release...

              We tested the OnePlus 15's cameras

              The OnePlus 15 just became official today in China, and it's expected to reach international markets next month. Ahead of that, we were lucky enough to have the opportunity to shoot some camera samples with the OnePlus 15 around Prague in Czechia. So here they are. The OnePlus 15 gave up on the Hasselblad co-branding of its predecessors in favor of the company's own self-developed DetailMax Engine, billed as its new era of computational imaging that focuses on delivering "clear and real" images (these are OnePlus' words). So we put that to the test, let's start with images from the main...

              Xiaomi's HyperOS 3 global rollout begins

              Back in September, Xiaomi began recruiting beta testers for the global version of HyperOS 3. The company has now announced that the software’s global rollout has started in phases for select users. According to the official Xiaomi HyperOS account, the HyperOS 3 global rollout has kicked off with the Xiaomi 15T series. The company revealed that the update will be available to users in a phased manner. It is likely that Xiaomi 15T and 15T Pro users who signed up for the global beta program will be the first to receive the stable HyperOS 3. In China, the Xiaomi 15 series and Redmi K80...

              OnePlus 15: Ultimate Buyers Guide

              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (3)

              The OnePlus 15 is a direct successor to the OnePlus 13, which initially launched last year around the same time. The initial launch of the OnePlus 15 took place on October 27, while the global model will likely follow next month. The device does look different than its predecessor, as the company did make some notable design changes. Design is not the only thing that changed, here, though.

              The new phone is, of course, more powerful overall, which we’ll talk about. It also comes with some changes that people may not be fans of. In any case, in this article, we’ll talk a lot more about the phone, even before its global debut. Once it arrives to global markets, we’ll fill in the gaps and update the information that is relevant to global users. With that being said, let’s get to it.

              OnePlus 15 specs

              OnePlus’ flagship smartphones bring top-of-the-line specs year-in, year-out. The same is the case here, as this phone is packed with powerful hardware. The Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 SoC from Qualcomm, the company’s new flagship chip, fuels this smartphone. That chip is backed by 12GB/16GB of RAM and 256GB/512GB/1TB of internal storage. Just to be clear, OnePlus is using LPDDR5X RAM here and UFS 4.1 flash storage.

              A 165Hz 1.5K AMOLED display is used, along with a 7,300mAh battery

              A 6.78-inch AMOLED display sits on the front, with a resolution of 2772 x 1272 (1.5K). That translates to 450 PPI, and an aspect ratio of 20:9. This display goes up to 165Hz, though only during gaming. During regular use, it’ll go from 1-120Hz, as it’s adaptive. The peak brightness is immensely high, well over 4,000 nits, though you’ll never get to that point. The point is, the display is immensely bright when you need it to be.

              A 7,300mAh silicon-carbon battery is used here. So, yes, even though the OnePlus 13 had a rather huge battery with plenty of capacity, OnePlus decided to improve upon that quite a bit. The phone jumped from 6,000mAh to 7,300mAh. 120W wired charging is supported (it will be limited to 80W in the US), along with 50W wireless charging. Android 16 comes pre-installed here with ColorOS 16 in China, while OxygenOS 16 will be included in the US.

              Three 50-megapixel cameras sit on the back, while the phone is quite durable

              There are three 50-megapixel cameras on the back. A 50-megapixel main camera (Sony’s IMX906 sensor, 1/1.56-inch sensor size) OIS, f/1.8 aperture, 84-degree FoV) is backed by a 50-megapixel ultrawide unit (OV50D sensor, 1/2.88-inch sensor size, 6P lens, f/2.0 aperture, 116-degree FoV). A 50-megapixel periscope telephoto camera (S5KJN5 sensor, 1/2.76-inch sensor size, 3.5x optical zoom, 4P lens, OIS, f/2.8 aperture, 30-degree FoV) also sits on the back. On the front, you’ll find a 32-megapixel Sony IMX709 camera sensor.

              The phone has an in-display fingerprint scanner, an ultrasonic one. An IR blaster is included, as is Bluetooth 6.0. Wi-Fi 7 is, of course, on the table too, as is USB 3.2 Gen 1. There are two nano SIM card slots here, and a charger will be included, at least in some regions. The OnePlus 15 is IP66/IP68/IP69/IP69K certified, which means it has great water and dust resistance, to say the least.

              OnePlus announced three color options

              The device measures 161.42 x 76.67 x 8.10-8.20mm, while it weighs 211/215 grams, depending on the model. Three color options have been launched in China: Absolute Black, Mist Purple, and Sand Dune

              OnePlus 15 Specs
              Display Size 6.78 Inches
              Display Resolution 2772 x 1272
              Refresh Rate 1-120Hz (adaptive), up to 165Hz when gaming
              Dimensions 161.42 x 76.67 x 8.10-8.20mm
              Weight 211/215 grams
              Chipset Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5
              RAM 12GB/16GB (LPDDR5X)
              Storage 256GB/512GB (UFS 4.1), non-expandable
              Main Camera 50MP (f/1.8 aperture, 1/1.56-inch sensor size, OIS, 84-degree FoV)
              Ultrawide Camera 50MP (OV50D sensor, 1/2.88-inch sensor size, f/2.0 aperture, 116-degree FoV, 6P lens)
              Periscope Telephoto Camera 50MP (S5KJN5 sensor, 1/2.76-inch sensor size, 3.5x optical zoom, 4P lens, OIS, f/2.8 aperture, 30-degree FoV)
              Front Camera 32MP (Sony IMX709 sensor, 1/2.74-inch sensor size, f/2.4 aperture, 5P lens)
              Battery 7,300mAh (silicon-carbon)
              Charging 120W wired (80W in the US), 50W wireless
              OS Android 16 with ColorOS 16 (China) / OxygenOS 16 (global, coming)
              Network & Connectivity 5G, LTE, Wi-Fi 7, Bluetooth 6.0
              Water Resistance IP68/IP69
              Colors Absolute Black, Mist Purple, and Sand Dune
              View Device Specs

              How much does the OnePlus 15 cost?

              The OnePlus 15 was announced only in China thus far. The phone’s pricing kicks off at CNY3,999 ($561) for the 12GB RAM model with 256GB of storage. It goes up to CNY5,399 ($758) for the 16GB RAM variant with 1TB of storage. Several other models are available in between. We’re expecting only a couple of models globally, though.

              Where can I buy the OnePlus 15?

              For the time being, the OnePlus 15 is only available to purchase in China. It launched in OnePlus’ homeland only, we’ll have to wait a bit before it makes its way to more markets. Once the global model launches, this section will be updated with new information and purchase links.

              What carriers does it work on?

              Only the Chinese variant was announced thus far, this section will be updated once the global model arrives.

              What colors does the OnePlus 15 come in?

              In China, the phone was announced in three color variants, Absolute Black, Mist Purple, and Sand Dune. Those are essentially black, purple, and beige colors. All three colors are rumored to arrive to global markets, though they will have different names, all three of them. At this point, we do know that the ‘Sand Dune’ color will be called ‘Sand Storm’ globally. That part has been officially confirmed, the other two colors, not yet.

              OnePlus 15 official color options (4)

              What new upgrades does the OnePlus 15 have over the OnePlus 13, and what noteworthy features in general?

              The OnePlus 15 is a more powerful smartphone than the OnePlus 13, there’s no doubt about it. Not everything on the phone is an upgrade over its predecessor, however. Well, most things are, but not everything. With that being said, in this section, we’ll highlight the upgrades and what seem to be downgrades. On top of that, we’ll simply highlight the best aspects of the phone itself, in general.

              Even more processing power

              The Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 from Qualcomm is used to fuel the OnePlus 15. That is Qualcomm’s most powerful chip to date, and a successor to the Snapdragon 8 Elite that is included in the OnePlus 13. There is no monumental difference when compared to the Snapdragon 8 Elite, but it’s better in a number of ways. Not only is it generally more powerful, but it brings upgrades in the GPU, NPU, and connectivity departments. A 23% improvement in GPU performance, 37% faster NPU, and more.

              Faster storage

              The OnePlus 15 ships with UFS 4.1 flash storage, compared to UFS 4.0 storage inside the OnePlus 13. That may not be something you’ll notice during day-to-day use, but UFS 4.1 is a notable improvement. It is not only faster, but it’s more power efficient too. A number of other improvements are included.

              A gigantic battery

              OnePlus opted to include a 7,300mAh battery inside the OnePlus 15. That is considerably more battery juice than what the OnePlus 13 delivered. That phone includes a 6,000mAh unit, which is also a silicon-carbon battery. That battery was plenty for that phone, and yet OnePlus decided to take things to a whole other level with the OnePlus 15. We do expect the OnePlus 15 to offer outstanding battery life.

              Faster charging (slightly)

              The OnePlus 15 supports 120W wired charging, compared to 100W charging on the OnePlus 13. Wireless charging remains the same. The thing is, this phone does include a larger battery, so the charging speed difference likely won’t be noticeable… when it comes to wired charging. Do note that the US will still get 80W wired charging, though.

              Better display, even though it may not seem like it

              The OnePlus 13 did ship with a sharper display than the OnePlus 15. The thing is, the difference will not be visible, and yet the OnePlus 15’s display is newer, more expensive, and technologically more advanced. It also supports a refresh rate of up to 165Hz for gaming, which is not something the OnePlus 13’s panel offered.

              Bluetooth 6.0

              The OnePlus 15 ships with Bluetooth 6.0 support, as expected. The OnePlus 13 included Bluetooth 5.4. Bluetooth 6.0 brings a number of improvements, including centimeter-level accuracy through channel sounding. It also brings improved audio latency and quality, and more efficient battery usage with decision-based advertising filtering. A number of other improvements are included.

              OxygenOS 16

              The OnePlus 15 ships with OxygenOS 16 out of the box. That is the latest version of OnePlus’ Android skin: It is based on Android 16, and it brings a refreshed UI, it’s immensely fast, has new animations, and so on. The thing is, the OnePlus 13 will get this UI as well, so chances are it won’t be much of a difference between the two. The point is, it is here, and it does make a difference.

              The camera conundrum

              On paper, the OnePlus 15 brings a camera downgrade to the table. It includes three 50-megapixel cameras on the back, with smaller camera sensors than the OnePlus 13. That goes for all three cameras, actually. That camera setup does not look great, in all honesty, but we’ll have to test it out to find out the truth.

              What cases are available for the OnePlus 15?

              OnePlus has confirmed the Sandstone Magnetic Case, Aramid Fiber Case, and Magnetic Hole Case for the Chinese market. We’re not sure if all of these will make their way to the global markets, but you can check them out below. The first two are kind of self-explanatory. The Sandstone case is a throwback to the original OnePlus smartphone, while the Aramid Fiber case is immensely thin and light. The Magnetic Hole Case brings a level of customization to the table. You can check them all below.

              OnePlus 15 Sandstone Magnetic Case
              OnePlus 15 Aramid Fiber Case
              OnePlus 15 Magnetic Hole Case
              OnePlus 15 Sandstone Magnetic Case
              OnePlus 15 Aramid Fiber Case
              OnePlus 15 Magnetic Hole Case

              Images & Video

              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (2)
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (3)
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (18)
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (7)
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (10)
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (12)
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (11)
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (13)
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (14)
              OnePlus 15 edited image 3844
              oneplus 15 unboxing
              OnePlus 15 official sand image (1)
              OnePlus 15 official sand image (2)
              OnePlus 15 official sand image (3)
              OnePlus 15 official image 102
              OnePlus 15 official image 100
              OnePlus 15 official image 99
              OnePlus 15 official image 103
              OnePlus 15 official color options (3)
              OnePlus 15 official color options (2)
              OnePlus 15 official color options (1)
              OnePlus 15 image 83459438
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (2)
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (3)
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (18)
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (7)
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (10)
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (12)
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (11)
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (13)
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (14)
              OnePlus 15 edited image 3844
              oneplus 15 unboxing
              OnePlus 15 official sand image (1)
              OnePlus 15 official sand image (2)
              OnePlus 15 official sand image (3)
              OnePlus 15 official image 102
              OnePlus 15 official image 100
              OnePlus 15 official image 99
              OnePlus 15 official image 103
              OnePlus 15 official color options (3)
              OnePlus 15 official color options (2)
              OnePlus 15 official color options (1)
              OnePlus 15 image 83459438

              Should I buy the OnePlus 15?

              Considering that only the Chinese OnePlus 15 variant has been launched at this point, it’s too early to tell whether the OnePlus 15 will be worth it. The price tag does seem quite appealing, but the smaller camera sensor do worry us. We can’t wait to review the OnePlus 15, however, so wait just a little bit longer while the global model arrives, and we’ll be able to share far more information about the device.

              The post OnePlus 15: Ultimate Buyers Guide appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Apple Says Jon Prosser Has Yet to Respond to Lawsuit Over iOS 26 Leaks

              The lawsuit Apple filed against leakster and YouTuber Jon Prosser seemed straightforward enough. However, it looks like things are becoming more complicated. Now, according to Apple, it says that Prosser has not indicated when he may respond to the lawsuit.

              Prosser has not indicated when he will respond to Apple lawsuit

              In recent court filings, Apple stated that Prosser “has not indicated” when, or even if, he plans to formally defend himself against the trade secrets allegations tied to leaked iOS 26 information. The lawsuit, filed in July 2025, targets both Prosser and co-defendant Michael Ramacciotti over the alleged theft of confidential details about Apple’s upcoming software update.

              Apple’s filings emphasize that despite Prosser’s public statements, he missed his legal deadline to respond. As a result, the court entered a default against him, which allows Apple to proceed toward seeking damages and an injunction without Prosser’s formal participation in the case. Meanwhile, Ramacciotti has actively cooperated with Apple and may settle soon, taking a completely different approach than his co-defendant.

              Going back and forth

              This is where things get confusing. Initially, Prosser’s statements suggested he was in active talks with Apple about the lawsuit. However, when court documents revealed he hadn’t responded to the legal filing, Prosser doubled down, claiming he had been in active communications with the company. Now, Apple’s latest statement directly contradicts that claim, leaving us scratching our heads about what’s actually happening behind the scenes.

              The back and forth raises questions about whether Prosser is truly engaging with Apple’s legal team or simply making public statements that don’t align with the formal legal process. Either way, his silence in court puts him at a significant disadvantage. If Apple’s injunction succeeds, it could set a precedent that limits how tech influencers handle leaked information, potentially restricting early looks at new features for enthusiasts who rely on these sources.

              For context, the lawsuit stems from Prosser publishing videos that revealed confidential iOS 26 features. Prosser has publicly denied coordinating any scheme to steal company secrets. He claims he had no technical access to Apple’s systems and didn’t plot to obtain anyone’s device.

              The post Apple Says Jon Prosser Has Yet to Respond to Lawsuit Over iOS 26 Leaks appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Your Pixel 10 might not charge wirelessly — and Google knows why

              Google Pixel 10 Pro Fold AM AH 04

              All wireless chargers are made the same, right? Well, according to Google, that is not the case.

              Some users have noted that when trying to charge their Pixel 10 Pro Fold, they get a question mark instead of it actually charging. Google has noticed and issued a statement saying that this issue arises when you use an “incompatible wireless charger”. Google suggests that users use “certified Qi2 wireless chargers” instead. Which should be a no-brainer. But since Qi2 is backward compatible with Qi, it’s a bit surprising that there is an issue.

              Google is going to fix this issue, however. So don’t throw out those old Qi chargers just yet. Google will be releasing a fix in the next software update. But for now, rebooting your phone should fix the issue.

              Google’s Pixel 10 series is really struggling this year

              Google’s off to a pretty rocky start with the Pixel 10 series this year. Nevermind the mid-range chip that is powering the devices, there’s been quite a few issues too. Like with Genshin Impact, a pretty popular game, that doesn’t run properly on the Pixel 10 because Google switched to a PowerVR GPU, and Genshin Impact stopped supporting those GPUs a few months ago.

              Now we’re seeing other issues too, but the Genshin Impact issue really can’t be fixed without the company supporting PowerVR again or Google ditching it on Tensor G6.

              In the grand scheme of things, this issue with charging is really not a big deal. Especially since this is wireless charging and not USB-C charging, that is the issue. While it is inconvenient, picking up a Qi2 charger for cheap or using a USB-C charger is definitely an easy fix. Check out our best Google Pixel 10 Pro Fold cases and accessories for some good options.

              The post Your Pixel 10 might not charge wirelessly — and Google knows why appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Sony’s First 200MP Camera Is Coming to Take on Samsung

              Sony LYT 910 generated image

              Sony’s first 200MP camera is coming, and it’s looking to challenge Samsung’s ISOCELL counterparts. We are talking about a sensor for mobile devices, mainly smartphones, here, of course.

              Sony’s first 200MP mobile camera sensor is coming for Samsung’s crown

              According to what FeniBook, a tipster, said, Sony is planning to announce the LYT-910, which will be the company’s first 200MP camera sensor. It will be a 1/1.11-inch sensor with an individual pixel size of 0.7um.

              Sony LYT 910 rumor

              That sensor will be able to capture 50MP and 200MP resolution images. The 50-megapixel ones will be captured through pixel binning, of course. With an in-sensor crop, this sensor could offer 2x and 4x lossless-quality zoom, basically.

              It is also said to offer superior HDR performance over Samsung’s offerings, with a dynamic range of over 100db. It will also support 4K recording at 120 FPS, and 8K recording at 30 FPS… with HDR.

              That’s basically everything the tipster shared. Now, if we compare this to Samsung’s 200MP offerings, the Sony LYT-910 does seem to be superior, at least on paper.

              It does seem more compelling, on paper, than Samsung’s ISOCELL HP1 & HP2 sensors

              The ISOCELL HP1 is a 1/1.22-inch sensor, and it’s the biggest sensor the company offers. The ISOCELL HP2 is the company’s best sensor, however, it’s a 1/1.4-inch unit. The ISOCLEL HPB is also worth noting, as it’s basically the ISOCELL HP2 in disguise.

              We’re not sure when the Sony LYT-910 will become official, but by the looks of it, it could arrive soon. In fact, the OPPO Find X9 Ultra and Vivo X300 Ultra could end up utilizing it next year, we’ll see.

              Those two phones, amongst some others, will look for an edge over their siblings. A powerful sensor like this would certainly give that to them. Everything is under wraps at the moment, so we’ll have to wait and see. This is the first time we’re hearing about this sensor.

              The post Sony’s First 200MP Camera Is Coming to Take on Samsung appeared first on Android Headlines.

              OnePlus 15 Launches With a Bold New Look and Massive Battery

              OnePlus 15 official sand image (1)

              OnePlus has just announced its new flagship smartphone, the OnePlus 15. Do note that this launch took place in China, and it is the initial launch event for the phone. The global launch event is expected to take place next month.

              With that being said, we already had a lot of details about the device. Plenty of information surfaced, while OnePlus revealed some info little by little over the last couple of weeks. Most of the information that leaked was also accurate.

              The OnePlus 15 is now official with a brand new design

              The OnePlus 15 has a brand new design. It is even more boxy than before. The phone features a flat display, a flat backplate, and a flat frame. Its corners are rounded, though, and the same goes for the corners of the phone’s camera island.

              Speaking of which, the camera island is no longer round, it is now a square with rounded corners. It looks entirely different and sits in the top-left corner on the back of the phone. There are still three cameras included on the inside, though.

              The phone has a centered display camera hole up top, and even thinner bezels than its predecessor. The bezels here measure 1.15mm all around. The phone does include uniform bezels, which means they’re the same thickness on all sides.

              The Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 chip is used, along with a 165Hz AMOLED display

              This smartphone is quite powerful, needless to say. It is fueled by the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 processor. That is Qualcomm’s most powerful chip to date. It is paired with 12GB/16GB of LPDDR5X RAM and UFS 4.1 flash storage (up to 1TB). Storage expansion is not supported.

              A 6.78-inch AMOLED display sits on the front, with a 1.5K resolution (2772 x 1272). That display goes up to 165Hz, but only during gaming. In regular use, it can go between 1 and 120Hz, as needed. It has high-frequency PWM dimming and gets immensely bright when needed.

              OnePlus included a massive 7,300mAh battery here, along with 120W charging

              A 7,300mAh silicon-carbon battery is included in the package too. That battery is a lot bigger than the already big unit in the OnePlus 13. 120W wired charging is supported here, along with 50W wireless charging.

              There is an ultrasonic in-display fingerprint scanner included too, while Bluetooth 6.0 is supported. The same goes for Wi-Fi 7. Android 16 comes pre-installed on the device, along with ColorOS 16. OxygenOS 16 will be included on the global model. The phone is also IP66/IP68/IP69/IP69K certified for water and dust resistance.

              The cameras seem to be a downgrade, at least on paper

              There are three 50-megapixel cameras included on the back of the phone. A 50-megapixel main camera (1/1.56-inch sensor size) is backed by a 50-megapixel ultrawide camera (1/2.88-inch sensor size, 116-degree FoV). The third camera is a 50-megapixel periscope telephoto unit (1/2.76-inch sensor size, 3.5x optical zoom). On paper, these cameras do seem like downgrades compared to the OnePlus 13. We’ll have to see if that’s true in actual performance.

              The OnePlus 15 measures 161.42 x 76.67 x 8.10-8.20mm, while it weighs 211/215 grams. It comes in Absolute Black, Mist Purple, and Sand Dune colors. They will have different names in markets outside of China.

              The device’s pricing starts at CNY3,999 ($561) for the 12GB RAM model with 256GB of storage, while it goes up to CNY5,399 ($758) for the 16GB RAM variant with 1TB of storage.

              OnePlus 15 Specs
              Display Size 6.78 Inches
              Display Resolution 2772 x 1272
              Refresh Rate 1-120Hz (adaptive), up to 165Hz when gaming
              Dimensions 161.42 x 76.67 x 8.10-8.20mm
              Weight 211/215 grams
              Chipset Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5
              RAM 12GB/16GB (LPDDR5X)
              Storage 256GB/512GB (UFS 4.1), non-expandable
              Main Camera 50MP (f/1.8 aperture, 1/1.56-inch sensor size, OIS, 84-degree FoV)
              Ultrawide Camera 50MP (OV50D sensor, 1/2.88-inch sensor size, f/2.0 aperture, 116-degree FoV, 6P lens)
              Periscope Telephoto Camera 50MP (S5KJN5 sensor, 1/2.76-inch sensor size, 3.5x optical zoom, 4P lens, OIS, f/2.8 aperture, 30-degree FoV)
              Front Camera 32MP (Sony IMX709 sensor, 1/2.74-inch sensor size, f/2.4 aperture, 5P lens)
              Battery 7,300mAh (silicon-carbon)
              Charging 120W wired (80W in the US), 50W wireless
              OS Android 16 with ColorOS 16 (China) / OxygenOS 16 (global)
              Network & Connectivity 5G, LTE, Wi-Fi 7, Bluetooth 6.0
              Water Resistance IP68/IP69
              Colors Absolute Black, Mist Purple, and Sand Dune
              View Device Specs
              OnePlus 15 official color options (4)
              OnePlus 15 image 83459438
              OnePlus 15 official color options (3)
              OnePlus 15 official color options (2)
              OnePlus 15 official color options (1)
              OnePlus 15 official image 103
              OnePlus 15 official image 96
              OnePlus 15 official image 98
              OnePlus 15 official image 100
              OnePlus 15 official image 3485
              OnePlus 15 edited image 3844
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (10)
              OnePlus 15 official color options (4)
              OnePlus 15 image 83459438
              OnePlus 15 official color options (3)
              OnePlus 15 official color options (2)
              OnePlus 15 official color options (1)
              OnePlus 15 official image 103
              OnePlus 15 official image 96
              OnePlus 15 official image 98
              OnePlus 15 official image 100
              OnePlus 15 official image 3485
              OnePlus 15 edited image 3844
              OnePlus 15 Sand Dune official (10)

              The post OnePlus 15 Launches With a Bold New Look and Massive Battery appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Xiaomi 17 Ultra May Skip Rear Display, Focus on Huge Camera Improvements

              Xiaomi 15 Ultra AM AH 04

              After launching the Xiaomi 17 series, the Chinese brand is apparently working on a more premium model, the Xiaomi 17 Ultra. The handset may debut before the end of this year in China, very much ahead of the usual MWC timeline (globally) every year. A new leak suggests that, like the regular models in the series, the Xiaomi 17 Ultra may not arrive with a rear display.

              Xiaomi 17 Ultra may not get a rear display

              In the latest Weibo post, prolific leaker Digital Chat Station has shed some light on the Xiaomi 17 Ultra’s cameras. He says the phone will have a new 50MP primary camera with a large sensor and improved in-sensor zoom technology. It can seamlessly transition to the telephoto lens for lossless focal range coverage.

              The telephoto unit could use a new 200MP large sensor, supporting multiple focal lengths. It could offer tele-macro shooting with “good magnification.” However, the focus range will not be extremely close, as per Digital Chat Station. Both lenses are claimed to offer a high dynamic range.

              Xiaomi 17 Ultra rear display
              Xiaomi 17 Ultra camera design

              The phone could bring camera upgrades

              Coming to the topic of rear display, one of the comments to the post asks the leaker whether the camera module is round or if it will have the new design (presumably referring to the rear display). To which, Digital Chat Station replies “circle.” This suggests that the phone may feature a large, round camera module like the predecessor, taking up a large portion of the back. It could be missing out on the rear display like its Pro siblings. 

              However, it contradicts a previous report that said Xiaomi will continue to use a secondary display on its next-gen flagships. Perhaps the Ultra model is an exception in order to accommodate large camera sensors.

              The upcoming Xiaomi phone may feature the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 chip and a 6.8-inch flat OLED 2K display. It could arrive in black, purple, and white shades.

              The post Xiaomi 17 Ultra May Skip Rear Display, Focus on Huge Camera Improvements appeared first on Android Headlines.

              This $549 Roborock Robot Vacuum Is Down to Just $299 for a Limited Time

              roborock q10 s5 plus

              The Roborock Q10 S5 is getting a massive discount right now, dropping to just $299 on Amazon — down from its usual $549 price tag. That’s a solid $250 in savings on one of the smartest robot vacuums you can buy in this price range. Roborock has built a strong reputation for offering high-end cleaning performance without the premium price, and the Q10 S5 continues that trend by packing serious suction power, a self-emptying dock, and advanced mopping capabilities into a sleek and compact design.

              At the heart of the Q10 S5 is Roborock’s 10,000Pa HyperForce suction system, which easily pulls up dust, pet hair, and debris from both carpets and hardwood floors. It also includes a Dual Anti-Tangle System, which prevents hair from wrapping around the brush — a huge bonus for pet owners. The mop system uses VibraRise 2.0 technology, meaning it can automatically lift when transitioning from hard floors to carpets and apply pressure scrubbing when needed. Combined, these features let the Q10 S5 handle deep cleaning and daily maintenance without you lifting a finger.

              What really makes this deal special is the price-to-performance ratio. At $299, you’re getting a robot vacuum that not only vacuums but also mops, empties itself, and maps your home with precision. That’s a combination usually reserved for models well over $600. While it doesn’t have the most advanced obstacle avoidance of Roborock’s flagship models, the Q10 S5 performs exceptionally well in real-world cleaning tests, especially for the price.

              If you’ve been waiting to upgrade your home cleaning setup, now’s the perfect time. With its strong suction, self-emptying dock, anti-tangle design, and intelligent mopping system, the Roborock Q10 S5 is a steal at $299 — but this deal won’t last long.

              Editor's Choice
              Roborock Q10 S5+

              Roborock Q10 S5+ – $299

              This robot vacuum is small but mighty, woth 10,000Pa of suction power, and a dock that can hold 70 days worth of dirt and debris.

              Buy from

              The post This $549 Roborock Robot Vacuum Is Down to Just $299 for a Limited Time appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Ulefone RugKing: The Rugged Phone That Roars Like a Jet Engine

              Ulefone RugKing (1)

              Many of you have probably already heard of Ulefone RugKing, the company’s budget rugged smartphone. What some of you may not know, is that this phone has a very powerful speaker. Uelfone has decided to demonstrate the RugKing’s speaker in a new promo video.

              The Ulefone RugKing’s powerful speaker gets demoed in a promo video

              If you check out the video below, you’ll see the speaker in action. You’ll not only see it running, but see it running while having a ton of dust on it, in a construction environment, amongst other scenes.

              This is a rugged phone, and Ulefone wanted to show you that you don’t have to baby it, nor its speaker. In some of these shots, the phone is covered with dust, and yet it’s doing its job perfectly.

              This is also a rather powerful speaker, a 126dB unit. It’s much more powerful than regular speakers you’d find on smartphones, that’s for sure. That’s another thing this phone has over other devices.

              The speaker, in diameter, measures 36mm, and has an 11.5 CC sound cavity. It delivers HiFi-quality sound, says the company. In the video you can see above, its 126dB prowess is shown.

              That speaker is really, really loud

              Just to give you some comparisons. A shotgun can provide noise of 160dB, while jet engine taking off provides noise of 140dB. A siren and a rock concert are at 110dB, while a motorcycle is at 100dB. Power tools provide 90dB of noise, while heavy traffic can provide 80-90dB.

              In addition to its ruggedness and powerful speaker, this phone also comes with 8GB of RAM. It offers 256GB of expandable internal storage and a 50-megapixel main camera. A large 9,600mAh battery is also included in the package.

              Android 15 comes pre-installed on the device, while a 5.99-inch HD+ LCD display sits on the front. A side-facing fingerprint scanner is also included here, while the phone also supports facial scanning.

              Buy the Ulefone RugKing (Ulefone)
              Ulefone RugKing (1)
              Ulefone RugKing (2)
              Ulefone RugKing (3)
              Ulefone RugKing (4)
              Ulefone RugKing (5)
              Ulefone RugKing (6)
              Ulefone RugKing (1)
              Ulefone RugKing (2)
              Ulefone RugKing (3)
              Ulefone RugKing (4)
              Ulefone RugKing (5)
              Ulefone RugKing (6)

              The post Ulefone RugKing: The Rugged Phone That Roars Like a Jet Engine appeared first on Android Headlines.

              iPhone 18 Could Get Up to 50% More RAM, Apple Reportedly Preparing LPDDR5X Memory

              iPhone 17 Pro and Pro Max display featured 1

              Compared to Android phones, Apple’s iPhones typically do not have that much RAM. However, with the iPhone 18, Apple is rumored to bump up the phone’s RAM by as much as 50%. This is according to a recent report from Korean publication, The Bell.

              iPhone 18 could feature more RAM

              According to the report, Apple’s iPhone 18 will come with as much as 50% more RAM. For context, the base iPhone 17 comes with 8GB of RAM. The Air, Pro, and Pro Max models feature 12GB of RAM. This means that for the iPhone 18 series, we could see a bump in RAM from 12-16GB of RAM.

              The report also claims that Apple has asked its memory suppliers to produce more LPDDR5X DRAM chips. This alone should give us some clues as to how much RAM to expect. This is because at the moment, LPDDR5X chips are only available in 12GB and 16GB variants. This means we’re looking at 12GB of RAM at the very least, or 16GB for Apple’s higher-end models.

              But is it necessary?

              That being said, we have to wonder if having more RAM is necessary. This is because Apple already controls its software and hardware. This is how iOS and its apps have no issues running with smaller amounts of RAM compared to Android. It also means that unless Apple is making some fundamental changes to its iOS platform, we’re not sure if there are tangible benefits to having more RAM.

              It is possible that because AI, like Apple Intelligence, that Apple could increase the memory on its 2026 iPhones. We’re already seeing how some older iPhone models do not support Apple Intelligence due to hardware constraints. So maybe future models with more RAM could allow more advanced AI features.

              Apple will launch its iPhone 18 series in 2026. However, according to the rumors, Apple could split up the launch. It could launch the iPhone Air 2, iPhone 18 Pro, and iPhone 18 Pro Max in the fall of 2026, as per usual. But the base iPhone 18 and the iPhone 18e could launch in the following spring.

              We’re also hearing rumors that the iPhone Fold could be delayed to 2027. There are also whispers that Apple could cancel its plans for the iPhone Air 2. Either way, we’ll find out more in the coming months.

              The post iPhone 18 Could Get Up to 50% More RAM, Apple Reportedly Preparing LPDDR5X Memory appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Samsung’s Tri-Fold Phone to Launch This Week — But Not in the US

              huawei mate xts 16

              Despite a recent report, which claimed that Samsung’s first tri-fold phone could arrive to the US, that’s quite unlikely. Evan Blass, a well-known tipster, just shared the markets the device will arrive to, and the US is not amongst them.

              Samsung’s first tri-fold smartphone is coming this week, but not the US

              Evan went to X to say that the company’s first tri-fold smartphone will likely launch in Korea, the greater Chinese market (including Singapore and Taiwan), and possibly the UAE. That’s basically it.

              The tipster did say, however, that he’d “love to be wrong”, but he doesn’t think he is. Everything point to Samsung avoiding both the US and Europe as launch markets for its very first tri-fold smartphone.

              When will this thing finally launch? Well, another new report reveals some information on that too. According to a report from The Korea Herald, the device will arrive later this week, actually.

              It is tipped to launch during the Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) 2025 summit in Gyeongju, North Gyeongsang Province, South Korea. That’s a mouthful, but the summit is taking place from October 31 to November 1.

              October 31 is probably its launch date

              Samsung will likely want to announce the device during the first day of the summit, so there’s a good chance we’ll see it on October 31. Nothing has been confirmed just yet, however, so we’ll have to wait and see.

              From earlier reports, we know that the device will likely cost around $2,800. So it will be around a $1,000 more expensive than the Galaxy Z Fold 7. It is tipped to have a 6.5-inch cover display, and a 10-inch main display, when fully expanded. An 8-inch display could be the middle-fold state.

              The Snapdragon 8 Elite chip is rumored, along with 16GB of RAM and 1TB of storage. A 200-megapixel main camera was also mentioned in rumors, along with both an ultrawide and a periscope telephoto camera.

              The post Samsung’s Tri-Fold Phone to Launch This Week — But Not in the US appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Top 10 Ways to Keep Your Smart Home Safe from Hackers

              Security image 83984398439

              Smart homes make life convenient. You can adjust the thermostat on your way home, check security cameras from your phone, and control lights with your voice. But convenience comes at a cost. Every device in your home that connects to the internet is a potential door for a hacker. If you are not thinking like an attacker, you are leaving your digital front door wide open.

              I have spent decades studying how hackers think, and one thing is clear. The easiest targets are often the ones that ignore basic security. Here are ten ways to secure your smart home before someone else does it for you.

              1. Prioritize Strong and Unique Passwords

              Many smart devices come with default passwords such as “admin” or “123456,” and hackers know them. Leaving these defaults in place is the same as leaving your front door key under the mat.

              Change passwords immediately on every smart device, your router, and your Wi-Fi network Each device and app should have its own distinct password to stay secure. A strong password uses a mix of uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and symbols. Twelve characters is the minimum you should use.

              Practical tip: Use a password manager to generate and store unique credentials. It may feel like extra work, but it protects every device in your home.

              Example: In one apartment I assessed, a smart door lock used the default password. Hackers were able to control it remotely because the owner never changed it.

              2. Enable Multi-Factor Authentication

              Passwords alone are not enough. If your smart devices support Multi-Factor Authentication, enable it. This adds a second verification step, such as a code sent to your phone, whenever someone tries to log in.

              Even if a hacker guesses or steals your password, they cannot access your devices without this second step.

              Example: If someone guesses the password to your smart thermostat, Multi-Factor Authentication prevents them from changing your home temperature or learning your routines.

              3. Keep Device Firmware and Software Updated

              Outdated devices are easy targets for attackers. Manufacturers release updates to fix vulnerabilities and bugs. Ignoring updates is like leaving a window unlocked while you sleep.

              Enable automatic updates wherever possible. For devices that require manual updates, check the manufacturer’s app or website regularly.

              Example: In 2023, researchers discovered a vulnerability in a popular security camera that allowed attackers to view live feeds. Devices that were updated automatically were safe, while older devices remained exposed.

              4. Secure Your Wi-Fi Network

              Your router is the command center of your smart home. If it is compromised, every connected device is at risk. Use the latest Wi-Fi security protocol, such as WPA3, or at least WPA2. Change the default network name and Wi-Fi password.

              Practical tip: Avoid using your real name or address in the network name. Hackers often target obvious Wi-Fi names.

              Example: A network named “JohnSmithHomeWiFi” is more likely to attract attention than a generic name like “BlueSky123.”

              5. Use a Separate Network for Smart Devices

              Not every device needs access to sensitive information. Create a separate network for cameras, plugs, and other gadgets. This keeps your personal computers, phones, and sensitive data separate.

              If a hacker gains access to a device on this separate network, they cannot easily move to your more important systems.

              Example: I have seen situations where a smart plug was compromised, but the attacker could not reach the home office network because the devices were on a separate network.

              6. Check Devices and Manufacturers

              Not all smart devices are created equal. Before buying a new product, research the manufacturer’s reputation and security track record. Look for companies that provide regular updates and clear privacy policies.

              Example: A reputable brand encrypts video from security cameras to prevent unauthorized access. Cheap cameras often send data unprotected, leaving your home vulnerable.

              Practical tip: Investing a little more in a trusted brand is better than saving a few dollars and risking your security.

              7. Turn Off Unnecessary Features

              Many smart devices have features enabled by default that you may never use, such as remote access, Bluetooth pairing, or automatic connections to apps. Each active feature creates a potential point of entry for hackers.

              Practical tip: Review your device settings and disable features that are not essential to daily use.

              Example: A smart fridge may allow Bluetooth connections by default. If you do not use this feature, turn it off to reduce your risk.

              8. Monitor Connected Devices

              Regularly review the devices connected to your network. Remove any device that is unused or unfamiliar. Forgotten devices can act as open doors for attackers.

              Practical tip: Check your router’s admin page or smart home dashboard at least once a month. Keep a note of every device that belongs on the network.

              Example: I have seen neighbors’ devices accidentally connecting to someone else’s network. If unnoticed, this can create a vulnerability.

              9. Use a VPN on Your Router

              A VPN protects your online activity by turning your data into a form that outsiders cannot understand. Configuring a VPN on your router protects every device in your home automatically.

              Practical tip: Use a trusted VPN provider and set it up on your router if possible. This is especially useful when accessing smart home devices remotely from public Wi-Fi.

              Example: When traveling, you can check your home cameras safely over a coffee shop network without exposing your data.

              10. Manage Voice Assistant Settings

              Smart speakers and voice assistants are convenient but always listening. Review privacy settings for Alexa, Google Assistant, or Siri. Delete stored voice recordings regularly and limit data collection.

              Example: Restricting cloud storage of voice commands helps prevent attackers or third-party employees from accessing your personal routines.

              Bonus Tip: Use Wired Connections for Key Devices

              Wi-Fi is convenient, but wired connections offer better security and stability. Connect critical devices, such as smart hubs, cameras, or network storage systems, directly to your router using Ethernet cables.

              Wired connections reduce the risk of hackers intercepting your signal and ensure faster and more reliable communication. Power over Ethernet is a useful option because it delivers power and data through one cable.

              Practical tip: Whenever you can, connect your hub and cameras using fast wired cables. For safety and reliability, choose cables that are safe to install inside your walls, such as category 6 plenum rated Ethernet cables. Use Wi-Fi only for devices that cannot be connected with wires.

              Final Thoughts

              Securing your smart home requires ongoing attention. Think like an attacker and close the doors before someone tries to open them. Follow these steps, check devices regularly, and maintain good habits.

              Cybersecurity is not a one-time effort. It is an ongoing process of vigilance and smart digital practices. A safe home is not just about locks on doors, it is about protecting the invisible connections that control your life.

              By taking these steps, you can rest easier knowing your home and personal data are protected.

              The post Top 10 Ways to Keep Your Smart Home Safe from Hackers appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Tech Graveyard No More: Stylish, Sustainable Uses for Yesterday’s Devices

              pexels pixabay 40185

              Every year, people rush to upgrade their devices, leaving older models collecting dust or ending up in landfills. What many don’t realize is that these outdated gadgets still have potential, whether reused, repurposed, or resold. With sustainability becoming a priority, giving older devices a second chance makes both financial and environmental sense. Modern buyers are finding smart ways to extend the life of what once seemed obsolete. From refurbished items to creative upcycling projects, today’s consumers are proving that older devices can stay useful longer than expected. 

              Before discarding what you think is outdated, here’s why you should consider how it might serve a new purpose and even save you money in the process.

              Why Old Devices Deserve a Second Chance

              Old devices often hold more value than people assume. Many still run smoothly for basic needs like browsing, streaming, or writing. The growing e-waste problem makes reuse even more important, as electronics contain materials that can harm the environment if thrown away carelessly. Extending the lifespan of these gadgets reduces waste and lowers the demand for new manufacturing. People who repair or repurpose older products also benefit by saving money and learning valuable skills. Instead of tossing your device, check if it can be repaired, reused, or donated. A small effort like this helps protect the environment while keeping your digital tools useful for years to come.

              Smart Ways to Find Value in Pre-Owned Devices

              Finding reliable pre-owned devices is easier than ever. Some trusted retailers offer refurbished laptops and gadgets that go through thorough testing before resale. They often include warranties and fair pricing to make buying secondhand safe and simple. On trusted online sites, buyers can explore certified options that perform almost like new without the heavy cost of fresh releases. This is where you can confidently buy used laptops that are tested, backed by return policies, and environmentally conscious. Many platforms also provide trade-in programs, letting users recycle old products responsibly while saving on upgrades. This approach combines sustainability, affordability, and practicality for modern consumers.

              Upcycle for Function: Turning Old Tablets into Smart Displays

              An old tablet doesn’t have to be forgotten in a drawer. With simple adjustments, it can turn into a smart home control screen, recipe display, or digital photo frame. Apps and Wi-Fi connections make it easy to use older models for lightweight tasks. Mounting them in the kitchen or living room keeps information accessible without buying new gadgets. This kind of repurposing cuts down waste and adds convenience to your daily routine. You don’t need expensive setups to make these devices functional again. A little creativity can transform yesterday’s hardware into something practical and stylish for your household.

              DIY Projects Using Old Electronics

              If you enjoy hands-on work, old devices can become the foundation for creative projects. Turn an unused smartphone into a security camera, a music player, or a home server. Outdated monitors can become secondary displays, while older computers can be turned into retro game systems or educational tools. With online tutorials, even those new to tinkering can handle simple modifications. These activities promote learning while reducing waste. Repurposing gadgets not only saves money but also gives you a rewarding sense of purpose. Instead of letting outdated items gather dust, explore how small changes can make them functional again. It’s a satisfying way to extend their usefulness sustainably.

              Donate, Don’t Discard: Giving Tech a New Purpose

              Donating older devices can make a bigger impact than you might expect. Many community programs, schools, and shelters accept functional electronics to help those in need. Your unused laptop or tablet could support students, teachers, or job seekers who can’t afford new devices. Several organizations refurbish donated items before redistributing them, extending their lifespan and preventing e-waste. Before donating, wipe all personal data and reset the system. Giving devices a second chance benefits both the environment and people who rely on technology for learning or work. It’s a simple step that supports sustainability while improving lives across local communities.

              Selling Responsibly: How to Prepare Your Old Devices

              If you plan to sell your old device, do it safely. Start by backing up your files, performing a factory reset, and removing personal information. Clean the device to make it look more appealing and check if accessories like chargers or cases are in good shape. Many resale platforms and local stores offer trade-in options or buybacks for functioning equipment. Properly handling data before selling protects your privacy while ensuring someone else can use the device without issues. Responsible selling helps circulate gadgets within the market instead of contributing to waste. This keeps more devices in use and supports eco-friendly practices.

              The Growing Market for Sustainable Tech

              Consumers today are increasingly aware of how their purchasing decisions affect the planet. The shift toward refurbished and reusable devices is growing rapidly. Brands now design products with repairability and recycling in mind, while certified sellers give pre-owned gadgets a reliable second life. This growing demand encourages companies to adopt sustainable business models that value longevity over constant replacement. For buyers, this means affordable prices and reduced waste. Choosing pre-owned devices supports responsible consumption without compromising performance. As awareness grows, more people are realizing that sustainable tech choices benefit everyone—from individual users to the environment at large.

              Reducing E-Waste Starts at Home

              Sustainability begins with small actions. Instead of replacing devices too soon, maintain them with regular updates and protective cases. Repairing small issues, such as a cracked screen or a weak battery, can extend their usability. Recycling programs offered by retailers and manufacturers make safe disposal easy when a device finally stops working. Keeping gadgets longer helps reduce waste and environmental damage. These small choices at home lead to collective change over time. With a little care, your devices can last much longer and serve many purposes before needing replacement, making your household more sustainable and resourceful overall.

              Old devices don’t need to end up in a drawer or landfill. Repurposing, donating, or purchasing refurbished items gives them a second life while helping the planet. The push toward sustainability is about more than trends—it’s about smarter, more responsible habits. Choosing to reuse or repair means less waste, fewer emissions, and greater value for everyone involved. Whether you buy pre-owned, donate to someone in need, or transform a gadget into something new, every small effort matters. It’s time to view yesterday’s devices not as waste but as opportunities to build a more sustainable and resource-conscious world for the future.

              The post Tech Graveyard No More: Stylish, Sustainable Uses for Yesterday’s Devices appeared first on Android Headlines.

              Top Mobile Industries Benefiting from Frictionless Payments in 2025

              Phone pay wireless image 34895834959843

              Mobile usage has grown, and it’s now the primary way that many people access apps, retailers and other services. As such, businesses, retailers and industries need to make sure that they are able to cater to this. Part of this involves making the payment options as simple as possible, allowing consumers the easiest access to getting their hands on products or services. The adoption of simple, frictionless payments is now widespread across industries and this article will take a look at some of the top ones using mobile payments.

              Gaming online

              Unsurprisingly, one of the first sectors to adopt frictionless payments was the gaming industry. Online casinos quickly took steps to ensure that players could make swift, seamless payments from their mobile devices when setting up a casino deposit. Not only did this entail offering speedy payment methods such as linking e-Wallets or Trustly accounts, but it went one step further. Mobile bill payment in the form of Pay by Mobile casino platforms are now prevalent in the industry. This payment method allows players to link their phone bill to their gaming account, paying any deposits at the end of each month as part of their mobile plan. This method allows players to make instant deposits and get playing. Monthly limits mean players are able to manage their bankrolls more effectively and avoid overspending.

              Going shopping

              Another sector that has seen a major adoption of frictionless mobile payment is the retail and e-commerce industry. Here, it’s common to see one-click payment options such as those found on Amazon. This makes it a lot easier for customers to buy products without the need to keep re-entering payment information. There’s also a focus on mobile-first purchases, with loyalty programmes often integrated into the use of a mobile app instead of the browser version of the site. Finally, there’s also been the integration of QR code payments, which makes it very quick for in-person transactions. This way, both online and in-person, shoppers can enjoy seamless mobile payments and pay directly from their phone without the need for cards, PINs or providing other payment details.

              Hitting the road

              Both the travel and accommodation industries have also quickly taken on board the need for speedy, seamless mobile payments. For someone actually travelling, on-the-go payment options make paying for things a lot simpler. This is the case for everything from booking a hotel to paying for a meal. Businesses that accept mobile payment methods like Apple Pay and Google Pay are also more likely to get more bookings from international visitors and consumers who prefer these methods when abroad. By offering seamless mobile payments across all areas of the travel process, guest satisfaction is boosted, which results in good reviews and the potential for a repeat customer. This is essential in what is already a competitive and oversaturated market.

              Picking a subscription

              These days, there’s a very strong subscription trend, with most products or services offering subscription services to get smoother or better features and offers. This means that companies like Uber use what are called invisible payments, where the transaction is processed automatically in the background after the drive has been completed. In this way, it’s completely seamless for both parties, with no faff or hassle at either end. Users simply provide their payment details in the app once, and then this method is used going forward for all rides. Frictionless processes like this help to encourage repeat customers and build loyalty. Payments are always a major friction point, and poor payment methods often deter customers from actually using the service repeatedly.

              Subscription models are also a major part of many industries, notably when it comes to entertainment. These services take regular revenue from customers without the need for those consumers to keep providing their payment details. Payments are taken automatically to ensure continuous service for the customer and continuous cash flow for the business.

              Final thoughts

              Frictionless mobile payments are increasingly the norm. Customers can use Google Pay or Apple Pay at a large array of different platforms, retailers and businesses. Better still, some platforms, once the payment details have been provided, do not need customers to provide any further information, allowing payments to be painless at all times.

              The post Top Mobile Industries Benefiting from Frictionless Payments in 2025 appeared first on Android Headlines.

              One UI 8 expands to Galaxy A54 in the US and M55 in India

              Samsung is now bringing the One UI 8 update to the Galaxy A54 in the US and the Galaxy M55 in India. These rollouts follow their initial deployment in Samsung’s home ground and select Asian and European countries.

              Galaxy A54 at Cricket Wireless carrier in the US and Galaxy M55 5G in India are getting their Android 16-based One UI 8. Having a compatible Galaxy device makes you eligible to grab this free upgrade from Samsung.

              One UI 8 brings user interface refinements to Galaxy users. One UI 7 brought Now Bar, and One UI 8 makes it compatible with even more services. Android 16’s Live Updates are also official, which will benefit your Samsung.

              Samsung has improved the Object Eraser and Reflection Eraser tools. The Gallery app’s Remaster feature also functions faster than ever. You may notice more precise results while editing images using the Object Eraser feature.

              System animations and fluency have been improved, too. Try using the Good Lock app and its supported modules for additional tweaks and customization. You can now get this personalization app from Google’s Play Store as well.

              One UI 8

              One UI 8

              One UI 8 focuses on various system apps and activities. Apps like My Files, Reminders, and Calendar have adopted a redesigned UI. This overhaul is centered on streamlining the overall user experience on Galaxy devices.

              The best part, One UI 8 update makes your device eligible for the One UI 8.5. As your device has now received Android 16, the next big One UI upgrade should be provided, which is expected to bring brand-new UI and features.

              Check for updates manually through Settings > Software update > Download and install.

              Source – Galaxy A54 | Galaxy M55

              The post One UI 8 expands to Galaxy A54 in the US and M55 in India appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              One UI 8 goes live for Galaxy Tab S8, Tab S8+ and Tab S8 Ultra

              Samsung is in the final phase of One UI 8 distribution, and the rollout has just initiated for the Galaxy Tab S8 series.

              Owners of the Galaxy Tab S8, Tab S8 Plus, and Tab S8 Ultra are getting Samsung’s Android 16-based One UI 8. The major software’s availability is currently capped to South Korea, but Samsung will soon take it to the Global market.

              One UI 8 also brings together the September 2025 security patch, which provides fixes for plenty of CVE and SVE items. Samsung is also rolling out the October patch, but your tablet might receive the December patch next.

              You are getting a plethora of new features, design improvements, and performance enhancements. Samsung included specific refinements in One UI 8 for its large-screen devices, such as foldable smartphones and tablets.

              The biggest change you will notice is the redesigned Quick Settings and Notification Panel. The two panels have adopted a pretty good design over the One UI 7. The adoption of dynamic blur takes the visual appeal to a whole new level.

              System animations and multitasking have been improved further. Samsung DeX is now based on Google’s Desktop Mode, bringing additional features and a more PC-like experience when you connect with a compatible monitor.

              Don’t eye the implementation of the Now Brief feature as Samsung had a single wave of expansion that covered 2024 flagships. Meanwhile, Now Bar will gradually support more and more apps and activities for real-time updates.

              Head towards your tablet’s Settings, followed by the Software update section. Once done, you should see a button entitled Download and install. Hit the key to force your Galaxy device to connect to the server and begin fetching the OTA.

              Samsung Galaxy Tab S8 One UI 8 Update

              Source – 영이옹이 / Samsung Community Korea

              (Source)

              The post One UI 8 goes live for Galaxy Tab S8, Tab S8+ and Tab S8 Ultra appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              Galaxy Buds 3 Pro October 2025 software improves charging

              Samsung is rolling out a new software update to the Galaxy Buds 3 and Buds 3 Pro with charging improvement. The company’s premium earbuds are receiving this firmware in South Korea, with expansion likely in the coming days.

              October 2025 update for the Galaxy Buds 3 and Buds 3 Pro includes a “stability code related to charging operation.” Samsung recommends users install this new software to experience optimal performance and experience.

              Galaxy Buds leverage on charging case to juice up their batteries. However, Samsung’s patch could mainly focus on the battery aspect to improve the charging. The battery life may also get a little boost, elevating the user experience.

              In addition, the update should’ve also carried stability enhancements. Meanwhile, no new feature’s addition has been observed so far. If you find any new, kindly let us know through DM on X @thesammyfans.

              Samsung also issued a general advice that the update’s content may vary by model, country and carrier. That said, the Global users may or may not receive charging improvements when the rollout begins outside Korea.

              Firmware versions:

              You can install the latest firmware through the Galaxy Wearable app. Open the application, head towards the device’s Settings, followed by Earbuds Software update, and hit the Download and install button.

              Remember, the rollout has started only in South Korea. An expansion could take some time, so don’t panic if your earbuds don’t fetch the OTA.

              Samsung Galaxy Buds 3 Pro October 2025 Update

              Source – Samsung Community Korea

              Thanks for the tip, Aptivi!

              The post Galaxy Buds 3 Pro October 2025 software improves charging appeared first on Sammy Fans.

              ❌